CNC Operation Manual SV20 Swiss Type Automatic Lathe

7_-
,
'
--
I-
OPERATION MANUAL
'
•ÿ
:
'Mi
MODEL: SV-SD
SWISS-TYPE AUTOMATIC LATHE
FANUC 16-TC
m
>
flSS ®gp
fy/r
|||
j “ it
i
r* . •:
fWBFÿ
i-
t
'V
m
i
s
’
[
1
$
U M
5 ,
.v.*y HP < I
j
1 ..
<•
jjjj j
Mj {•,ÿ* Always read thifc manual thoroughly andÿearivlhe contents
before operating tins maehjhe. Especially read the* Warn¬
m
ing's, etc , carefully to use this machine safely. *_ *'
’
7' Store this Operation Manual in a Safe place /©rfutuie refer-,
; - ,i
f .
ehce 6
3. Res.ponsibilityof prdduuts which fail during..the guarantee

•period will he borne by StaeMicronics to., Ltd.; lipwe.vefÿ
if the.usei does not follow,the Operating Manual, tir if pbrts
not designated by Star Micrÿp’tcs C , Ltd. are used'£or re-
placement, the responsibility,ÿ 'Star Miefonics ,Co„ -Ltd.
----
*• .
5
will be lowered or eliminated
‘
-nA
*T~~~ w-f
J
gl J-
:• •
V ifellÿSlAR.
i
M1CRQN1G3 CO,; LTD.. ..
t
,
; ifsillg -
:
alert symbol
p,«~.
A Safety alert symbol
This is the "Safety alert symbol". This symbol is used to gain the operator’s attention about
items or operations that may pose danger to the operator or other persons. Always read the
message attached to this symbol, and follow the instructions carefully.
!
It is important that the operator read the warning items and other items related to safety before
using this machine.
I of warning signal words
f.
I nr
: Danger that may lead to personal injury
A WARNING
1 ACAUTIQN 1 : Danger that may lead to physical accidents
NOTICE : Items of notice

1
1
;
I
:i
1
i
14
fmim
B
I
f
WARNING-1 r
. „ tftfi am m :
..
::
j
i
1
]
I
i
of warning labels
Always leam the important warning items shown below before operating the |
machine so that the machine can be used safely.
The positions where the warning labels adhered and the contents of the labels are explained below.
I
A
\
I
x
mmfnV\ FTTf
V \
5
i ~
1 I 2 I 3.Y 4 Y 5 Y 6 T 7
\
: 1 \
> ; Alii °
m 4-
I
r *
B ,
mm1' m
.
t
[ 0 1=3;
Tfm Wei ooo
,
OO
Bias
/ÿ
WARNING-2
i
(D
A
A high voltage current flows in some parts of the CNC box and
iO machine operation panel Electric shocks could lead to fatal acci¬
dents. The authorized personnel must always open the CNC box
i
door or remove the machine operation panel cover.
<D
1
& m .
NOTICE
! READ OPERATION MANUAL BEFORE OPERATING.
H
2. CLOSE ALL DOORS BEFORE PRESSING START
BUTTON.
TSU. 3. KEEP ACCESSORY KEYS UNDER THE CONTROL OF
o
A DES 1GNATED PERSON IN CHARGE OF SAFETY.
4 . MOUNT TOOL I NG . ATTACHMENTS . AND
4.39*.
s.amas. ssSHEWS®. ACCESSORIES PROPERLY. i
SUTTSIL 5. USE RECCfcMENDED LUBRICANTS AND
HYDRAULIC OIL.
6 . 5®K®C:S:««Bija>aCDÿS»SU\*ÿJS
6. CHECK AMOUNT OF COOLANT BEFORE OPERATING.
S8U-CTSLN. 7 . REMOVE CUTTING CHIPS PERIODICALLY.
7 . tt*ttS»a9CWO»U-C*F*ÿ. 8. DO NOT TOUCH OPERATION BUTTONS AND
SWITCHES WITH WET HANDS.
WFStL 9. WARM UP MACHINE 8EFORE OPERATING.
9.an«!c.B;**ai8igurT*t>. 10. TURN OFF POWER COMPLETELY AFTER DAYS
MACHINING.
11 .PER 1 031 CALL Y REPLACE WORN PARTS. SUCH AS
.
esaUTTiU. SCREW. WITH NEW ONES.
i
1. Read operation manual before operating.
2. Close all doors before pressing start button
3. Keep accessory keys under the control of a designated person in charge of safety.
4. Mount tooling attachments and accessories properly.
5. Use recommended lubricants, hydraulic oil and coolant oil. #§5 -
6. Check amount of coolant before operating.
I
7. Remove cutting chips periodically.
8. Do not touch operation buttons and switches with wet hands.
9. Warm up machine before operating.
10. Turn OFF power completely after days machining.
11. Periodically replace worn parts, such as screw, with new ones.
L, WARNING-3
i
i
;
I
<D
&
1 . mmcommv.
m
2 . ffl9iiaca*jw«fflRE«e*n
Z>*C.SXA,O>
WARN I NG
1 -STOP MACHINE 8EFORE MAKING
ADJUSTMENT OR REMOVI NG CUT TING
CHIPS.
2. DIRECT COOLANT NOZZLES TO
APPROBATE MAC HINING AREA TO
t ..
/
t
SUPPLY ADEQUATE AMOUNT OF COOLANT.
T£H. 3. DO NOT SPLASH CL EANING SOLUTION
3 . *»5SC«»C.a«WOa»5S OR ANY FORM OF L IQUID ON THE
u»ci/rT6w. MACHINE.
4. DO NOT OPEN NC CASINET WITHOUT
4 . NCJ|tvÿX©KP5«lÿ 6fflS
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL.
5. THE MACHINE SHOULD NOT BE MODIFIED
5 . amsaiavaiss »««©»* IN ANYWAY WITHOUT NOTIFYING THE
c&o-cr&u. MANUFACTURER.
j 6-XRCtWft. HWBCfctSgSfeCtt 6. CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN NOT TO TOUCH.
n©ty*a*U-cT*i.\. THE TOOL-NOSE WHILE REPLACING OR
ADJUSTING TOOLS.
7. TURN OFF POWER BEFORE REMOVING
asta-p'cTSf'. m»?A na COVERS. INSTALL COVERS BEFORE THE
assAÿ-sawe-TTÿi-L ilNE IS TURNED ON.
I
1. The operator may be injured if he/she contacts moving parts. Always stop the machine before
adjusting the machine, measuring the dimensions of the machined part or removing the cut¬
ting chips.
2. If sufficient coolant oil is not supplied to the machining portion, a fire may start.
:.s
Always set the coolant nozzle toward the machining portion.
3. Power leakages or trouble may occur if the liquid enters non-designated places of the ma¬
chine. Do not splash liquid onto the machine during cleaning, etc.
4. A high voltage current flows in some parts of the CNC box and machine operation panel.
Electric shocks could lead to fatal accidents. The authorized personnel must always open the 1
CNC box door or remove the machine operation panel cover.
5. Modifications of this machine may lead to obstruction of the machine functions and may pose
a risk to the operator. Always follow instructions given by STAR when making modifica¬
tions.
6. To prevent injuries, be sure not to touch the tool nose when changing the tools.
7. The covers mounted on this machine are important for securing safety. Always turn OFF
( O ) the main power (main breaker) before removing the covers for maintenance, etc.
: Always return the covers to the original positions before turning the main power ON (|)
ii
. again.
i.
Safesfew
: .a WARNING-4
A
HMK'.
/£ M CAUTION
1 1.00 NOT PUT HANDS INTO CHIP
a
I CLTT<*S,\.
3 . wstzx>>~-isyi&mtn
TANK WHILE OPERATING.
2. DO NOT TOUCH CUTTING CHIPS
DIRECTLY WITH HAND.
3. DO NOT BLOW CUTTING CHIPS
WITH AIR FOR CHIP TANK
WFcStA. CLEANING.
1. The operator may be injured if he/she contacts moving parts. The operator must not place his/ I!
II her hands in the chip tank during operation. I
2. To prevent injuries, the cutting chips must never be touched directly by hand.
3. The cutting chips will scatter and may cause injuries. Air must not be blown directly at the
I cutting chips.
<D
/£_M WARN I NG
MOVING PARTS CAN CAUSE
* SB**:*.
HBUrTSU.
SEVERE INJURY.
DO NOT OPEN SAFETY
DOORS WHILE OPERATING. :
•17280 i
The operator may be injured if he/she contacts moving parts. Always close the door before
starting operation. Never open any of the doors during operation. :
CD i
f
3L St WARNING
fm
MOVING PARTS CAN
% CAUSE SEVERE INJURY.
KEEP ANY PART OF BODY
BlgSSSW&SlAi? AWAY FROM HERE WHILE
OPERATING.
\
g 17480
J
The guide tube of the parts ejector moves inside this cover. Because there is no cover at the
lower part of this cover, moving guide tube may cause injuries if caught on part of the body.
Keep any part of body away from here while operating.
WARNING-5
... .....
.. *dN rf -J
I |;
ii
f
ii
ir
/=E M WARNING
f
MOVING PARTS CAN
sare-sr* CAUSE SEVERE INJURY.
SlSEPKZLCDmJgC KEEP ANY PART OF BODY
i3ÿ5£«£>«:ivc AWAY FROM HERE WHILE I
C&SU. OPERATING.
» 17480
ii
The headstock moves inside this cover. Do not insert the part of the boby into the barfeed hole
during operation.
|
ill
1
t:
mm. i
i
l|r
|
:
:
1
f
I
;v :
WARNINGS
K &,<dJ ' iteo 4&-‘ '&**&*! $ >v* * •
.
I
Hi Regarding ordering of warning labels
If the warning label is lost or can no longer be read, contact your dealer. Replacement warning
labels will be set for a fee, so replace them at the designated positions.
:f
When ordering the warning labels, indicate the following order No. and EDP code and the language
being used. For the warning label whose order number is empty, indicate only EDP code.
If you need the warning label in language not written in the following table, indicate English order
number and the language required.
w
Warning label Language Order No. EDP code
1 (D 87505373 s
(D Japanese/English #17260 87505703
(D Japanese/English #17270 87505704
Japanese/English #17300 87505707
l .CD Japanese/English #17280 87505705
© Japanese/English #17480 87505710
CD, Japanese/English #17480 87505710
(
I
WARNING-7 C V: i;: >
i
CONTENTS
1. Before reading this operation manual 1-1
2. Safety 2-1
3. Operation principle of the machine 3-1
4. Machine and specifications 4-1 I

I
4-1 Genera! structure 4-1 f:
4-2
4-3
Control axis configuration diagram 4-3 |
Externa! dimensions 4-5
4-4 Standard machine specifications 4-7
.....
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
Standard accessories .
Optional accessories lists
Standard CMC specifications
Optional CNC functions
— .
*—
4-11
4-12
4-14
4-18
5. Safety devices 5-1 I

5-1 Door interlock 5-1 £
5-2 Safety device for Coolant oil 5-2 1
5-3 Safety device for automatic centralized lubrication unit 5-3 l
5-4 Broken cut-off tool detector 5-3
&
5-5 Parts ejection detector 5-3
5-6 Safety function of CNC device 5-4
II #
6. Tooling system . . 6-1
6-1 List of consumable parts 6-1
6-2 Tool number 6-3
:
6-3
6-4
6-5
Tooling system table
6-3-1
6-3-2
Gang tool post
Turret
Tooihoider tables
Precautions for tooling
.
.
.
*
.....
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-9
6-19
I
6-5-1 Precautions for gang too! post/turret simultaneous machining 6-19

6-5-2 Precautions when angle adjustable cross drilling unit is used 6-27
it:
MSI
.i
' <’ n’ /tSilKil
x
7. Operation 7-1 ;
c 7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
Diagram of machine operation panel
Explanation of machine operation pane!
Explanation of CNC operation panel
Turning the power ON and OFF .
— .
7-1
7-5
7-19
7-23
7-5 Automatic operation
.
- 7-25
l
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
Search
Program input {Registering into memory)
Program edit
Program output (Punch out)
—
*•••ÿ
7-28
7-30
7-31
7-33
1
i
.
7-10 Position display screen . 7-34 |

7-11 Offset i nput *** 7-36
7-12 Menu function 7-38
7-13 Counter function . . 7-39
c 7-14
7-15
Star simple tool life management <Option> :
Tool geometry offset function .
.
7-42
7-44
7-16 Machining data display function 7-46
7-17 Keep relay conversational setting function 7-48
7-18 Servo monitor function .. 7-50 ||
7-19 Machine specification display function '
7-52
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
Maintenance timer function
Macro data setting ........

Input / output interface
•ÿ•*:**
Parameter display and change method *

.
Display of registered program numbers •••
.......
•
7-53
7-55
7-56
7-57
7-59
C
8.
7-25
7-26
Background editing
Help function *
Explanation of program**
• **—
—
...
Si
• 7-60
8-1
8-1 Programming . ........
..... •••••• 8-1
-
8-2
8-3
Organization of program
Dimension word •••'**:
•••ÿ
*
- 8-28-4
8-4 Coordinate system . 8-5
8-5 Soft OT function by tool ***••*
8-7
8-6 Feed function *
8-7 Spindle function (S function) 8-9

8-8 Tool function 8-11
8-8-1 Tool number 8-11
8-8-2 Tool function {T function} 8-12
.......
.....
8-9 Approach function 8-18
< 8-9-1 Approach operation 8-18
lillll
m
* a, i m a
I
;
i
Si
f! I:
1
I
/
,
0 Preparatory function {G function) 8-20

8-23
o
8-10-1 Positioning (GOO) ••*.**»•?*
8-10-2 Liner interpolation (GQ1) * 8-23
8-10-3
8-10-4
8-10-5
8-10-6
Dwell (G04) ......
.....
. ..
——
Circular interpolation (G02, G03)
Programmable data input (G10)

Plane selection (G17, G18, G1 9)
*
8-24
8-26
8-26
8-27
8-10-7 Stored stroke check ON / OFF (G22, G23) 8-27
8-10-8
8-10-9
8-10-10
Spindle speed fluctuation detection ON / OFF (G26, G25)
Reference point return (G28)
Second reference point return (G30)
8-28
8-29
8-29
f
8-10-11 .....
....
Thread cutting (G32) . 8-30
8-10-12
8-10-13
8-10-14
Variable lead thread cutting (G34) <Option>
Tool nose radius compensation (G40, G41 , G42)
Coordinate system setting • Spindle maximum speed setting (G50)
8-32
8-33
8-36
I
8-10-15 .....
Macro program call (G65 to G67) 8-37 ;?
' •
8-10-16
8-10-17
Multiple canned cycle (G70 to G76)
Canned cycle for drilling (G80, G83, G84, G85, G87, G89)
8-37
8-43 I
ll§§ii 8-10-18
8-10-19
Single canned cycle (G90, G92, G94)
Constant surface speed control (G96, G97)
8-47
8-51
1
Feed function specification (G98, G99, G1 01, G1 03)
Eillii 8-52
.......
8-10-20
- 8-10-21
8-1 0-22
8-10-23
Cylindrical interpolation (G1 07) <Option>
Pole coordinate interpolation (G112, G113) <Option>
Coordinate system setting *
8-§3
8-55
8-57
I
(G1 20, G1 21 , G1 30, G131, G132Kk, G1 40, G141) 8-57
V
Iff: 8-10-24
8-10-25
8-10-26
8-10-27
Plane selection function (G1 50, 154, 158)
Approach position setting (G170)
Tool select with short cut route (G171)
Sub-spind\e indexing [G2Q0,G201)
8-61
8-61
8-61
8-62
I
/
||f \
8-11
8-10-28
8-10-29
8-10-30
8-10-31
C-axis coordinate system shift (G202, G203)
Threading cycle (G184, G284, G384, G484)
Cross rigid tapping cycle (G784)
Head2 single operation block jump (G900 J j)
HEAD1 side auxiliary functions (M functions)
8-62
8-63
8-65
8-66
8-67
I
|
|
8-12
8-13
8-14
HEAD2 side auxiliary functions (M functions)
Sub-program function
Macro program call (G65 to G67)
.
*
......
... 8-79
8-80
8-91
.
*
/)
/ 8-15
8-16
Program pattern
8-15-1
8-15-2
. •••••••
HEAD1 side machining program pattern
HEAD2 side machining program pattern
Test piece program example .
•*•••-
...
................
8-101
......... 8-104
-V 8-123
8-154 1
:h :
ii
8-17 Program reference data 8-160
i
a
}‘
i,
ii JJjjf
••
n
*8
& L -J
9. Preparation and inspection before starting operation
9-1 Preparation and inspection before turning power on
9-1 -1 Cleaning of chips
— » « • •«r*
......
........
W* .
9-1
9-1
9-1
I i
j
9-1-2 Cleaning and inspection of coolant device ........ g_2
9-1-3 Inspection of hydraulic oil - -•""9-5 ;
9-2
9-1-4
9-2-1
9-2-2
9-2-3
Inspection of lubricant
Preparation and inspection before starting operation after power is turned on
Confirmation of alarm message ..........
......
........
Inspection and adjustment of hydraulic pressure
Inspection of air unit *
.........
9-7
••• 9-8
9-8
9-8
• 9-9
I
;
9-3 Handling of automatic bar feeder 9-10
,
..
10. Setting and adjustment 10-1
10-1 Attaching and adjusting of main collet •••**•• 10-1 ;
10-2 Attaching and adjusting of guide bushing 10-4

& 10-3 Attaching and adjusting of sub-collet 10-6
...... .......................
!
I
..
10-4
10-5
Handling of push rod
10-4-1
10-4-2
Attaching of push rod
Exchange of ejector pin ..
Attaching and adjusting of tool unit
"*•*ÿ••**
...........
Attaching and adjusting of tool to gang tool post

........
......
.....
.
. 10-10
10-12
10-12
Q_g
10-9
:
10-5-1
10-5-2 Attaching and adjusting of tool to turret ......... 10.17
IP
1 0-6
10-5-3 Handling of tool unit for turret
Handling of too! setter
10-6-1 Attaching of tool setter
.......
...
........ • 10-23
10-26
10-28
.....
10-6-2 Measurement of relative position-lÿtool
sensor •• •- 10-29
1:
I
10-6-3
10-6-4
Offset adjustment screen '•••”* *
Automatic compensation of tool by tool setter

==»ÿ
:,:VV ;
1
1
;
s
;
1 0-7 Handling of tool presetter
10-7-1
10-7-2
10-7-3
10-7-4
Handling of scale unit
Handling of measure scope
....
Measurement of reference position of measure scope

Setting of tooi outside machine by tool presetter
- ..........
*
......
.
.
10-45
10-46
io-48
10-49
10-51
•J,'
i $
:
I 11. Troubleshooting 11-1

11-1 Procedure for locating trouble 11-1
.
11-2 DGN check method 11-2
§ÿ 11-3 Alarm check method ........... 11-3
11-4 Parameter check method 11-5
........
$
11-5 Parameter change method 11-7
1 Selfdiagnosis function (DGN) table 11-8
1 11-6
Power circuit sequence-*Machine ....... • - 11-8
Power circuit sequence-ÿOperation panel 11-12
Machine-*Power circuit sequence 11-15
Operation panel-*Power circuit sequence 11-17
'
ii =:
:
i
:
!
!
i-
11-7 Alarm table 11-21
11-8 Keep relay table 11-39
1 2. Maintenance and Inspection . 12-1

12-1 Monthly inspection 12-1
12-1 -1 Inspection of bearing heating 12-1
12-1-2 Cleaning of guide bushing 12-3
12-1 -3 Cleaning of collet 12-4
12-1-4 Inspection of hydraulic unit 12-6
1 2-1-5 inspection of air unit . 12-8
12-2 Six-month inspection
12-2-1 inspection of
- .
main/sub-spindle shifter section wear
12-11
12-11 I
1 2-2-2 Inspection of belt 12-11
1 2-2-3 Inspection of wiring and piping •12-18
1 2-2-4 Inspection of safety device •12-19
13. Specifications and handling of optional accessories 13-1 '
13-1 Single bar feeder [323] 13-1

13-2 Leakage breaker [40440] 13-5
13-3 Chip conveyor . 13-5
13-4 Broken cut-off tool damage detector [42404] 13-8
13-5 Parts conveyor [4241 2] * 13-11
13-6 Parts separator type B [4241 4] 13-13
13-7 Parts separator type A [4241 5] 13-15
13-8 Barstock gripping unit [42418] 13-18
13-9 Tool setter [42421] 13-20
13-10 Too! presetter [42422] . 13-20
13-11 Parts Stocker base [42424] . 13-21
13-1 2 Rotating beacon [42427], signal tower [42428] 13-22
13-13 Main spindle inner tube 11.7 mm specification [42445] 13-24 I
13-1 4 Main spindle inner tube 8.5 mm [42446] . 13-25
13-15 Coolant unit 0.8 MPa [42458] - . 13-26 k
13-16 Coolant oil flow sensor [42459] .....
. •••
*
13-28
. .........
.....
13-17 Oil hole drill unit [42461]
— 13-29
*•••*—
—
'
13-18 Long parts ejector with guide tube [42472, 42472A], 13-31
Parts stopper [42479] . 13-31
13-1 9 Sub-spindle air blow unit [42475] . 13-35
13-20 Sub-spindie 1 0 indexing unit [42484] . 13-37
13-21 CE conformed transformer version [42491] 13-39
13-22 Parts ejection detector [53409] ••• 13-40
13-23 Profile barstock specification 13-44
u
...... •. \..v; '
vÿv-v. •• . \ .
' i iii
f
I;
1. Before reading this operation, manual
operation manual is for the Model SV-20 Swiss-type automatic lathe. This '•
manual should be read for first-time users and also by operators who have knowl¬ ;
edge and experience from previous use. Before operating this machine, read this
operation manual thoroughly and learn the contents. This operation manual should
H be kept in a safe place for future reference.
:
llYou should give the highest priority to safety when handling this machine. Work in
strict conformity to ail cautionary points mentioned in this manual. II
if main contents of this operation manual include the following items for the
Model SV-20 Swiss-type automatic lathe:
(1) Outline
'ÿ-J (2) Safety
(3) Principle of machine operation
“'“It#
.-1
........
.....
. .....
•
..... * ,
(4) Functions and specifications

'
: . ;
(5) Operation : ;• : - . -. ’
(6) Program
(7) Setting and adjustments
(8) Troubleshooting - |
(9) Daily maintenance and inspection - ifr'...1'*
(10) Option accessories - . ' .11 ..I'- <;»y« 'S !ÿ
j
that the specifications and details described on the outside of the machine
and in this operation manual are subject to change without notice. Please contact
your dealer for any inquires regarding the details of this opera!
O the event that ,his op“ manual is ,ost or no ,on9er “•
1. ' ''*1 V,' * I'; J*
'
afc t
#ÿ
If ISfliilSs 1 m
m
c mm 1
1-1
Jaafc. m
i
1
|
p
I
iafety
yl learn the following warnings and notices before starting operation to
safe operation.
o
keral cautions
A WARNING
J •Wear work uniform, cap, safety shoes or other required wear properly when operating
M the machine. Avoid wearing clothing with loose sleeves or other accessories that can
| easily be entangled in the machine. Do not wear accessories that generate a magnetic
field to the machine.
® Power leakages or trouble may occur if the liquid enters non-designated places of the
machine. Take care so that liquids are not splashed onto the machine during cleaning, etc.
%
®
Modifications of this machine may lead to obstruction of the machine functions and
may pose a risk to the operator. Alwaysfollow instructions given by STAR when making
I modifications.
® The covers mounted on this machine are important for securing safety. Always turn
I OFF (Q)) the main power (main breaker) before removing the coversfor maintenance, 1
etc.
Always return the covers to the original positions before turning the main power ON ( $ )
again.
® Do not operate the machine when parts that should be installed on the machine have
been removed.
-
\
•Always service the machine parts to prevent damage or malfunctioning of the machine.
Take special care to loosening of the screws, etc.
» Replace damaged parts immediately to prevent damage and malfunctioning of the machine.
f
NOTICE
7
•Always read the operation manual thoroughly and learn the contents before operating f
I the machine.
•Always keep the machine clean. It is particularly important that the operation panel be
keptfreefrom oil and cuttings to prevent operational mistakes and injuries.
® Keep the area around the machine neat and clean, and always work in a clean environ¬
ment.
2-1
- . .
HI Cautions for inspection and maintenance
1C AWARNING
•Always stop the machine before starting inspection or maintenance of the machine.
•Confirm that the grips of the main and sub-collets and the tool unit collet are sufficient.
If the collet grip is insufficient, the material or tools may fly out of the spindle.
•Confirm that the clearance between the guide bushing and material is sufficient. If the
guide bushing is too tight, the material may be burnt orfires may start.
•If cutting chips contact the material or tool or accumulate, the cooling effect of the
cutting oil will drop remarkably and may lead tofires. Perform tooling with a favorable
|
flow of cutting chips in consideration of the cooling effect.
•If sufficient cutting oil is not supplied to the machining portion, afire may start. Always
set the coolant nozzle toward the machining portion.
® To prevent injuries, the cutting chips must never be touched directly by hand.
® The cutting chips will scatter and may cause injuries. Air must not be blown directly at
the cutting chips.

•Take care not to touch the tool nose when replacing the tools.
•Breakage of the cutting-off tool can lead to machine damage orfires. Immediately re¬
place it if it is broken.
_
®Do not use cutting oil having a chlorine element as the life of rubber parts such as the
belt and seals to drop remarkably.
•If a non-designated tool unit is used, machining defects or machine interference acci¬
dents may occur. Always use the tool units listed in the tooling system in this operation
manual
sJ •Always correctly install the tool unit and attachments onto the machine to prevent ma¬
chine damage or unforeseen accidents.
•Never perform machining that exceeds the machine specifications to prevent machine
damage or unforeseen accidents.
W*
2-2 s 1
iiii j
!:t?
!ÿ
1
;
!
I
NOTICE
® Designate an employee who is responsible for overseeing the machine, and always se¬
cure his approval before inspecting or adjusting the machine.
•The machine supervisor must always handle the key switches (door interlock cool¬
ant oil ON/OFF glk, memory protect ), and must store the CNC box key.
* Always use a clearly visible sign or other means to indicate that the machine is under
inspection or adjustment.
•Always use the lubricating oil and coolant oil designated by STAR. If
® Never use differing brands of lubricating oil or hydraulic oil together as the performance 1
of the lubricating oil or hydraulic oil may drop.
® Always perform tool setting with attention to possible machine
interference during I
operation, and always make a dry run check of the program before starting automatic lit
operation.
•A drop of operation efficiency or unforeseen accidents may occur. Do not leave the used :
operation tools or tool units, etc., on the machine. Make sure to keep them in order. I!-'
|
I
I
HI Cautions before operation
* Check that the lubricating oil, coolant oil and hydraulic oil are at the correct levels to
Im
prevent machine damage or malfunctioning. 4
9
Confirm that the tools and machined piece are correctly installed to prevent machine
damage or malfunctioning. 1
•Confirm that the program and tooling match to prevent machine damage or malfunc¬
tioning.
NOTICE 4
H
•Always check the position of the emergency stop button in anticipation of an accident or
danger.
4
®
Confirm that the tool compensation details are adequate.
•Carry out the idlingfor the main spindle and sub-spindle at 3,000mm'1for 15 minutes
I
before starting operation.
I
,
lip '
'
2-3
44
11
and notices during operation

.
A WARNING
® Always close all doors and turn the door interlock key switch J
ON ( ) to prevent
hazards.
•Never place your hands in the machine during operation to prevent injuries.
ill ® The guide tube of the parts ejector with guide tube moves outside the machine and may
cause injuries if caught on part of the body. Always install a protective cover and do not
move near the guide tube during operation.
1 •Check if the cutting oil discharge is normal or not
a: ®
If cutting chips become entangled in or clog work or tools, the cooling effect of the
coolant oil will be drastically lowered and this in turn may cause a fire. Clear away Chips
as needed.
•Always stop the machine when removing cutting chips that have jammed the work or tool
•During automatic operation, check the operational conditions periodically at suitable
intervals. Pay close attention to (1) cutting chip accumulation, (2) coolant oil quantity
and discharge conditions, (3) tool breakage, (4) tool wear and (5) guide bushing seizure
heat. Ignoring a problem in any of these areas will lead to a serious accident. \
NOTICE
® Always carry out a dry-run check of the program before stating automatic operation.
When doing this, check the movement by lowering the rapid traverse override
•Confirm that the pressure gauges’pressures are 3.4MPa (35kg/cm2) and 4.9MP& (50kg/
cm2).
•Confirm that the air pressure gauge’s pressure is O.SMPa (5kg/cm2).
•Net sheets orfilters can easily become clogged depending on the cutting chips. Remove
cutting chips as needed to improve theflow of cutting oil Before doing this, always stop
the machine.
•After starting the machine, observe the operational conditions until you are certain that
automatic operation is running properly.
• Before starting automatic operation, be sure to check the disposal of cutting chips, the
amount of coolant oil and the coolant oil discharge conditions. After checking all these
conditions carefully, set the automatic operation time.
after completing operation

I
NOTICE
•Check that the CNC POWER switch and main (breaker) switch are OFF ((f)).
•Always clean the machine, remove chips and apply rust prevention oil_ '
2-4 ,ÿ'v
:
i
:
1
!
!
regarding the control unit
AWARNING
•Always contact STAR before modifying the control device or circuit. Such modifica¬
tions may, depending on their nature, cause serious problems to the control system.
Always follow the instructions from STAR.
® There are a number of points in the CNC box and operation panel to high voltage cur¬ If
Ife
rentflow, any electrical shocksfrom these can lead to life-threatening accidents. Never
leave the machine with the CNC box door open.
?i
ACAUTSON
•Always usefuses of the specified ratingfor replacements.
•Do not subject the control unit to shock or vibration.
® Do not subject connectors to strongforce.
® Clean the CNC box airfilter periodically.
§1Caution for fire prevention

Oil-based coolant oil has the potential to catch fire if it vaporizes or forms a mist inside the ma¬
chine. Pay very careful attention to the following points to prevent fires.
(1) Conditions under which cutting oil can easily ignite

* When cutting chips become entangled in work or tools and cause a drastic reduction in the
i cooling effect of the coolant oil

• When insufficient coolant oil is supplied to the cutting point due to incorrect nozzle direction I
Pay attention that nozzle direction may be changed by machine moving parts or cutting I
it
chip.
• When the discharge of coolant oil is insufficient due to insufficient coolant oil, clogging
of the cutting chip filer or breakdown of the cutting oil pump
• When the employed coolant oil (1) has a low cooling capacity or (2) can easily catch fire
• When the temperature is high, and the evaporation of the coolant oil is promoted to form
a high concentration
• When frictional heat between work and tool is abnormally high due to damage or deterio¬ t
ration of the tool
* When an abnormality in the electrical system inside or around the machine easily leads to
sparks
%
••• 2-5
I
(2) Cautionary points for fire prevention
:
A WARNING :
•Do not use anything flammable near the machine.
•Never perform machining that exceeds the machine specifications.
®
Confirm that the coolant oil discharge rate and discharge direction are adequate.
•Confirm that the coolant nozzle direction has not changed due to the machine’s moving
parts or cutting chips.
® Check the state of the cutting chips in the coolant tank and chip tank, clogging of the
cutting chipfilter and the coolant hosefor twisting or clogging so that the cutting oil can
sufficiently circulate in the tank.
®
Confirm that each protection device (coolant oil level detector, broken cut-off tool detec¬
tor)for normal operation.
® Always close all doors during operation.
f \
r"
2-6
&
:
:
;
li
;
;
:
|r
3. Operation principle of the machine

This machine is a CNC sliding headstock automatic lathe and comprises the following main attach¬ )
ments.
Turret
B -
t P7
Headstock Main spindie
'
Guide bushing Sub-spindle

Sub-spindie
|
©3-
I Z1.
r
Gang too! post
X A Z2
a B
The headstock comprises a main spindle for chucking a material (bar) by the collet and giving a
rotary motion to it and a sliding device for giving a reciprocating motion to it in the direction,of the 11
Z1 axis (longitudinal) under CNC control. A material is fed in the direction of the Z1 axis in main
machining by the headstock.
NOTICE
•Main machining Machining by the main spindle and gang tool post/turret
•Back machining Machining by the sub-spindle and turret
I
I i:
fX Im
3-1
i tool post
p
The gang tool post can perform a reciprocating motion in Power-driven tool
\ . the directions of the X axis (diameter) and A axis (tool
selection) under CNC control and a material is fed in the
direction of the diameter in main machining by the gang +X
+A
6
tool post. In the neighborhood of the guide bushing, the -A 8=
tool is made touch the material and machines it in coop¬
eration with the headstock.
The gang tool post is provided with a tool holder and
M i&sT0©!
power-driven tool. A tool is attached to the tool holder
and used for machining. A drill, tap, and end mill are
I
°© i
attached to the power-driven tool and each of them is
given a rotary motion for cross drilling, tapping, and ](D@ 0(0) T
w
milling. -i(D@ °1-J
—
EM ° ©i i — l
1 © 1 1 ©~o Tool holder
;
The turret has 8 tool unit mounting

surfaces and comprises a turret which Tool unit
1 can turn and index and a sliding device
» ©
m
for giving a reciprocating motion un¬
der CNC control in the directions of
the Y axis (diameter), B axis (vertical), (Bo 9.
m
and E axis (longitudinal). A material in
machining by the turret is fed in the di¬ L ;
rection of the diameter and the vertical

Tl 6
» O op
m
-4-
'!
i direction by the turret. The machining m +E
position in the longitudinal direction
can be optionally selected by the E
: axis. The tool is made touch the mate¬
©
ni rial and performs main and back ma¬
chining in cooperation with the head-
stock and back attachment.
Turret
A fixing tool unit such as a tool holder or sleeve holder and the power-driven tool can be attached to
the turret. A tool is attached to the tool holder and used for machining. Various sleeves are attached to
the sleeve holder and used for front and back drilling, tapping, die cutting and boring. A drill, tap, end
mill, and metal saw are attached to the power-driven tool and each of them is given a rotary motion for
front, back, and cross drilling, tapping, milling, and slotting.
S'i~-
f
3-2
It
|||
i
it
i
j
i
bushing
The guide bushing supports a material in the I 1 Guide bushing
neighborhood of the machining position, pre¬
vents the material from bending due to the ma¬
i
chining load, and allows highly precise ma- -
chining. In this machine, the guide bushing
_
supports almost all the cutting load in the direc-
tion of the diameter and the machining accu¬ p.
racy depends greatly on the guide bushing and
;
material clearance. Therefore, use a material
having high outer diameter accuracy.
In this machine, a revolving guide bushing ro¬
tating in synchronization with the main spindle
is provided.
1
$
|
3-3
: .
attachment
The back attachment comprises a sub-spindle for chucking a material in main machining or
completed by the collet and giving a rotary motion to it and a sliding device for giving a recip¬
rocating motion to it in the direction of the Z2 axis (longitudinal) under CNC control. A mate¬ .
rial is fed in the direction of the Z2 axis in back machining by the back attachment. Roles of
the back attachment for machining are broadly divided as shown below.
• Non-pip machining
The back attachment chucks a material in the cutting-off process and performs the cutting-off
process by rotating in synchronization with the main spindle so as to obtain a cutting-off
surface without dowel.
• Synchronous control of Z1 and Z2
The back attachment chucks a material at the same time with the main spindle during main
machining, performs a synchronous operation in the directions of the Z1 and Z2 axes or
makes a synchronous rotation with the main spindle, suppresses bending and whirling of the
material, and performs heavy cutting or highly precise machining.
• Back machining
if
The back attachment performs back machining for the cutting- off surface and periphery
thereof in cooperation with the turret.
1
:'7 Guide bushing Sub-spindle
+Z2«e—«s»-Z2
<
££
©
©
©
©
©
f®
©
77
® o
II
3-4
1
i
r~
4„ Machine and specifications
4-1 General structure
Genera! structure 1
§ o
o 5t O
S 1 I I
o
1i 1
1 II =5
3
i
1c s oJ |
=
B •fo W
1I fl
co
IJZ •s 7
?! rf 5
3
1 a 3-.
1 1E
o
n / iI
rh
fr'H—-'-IT*ifl
I 1I
ip
Io
i
.
Ig
X
O
.£
rY*
!i
—
00
o
( 'I
—
o-
§
o>
•I
da CD
9
O
1 if
3 a. r.
8
I5 a
sI dAfl
i
jH
4ÿ3 si
Sr
s 8»y lI
srz 1
CL S
Iit!r« w s ian i i
ro
a®
O
II
I1
i « i V,
a ®
I a
>1 1s-
M
CB
CD
JJ i i
2
o o
I
s- oI
.£
!
•i2 a .1
1
I ::>
4-1
II
fi
>>vv: TÿVC- ::-~-:Q'y~'xÿ'«£&.:.'£/;*ZÿrXÿ/ - :.- --. .
.- .— - j>_:- - -I-
-- - -
-:; -=:.- - : -. r- -
:::\ :- - ’: -' -ÿ
;": - .- ;'.:- 'f-V-7'.--::-ÿ' 'ÿ33® ....-• .. ' 7. ' . .'
%
f f
•/V
i -t •: \ I t
i
i
Q
Rotating beacon (OP.) X-axis servo motor Drive system for power driven attachments CD
Main spindle position coder 3
Singnal tower (OP.) CD
!
A-axis servo motor Gang tool post tool holder Work light D>
i Z1~axis servo motor Work light CO
c
O
23%, w w c
Jj
I. CD
i3 J) 0 ro
-
i a
I
I
I
ftJ x Headstock room a Ua
e
e
U r 't
i
t tf
1 t
9
1 EH jjpi S5 e
Cutting room
t
J5L
o I * 9
:=rf
1L3JDC
{.-
j
i -8.
s
a *
e
r 0
8
?' 4a
3 »5S
i
I . ©
«
©1 © @ [0
i
<
3
: S t ii
IQ
o 0 © 9
3
3
o
i L
6 3
-5
•C. q
L .
R
t::V i.
!;3-' - 0 i
\
|
:
&
A ML
:
SF $
V Hydraulic unit Oil gauge (Turret clamp) Oil gauge (Actuator) Chip tank
? V- Coolant tank Coolant unit 0.8MPa (OP.)
:?
i m,
'
>33" _
SKSSSXraif
*.1
4-2 Control axis configuration diagram

Control axis configuration diagram-1
Q.
.Eb: A
T
I?
I
CM
N
+
l
°
f
L_ A
U-
2
it
?!~7
rm i
s
4-3
Control axis configuration diagram-2
:
c 2
j +A ;
'
L®
'fedk
J
+B
-Y
__
-B ©
I
i
£ J[
S;
Ds
a
I
J
yg7 1
R4 IP !Slm
..r.-v.-
4-4 f'umm
m MSMI
_A ,, n„2 _;i,
i
;
«pi
S-fr
v ' .
|
r .
1650 (5.4) ...
1 1
s
o
B
n
m
5 [NO
a3
f 3 11(1 (88
3 o 88(81111
9
3
a—
1070 (3.5)
w u=r 1260(4.1) 115
(0.4)
1375 (4.5)
'So
I
J&l
o so
r i;
sy TTT1
°
;
o
i
IF [
o Il i
a sI
r
111«ÿ
ID o
fa
I
? S3
a ITS j
3 o
f D EPfr
I
I!
u
< 3
3
2
l - suoisuauiip |BUJ0ix3
suoisuaiup feiuapcg £-fr
i
i
i
:
m
Bar feeder Chip conveyor
&
0
Length Length
Amm (ft.) B mm C mm 9L
Type No.
Type 2.5M 3M 3.7M 4M 42401.42431 1091 (3.8) 1020 (3.3) a
42402.42432 900 (3.0) 690 (2.3)
3
Single barfeeder 5010 (i)
(323) (16-4) w
2501 3001 4001 o'
ir -• tv
S204
(8-2) (9-8) (13-1)
\ , i 5
\/V ro
.1
0
on m
1!—it- jo
it
A 2670 (8.8) 8
a IP . CZ3 fesae
0
ir
B is ; ;
2. I.... j rf/
mmft
L i o
wrm I
Unit = mm (ft.)
Illy mm. iswsESSS?

;
i
\
\
i
4-4 Standard machine specifications
NOTICE
• Thefollowing machining capacities apply to S45C (A1SI 1045, DIN C45) material The
machining capacities may differ from the listed values depending on the machining
conditions, such as the material to be machined or the tools to be used.
I;
Control axis specifications

i
item Specifications 1
Rapid feed rate X, Y 15000mm/min
A, B 1 5000mm/min
Z1.Z2, E 1 8000mm/min
C 90000" /min (250mm-1) |
Maximum turning feed rate X, Y 10000mm/min
A, B 10000mm/min
Z1,Z2,E 100G0mm/min
C 36000" /min (lOOmim1)
Minimum input increment X, Y 0.001 mm/0.0001 inch (Diameter value)
A, B 0.001 mm/0.0001inch
Z1, Z2, E 0.001 mm/0.0001inch lit
c
I
0.001"
8 I
Machining capacity
Item Specifications Remarks
Maximum turning diameter 4> 20mm (25/32inch)
%
Standard 205mm (8inch) 1 chuck stroke ,"v
Maximum headstock stroke
With gripping unit 195mm (7.6inch) 1 chuck stroke
Stationary tool <|> 14mm (35/64inch) For the dia. over 13, drill the
Maximum drilling capacity Power driven prepared hole with the dia. over
<!> 8mm (5/16inch)
attachment <J) 6.
Stationary tool M10 X P1.5 For M10 X P1.5, use tap for
Maximum tapping
Power-driven deep drilling.
1
capacity M6 X P1.0
attachment
Maximum milling capacity <J> 10mm (25/64 inch) it
Maximum die cutting capacity M10 X P1.5 Over M8-*Max. machining length
20mm 1
Maximum slotting capacity 2.0mm width X 6.0mm depth
1
lfi%:
Kl ‘ '
IW,' - i
4-7
m-L' : i:
:
Machine configuration
I
|
Operation mode Right-handed machine
Machine configuration integrated mechanicai/eiectrical/hydraulic structure
Length X width X height 2670 X 1375 X 1650mm including leveling pads
Dimensions Center height
Weight
1070mm
Approximately 3400 kg
including leveling pads
;I
,
Main spindle specifications V
Item Specifications Remarks .

:
Spindle speed 500— lOOOOmin-1 1
Speed control S code -f- Direct 5-digit command !:>
Main spindle rotational control AC spindle drive
Main spindle motor 3.7kw (continuous)/5.5lfw (30min/50% ED) I
Main spindle bore p26mm
]
post specifications
Item Specifications
Type Gang tool post + 8 station turret Horizontal sturucture
Gang tool post

4 fools {shank : [1316mm •05/8 inch X 95 135mm)
5 tools (shank : [312mm •[31/2 inch X 95 135mm)
—— 1
K
Tool
1 tooi/1 station (shank : [Hi 6mm •[35/8 inch X 65 70mm)
—
:.c
Number of
tools
Sleeve
Turret
Turret
3 toois/1 station (shank : E3l2mm •Q1/2 inch X 70 78mm)
Max. 3 tools/station
—
II
'iM .'/[ÿ
Power-driven Gang too! post 3 tools

tools Turret Installation is possible on all eight stations, (including 2 spindle type)
1
Gang tool post Servo motor
Tool selection
Turret Servo motor (shortest distance random indexing.)
Tool holder & sleeve Turret 736 series, 221 series, 421 series / I
Max. 600Gmin'1
Gang tool post
Spindle speed Permissible continuous time for 4500min_1 or more is five minutes. 1
1
Power-driven Speed control
Turret
—
400 6000min'1
S code 4- Direct 4-digit command
1
i
attachment Rotational Gang tool post AC servo drive
control T urret Inverter drive
|| Gang tooi post O.Skw
£ Motor
j Turret 0.75kw
ril
4-8
m ill
:
I
.
i
: 1
I
1
I %
t
;
l
fr
specifications
m
Maximum chucking diameter p 20mm (25/32 inch)
Pick-up li
Maximum part length for front ejection 150mm (5-7/8 inch)
capacity
Maximum part projection length 75mm (2-15/16 inch) Distance from coilet end
Spindle speed 500— lOOOOmin-1
|
Speed control S code+Direct 5-digit command
Rotational control AC spindle drive
1 Sub-spindle
15“ (24divisions)
I specifications Sub-spindle minimum indexing angle
1” Option
: Sub-spindle motor 2.2kw (continuous) /3.7kw (15 min /50% ED)
;
•r
Coolant unit specifications
item Specifications Remarks I
s Installation method Installed separately outside machine
13 Coolant tank capacity 170 L
Coolant motor Q.4kw
ft
Coolant oil level detector Detects the lack of coolant oil in tank
Safety device
Coolant oil flow sensor Detects the lack of coolant flow
13
Coolant oil Oil-based coolant oil Water-based coolant oil is available.
I Sub-spindle machining capacity

!
Number of tools
Item Specifications
Max. 3 toois/station T urret
Remarks
I
Maximum drilling capacity Stationary tool p 10mm (25/64 inch)
.
. Maximum tapping capacity Stationary tool M8 X P1.25

I Maximum die cutting capacity M8 X P1.25 If
:
li
li
I
V
Hydraulic unit specifications
Item
Installation method
Tank capacity
Specifications
Installed on machine
10L
Remarks
i
Norma! pressure 3.4MPa (35kg/cm2) Turret clamp portion : 4.9MPa
I
I
Hydraulic pump motor 0.75kw
! Suitable hydraulic oil Viscosity grade : ISO VG32 Recommended oil : Shell Tellus Oil 32
l
(it:
Air unit specifications
Item Specification Remarks
1 I. Pressure O.SMPa (5kg/cm2) Air source should be supplied by user.

Pipe bore Rc 1/4
'ÿAir consumption 1 .5m3/h (ANR) or more
IJ 4-9
1111 H |
I
8
11
S Lubricating unit specifications
item Specifications Specifications
Rectilinear guide bearing portion
Lubrication part
and siiding portion
.Oil ejection amount 5.5cc/30min I
I
Tank capacity 1.8L fi
Pump motor 3w
f
Safety device Lubricating oii level detector ;i
Suitable lubricating oii Viscosity grade: ISO VG68 Recommended oil : Mobii Vactra oil No.2 SLC
1 Others
+10%
Voltage 3-phase 200/220V The capacity for export
-15%
Power supply machines must be determined
Frequency 50/60 Hz ± 1Hz
separately by consultation.
Capacity Average : 9.0KVA
6
A
I
:
i!
!
II
1 I
I
me
I
f
:4i
Ipv! /ÿ
AA
4-10
it
.... Jp
i
|
I
m
I:
:
«
3!
M
4-5 Standard accessories (» Standard for export machine)
• Machine body
• CNC unit 3
• Operation panel with LCD display
• Hydraulic unit
.
• Air unit
• Separate type coolant oil tank
• Coolant oil level detector (Lower limit)
* Automatic centralized lubrication unit with oil level detercor
* Door interlock unit
• C-axis control (Main spindle)
• Drive system for power-driven attachments (Gang tool post, Turret)
* Backworking attachment
• Sub-spindle 15° indexing unit
• 5-station toolholder (421-01 or 421-91)
• 42414 Parts separator B
• 42404 Broken cut-off tool detector
• 42445 Main spindle inner tube <j> 11,7mm
• 42459 Coolant oil flow sensor
$6 * 42475 Sub-spindle air blow unit
$6 • 53409 Parts ejection detector
• 42302 Synchronized revolving guide bushing R20
(Neukomm Type B Art No. 22.001)
• Leveling bolts and leveling pads
• Work light (Cutting room, Headstock room)
• Tool kit (1 set)
• Operation manual
« Parts list
• Electric circuit diagram

• Sequence ladder diagram
\ 4-11
g;
1
ill
If
111
%
-in 4-8 Optional accessories lists
i
Machine number Name Remarks
323 Single barfeeder 3-tubes
40440 Leakage breaker
42401 Chip conveyor hinge type Can not be used with 42472 and 42472A
42402 Chip conveyor hinge type tong version
42404 -X- Broken cut-off tool detector
1
f
42412 Parts conveyor For use with 42414
42414 SC- Parts separator B
;
42415 Parts separator A For use with 42414, Cannot be used with 42461
42418 Barstock gripping unit
; 42421 Too! setter Tooi setting inside the machine

42422 Tool presetier Setting for tools on turret outside the machine
;
!
42424 Parts stocker base For use with 42412 1
.'j
E-
42427
42427A
Rotating beacon
Rotating beacon • 2 colors
Red, yellow, green
Red, yellow
11
42427B Rotating beacon •2 colors Red, green
42427C Rotating beacon •2 colors Yellow, green

42427D Rotating beacon •1 color Red
42427E Rotating beacon •1 color Yellow
42427F Rotating beacon * 1 color Green
I 42428 Signal tower Red, yeliow, green

42431 Chip conveyor hinge type Cannot be used with 42472 and 42472A
42432 Chip conveyor hinge type long version
i 42445
42446
5S Main spindle inner tube 11.7mm
Main spindle inner tube 6.0mm
Applicable barstock diameter : j>4
Applicable barstock diameter : max $ 4
— <f>Q
42458 Coolant unit 0.8MPa

WM 42459 Coolant oil flow sensor
42461 Oil hole drill unit For use with 42458, Cannot be used with 42415
v
42472 Long pÿrts ejector with guide tube Cannot be used with 42401 , 42431 and 53409
§
Long parts ejector with guide tube for back collet Type R16 Cannot be used with 42401, 42431 and 53409
m 42472A
Is 42475 >8 Sub-spindie air blow unit

42479 Parts stopper For use with 42472, 42472A and 42475
42484 Sub-spindie 1 " indexing unit
42491 CE conformed transformer version Transformer for Europe
I
I 53409 Parts ejection detector Cannot be used with 42472 and 42472A
72506 Star simulation system for SV Machining contour/interference check
| For IBM-PC (Will be on sale in July ’97)
(*Standard for export machine)
.h
J
: 4-12
1
I
... *
,,.J
-
Hi
Mmm Tij
j I
I
;
i:
'
I
1
fj
! 1
•1,1
.;ÿ
I 1-
J,
N!\
;!
'
1
ii
i!
NOTICE
For the details of optional accessories, refer to u13. Specifications and handling of op¬
tional accessories
1
:
I
*m
I
1;:
|
I
'Tft
m
'r
4-13
gif
4-7 Standard CMC specifications

item Specifications
Control unit FANUC 16-TC

Number of control axes Total Saxes : Simultaneous 4 axes (HEAD1 3 axes
_ (HEAD2) _
Synchronous control Synchronous control of Z1-Z2 possible (Synchronization of main/sub-
spindle movement)
Synchronous control of X-Y possible (Balance cutting function) _
Interpolation function Linear interpolation G01
Circular arc interpolation G02 (CW), G03 (CCW)
Synchronous rotation/phase control of main Synchronous rotational control and phase control of main and sub¬ I
and sub-spindle spindle are possible I
Operation panel display 10.4 inch color LCD display
5
Input/output code EIA or ISO
At input: automatic discrimination At output: parameter change
Input/output interface RS232C
Coordinate command system X, Y, Z1, C,Z2 Absolute/incremental, combines use possible
A, B, E Absolute
I
Decimal point input Possible l
Diametric direction specification Value commanded in diameter (X-axis, Y-axis)
Feed command method Feed per minute (mm/min) G98
Feed per revolution (mm/rev) G99, G101, G103
Continuous manual feed
Step feed
—
0 1,200mm/min (switchable with 16-stage rotary switch)
0.001 mm/step (diametric value for X and Y-axes)
I;
!
Feed rate override
Override cancel
—
0 150% (switchable with 16-stage rotary switch)
Override 100% ON M88
1;
;S Override 100% OFF M89
1 Rapid traverse override 1, 5, 25, 100% (4-step selectable)
Tool selection function and plane selection T code commands perform tool selection. On the HEAD 1 side, they
also select the plane that can perform circular arc interpolation, tool
nose R compensation, etc.
TD00(T 3-digit) Gang tool post side (Os 1 9.)
TDDAA (T 4-digit) Turret side
—
(ÿÿis 11—18, ZAZAis 31—39, 41—48, 51—59, 61—68)
Tool on turret positionning function Even when multiple numbers of tools are attached to a station of the
turret, the tool on turret is positioned in center height (B axis direction)
automatically with commanding T code to make the turret rotate.
Tool wear offset 32 pairs each on HEAD 1 and 2 (±99.999mm)
Absolute/incrementa! input possible
Program memory capacity Equivalent to about 30m tape each for HEAD 1 and 2
Number of registerable programs 63 programs each for HEAD 1 and 2
Buffer register Function to read 1 block ahead
Absolute position detection function Zero point return operation at turning power suppiy ON is not needed. ,r- 0
4-14
/
1
*:
Item Specifications
MDI operation B MDi operation is possible by inputting several blocks in a unit.

jf
Custom macro B This function permits a user-made macro, which has first been regis¬
tered in the memory as a subprogram, to be executed by calling from
the CNC command program.
Program should be input/output with ISO code.
Background editing Editing is possible in background during program operation. The fol¬
lowing operations are possible in the background.
• Program editing
* Program input from outer device
: • Program output to outer device
Notch signal function This function runs a machine operated by a miscellaneous function (M 1
code command) at an optional position during axis movement in order
to shorten the idle time.
Threading function Threading G32
Threading cycle G92
Thread cutting (tapping, die cutting) function Tapping and die cutting can be performed in a simple block program.
Front tapping, die cutting 6184
Back tapping G284
X Cross tapping G384
Y Cross tapping G484
X rigid tapping G784
Continuous thread cutting G32
Multiple repetitive canned cycle G70~G76 : Available in G150 mode for HEAD 1
. Available in G1 54 mode for HEAD 2
Canned cycle for drilling G80~G89
Cutting off processing function Cutting off in MDI mode can be done in an easy operation.
Circular arc R specification If the starting and finishing positions are specified by program, the tool
will follow the proper track when the circular arc radius is specified for a
—
circular arc of 0 180". (It is then unnecessary to specify the center
coordinates of the circular arc.)
Inch/metric conversion G20, G21
Tool geometry offset function This function (1) has the too! offset amount for each tools . (2) positions
the tool at a location to which the offset amount has been added when
the tool selection is commanded and (3) sets the coordinate system.
Gang too! post side Offset for X, Z1 and A axes
Turret side Offset for Y, E and B axes
_
The offset amount can be entered by MDI input. Automatic input for tool
center height adjustment can be done with tool setter (42421).
:%
>
4-15
:1 i
item Specifications 3
Servo torque limit and servo monitor function This function applies a torque iimit (current limit) to the servo motor and
\
serves to make the damage less in case of collision. It also allows to 5

display the servo motor load (current value) on LCD. !
Approach function While unit is machining with the tooi on gang (turret) tool post, the next
tool on turret (gang) tool post can be selected and positioned to the .
k
specified position by this function.
Memory protection function This function protects program editing.
Error detect ON/OFF M21. M22
Chamfering ON/OFF M23. M24
s
Z-axis stroke check function This function is used to check machining start position for Z1 axis auto¬ :
matically by dry run.
Machining start position movement function This function moves Z1 axis to the machining start position and others
to origin of the machine when the machine starts machining.
Too! on turret change support function When too! on turret is changed, turret is selected or moves to the posi¬
tion where operator can easily work.
v j
I
Turret rotating speed change function M121-M123
Turret rotating speed can be changed as required. I
Sub-spindle indexing command function G200, G201 :
indexing angle can be easily input.

Automatic coordinate setting function G131 Z2-axis coordinate for sub-spindie parts pick-up
|
G132 Z2-axis coordinate for back machining
\ G14t E-axis coordinate at main side machining from HEAD 2 side
Position display function Current position for each axis (X, Z1 , A. Y, B, C, E,Z2) and tool number
i currently selected are displayed on LCD screen at one time.
Automatic erase LCD screen display When MDi key operation is not executed for certain time (initial setting
i:
15 min.), back light of LCD screen is automatically turned off.
Clock display Hour/minute/second is displayed on LCD screen.
(Year/month/date is displayed on a certain screen.)
1
Constant surface speed control G96, G97, G50 : Available to main/sub-spindle
Spindle speed fluctuation detection function G25, G26 : Available to main/sub-spindle i
Tool nose R compensation G40-G42
REV/MIN conversion function This function makes it possible for the feed-per-revolution command to
work on power driven attachment which has no position coder.
G101, G103
s Programmable date input G10

i
Tool wear offset amount, etc. can be changed with program.
ft. \
,";v i
;
K
M:
. 1
M
4-16 r f \
MiH is
I
\
:
.
;
p
ii
.
I :
:|
If Item Specifications
Offset display function This function displays the wear offset amount of the X, Z1, Y, E and 22
axes together on the LCD screen.
Machining data display function This function displays machining information including the (1) barstock
diameter, {2} part length, (3) cutting-off tooi width and (4) main spindle
cutting off spindle speed on the LCD screen.
Program list display function This function displays the (1) program number, (2) remarks, (3) capac¬
ity, (4) remaining number of program registrations, (5) memory capac¬
ity and (6) remaining memory available on the LCD screen.
Timer function The specific time can be pre-set at (5) timers incorporated in LCD I
screen, which show the message on the LCD screen when it becomes
due respectively. This function may be useful for maintenance work.
Parts number display function This function can, during program operation, count the machined parts
with M20, display the number on the LCD screen and also execute one
cycle stop at a set number.
Number of counters 0—99999
Keep relay conversational setting function This function permits the user to change a keep relay that has a high
. frequency of usage by following the dialogue setting screen displayed I
!
on the LCD.
Spare M code output 4 pairs M150-M157 : Command possible from either HEAD 1/2
s 18
.
1
Tl:
I
/
o
I
i>r.
m: 4-17
f
i
4-8 Optional CNC functions If
;
Machine number item Specifications
-i
932 440 05 Spare M code j M158, M159, M160, M161

Command avaiiabie from either HEAD 1/2
Cannot use with direct drawing dimension programming
1
932 441 05 Automatic chamfering comer R
(932. 441. 18) “C” command cannot be used. !
li 932 441 08 Variabie lead thread cutting G34 !
932 441 10 Threading retract HEAD1 : Avaiiabie in G150 mode f{
HEAD2 : Available in G154 mode
932 441 18 Direct drawing dimension programming Cannot use with chamfering comer R (932. 441. 05)
HEAD1 : Available in G150 mode
HEAD2 : Avaiiabie in G154 mode
II
f: A” command cannot be used.
932 441 24 Cyiindrical interporation Available only in G150 mode (HEAD 1) i
II
932 441 25 Polar coordinate interporation Available only in G 150 mode (HEAD 1)
*932 441 26 Rigid tapping Main spindle : Available in G150 mode is;
Sub-spindle : Avaiiabie in G154 mode v
932 441 28 0.1 micron setting version Minimum setting unit : 0.0001 mm/0.00001 inch I
932 442 02 Run hour, parts number display
1
its
932 442 09 Custom macro common variables addition Shorten the tape memory length by 8.5m
932 442 10 Extended part program editing :
932 442 32 Tool offset number addition B 64 pairs each for HEAD 1/2
932 442 33 Tool offset number addition C 99 pairs each for HEAD 1/2 |
932 442 40 Addition of registered program 125 each for HEAD 1/2
!
Needed 80m or more tape length
Needed 320m or more tape length
932 442 62 Additional memory Equivalent to total 80m tape each for HEAD 1/2
932 442 65 Additional memory Equivalent to total 320m tape each for HEAD 1/2 II
932 442 66 Additional memory Equivalent to total 640m tape each for HEAD 1/2 \
932 442 83 Japanese language display
::
932 443 06 Star simple tool life management Available up to 30 tools (STAR specification)
I
Y I *932 443 10 Star run hour display Total running time and machining time (STAR specifica¬
v?| tion) _
(*Standard for export machine)
1
1 1
M):
4-18
! I
I
I
I
1
I
i
r:
:
:
Machine number item Specifications

£ This function automatically shuts off the main power sup¬
932 443 12 Automatic power supply shut-off function
i
ply if the machine stops due to machine abnormality or
barstock absence when the AUTO POWER OFF switch
jffTSj| on the operation pane! is OH.
!
:
I
••
!
:
.
:
s
;ÿ
:
.
;ÿ
&
si,
w 4-19
'
IllIiK
%
:5';
i 5. Safety devices
i 5-1 Door interlock
£
A WARNING
H
;: •Be sure to keep the door interlock key switch -jjjl- ON ( $ ) when the machine is in operation.
Rt •The key of the door interlock key switch should be stored by the person in charge of
machine management
m
Ili
- Door interlock
i
The door interlock is a device for stopping the machine in emergency when the doors of the cutting
v;
room and headstock room are opened in the machine ready state (the machine ready button jj(J)J
of
the machine operation panel is on). In this machine, the door interlock switches are installed in the
following locations.
i
DOOR INTERLOCK DOOR INTERLOCK
(CUTTING ROOM: LEFT) .< CUTT I NG ROOM : R .1 GHT )
DOOR INTERLOCK
(HEADSTOCK ROOM)
:
CUT
1 cm
Vi
M-
Si
f • DOOR INTERLOCK (HEADSTOCK ROOM): For the door of the headstock room
• DOOR INTERLOCK (CUTTING ROOM: LEFT): For the left door of the cutting room
• DOOR INTERLOCK (CUTTING ROOM: RIGHT): For the right door of the cutting room
The door interlock is switched to Valid or Invalid by the door interlock key switch (T) of the machine
operation panel. J: Valid (ON), Q: Invalid (OFF)
©
QOCOQOG| jaw-'
B* B
O I
afl rfrfri-fhrl f
° a
B
— v—
5-1
,
I?
\\
;
i;
i
5-2 Safety device for Coolant oil
H Coolant oil level detector
A WARNING
•When coolant oilflow sensor is mounted, if this machine is operated, it is necessary to
put the machine into the feed hold state. Set both of the keep relays KOO-bitl and KOI-
Mt4 to 0 before starting operation.
The coolant oil level detector CD is a device for
: 4 detecting shortage of coolant oil in the coolant

tank. When it detects shortage of coolant oil:
•When the keep relay KOO-bitl is set at
||
0 and K01-bit4 is set at 0, the coolant

oil level detector puts the machine into
the feed hold state and stops the main + >
cz
spindle, sub-spindle, power-driven 42
tool, and coolant motor.
• When the keep relay KOO-bitl is set at
flj f <9 2 lit
1 and K01-bit4 is set at 0, the coolant 2
oil level detector puts the machine into o c

the single block stop state.
V When the keep relay K01-bit4 is set at
1, the coolant oil level detector puts the im m m
machine into the one cycle stop state.
Coolant oil flow sensor
The coolant oil flow sensor (2) is a device for detecting insufficiency of the coolant oil feed rate.
When the device detects insufficiency of the coolant oil feed rate, it puts the machine into the feed
hold state and stops the main spindle, sub-spindle, power-driven tool, and coolant motor. 3
i
li
i
I 1
'
"
5-2
I
I
5-3 Safety device for automatic centralized lubrication unit

The automatic centralized lubrication unit is provided with
an oil level detector (l). The oil level detector is a device
for detecting shortage of lubricant in the lubricant tank.
When the lubricant amount is below the position L of the 1 icy
lubricant tank, the oil level detector decides it as insuffi¬ H
f ciency of lubricant and puts the machine into the one cycle i
stop state.
$
H
- 5-4 Broken cut-off tool detector

The device is a device for checking whether a
product which should be cut off remains in the
neighborhood of the guide bushing after the
f"7s
©
©
jQC-ÿal
1
|
.
cutting-off process is completed and detecting

o
damage of the cutting-off tool. o
When the device detects damage of the cut¬
n
ting-off tool, it puts the machine into the
emergency stop state. (f
HI
1 1
ij JjSi.
_ ©
©
!!
: ©
i
s;;
I !! ©
II :
5-5 Parts ejection detector
a The device is a device for confirming the position of the parts ejection shaft CD by the switch (D when
a product is picked up and ejected by the sub-spindle and detecting a failure in picking up a product by
the sub- spindle or a failure in parts ejection.
I When the device detects a failure in picking up of a product, it puts the machine into the feed hold state
and stops the main spindle, sub-spindle, power-driven tool, and coolant motor.
I When the device detects a failure in parts ejection, it puts the machine into the single block stop state.
'•
\
5-3
:}!
I
II
r
;i
I
:
1
I 1 2
fcozzcn m
P :: W
hÿrr- i= i
1
1L
I
y
LJ
.!':ÿ?
?
i
1 5“6 Safety function of CNC device
speed fluctuation detection function 1
Wien the difference between the specified spindle speed of the main or sub spindle and the actual m
spindle speed is larger than the set value, the function puts the machine into the feed hold state and
stops the main spindle, sub- spindle, power-driven tool, and coolant motor.
The function can be used to prevent the guide bushing from seizure.
• Valid in spindle speed fluctuation detection: G26 I
• Invalid in spindle speed fluctuation detection: G25
torque limit function and servo monitor function

These are functions for putting a torque restriction (current restriction) to the servo motor, setting
rapid feed, feed rate, and constant at acceleration/deceleration as parameters, and reducing damage
due to machine interference during dry run or taking out a product by the sub- spindle. The func¬
tions can check the load status (current) of the servo motor by display on the LCD screen.
||
power supply shut-off function (optional)
If the machine enters the alarm stop state due to a machine error or material shortage when the
automatic power supply shut-off switch on the operation panel is ON, the function automati¬
cally shuts off the main power supply (main breaker).
I;
1
j
.! .
r;
5-4
y
6. Tooling system
6-1 List of consumable parts
Guide bushing
Machine number Name Remaks
42301 Synchronized revolving guide bushing VNC 20 Star specification (Equivaiant C16)
42302 Synchronized revolving guide bushing R20 Neukorrtm Type B Art No. 22. 001
NOTICE
•Maximum chucking diameter
Type VNC20: (ft 20mm (round), 16mm (hexagon), 12mm (square)
Type R20 : (ft 20mm (round), 16mm (hexagon), 12mm (square)
* Installation on either the round or profile guide bushing is possible.
collet chuck
Machine number Name Remaks
42351 Collet sleeve kit Type VNC 20 Star specification
42352 Collet sleeve kit Type VNC 20 (for profile barstock)
42353 Coiiet sleeve kit Type R16 Schaublin
45354 Collet sieeve kit Type R16 (for profile barstock) Type F 20 Art No. 87
45355 Collet sieeve kit Type R20 Schaublin
45356 Coiiet sleeve kit Type R20 (for profile barstock) Type F 25 Art No. 64
chuck
If.
| Machine number Name Remaks
42371 Collet sieeve kit Type VNC 20 Star specification
42372 Coiiet sieeve kit Type VNC 20 (for profile barstock)
42373 Collet sleeve kit Type R1 6 Schaublin
42374 Collet sleeve kit Type R16 (for profile barstock) Type F 20 Art No. 87
42375 Collet sleeve kit Type R20 Schaublin
42376 Coiiet sleeve kit Type R20 (for profile barstock) Type F 25 Art No. 64
NOTICE
•Maximum chucking diameter
Type 16: (ft 16mm (round), 14mm (hexagon), 11mm (square)
m VNC20: (ft 20mm (round), 16mm (hexagon), 12mm (square)
R20 : (ft 20mm (round), 16mm (hexagon), 12mm (square)
•: : .
6-1
\
ii
i
i:
- i
I
5
:
a
Ejector pin 1
Prepare an ejector pin CD of the sub-spindle

II
in the following shape.
u:
g
£
s
(1) When the sub-collet chuck type VNC20 (Type Nos. 42371, 42372) or the type R20 (Type
Nos. 42375, 42376) is selected
4 Drill 4.3 M 1 0 * 1.5
: Co :Mg|
i F
£
o O
5 .2
"c L •©
N
>e 14
& I 1
|
30) <0ÿ 1 19
'
38 20 f
Note 2: Dimension D depends on the product shape.
58 Note 1: Undesignated corner CO.3
|*|
(2) When the sub-collet chuck type R16 (Type Nos. 42373, 42374) is selected
i4 Phil 4.3 M1 0* 1 .5
Cb
/ 6sf
m
u
7T
I Q o
1S 2
-&
<b.
10
b A
14
nj\
28 1 19
f
36 20
Note 2: Dimension D depends on the product shape.
Note 1: Undesignated comer CO.3
NOTICE
56
:
4*
t;
The dimension D should he smaller than "inner diameter of sub-collet chuck -1 mm
I
I
6-2 :
1
D
I
6-2 Tool number
In this operation manual, each tool position is indicated by the tool number indicated below according
to the tool selection command.
too! post
1 The position is indicated by T3-digit. The tool number is shown in the arrow portion shown in the
drawing. The tool number is different between when the 5-station toolholder (Type Nos. 421-01,
421-91) is selected and when the 4-spindle toolholder (Type No. 421-04) is selected.
© © <§>
(T800 T800
© (1700) (T70Q)
© © (T 600)
!T 60 O]
d~~@1 s
40© °® 1 (T500 (T40Q
4@®
w
O
°® 1
© j
T400
— \m> g I (T3Q0J
M. (T 30 0) I T200
— o @i_| (1200 — o 5? T100
© 11 ©or 1 (T 1 00) i I © or i
421-01.91 / 421 -04 /
1
The position is indicated by T4-digit. The tool number is shown in the arrow portion shown in the 1
drawing.
4
(THOO)
% Q
&
c>
iAo
i
(moo)-
o
-+- (TÿOO)
m f®
O
[
©
;
(moo) °©
©
o
iO°
T 1700
sj|
6-3
|{
.
I
;
I!
h
6-3 Tooling system table

I: 6-3-1 Gang tool post
r- Tool holder -5-station toolholder ([J12mm) .421-01 fÿ*
-4-station toolholder (ÿl6mm) ,421-04
- 5-station toolholder (CZ31/2 inch) . .421-91

- 20mm-overhang tool adapter (ÿ 12mm) .311-01
?
- 20mm-overhang tool adapter (HHl/2 inch) .311-02
- 17mm-overhang topi adapter (Dldmin) ... .331-01
I
— Power-driven attachment
I
Cross drilling/milling unit ER16
Cross tapping unit ER11
331-50
331-51
NOTICE
® Max. chucking diameter ......
ER16: <pl0mm
i
•Number of tool which can be installed on overhang tool adapter (Type Nos. 312-01, 02,
332-01) is one each.
® % 5-station toolholder (421-01 or 421-91) is standard. 1
1
6-3-2 Turret
—
[“Tool holder toolholder (ÿl2mm)
3-station toolholder for backworking (dl/2 inch) ....... 421-02

3-station toolholder for inverse tool setting for backworking (Dl2mm) .. 421-03
421-92
_3-station toolholder for inverse tool setting for backworking (Dl/2 inch).. 421-93
“Standard wedge type (ÿl6ram) 221-01

I
“Standard wedge-free type (ÿl6mm)

“Wedge type for inverse tool setting (ÿl6mm)
“Wedge-free type for inverse tool setting (ÿ16mm)
“ Wedge-freelype for backworking (Dlbrnm)
.....221-03
221-07
221-08
221-72
- Triple sleeve holder--Counterface drill sleeve ER16 421-22

combined use main and back “Counterface tap sleeve ER16 .. 421-32 |
(421-12)
& —
Die sleeve <j) 20mm
- Die sleeve <|> 25mm
301-36
301-37
“Die sleeve 13/16 inch 301-38
” Die sleeve 1 inch 301-39
“
Boring sleeve <j> 8mm 736-40
“Boring sleeve 5/16 inch 736-40D
“
Boring sleeve 4> 10mm 736-41
” Boring sleeve 3/8 inch 736-41D :>ÿ
i
6-4
——Boring sleeve (j> 12mm
Boring sleeve 1/2 inch
736-42
736-42D
—Boring sleeve <j> 6mm .. 736-44
-Boring sleeve 1/4 inch 736-44D
- Triple sleeve holder - - Counterface drill sleeve ER20 -.421-21

for large diameter -Counterface tap sleeve ER16 .. ...421-31
combined use main and back - Boring sleeve <j) 16mm ...781-43
...
(421-11) |\0ÿ° —Boring sleeve 5/8 inch ...78I-43D
— Single sleeve holder-

for deep drilling
Drill sleeve for deep drilling ER16
(22!-11)ÿ -Drill sleeve MT1 for deep drilling .
.i&:736-21 -.I
....736-22
-Boring sleeve $ 12mm ....736-42
|
sleeve 1/2 inch
:
*— Power-driven attachment --Cross drilling unit ER16 221-50
-Cross tapping unit ER11 221-51
—Front drilling unit ER11 221-52
-Front tapping unit ER11 221-53
p
-Counterface drilling unit ER11 . 221-56
—2-spindle cross drilling unit ER16 .421-51
I —High speed 2-spindle cross drilling unit ER11 421-52
-Slotting unit 50B 421-53 /
-Slotting unit 50A .421-54
‘—Angle adjustable cross drilling unit ER11 ,421-55
r\ NOTICE
The maximum chucking diameter, ...ER11: <j>7mm
ER16: <j) 10mm
ER20: <pl3mm
I
I On the turret, the following unit can also be installed.
O'
Tool holder -Standard wedge type (Dl9mm) 221-01A
£ r-
-15mm-overhang wedge type (ÿ 16mm) 221-02
“ 15mm-overhang wedge type (ÿl9mm) 221-02A
-Standard wedge-free type (Dl9mm) 221-03A
~15mm-overhang wedge-free type ([Zll6mm) 221-04
-15mm-overhang wedge-free type (Dl9mm) 221-04A
, s
6-5
ill
'
1
—Wedge longitudinally adjustable type(Ql6mm) . 221-05
“Wedge longitudinally adjustable type (CI]l9mm)
-Wedge type for inverse tool setting (019mm) ...
.....
“Wedge-free type for inverse tool setting (ÿ 19mm)
-Wedge longitudinally adjustable type (016mm)
“Wedge longitudinally adjustable type (Ol9mm)
221-05A
221-07A
221-08A
.221-09
221-09A
—Wedge-free type for cut-off tool (Ol6mm) 221-71 I
“Wedge-free type for cut-off tool (Ol9mm) 221-71A
L Wedge-free type for backworking (Ol9mm) 221-72A
— -
Triple sleeve holder -j— Drill sleeve ER16
combined use main and back —Drill sleeve ER16
736-20
301-24
I
(421-12) “Drill sleeve ER16 for deep drilling 301-25 1
—Drill sleeve ER11 736-23
“Drill sleeve ER11 301-21
—Drill sleeve ER11 for deep drilling 301-22
—Drill sleeve T 7 736-24
-Drill sleeve T 7 401-24
-Tap sleeve ER16 736-30
..
-Tap sleeve ER11
-Die sleeve (j) 30mm
—Die sleeve $ 25mm
301-31
736-38
736-36
*
-Die sleeve 1 inch 736-36D
j
-Die sleeve (j) 20mm 736-37
-Die sleeve <{> 20mm 401-36
—Die sleeve 13/16 inch 736-37D
—Die sleeve 13/16 inch 401-38
-Die sleeve <j> 16mm 411-36
—Die sleeve 5/8 inch 411-38
-Boring sleeve 0 4mm 411-41
-Boring sleeve 1/8 inch 411-43
-Boring sleeve <j> 6mm 301-41
-Boring sleeve 1/4 inch 411-44
—Boring sleeve <j> 8mm 301-42
-Boring sleeve 5/16 inch 301-44 i1
-Boring sleeve <j> 10mm 301-43
*—Boring sleeve 3/8 inch 301-45
||S, 6-6
I
- Triple sleeve holder- •Drill sleeve ER11 781-25

for large diameter
combined use main and back
(421-11)
- Single sleeve holder (221-10)-r— Drill sleeve ER16 .736-20

Center adjustable
single sleeve holder (221-14)
——
Drill sleeve ER16
Drill sleeve ER16 for deep drilling
.301-24
,301-25
Single sleeve holder -Drill sleeve ER11 .736-23
for backworking (221-16) -Drill sleeve ER11 .301-21
-Drill sleeve ER11 for deep drilling .301-22
-Drill sleeve T7 .736-24 J
-Drill sleeve T7 .401-24
>:
- Tap sleeve ER16 736-30
- Die sleeve <|> 25mm 736-36
-Die sleeve 1 inch 736-36D
—Die sleeve <j) 20
- Die sleeve 13/16 inch
736-37
736-37D :
——
Die sleeve <j) 30mm
Boring sleeve <j> 4mm
736-38
411-41
- Boring sleeve 1/8 inch 411-43
-Boring sleeve <J) 6mm 736-44
-Boring sleeve <j) 6mm 301-41
i -Boring sleeve 1/4 inch 736-44D
-Boring sleeve 1/4 inch .411-44'
-Boring sleeve <j> 8mm . .736-40
-Boring sleeve <(> 8mm . 301-42
——
Boring sleeve 5/16 inch..
Boring sleeve 5/16 inch...
. 736-40D
.301-44
-Boring sleeve <j) 10mm .736-41
#§: —Boring sleeve <j> 10mm

~ Boring sleeve 3/8 inch
.301-43
.736-4 ID
-Boring sleeve 3/8 inch .301-45
- Boring sleeve <)> 12mm .736-42
-Boring sleeve 1/2 inch . 736-42D
r"
6-7
.,4ll§i§8
:
l:
i
:
.
- Double sleeve holder T-Drill sleeve ER16 301-24

(221-12) - Drill sleeve ER16 for deep drilling 301-25
- Drill sleeve ER1 1 736-23
- Drill sleeve ER1 1 301-21
— Drill sleeve ER11 for deep drilling

- Drill sleeve T7
301-22
401-24 I
—
-
Boring sleeve (j> 4mm
.411-41
.411-43
- Boring sleeve <}> 6 736-44 1
-
-
Boring sleeve 4> 6
301-41
736-44D it.
— Boring sleeve <j> 8mm
- Boring sleeve 0 8mm
736-40
.301-42
- Boring sleeve 5/16 inch 736-40D
i
- Boring sleeve 5/16 inch .301-44
——Boring sleeve <j> 10mm
Boring sleeve <j> 10mm .
736-41
301-43
- Boring sleeve 3/8 inch 736-4 ID :

- Boring sleeve <j> 12mm .736-42
- Boring sleeve 1/2 inch 736-42D i
V '
-s Power-driven attachment - Off-center cross drilling unit ER11 221-57

- Off-center cross tapping unit ER11 221-59
- Side milling unit for BC collet 221-62
;I
- Slotting unit 50B 221-63
gif, - Slotting unit 50A 221-63H
ill
- Adjustable side milling unit ER11 . 221-64' If
- Adjustable slotting unit 50B 221-65
- Adjustable slotting unit 50A 221-65H
ft
— Side milling unit ER16 221-66 I
||
NOTICE
The maximum chucking diameter. ER11: <j) 7mm K
ER16: <j) 10mm
T7: <j> 7mm
BC: <j) 10mm
6-8
? 6-4 Tooiholder tables
If there is no specification in each diagram, the following diagrams show the relational dimensions
..........
i
when each axis is at the following position.
• X0.0, YO.O (Absolute coordinate)
• B, E, Z2 Reference point
Gang tool post
Name 5-station tooiholder (Dÿmm) Name 5-station tooiholder (Ql/2 inch)
Type No. 421-01 Type No. 421-91
t Application Outer diameter cutting, cutting-off Application Outer diameter cutting, cutting-off
i
is CM <M
TUT HU
3;
cvi 1
THJ
3 rs
22 22 CM
Q
—1©@ÿ 10-
© o©
LO¬
CO CO
CVJir
try
@© O© CM<
try
°©
CO
(Si '
to¬
•ICD© °© T <o
(Si'
tO
CD co
-j®@ O ©I— CShr
in
]@© O© <M,r
10
S© O©
CQ;
CM j(D© °©|—1 rk CD
CM
© ©o
P © ©O
Name 20mm-overhang tool adapter {ÿ12mm) Name 20mm-overhang tool adapter (ED1/2 inch)
Type No. 311-01 Fit position T400 Type No. 311-02 Fit position T400
Application Single point threading, grooving, boring Application Single point threading, grooving, boring
Applicable tooiholder 421-01 Applicable tooiholder 421-91
Remarks Cannot be attached to T300 Remarks Cannot be attached to T300
i CM
CM ! 33' CM
CM I
4 CM
3- fs
22 22 CM
©
© o O© 3 © o O© 3
i
m,
6*9
]i
;
:
{:
i i
i •
I '
:
l
i
I
4
:
Name 4-station tooiholder (ÿ!6mm) Name 1 7mm-overhang too! adapter (Q16mm)

Type No. 421-04 Type No. 331-01 Fit position T300
Application Outer diameter cutting, cutting-off Application Single point threading, grooving, boring
k Applicable tooiholder 421-04

CM I
k
3J 0> -
»
I
CD
LO
m m 25.
-KD© ° ©
to
~Q t 3
iO
-j(D© o Wrvf rK CO
I
©o
F
© 30 i!4
Name Crpss-drilling/milling unit ER16 Name Cross-tapping unit ER11

Type No. 331-50 Shank diameter max. <j> 10mm Type No. 331-51 Shank diameter max. 6mm
Application Cross-drilling, tapping, milling Application Cross-tapping
Fit position T600, T700, T800 Fit position T600, T700, T800 II
W:
i
i
—r
~
i1 k
yXl
i i1 k
to
. 5 sc-
N
•e
! 71 nax .36 ; 47
24.
4
max .35.5
V
—I* . i**
I km i > 6-10
Name 3-station toolholder (Qlÿm) Name 3-stalion toolholder for backworking (ÿ1/2 inch)
l Type No. 421-02 Type No. 421-92
Application Outer diameter cutting Application Outer diameter cutting
CSLa sn A. on
¥
:
q
in
CM
¥UiLL c
c
to
CM
A
o
CO
i
3. 12 3
3 12.7
27 27 27 27
Name 3-station toolholder for inverse tool setting for backworking (Dl2mm) Type No. 421-03
Application Outer diameter cutting with backworking attachment
1 e ST)
J © ©
O o o
i o @1 ©
CO
—
! |T
x_
-rP*
a)
CM
Ld
12 l-4 3
161 159 27 27
: : :
Name 3-station toolholder for inverse tool setting for backworking (01/2 inch) Type No. 421-93
§
a BCl
3 © © ©
o o o
If
—
J o © © ©
co
! (T x_ rr
ID
:v'?; CM
' H U3
12.7, Hi
161 159 27 27
1
-
6-11
II :
y
V
••
:
>ÿ3
1 I
Name Standard wedge type (D1 6mm) Name Standard wedge-free type ([j16mm)
Type No. 221-01 Type No. 221-03
Application Outer diameter cutting Application Outer diameter cutting, cutting-off
5
5
o
[ tO-122 - so
o
o
M.
EO-122
O
3
i
€0 CO pp ©/
: 10
CM
rv
LO
CM /
2 16 1 Sj 2 16 16
i
I
i Name Wedge type for inverse tool setting (D16mm) Name Wedge-free type for inverse tool setting (Dl6mm) it
Type No. 221-07 Type No. 221-08
'
Application Outer diameter cutting Application Outer diameter cutting
!;
i
:
I ZQ- 122
e JSL
80-122
oa
©
o
E .3
* O o
; o
03
©
JIT
CO
©
LO
\© o ©/
I 1J LO
CM
11- CM
%
w l i
2 16 2 16 16
lie ->
:
Name Wedge-free type for backworking (ÿ16mm) Type No. 221-72

n°i
2Z-122
0 ca
© o Di 3
.
o
©
LO!
CM.!
00
r-rr
-EE4
16 L4L 16
161 1 59
S': 6-12
'
Name Tripie sleeve holder for large dia. combined use main and back Type No. j 421-11
Applicable sleeve 421-21, 31, 781-43, 43D
na o da
l 1-lZv
o o
rv.
r J
-
i ©
o CO
—fT
[
col £2
6- ©
CM <»,.
L-41
&
S j
max.75 max. 80 '
77 50 193 40
Name Triple sleeve holder combined use main and back Type No. 421-12 j
Applicable sleeve 421-22, 32, 301-36, 37, 38, 39, 736-40, 40D, 736-41, 41D, 42, 42D, 44, 44D :
r9 o
21-lEV
O
o
J s
o:
N
CD
I —fT >;i,rn
N co
U|
Os.
fk
max.75 max .80 j
77 50 1 93 40
Name Single sleeve holder for deep drilling Type No. 221-11
:
Applicable sleeve 736-21 , 22, 42, 42D
rq
- il-lZZ
o
oa
CD
J __
&
IS
105 50
I
6-13 ,
illl!
I! ,
!
«
i
i
| I
i
1
I!
I
s
Si
;
if
'
Name Counterface drill sleeve ER20 Name Counterface drill sleeve ER16 if!
Type No. 421-21 Shank diameter max. Type No. 421-22 Shank diameter max. i
I Applicable sleeve holder 421-11 Applicable sleeve holder 421-12
52 <-
1 05
53 _ , 114 ! i
10
5 17
1 oo
-8
1 -8
i
r:
fBsie =3
1 I* I
1 Name Drill sleeve for deep drilling ER16 Name Drill sleeve MT1 for deep drilling
if
!
Type No. |8Wff| Shank diameter max. <j> 10mm Type No. 736-22 Taper size MT1
Applicable sleeve holder 221-11 Applicable sieeve holder 221-11
77 75
% II
X 65
90 62
s
1
I
A
1 ,
1
i
Name Counterface tap sleeve ER16 Name Counterface tap sieeve ER16
Type No. 421-31 Shank diameter max. 1 0mm Type No. 421-32 Shank diameter max. <j> 10mm
Applicable sleeve holder 421-11 Applicable sleeve holder 421-12 I
48 1 23 48 1 33
1
15 43 43 25. 42 42 ;.":i
32 ID ID 32 32 32
n
ID I ID
i
CD CD
1
U
l
L Qip-r
-8-
CD
O
CD
-8
1
Name Die sleeve $ 20mm
Type No. 301-36 Die outside diameter
Applicable sleeve holder 421-12
6 95 2 95 Q
41 41
m
CB O)
-8 •8
1 JAM 3E=~Hp
f
ltd )
I?1"
6-14
I
1!
Name Die sleeve <f> 25mm 1

[
Type No. 301-37 Die outside diameter <f> 25mm
f
Applicable sieeve holder 421-12 %
ft
a •s
--
95 95 9 <ÿ
-> <- ->
j
41 41
e> k I!5
O) 0)
1 u
j EM) BEZEp-
4
33EI-]
1
i
:
.
Name Die sieeve 13/16 inch
Type No. 301-38 Die outside diameter 13/1 6 inch 31
i!
Applicable sieeve holder 421-12 8
&<r 95 o 95 9
<-
x
41 41
i -Sr <- i
0) 0)
si -&
I
in=QE9EZ
jtn IKE'
Name Die sleeve 1 inch
II Type No. 301-39 Die outside diameter 1 inch
Applicable sleeve holder 421-12
I
1 95 o 95 » 9 <-
&-e-
m <-
41
•>
41
->
;;
f CB
-e-
O)
!
I
j
:ÿ
) EM 1
u 8
1
•i
*
Name Boring sleeve $ 16mm Name Boring sieeve 5/8 inch i
Type No. 781-43 Shank diameter <j> 15mm Type NoJ 781-43D f Shank diameter 5/8 inch 1
Applicable sleeve holder 421-11 Applicable sleeve holder 421-11
52 <-
1 05 52 1 05
35 -> <-
35
mm
MM
1 1 r*"
—
.....
as
vM;M « a -0 03
J l i I
I!'
6-15 'M./.JI1I
; §
••
I
1
1
$ 1
it
f?
:!
31 1
i
1
I I
II
E
5 H
if I
J
8
!
1
I
Name Boring sleeve
Type No. 736-40
Applicable sleeve holder
Shank diameter
421-12
jSSmm
Name
Type No. 736-40D
Applicable sleeve holder

Shank diameter 5/16 inch
421-12
...
. ", H)
s !i
Si
42 1 05 42 1 05 i
? I
25
-
r«E 3*"
I >
r-E-B m- Lru:
tr ti
-
i
Name Boring sleeve j> 10mm Name Boring sleeve 3/8 inch
Type No. 736-41 Shank diameter j $ 10mm Type No. 736-41 D Shank diameter 3/8 inch
Applicable sleeve holder 421-12 Applicable sleeve holder 421-12
I
52 1 05 52 105
35 35
1
I I
j
— jll J<g> -m-h-
i'
Name Boring sleeve <f> 1 2mm Name Boring sleeve 1/2 inch
Type No. 736-42 Shank diameter <j> 12mm Type N c 736 42D /Shank diameter ; 1/2 inch
Applicable sleeve holder 421-12,221-11 Applicable sleeve holder 421-12,221-11
52 1 05 52 1 05
35 i 35
j-E—Bi r-t --
Name Boring sleeve <f> 6mm Name Boring sleeve 1/4 inch
Type No- 736-44 Shank diameter <j> 6mm
J
Type No. 736-44D j
Shank diameter 1/4 inch
Applicable sleeve holder 421-12 Applicable sleeve holder j 421-12
42 1 05 42 105
B. 25.
l-f JLJZ L !§
I L j L-
6-16
i
*
Name Cross drilling unit ER16 Name Cross tapping unit ER1 1
Type No. 221 -50 Shank diameter max. 10mm Type No. 221-51 Shank diameter max. l-7mm I
Application Cross-drilling, milling Application Cross-tapping
I
Speed 400—SOOOmin-1 Speed —
400 6DOOmin'5
max-33 max 33 .
/ .
i
4 r &
i
27 1 5.
t* 27 Si \
80 80
t;
Name Front drilling unit ER11 Name Front tapping unit ER1 1
!5
Type No. 221-52 I Shank diameter max. <f> 7mm Type No. 221-53 Shank diameter max. & 7mm
Application Front off-center driiiing Application Front off-center tapping
Speed 400—6000min-1 Speed 400—eOOOmin-'’
f
5
|
i
*
\
26 80 27 80
I
Name Counterface driiiing unit ER11 I

Type No. 221-56 Shank diameter max. <[> 7mm 1
Application Front/back off-center driiiing
Speed 400—SOOOmin-1
--
Remarks Front/back simultaneous off-center drilling are possible
#S®f
ft |J-©~
& St B—X-
u
| ma x .75 80
26 1 05 189
:ÿ
8-17
• .*•
sll
I
i
a ll
if
m
J
l
; }
It
:5l i
I |
I
ii:
:
if I
S'
)
"
Name 2-spindle cross drilling unit ER16 Name High speed 2-spindle cross drilling unit ER11
Type No. 421-51 Shank diameter max. $5 10mm Type No. 421-52 Shank diameter | max. <j> 7mm
1 Application Cross-drilling, milling Application Cross-drilling, milling >
Speed 400—eOQOmin-1 Speed 670—10000min-’
Remarks Use this when Y 62.0 Remarks Use this when Y Sr 62.0
I
:y
1 max .25,. max.26ÿ
|f
:fcraS~
_ X
CM
rZ!> r —I
-©
CM .-.-i—i
l
27 12 27
1 1 1 { Y62.0 )|
ll -
k --
- 111 ( Y62.0 )
|
V
Name Slotting unit 50B Name Slotting unit 50A v

I Type No. 421-53 Type No. 421-54
i Application Slotting, 2 side milling Application Slotting, 2 side milling i
Speed 120—1800mm-1 Speed 120—1800min-1
I Circular saw
©
4> 50mm X t X <j> 12.7mm Circular saw 55 50mm X t X 13mm |
vSto 1
% &
o \3- I
i
\ T
~P>
t
CO CO
J.
|%
I
I
I
2.5 <13-5 \ 2.5 c1 3.5 1I i
,27.5 £7 |
ZL.5 42Z
93( Y26.0 t 93( Y26.0 )
Name Angle adjustable cross drilling unit ER11 1

Type No. 421-55 Shank diameter max. <j> 7mm
) Application Angular drilling (0-60" to axis line)
Speed 400—SOOOmin-’
2Zu
/ /
/ 1
47 80
6-18
.
I: 4
1
;: 6-5 Precautions for tooling
6-5-1 Precautions for gang tool post/turret simultaneous machining
•Due to the structure of the machine, when a specific tool holder is attached to the turret
and simultaneous machining is executed by the gang tool post and turret, the tools or tool
holders of the gang tool post and the turret may interfere with each other. Statuses that the
tools or tool holders interfere with each other are shown below. During tooling, care
should be taken to prevent those statuses.
£ ,
SI :ÿ
is;! When the 3-station tooihoSder [Type Nos. 421- 02, 421-92] is used
1 As shown in the drawing below, when balance cutting is executed by the T500 tool (when the 5-
1 station toolholder [Type Nos. 421-01, 421-91] is mounted) or the T400 tool (when the 4-station
toolholder [Type No. 421-04] is mounted) of the gang tool post and the (D tool of the 3-station
toolholder [Type Nos. 421-02, 421-92] of the turret, the T600 tool of the gang tool post and the ® tool
(the arrow portion shown in the drawing below) of the 3-station toolholder [Type Nos. 421-02, 421-
92] of the turret interfere with each other.
xo.o
PQÿ 1
YILJD
-l®@ °©
3K
°©=T
ojj
w
O Method for avoiding tool interference

Do not use the T500 tool (when the 5-station toolholder [Type Nos. 421-01, 421-91] is
II
mounted) of the gang tool post or the T400 tool (when the 4-station toolholder [Type No. 421-
04] is mounted) and the (3) tool of the 3-station toolholder [Type Nos. 421-02, 421-92] of the
turret for balance cutting.
•..v;
;I|
6-19
tM
:
I
K
I
1
'
:
.
t the triple sleeve holder used for main and back [Type Nos. 421-11, 421-12] is used
I
O Status 1 that tool interference occurs
When simultaneous machining is executed by the gang tool post and the turret when the statuses
I indicated below occur at the same time, the tools T600 to T800 of the gang tool post and the ©
tool of the triple sleeve holder used for main and back [Type Nos. 421-11, 421-12] of the turret
may interfere with each other as shown in the drawing below.
I • The triple sleeve holder used for main and back [Type Nos. 421-11, 421-12] is mounted on
the surface just above the turret surface selected at present.
• T20Q to T50G of the gang tool post are selected.
X-4 . 0 X-4 . O'

P.
O A
o-ÿ
c c
©
1 __ © /
Y zZiÿQ. •16® y-zziÿo.
sp o
w o J
. Method for avoiding tool interference
(1) When the sum of the absolute coordinate values of the X axis and the Y axis is -2.0 or
more (X+Yÿ -2.0)
. Set the overhang amount of the sleeve mounted in the position © of the triple sleeve
holder used for main and back [Type Nos. 421-11, 421-12] between the sleeve holder and
the end face of cap to 42 mm or less.
: (2) When the sum of the absolute coordinate values of the X axis and the Y axis is less than -
2.0 (X+Y<-2.0)
Set the machine coordinate of the E axis when X+Y<-2.0 to Eÿs-21.0.
i ! I
xo.o
m
X-4 .
w =M-
:
;
C
X+Yi-2 . 0
Y -2.0
12.0
t T
t-t
C\J
x
©
X+Y < -2 . O
Ml ?
4i
®l R
X
Y-21 . 0
E-21 . 0
6-20
1
1
indicated below occur at the same time, the tools T100 to T500 of the gang tool post and the tool
© of the triple sleeve holder used for main and back [Type Nos. 421-11, 421- 12] of the turret
may interfere with each other as shown in the drawing below.
__ ___
• The triple sleeve holder used for main and back [Type Nos. 421-11, 421-12] is mounted on
the surface just below the turret surface selected at present.
* T500 to T80Q (when the 5-station toolholder [Type Nos. 421-01, 421-91] is mounted) of the
gang tool post or T400 to T8Q0 (when the 4-station toolholder [Type No. 421-04] is mounted)
are selected.
• The sum of the absolute coordinate values of the X axis and the Y axis is less than -10.0
(X+Yc-10.0). J
X-4 . O X-4 . 0 '
i
YJIZI °~©1 A X=21*Q.
© o
]®@ g
SF
A 7 A
O
°(ÿT
ffj© o®jZr -I®© ° tgbr l :
I
ii o
Ho A n o o ©
Method for avoiding tool interference
(1) When no overhang tool adapter [Type Nos. 311-01, 311-02, 331-01] is mounted to the !
gang tool post 5
• When the 5-station toolholder [Type Nos. 421-01, 421-91] is mounted i

Set the overhang amount of the sleeve mounted in the position © of the triple sleeve
• When the 4-station toolholder [Type No. 421-04] is mounted
1 Set the overhang amount of the sleeve mounted in the position ® of the triple sleeve :
! j
£ X-4 . O' col X-4 . O'

cot
I
A X
CO A coj
i Y-21 . O
E12.0
?:t Y-21 -0
E12 . 0
ft ?
!
t ft
.
6-21
j
I SI
: i
ii
:
1
H
(2) When the overhang tool adapter [Type Nos. 311-01, 311-02, 331-01] is mounted to the
11
gang tool post
• When the 5-station toolholder [Type Nos. 421-01, 421-91] is mounted
Set the overhang amount of the sleeve mounted in the position (A) of the triple sleeve
Set the overhang amount of the sleeve mounted in the position ® of the triple sleeve |
I L
X-4 . O' X-4 . O' l
_
! i CD
ii CD
A
A
T t
CO
Y-21 . 0 :T ? CM
Y-21 . 0
S
x
E12 - 0 2E E12 . 0
-?J—It- 2
the 2-spsndi© cross drilling unit [Type Mos„ 421-51, 421-52] is used
indicated below occur at the same time, the tools T60G to T800 of the gang tool post and the ®
tool of the 2-spindle cross drilling unit [Type Nos. 421-51, 421-52] of the turret may interfere
with each other as shown in the drawing below.
• The 2-spindle cross drilling unit [Type Nos. 421-51, 421-52] is mounted on the surface just
above the turret surface selected at present.
* T200 to T50Q of the gang tool post are selected.
;
:
X-4 . O
is®
©
w
°©
O
Uh
W
___
®
\
XzZlÿQ_
X-4 . 0'
-4®@
-Hii' °©T
M
.c:®'
W
©o
...
©
&
o©
°©l—1
°©i—i
n ,
A
®
__
1|
r.
6-22
1
f
(1) When the sum of the absolute coordinate values of the X axis and the Y axis is 0.0 or more
(X+Yÿ0.0)
Set the machine coordinate of the E axis to EÿO.O.
(2) When the sum of the absolute coordinate values of the X axis and the Y axis is less than
0.0 (X+Y<0.0)
Set the machine coordinate of the E axis when X+Y<0.0 to Eÿ-10.0.
L
.2 YO . 0 ;
xo . 0 EO . 0 X- 4 . E- 10.0
Y-21 . 0
1I E£0 CM]
X + Y3s0 ;
(3) When the T slot cutter is attached to T600 L i
to T800 of the gang tool post

X-4 . 0 1
Set the machine coordinate of the E axis
to E£-19.0. -§EH CO
CM
E-19.0 :
Y-21 . 0
indicated below occur at the same time, the tools T200 to T500 of the gang tool post and the ®
l|j i '
tool of the 2-spindle cross drilling unit [Type Nos. 421-51, 421-52] of the turret may interfere
with each other as shown in the drawing below.
• The 2-spindle cross drilling unit [Type Nos. 421-51, 421-52] is mounted on the surface just
s below the turret surface selected at present.
1 • T60Q to T800 of the gang tool post are selected.
• The sum of the absolute coordinate values of the X axis and the Y axis is less than 4.0
3 (X+Y<4.0). 1|
. I1QF=-
@4- .X=2.\-J£L
Ie4-
-(SXcg © & A
dM °3TT
<0) O© -I©®* °© I
D@ o© -t®@ °@ I
;
n o
X-4 . 0
X-4 . O
6-23
KS Y-4 ;
I;
1
I
i
:
I
it
$
: .

(1) When no overhang tool adapter [Type Nos. 311-01, 311-02, 331-01] is mounted to the
gang tool post
• When the 5-station toolhoider [Type Nos. 421-01, 421-91] is mounted
Set the machine coordinate of the E axis to Eÿ5.0.
I • When the 4-station toolhoider [Type No. 421-04] is mounted
Set the machine coordinate of the E axis to ES» 1.0.
|
Y-21 . 0 Y-21 . 0
X-4 . 0 E5 . 0 X-4 . 0 E1 .0
nr
cn|
:
gang tool post ,
'
* When the 5-station toolhoider [Type Nos. 421-01, 421-913 is mounted

Set the machine coordinate of the E axis to Eÿ-15.0.
* When the 4-station toolhoider [Type No. 421-04] is mounted
.
X-4 . 0s- X- 4 . 0s-

Y-21 - O Y-21 . 0
E-15.0 E- 16.0
1=7i
W
6-24
the slotting unit [Type Nos. 421-53, 421-54] is used
indicated below occur at the same time, the tools T60Q to T800 of the gang tool post and the
slotting unit [Type Nos. 421- 53, 421-54] of the turret may interfere with each other as shown in
the drawing below.
• The slotting unit [Type Nos. 421-53, 421-54] is mounted on the surface just above the turret
surface selected at present.
• TICK) to T400 (when the 5-station toolholder [Type Nos. 421-01, 421-91] is mounted) of the
gang tool post or T100 to T3GQ (when the 4-station toolholder [Type No. 421-04] is mounted)
are selected.
• The sum of the absolute coordinate values of the X axis and the Y axis is less than 0.0
(X+Y<0.0).
___
X-4 . 0 x - 4 . o'
I
EN -4®® °©
m -t@®' °
wo®}-?
-j®@ o©
© °© VJIZIÿO
—w
°®i i
i -id)® o©T
©o

(1) When no slotting unit is attached to T6G0 to -
X 4.
T800 of the gang tool post {1 fi rf
Set the machine coordinate of the E axis to
Eÿ-8.0.
1 1 4->
?-!i°o
(2) When the slotting unit is attached to T600 to !
T800 of the gang tool post
Set the machine coordinate of the E axis to
I
7
Eÿ-16.0.
'"-Hit CD
C\J
jtol r
OJ
E-16.0
Y-21 . O
6-25
il
.
i
1 O Status 2 that tool interference occurs
__
indicated below occur at the same time, the tools T200 to T500 of the gang tool post and the
:
slotting unit [Type Nos. 421- 53, 421-54] of the turret may interfere with each other as shown in
the drawing below.
r • The slotting unit [Type Nos. 421-53, 421-54] is mounted on the surface just below the turret
surface selected at present.
* T500 to T800 (when the 5-station toolholder [Type Nos. 421-01, 421-91] is mounted) of the
i gang tool post or T400 to T800 (when the 4-station toolholder [Type No. 421-04] is mounted)
are selected.
;( !
it
i
j®©
©
oW
o@
kr> Y_z21_0
; ~m@ °@n
I -I©© om-i
I -I©© °@M /
VI
I -|©@ o©
X-4 . 0 ;
T
X~4 . 0
:: Method for avoiding tool interference

(1) When no overhang tool adapter [Type Nos. 311-01, 311-02, 331-01] is mounted to the
gang tool post
:
; • When the 4-station toolholder [Type No. 421-04] is mounted
L
1
:
: X-4 . 0 X-4 . 0
;
CD
CM I
JLd
Y-2 1 . 0
E-7 . O
CM
cn
JLd I
FTÿh FIR
I
:
1
6-26
1
gang tool post
Set the machine coordinate of the E axis to E 5s -28.0.
Set the machine coordinate of the E axis to ESS-37.0.
X- 4 . X-4 . O'
3 irr-'T 3 id
ITT Y-21 . 0
E- 28 . O
-
N
TP=i
Y-21 . 0
-
E 37 . O
I
6-5-2 Precautions when angle adjustable cross drilling unit is used
*
X1 Angle adjustable cross drilling unit [Type No. 421-55] can decline to the barstock center line with the
angle 0° to 60°. However, when tool is mounted on the surface just above the turret surface on which
this unit is mounted, adjustable drilling angle is limited.
w
:: r7®==Ph
f- :
l ’1 h
I
m
1 W
T
1
421-55
S
m
$
m
Adjustable drilling angle 8 and tool units which are mountable on the surface just above the turret
surface on which angle adjustable cross drilling unit is mounted (plane ®) are as follows.
drilling angle : 0° S0ÿ=1O°
• All tool units are mountable
drilling angle : 10° <0ÿ30°
• All tool units are mountable except 2-spindle cross drilling unit [Type 421-51, 52] and Slotting
...
Uunit [Type 421-53, 54],
However, when Angle adjustable cross drilling unit [Type 421-55] is mounted on the plane ®,
Adjustable drilling angles (0) of two Angle adjustable cross drilling units [Type 421-55] must be
the same.
6-27
jjjilP
i
Adjustable drifting angle : 30° < 0ÿ60°

• No tool unit
• 3-station toolholder/inverse [Type 421-03, 93]
Adjustable drifting angle : 0 10° to 60°
=
* While ® plane is selected, use Z2 spindle range of 0 to 120.0.
I
: 1
i
5
!
f
I!
I
if !
I 6-28
I
:
7. Operation ;;
\
i !
; 7-1 Diagram of machine operation panel :
!5
CNC operation pane! Operation panel A
V
7
A * I
z
1 7 ][ ®©
1 LJ[
1 POWER [ I MM El i
ED nnr
OH *
E3 U
IHHHRnH © l
Bfla a €>y
4 <> 4
K
wm EBU W |
- ® ©.
.7}
71 , {
' A M 7
©QÿBSÿSEB MJ
O
m m
ppsasraasBH ° < »t °h
-.a
5§ luAtN OOJUSTÿ
|gawwwm
V.
9 A
7
Operation panei 8 Operation panel C RS232C port
!
A.C1Q0V socket
AC230V socket
f
5
7
7
;ÿ
7
m
7-1
7
W«SI •mpmiHfll VVM l-Wi
[;
I
Operation panel A i
:f:
4 4-
o
1
?
f
5
4
0 4 IS
1
O 1
j|-
—— ¥
o I i
1 i1
I
II
I is.
I
«
I I
4 4 1
g
If
i ©
:
.
v
7-2 f H.
If
':r
Operation panel B
1
4-
1
— —
I HEAD 2 jrSUB COLLET-j pSUS SP I NDLErj
I
BBS®) S 01 0 ;
.r
v
:!v
POWER DRIVEN
, MODE 2 „ , TOOLS i„
ffl SH
I
, H -OPERATION-
®0B@BBB00 B @j
i
AXIS DIRECTION-
LMAIN COLLET-ÿ
pMAlN SPINDLE-j
9 MM 'I
r
4 4 4 ,1s
I
i LED (Green) LED (Green) s>
i
mI
;fgi
%v;: /
Key (Gray) Key (White) Key (White)
i
1 LED (Green) LED (Red)
I
Ur Key (Black)
Key (Black)
11
:!
7-3
jv
1-
y.
-
i
;
Operation panel C
:i
> 5 25
4-
•v
100
(%>
:
0ÿ5
I
o
El HI
O I MW
12
„ ~~ 80
120
i 3 80
200
00
100
6
40
; 120
600
l 20
O I
m
2 140
*
800
%
mm/ml n
4 4 Z!'
|
'
I
f.-
1 |
l
|
;
7-4
1: - .4
7-2 Explanation of machine operation panel
(Refer to the operation panel diagram.)
lamp
4 4 Power lamp
Power lamp ®@r

© m
* EJ
ED ©
El
§
© §
t
!
This lamp lights when the main power supply (main breaker) is ON (|).
POWER ON / OFF
POWER
O
When the ON (|) button is pressed after turning the main power supply (main breaker) ON, the
CNC power will turn ON.
After approx. 15 seconds, message will display on the screen.
1 1022 MACHINE IS NOT READY
When the OFF (0) button is pressed, the CNC power will turn OFF.
The hydraulic pressure will also be turned off when the CNC power is turned OFF.
Ilf
7-5
:
1
READY
o
When the MACHINE READY button is pressed while message 1022 is displayed, the hydraulic
pressure will turn ON, and the machine ready state will be entered. The machine ready state is that X
in which message 1022 has turned off and this button lamp is lit.
ABSENCE LAMP
1
§ m
;
If the barstock runs out during machining and the barfeeder's barstock absence switch turns ON,
this lamp will light.
NOTICE
I
• When the automatic barfeeder is not actually being used, the keep relay KO-bit 0 is 1
(use of automatic barfeeder validated), and the machine is not in dry run (AIR Ct/r[5]
key is not lit), this lamp will light.
I • Refer to section 7-17for details on the keep relay interactive screen.
INTERLOCK key
O I
s
i
If the headstock or cutting room door is opened while the DOOR INTERLOCK key switch is set to
,
ON |
( ), the machine will enter the emergency stop state.
!i If the headstock or cutting room door is opened while the DOOR INTERLOCK key switch is set to
OFF (O), rapid override 1, 5, 25% are validate.
Even if 100% is being selected speed will be reduced to 25 %.
• Always set this key to ON (\) during machine operation.

* Assign a supervisorfor the control of this key.
f The key can be pulled out when the DOOR INTERLOCK key switch is set to ON (|j.
7-6
!
INPUT key
i ; O I
The following types of input from the CNC operation panel will be disabled when the MEMORY
INPUT key is set to OFF (0).
• Changing or deleting of program
ACAUTiOW
ft • Assign a supervisorfor the control of this key.
® The key can be pulled out when the key switch is set to OFF (0).
key switch
; *m
O 1
'
ACAUTION
'ft
• Assign a supervisorfor the control of this key.
The key can be pulled out when the COOLANT key switch is set to ON |
( ).
If the COOLANT key switch is set to OFF (O) while the coolant oil is being discharged, the
discharge will stop. When the switch is set to ON |
( ) again, the discharge will resume.
If the COOLANT ON (M25) command is issued while the switch is set to OFF (0), the following
message will display on the screen.
1 2083 COOLANT AUTO KEY IS OFF]
1 The state after this is as follows.
ft- © During dry run operation (AIR CUT |rj*j| is lit)
The program will stop after a single block. If the coolant is not actually required, press the
START button and the program will resume.
(D When not in dry run operation (AIR CUT [p] is not lit)
1 The program will remain stopped at the M25 block, and one of the following messages will
display for approx. 10 sec.
11023 MAIN M-FIN SIGNAL ALARM [
or
1 1131 BACK M-FIN SIGNAL ALARM]
7-7
,1'ft
]
if
After pressing the RESET j f

, set the COOLANT key switch to ON ( ) and start the program
from the TOP.
If the COOLANT key switch is turned ON (|) within 10 sec. after message 2083 displays, the
coolant will be discharged immediately. The program will stop after a single block, so the program
can be resumed by pressing the START button jfUl.
-- A- iff
unit O.SMPa ON/OFF switch ...option , ..
O
|
If coolant unit 0.8MPa ON/OFF switch is set to OFF (0) whildtodlant is discharged, discharge of
coolant will stop. After that, if the switch is set to ON |
( ), the coolant will be discharged again.
The cutting room door is opened while the coolant will be discharged, the discharge of coolant will
stop. After that, if cutting room door is closed, the coolant will be discharged again.
If the coolant unit G.8MPa ON (Ml25) is commanded while the Switch is set to OFF (0), the
following message will be displayed on the screen.
1 2091 COOLANT UNIT 0.8MPA AUTO SWITCH IS OFF [
After this, the machine will enter the following state.
CD In case during air cut (air cut key jrÿ is lit.)
The program will stop in single block. In case coolant will not be needed, to restart the pro¬
gram, press start button (ml-
Jr
(2) In case not during air cut (air cut key is put off)
The program will stop at Ml 25 block and 10 seconds later, the following message will be
displayed on the screen.
1023 MAIN M-FIN SIGNAL ALARM |
or
1 1131 BACK M-FIN SIGNAL ALARM]
To restart the program from the beginning, aftex*f§lssing reset key j # j, turn on ( § ) the
coolant unit 0.8MPa ON/OFF switch.
If the coolant unit 0.8MPa ON/OFF switch is set to ON | ( ) within 10 seconds after message
2083 is displayed, the coolant will be discharged immediately. Because program will stop in
single block, only pressing start button jfUl will make program restart.
7-8
TRAVERSE OVERRIDE
5 25
100
(%)
VT
’*/••• .-
This:is used to ch|fiÿeÿe rapid traverse speed (1%, 5%, 25%, 100%).
If the headstock or cutting room door is opened while the DOOR INTERLOCK key switch is set to
OFF (OX rapid ovemdqÿÿl,, 5, 25% are validate. |
Even if 100% is being selected, speed will be reduced to '25 %.
!
/OVERRIDE !ÿ
-
m ;
120
8 200
80
80
100-
{iso
20
2 U 140:
O
0
t 150
800
t!. .1200
;
%
mm/m i n
flfel
and MDI
—
This will change the jog feed rate (0 1200mm/min) and the feed rate (0 150%). In MEMORY
modes, the feed rate override is effective, and in JOG
—pw°j and STEP py]
modes the jog feed rate is effectiys&p-
1
c
7-9
1&
I
I
/FEED HOLD
00 ro yI
Press the START button |][| to activate automatic operation by MEMORY fa] or MDI
modes.
To activate FEED HOLD during automatic operation, press the FEED HOLD button |fo]|.
II
STOP a h
-— *4
J.
I .
Press this key to stop the machine immediately when an emergency occurs. This switch is a lock-
type push-button switch, and the lock mechanism can be released by turning the knob clockwise. |
r NOTICE
Once this button is pressed, the following operations will be required to restart the ma¬
chine.
(D Confirm that the state of emergency has been cleared.
(D Press the CNC POWER OFF (0) button to turn the CNC power OFF.
(D Turn the knob of this button clockwise, and release the lock.
(4) Turn the CNC POWER ON (\) button to turn the CNC power ON.
(D Press the MACHINE READY button |Q], and enter the machine ready state.
illir
5
I if
II
31
7-10
;
1
$
I
l
OSIMUL-MODEg...
O HEAD2-MODE g...
___
11Operation mode selection (MODE 1)
These are the keys used to select the operation mode for program running, MDI running or program
editing. Light the LED lamp by pressing the key. The screen can be changed to that for the HEAD1
and for HEAD2 with this key.
O HEADI-MODE g Single operation of HEAD1 side
Main and back side simultaneous operation
Single operation of HEAD2 side

I
V
):
i
& i
In the HEAD1 |gg| and SIMUL modes, the MDI, EDIT, MEMORY, OFFSET, DGN. PA¬
RAMETER operations of the HEAD1 side can be carried out. 1:
In the HEAD2 grande, the MDI, EDIT, MEMORY, OFFSET, DGN. PARAMETER operations
of the HEAD2 side can be carried out.
.
:: ACAUTiON
• The selection position display lamp is on the upper left of each key. If the mode lamp
selected by this switch flashes during AUTO operation, the operation will be maintained
even if this key is changed. When restarting after a stop, however, the machine will run in
the operation mode selected at the start. Pay attention to the mode selection by this key.
!
§
-
i
These keys are used to select the machine's operation method.
Light the LED lamp by pressing the key.
V'-
O Edit mode (EDIT) g
This mode is selected to edit a program.
1 O Memory mode (MEMORY) pj]
I! This mode is selected to operate the machine by program stored in memory.
Hi; O MDI mode (MDI) g 1
if This mode is selected to input and execute NC commands with the data input keys on the NC
I
operation panel.
I O Macro mode (MACRO) g

I This is selected to operate STAR’S custom functions.
..
;• ;
7-11
;J2,|1m
i
l
r
O Jog mode (JOG)fg |
This mode is selected when the X, Y, Zl, A, B, E or Z2-axis is to be moved with JOG feed, or to
I
open and close the main collet or sub collet.
O Step mode (STEP) py]

This mode is selected when the X, Y, Zl, A, B, E or Z2-axis is to be moved in 0.001 mm
! increments.
<0 Zero return mode (ZERO RETURN)

This mode is selected when each axis is to be manually returned to the reference point
i NOTICE ii
t ® All of the servo motors usedfor this machine use absolute pulse encoders. Thus, the
program can be started even when reference point return is not completed. i
®
Reference point return cannot be executed if there is an alarm displayed on the screen.
i
keys
1
Light the LED lamp by pressing the key to select the operation key.
Q WORK LAMP
This key is used to turn the work lamp inside the machine ON or OFF.
NOTICE
If the lamp does not light even when this key is pressed, the following can be considered:
® Lamp trouble. —*ÿ
Contact the maintenance personnel or the maker.
® Wire breakage in lamp cable. Contact the maker. I
® Trip of circuit protector QF014 or QF015.
the maker.
-* Contact the maintenance personnel or
1
f
f
i OAIR CUT jrÿj
This key is pressed to carry out dry ran.
:ÿ
.
I M
I
7-12
OAUTO CUT OFF mode g p
r ACAUTION
• When executing this mode, set material diameter, spindle speed and cut-off tool width
on the machining data setting screen beforehand. Refer to section 7-16.
! This mode is used when a sequence of cutting-off operation of material end face is executed, (cut¬
off processing function) Setting on the machining data setting screen is needed beforehand.
(1) Set the cut-off position of material to the right of the cut-off tool tip
(2) Press macro key to light it up.
jg
'
(3) Press cut-off mode key to light it up.

(4) Press SIMUL g of MODE 1.
(5) Press start button jf~jp|, the following operation will start in order.
(X1 Selects G99 mode, M25 command (feed per revolution, coolant ON)
(2) Selects T100 (selects cut-off tool)
(3) T100 positioning p GOO X [#531 + 1.0];
#531 : material dia.
Set material dia. on the machining data screen beforehand.
_ Refer to the section 7-16.
(4) M10 command (main collet close)
;
(5) Main spindle forward p M3 S#529
rotation #529 : spindle speed
Set spindle speed on the machining data screen beforehand.
Refer to the section 7-16.
© Cutting off p G01 X-#528 F0.02 ; iI
#528 : cut-off tool width
Set cut-off tool width on the machining data screen beforehand.
_ Refer to the section 7-16.
CD M26 command (coolant OFF) :
(D Main spindle stop
(9) Ml 1 command (main collet open)
(6) After cut-off processing, alarm message will be displayed and cut-off key ||gj will be turned
off.
[3012 PROGRAM END - RESET ON]
Press reset key |# j to release the alarm.
7-13
V;
f
OINITIAL POSITION mode gjl
I
I
• When executing this mode, pay attention not to collide each tools due to all the axes
movement for positioning.
This mode is used to position the Zl-axis to the machining zero point, and X-axis to the cut-off
end position.
At the same time the other axes (Y, A, B, E and Z2) position to the reference point.
To execute this mode, press START button jmi after pressing MACRO key to be lit up and
1 selecting this mode.
Note, the max. stroke of Zl-axis must be set on the machining data screen with the Zl-AXIS
STROKE CHECK mode or MDI mode beforehand. Also the other data of the machining data
screen must be set.
OZ1-AXIS STROKE CHECK mode [g]
This mode is used to set the max. Zl-axis stroke of the program to be executed.
Display the program to be executed after lightening the MEMORY |p]j and the AIR CUT p~|
by pressing those keys, select this mode, and then press the START button |jJ . One cycle of
the program will be executed, and the max. Zl-axis stroke will be set on the machining data
screen. This setting value is required for the INITIAL POSITION mode.
O AUTO POWER OFF gj<Option> I
l
When this key is ON, the main power will be turned OFF if the machine stops due to
s machine fault or absence of barstock, etc.

OTORQUE LIMIT g]
!
:
The servo axis torque limiter is enabled (turned ON) when this key pgj is ON. If a current larger
than the limit data on the servo monitor screen flows due to an interference, etc., servo alarm
l 411 will occur.
I The state can be reset with the RESET j # j, but turn the power OFF, remove the cause, and then
turn the main power (main breaker) ON again.
1i During normal machining, set this key OFF.
If this key is turned ON, the rapid traverse override will be automatically set to 25% or less (1%,
I
5%, 25% are valid, 100% is clamped to 25%), and the cutting feed override will be automati¬
i
cally set to 70% or less (0 to 70% is valid, 80 to 150% is clamped to 70%).
The feed override 100% ON command (M88) will be invalidated.
! OOPTXONAL STOP ra
f
If the OPTIONAL STOP key fWj is ON, the machine will temporarily stop at the block where
the M01 code in the program is executed. Press the START button to resume operation.
This function is valid for both the HEAD1 and HEAD2 programs.
:
!
7-14 ||
:
i
I
OHEAD1 side BLOCK SKIP Q
When the HEAD1 side BLOCK SKIP key jFjÿj is ON, the blocks containing a slash code (/) at
the head of the block in the HEAD1 side program will not be executed. The block skip function
will not apply to the blocks that contain a slash code between M80 and M81. I
O ONE CYCLE fp]
When the ONE CYCLE key [Q] is ON, the machine will stop temporarily at the block where :
the M20 code in the program is executed. Press the START button Iffll to resume operation.
O SINGLE BLOCK f5]
When the SINGLE BLOCK key jjc7|
is ON and the START button |~|]i is pressed, the program
will be executed in block units. If the SINGLE BLOCK key is turned ON during continuous
operation, the block currently being executed will be completed, and the next block will not be
executed. To return to continuous operation, turn this key OFF and press the START button.
l
I
l
f
I
I ,
i
*
::
:
I:;
.
7-15
\
|
1
'
!
DIRECTION selection
r DIRECTiON- 1
These keys are used to select the movement direction of each axis when carrying outstep feed, jog
feed or manual reference point return.
\§ The axis moves by pressing the AXIS DIRECTION key after selecting the mode of MODE 2.
To execute the manual reference point return, press the key with the LED lamps once.
To execute the manual reference point return of A-axis execute X-axis reference point return, to
l execute B or E-axis execute Y-axis reference point return beforehand.
If the axis does not perform the reference point return, change MODE 2 to JOG once then
1 select ZERO RETURN |wl] mode and then press the key with the LED lamp once again.
In case the positioning of the axis is commanded after executing the A or B-axis reference point
return, tool select must be commanded beforehand. I
! II
SPINDLE ON / OFF gg jgg I
These keys are used to start ( ) or stop ( ) the main spindle.
Note that the speed and rotation direction must be commanded beforehand.
TOOLS OFF /AUTO g] Q

If POWER TOOLS OFF (|ÿ|) is turned ON while a power tool is rotating with the M36 or M37
command, the tool rotation motor will stop. If POWER TOOLS AUTO ( pT| ) is turned ON, the
tool rotation motor will rotate.
If the START button j[|J is pressed while this key is OFF, following message will be displayed,
and the operation will not start.
1 2080 POWER TOOLS AUTO KEY IS OFF |
Turn this key ON and press the START button jffli again to start operation.
The power tool servo will turn OFF three seconds after the OFF key is pressed. J
7-16 !
1
OTURRET ADVANCE / RETRACT g)] jjg|
These keys are valid in the MACRO mode. f
Use these keys to advance the turret to the Y-axis absolute position 0 or to retract j(g)| to the
jj|Fÿ
Y-axis reference point position.
TURRET ADVANCE jjg] key is valid when E-axis is in minus position and X and Z2-axes are
at the reference position.
If the TURRET ADVANCE [j|Fj] key is pressed when these axes are not in those positions,
following message will be displayed.
1 1124 E POSITION IS WRQNG~]
[~1125 X OR Z2 POSITION IS WRONG j
OTURRET CW / CCW jgj g
—
These keys are valid in the MACRO mode.
Use these keys to rotate the turret in the forward |gj direction (ex., T1100 -*•T1200), or in the
reverse g]direction ex., T1200 T1100).
When this key is pressed, the Y-axis will retract to the reference point position, and the turret
will index.
These keys are valid when E- axis is in the position of 0 or minus direction. If this TURRET CW
/ CCW [Q| [g] key is pressed when E-axis is not in this area follwoing message will be dis¬
played.
1 1124 E POSITION IS WRQNG~

COLLET OPEN / CLOSE gg|gg]
These keys are used to open or close jp>5| the main spindle collet in the STEP or JOG mode.
SPINDLE ON /OFFggfgl
These keys are used to start (|Q ) or stop ( jÿ| ) the sub spindle. Note that the speed and rotation
direction must be commanded beforehand.
COLLET OPEN / CLOSE ggj]

These keys are used to open |ÿj| or close the sub spindle collet in the STEP or JOG mode.
7-17
|
I
?
keys
<C>HEAD2 side BLOCK SKIP gj
When the HEAD2 side BLOCK SKIP key [j5ÿ is ON, the blocks containing a slash code (/) at
the head of the block in the HEAD2 side program will not be executed. The block skip function
tfflt
will not apply to the blocks contain a slash code between M80 and M81.
|
1
OTURRET CONTROL m
When using the turret (except the E-axis) on the HEAD1 side, the TURRET CONTROL key
I pQ?| is turned OFF, and when using the turret on the HEAD2 side, the TURRET CONTROL key '
is turned ON. Either press this key, or command Ml 31 (OFF) or Ml 32 (ON) in the together with
j: HEAD1 and HEAD2 program.
The key function is invalid when MEMORY mode |Q| is selected.
key _ i
The key function is invalid when MEMORY fo] mode is selected.
*
1 s
I:
7-18
'
I
:
7-3 Explanation of CMC operation panel .
o O
00S00I3I]
S@§00§@
POWER
0000 ID13ID
ED] 0000000
I 00SB0SB
i
mi llllfIfiH ID
I @n0n m
( adopdo | aLJ0u 0
o
CNC Power ON / OFF buttons Soft keys

i
(CNC Operation panel]
[0000000
|
0000 000 .
:
Address/data keys
0000 000
-<
1
-0000 000 H
.0000 0B0- Cancel key
Shift key
|
!
:
smm €> — Input key

Function keys -<
mas
0p]0m |GSf~* etp key
Page keys
10U0U
*s
V
kh
Program edit keys
eset key
Cursor keys
7-19
! [I
5
;
:ÿ
i!
:
'
i
.
I
}
.
/ data keys
These keys are used to write all the alphabetic characters and numerical values, including the MDI
commands, tool offset amount, settings and parameters.
liFynctiori keys
These keys are used to select functions related to displays and writing. There are eight positions,
and each respective function will be activated when the key is pressed.
HI : Position key
This key is used to display the current position of each axis.
4 g : Program key
In the EDIT mode, this key is used to edit and display the program. In the MDI
mode, this is used to input and display the MDI data, and during MEMORY
operation, this key is used to display the program or command values being
;
executed.
g : Offset key-ÿ"
This key is used to set or display the offset amount, macro variable and setting
1 parameters, etc.
: Custom key
This key displays the STAR original screen.
4
© : System key
:
This key is used to display the status of the input/output signal or to display
and write the parameters.
© : Message key
This key is used to display the alarms or operator messages. I
© : Not used
s
'
'
7-20 I?
..
key |T] 1
When inputting characters on the lower right of the address/data keys, press this SHIFT key first.
BCaocel key | # j.
I This key is used when characters or numerals input in the key input buffer (lower left of screen) are
to be deleted.
V
key [£>]
This key is used to input the parameters and offset, etc.
>:
editing keys
I These keys are used to edit the program stored in the memory.
I : s : Delete key
This key is used to delete the data in memory.
: Insert key
This key is used to insert data into memory.
0 : Alter key
This key is used to alter the data in memory.
key g
This key is used to confirm the alarm information, operation methods and parameter number con¬
tents, etc.
key
This key is used to reset the NC. The following operations will be executed when the RESET key
| is pressed.
• Movement command cancel
• Buffer clear
( • Alarm release if cause has been removed
5:
• Auxiliary function cancel
• G code reset (Refer to the G code table on section 8-10 for details)
7-21
|
|
i
f
keys
These keys are used to move the cursor to the left, right, up or down on the CRT screen.
j j is pressed, to right when [ j is pressed, up

The cursor will move to the left when <-
:>
when | t |is pressed, and down when | i j is pressed.
key
This is used to display the next or previous page, taking the CRT screen display as one page.
j j j |
Pressing the key $ will display the previous page, and pressing the key % will display the
next page.
keys
These keys can execute various functions depending on application. The available functions will be
displayed at the extreme bottom of the CRT screen.
I : Left soft key
: This is used to return to the initial condition (condition when the function key was pressed) if a
function has been activated by another soft key.
: Right soft key
This key will display other undisplayed functions if they exist.
|i
7-22
il
i'
0 Turning the power ON and OFF
7-4
c. the power ON procedure
8 a To
I
1
M g EZ3 g
-*-* ootr
o|7
T
if S.
n Rear view of machine
1 1213 14 15*6
/ / X
/ 7 x
SB*
n( /
/
PDODOOD
ha
*
manna a
1
1 paaaaaa
m
akan
alVaLJ a
| aannaooooooffl j
m
__ __ obdbdbo
oooaocooa b o
d
a
WJ,
o
ODomomD P :
m i
a # ;
1 Diagram of machine operation panel
I» I'
I
1 7-23
l 4
i
I:
:
(1) Turn the factory side power ON.

f
(2) Turn the main power (main breaker) © ON ( $ ).
The power display lamp © (opaque) will light.
A NOTICE
If the power display lamp does not light when the main breaker is ON ( f the following
can be considered:
• Thefactory side power is not ON ( ). J %
it
* Trip of breaker QF010, QF014 QF016. -*ÿ
Contact the maintenance personnel or the
maker. if
3
® Lamp trouble. Contact the maker. ;
• Wire breakage in lamp cable. Contact the maker. I!

I
(3) Reset the EMERGENCY STOP button © .
(The state will be reset by turning the button clockwise and protruding it.) ft:
(4) Press the NC POWER ON ( j ) button © .
Message 1022 will display on the screen after approx. 15 sec.
(5) Press the MACHINE READY button © .
Message 1022 will go out, the hydraulic motor will turn ON, and the machine ready state
will be entered.
NOTICE
1 ®
After entering the machine ready state, confirm that the hydraulic device 's hydraulic
pressure differential pressure is 3.2 to 3.6 Mpa (33 to 37 kg/cm2), and the main pressure
is 4.9 Mpa (50 kg/cm2) at the side of the machine.
turn the power OFF, stop the machine operation and then follow the steps given 11
below.
I A WARNING
• If a machinefault or emergency state in which the power must be turned OFF occurs,
press the EMERGENCY STOP button © instead of waitingfor the machine to stop.
\
(1) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button © .
i (2) Press the NC POWER OFF button (0) © .
(3) Turn the main power (main breaker) © OFF (0 ).
The power display lamp © will turn OFF.
I Turn the factory side power OFF (0).
i (4)
!i 7-24
til
:j
is
5; i
7-5 Automatic operation il'
HMD! operation
C (1) Set the MODE key to ”MDF Q.
(2) Press MODE key HEAD1 g or HEAD2 g. i
In case of "SIMUL", operation is only in HEAD1 side.

(3) Successively press PROG j(g)]j to display the screen with "PROGRA (MDI)" in the upper
left comer. Program number "QOOOQ" will be inserted automatically.
(4) Input the MDI commands with the same operation used in normal program editing.
This includes, for example, word insertion, alteration, deletion, word search and address
search program. (Refer to section 7-6 to 7-8.)
(5) Press the START fJJ button.
|
NOTICE
® The program created mustfit on the page shown on the screen.
® A program with up to ten blocks can be created.
ACTUAL POSITION £|
OOOOO NOOOOO
(ABSOLUTE 3
TOOOO
X o . ooo TOOOO
Y o . ooo
z o . ooo PROGRAM
OOOOO :
(MDI 3
A o . ooo %
i B o . ooo
E O - ooo 1.1
3 O - ooo
z2 1
5 (ACTUAL SPEED 3F1
S1
0 IvM-'MIN
0 RPM
F2 0 Mvt/MEN S 0 TOOQC
S2 0 RPM MDI 00:00:00 HEAD1
V ABS R£L ALL PRGRM MDI NEXT COPRT)
1
1
I
7-25 I
F operation
( 1) Press the MODE key MEMORY fp].
(2) Press the PROG j"jÿ)|.
(3) Search for the program to be displayed on the HEAD1 side or HEAD2 side.
(4) Press the MODE key HEAD1 gg],
SIMUL gg)
or HEAD2 Q.
Take note to the HEAD2 side program number when "SIMUL" is selected.
•HEAD1 : Single operation of HEAD1 side F:
•SIMUL : Simultaneous operation of HEAD1 and HEAD2
* HEAD2 : Single operation of HEAD2 side
! ACAUTION ;
!ÿ ® When SIMUL |gg| is selected check whether the execution program number is on the 8
I
:
HEAD1 or HEAD2 side.
: If
II
(5) Press the START UJ button.
O Changing the program screen display
(1) When the PROG jf3>)| key is pressed, screen © will change to screen (3) .
(2) When the soft key [PRGRM] is pressed, screen © will change to screen (D .
Screen ©
ACTUAL POSITION
i OOOOO NOOOOO
(ABSOLUTE )
o . ooo TOOOO
X TQOOO
Y o . ooo
Zi o . ooo PROGRAM
OOOOO :
A o . ooo N1
G99:
B o . ooo M03S500:
Mil:
E o . ooo GOOZOTO:
M200:
Z2 o . ooo M20:
MIO:
(ACTUAL SPEED 3F1 0 MM/MfN T 100:
S1 0 RPM
F2 0 VM/MIN S 0 T000C
S2 O RPM STRT *** «*
-
00:00 00 HEAD1
A8S REL ALL PRSÿM CHECK NEXT COPRT )
7-26
$!
I
Screen (D I
1
I
PROGRAM
CHEAD1 )
00000 NOOOOO
1HEAD2 3
00000 N0Q0QI i
30000 : OQOOO : I
IS
If
1e
1i';
if
Isfi
&
Ii
mI
i'
S 0 TQOGC
STRT MTN « V '% 00:00:00 HEAD1
PRGRM CHECK NEXT COPRT J + ;
1
;f
;
1
|
ifi
;
i
Screen (D I
i
i I
PROGRAM CHECK 0000 NOOOOO 00000 NOOOOC &
01234 : 01234 :
ill i
f
f 12
(RELATIVE) {ABSOLUTE) (DiST TO GO) [RELAX EVE 3 [ABSOLUTE) (DIST TO GO)
Jt 0.000 X1 0.000 X1 0.000 V2 0.000 Y2 0.000 Y2 0.000 if
iV1 0.000 Z1 0.000 Z1 0.000 W2 Z2 Z2 if:
M 0.000 A1 0.000 A1 0.000
o;ooo
E2 £1 E2 i:
71 0.000 Y1 0.000 Y 1 B2 B2 B2
31 0.000 Bt 0.000 B1 0.000 U2 X2 X2
it 0.000 C1 0.000 Cl 0.000 :
(MODAL) [MODAL 3
301 G98 G25 G67 M 304 G01 G98 G25 G67 M 301
397 G21 G22 G54 G97 G21 G22 G54
369 G40 G8Q Gl8 G69 G40 G80 G18 If;
400 CACT.F)
T
4Q0!YM/MSN
0
F 400 CACT.F)
T
40OA4A5IN
i
3 2000 [ACT . S 3 2000RPM S 1000 (ACT . S ) 1000RPM
>„ S 0 TOOOC
k I
MEM STRT * * * V *$ 00:00:00 HEAD1 1If
PRGRM Q-ECK NEXT COPRT ) i
1
if c
1 1
i
i i;
y; :f
if
V
If
4
1
I f
f 7-27
I *
a
I
•M
n 1
1
I
s if
!
i>
:
:
s
lu
i
I1 7-6 Search
Program number search
<>Method 1
(1) Press the MODE key MEMORY O or EDIT pTj.
(2) Press the PROG j(1>)j key.
(3) Press address jo].
(4) Type in the program number to be searched.
:
t (5) Press the CURSOR [T| key.
(6) After searching, the program number searched for will display on the upper right of the
CRT screen.
..
1
O Method 2
(1) Press the MODE key MEMORY |o|or EDIT fj].
(2). Press the PROG g key.
(3) Press address [o].
(4) Press the CURSOR j""i j key.
!
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until the required program is displayed.
:
OMethod 3
(1) Press the MODE key MEMORY [ÿ)
or EDIT Q
(2) Press the PROG jjTjjj key.
(3) Type in the program number to be searched.
(4) Press the soft key [O SRH].
SUSequence number search

(1) Press the MODE key MEMORY fp] or EDIT fj].
(2) Press the PROG [|j>))j key.
(3) Press address [hf|.
(4) Type in the sequence number to be searched.
(5) Press the CURSOR.| \ j key, or press the soft key [SRH +] or [SRH -].
7-28
|
(2)
(3)
search method
O Scanning method
(1) Press the MODE key "EDIT"
When the CURSOR keys t
When the PAGE or

j ..
1i
1 |or j" j| j are pressed, the cursor will move.
-»
If the key is held down, the cursor will move continuously.

j j key is pressed, the page will change.
If the key is held down, the page will change continuously.
O Word search method

j.
N26GQ1 X7.6 W0.4 F0.01 ;
N27 X6.0 ; :
N28 G04 U0.1 ;

1
I
| j
Pressing the CURSOR i key after input of ful fol Mill will move the cursor beneath
address U of word UO.1. :
:
m.
;
I
::
'
j': ;
7-29
;
:
5
3 7-7 Program input (Registering into memory)
!:
Input the program after turning the operation panel MEMORY INPUT key ON (|).
When input the program has been completed, turn the MEMORY INPUT key OFF (©)ÿ
NOTICE
IP
®
If a program number that is the same as a registered program number is registered, an II
alarm will occur.
t ® An alarm will occur if the number of registered programs on the HEAD1 side and
HEAD2 side exceeds 63.
program into memory with MDI

II (1) Press the MODE key ’’EDIT"
(2) Press the MODE key HEAD1 Q, QorHEAD2g|.
SIMUL
If SIMUL is selected, the program will be registered in the HEAD1 side. 1
(3) Press the PROG g. 1
(4) Press O, program number, INSERT j -|>| , l EOB land INSERT [ »f>|.
I The program number will be registered with the above steps. Type in the program word by
word, and register into the memory.
: Address 1 1 Data I I Address I 1 Data l INSERT [wfr]
II
program into memory from external I/O device
I Always turn the main power (main breaker) OFF (©) before connecting or disconnecting the
external I/O device connector to/from the RS-232C port (refer to the diagram of the machine opera¬
tion panel on section 7-1.)
3
i
(1) Press the MODE key "EDIT” £5}
(2) Press the PROG gjj. , >
(3) Press the MODE key HEAD1 ||g|, SIMUL or HEAD2 1|||).
?! If SIMUL is selected, the program will be registered in the HEAD1 side.
(4) Press the soft key [OPRT1.
(5) Press the right end soft key [> ] and the soft key [READ].
(6) Transfer the data from the external I/O device.
(7) Press the soft key [EXEC].
The program number will be registered with the above steps.
4
1
1 7-30
\
7-8 Program edit
Turn the operation panel's MEMORY INPUT key ON |
( ) before editing the program.
When edit the program has been completed, turn the MEMORY INPUT key OFF (O).
MDI operation, programs can be registered into the memory and programs
I
already registered in the memory can be edited.
(1) Set the MODE key to "EDIT" |j0.
(2) Press PROG
S (3) Search for the word to be changed.

• By scanning method
1:
' ' • By word search method
(4) Edit the program, such as changing, inserting or deleting words. ,
• Word insert
c; © Search or scan for the word just before the insertion.
(D Input the address and data.
T © Press INSRT[ÿ| O'
|
• Word change
'V. © Search or scan for the word to be changed.
3 © Input the address and data.
© Press ALTER [g.
r
'
- • Delete
s;. a) Word delete
© Search or scan for the word to be deleted.
© Press DELET [jjjTj. I
b) Deletion to EOB
N01 M03 S1000 ;
Pressing 1eOB| and DELET | |in sequence at the currently searched word
"N01” will delete everything to EOB and place the cursor beneath N in the next i
block.
f,
7-31
ii
5
)
\r
c) Deletion of several blocks

N01 MO 3 S1000 ;
NQ2 Mil ;
N03 GOO ZO ;
N04 M20 ;
NOB GOO Z-0.2 ;
The following command will delete all the blocks from the currently searched word
t
"N02" to the specified sequence number.
Key in address [Nj [O] and [4] then press DELET j j. Blocks NQ2, N03 and N04
will be deleted and the cursor will move to NOS.
d) Deletion of a single program

(D Set the MODE key to "EDIT" gTj.
® Press PROG g
(D Press address [oj.
@ Key in the program number.
(D Press DELET j |to delete the program whose number was selected in step.
i I
e) Deletion of all programs
I CD Press the MODE key to "EDIT" pjT).

(D Press either MAIN jgjgj, SIMUL|ÿ|or BACK |g]g|' of the MODE key.
In case of "SIMUL", deletion will be to the main side.
!
(3) Press PROG g.
I (4) Press address fol .
i;
I
(D Keyin Q [9] [9] [g ®.
(D Press DELET| [ to delete all currently recorded programs.
j
; 1
3
I
7-32
if
I;
!
I
II
m 7-9 Program output (Punch out)
Turn the MEMORY INPUT key on the operation panel to ON |( ) and then output the program.
Always turn the main power (main breaker) OFF (©) before connecting or disconnecting the exter¬
nal I/O unit connector to the RS-232C port (refer to Fig. 7-1 machine operation panel diagram).
When output of the program has been completed, turn the MEMORY INPUT key OFF (©)-
H Punch out a program registered in memory.

(1) Press MOPE key ’’EDIT" fÿT).
'
(2) Press either MAIN |@jg| , SIMUL or BACK of the MODE key.
1 In case of "SIMUL", punch out will be from the HEAD1 side.

.
if (3) Press PROG [jjf|.
(4) Press address [o] .
(5) Key in the program number to be output.
(6) Press soft key right end ] and soft key [PUNCH].
(7) Press soft key [EXEC].

i
Punch out of all programs

This procedure will punch out all programs registered in memory.
1 (1) Press MODE key "EDIT"
(2) Press either MAIN ||jg] , SIMUL or BACK of the MODE key.
i
In case of "SIMUL", punch out will be from the HEAD1 side.
it
1 (3) Press PROG H.
i
i
(4)
(5)
Press address
Key in
[oj .
Q ® [9] SHU.
Y,;
(6) Press soft key right end [ÿ ] and soft key [PUNCH].
L.
I.5
3
v!
7-33
I
fi
ii
}
Ii 7-10 Position display screen
There are three screens for displaying the position of the tool currently selected. These can be selected
with the soft keys. (When using the inch specifications, the data display will be
I (1) Press the POS jfPFlj key .
i
(2) Soft key [ABS], [REL] or [ALL] can be pressed.
When soft key [ABS] is pressed, the position of each axis will be displayed with the work
coordinate system (ABSOLUTE).
ACTVAL POSITION
(ABSOLUTE )
:
X o . ooo TOOOO
Y o . ooo TOOOO
i Zi o . ooo Hi O - OOO
A o . ooo H2 O . OOO
B o . ooo (S) (SACT)
St o o
E o - ooo s2 o o
z2 o . ooo i
S 0 T000C
MEM 00:00:00 HEAD1 *1
ABS REL ALL (OPRT)
!
When soft key [REL] is pressed, the position of each axis will be displayed with the relative coordi¬
nate system (RELATIVE).
I; ACTVAL POSITION
(RELATIVE)
u o . OOO TOOOO
V O . OOO TOOOO
; Wi O . OOO c t 0. ooo
: A 0.000 C2 o . ooo
B o . ooo (S) (SACT) 1
St o o
I.1 E o . ooo s2 o o
w2 o . ooo
i MEM
S0
00:00:00
TQOOC
HEAD)
ABS REL ALL (OPRT)
7-34
The relative coordinate system is the coordinate system that can be set per each tool.
The relative coordinate system is set with the following steps.
(D Press the soft key [REL], and display the relative coordinate system (RELATIVE).
(D Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
(D To input 0, press the soft key [ORIGIN], select an axis with soft key [U], [V] or [W], and
then press soft key [EXEC].
,
When soft key [ALL] is pressed, the work coordinate system position for each axis will be displayed.
\CTUAL POSITION
[RELATIVE] (ABSOLUTE ) (RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE)
u 0.000 X 0.000 E 0.000 E 0.000
V 0.000 Y 0.000 W2 0.000 22 0.000
C2 0.000
: W1
A
0.000
0.000
Z
A
0.000
0.000
0.000
H2 0.000
I
B 0.000 B
HI 0.000 C1 0.000
(MACHINE) (D1ST TO GO) (MACHINE) (D1ST TO GO)
X 0.000 X 0.000 E 0.000 E 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Z2 0.000 22 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000 C2 0.000 C2 0.000
A 0.000 A 0.000
B 0.000 B 0.000
: Cl 0.000 C1 0.000
(ACTUAL SPEED )F1: 0 Mvi/MIN (ACTUAL SPEED )F2: 0 ivM/MlN

S1 : 0 RPM S2 : 0 RPM
5
11 VEM «...
S
00:00:00
0 TQQOC
HEAD1
:
;
ABS REL ALL (OPRT)
1
(a) Position with work coordinate system (ABSOLUTE)
£
(b) Position with machine coordinate system (MACHINE)
(c) Remaining distance (DISTANCE TO GO)
(d) Position with relative coordinate system (RELATIVE)
$
t
:ÿ
ii
i
|
i
m
Mi
II 7-35
I
;
1
: !
7-11 Offset input
of HEAD1 side X, Z and Y axes
:
(1) Press MODE key HEAD1 or SIMUL 1|| g.
(2) Press OFFSET SETTING g.
(3) Press soft key [(OPRT)].
(4) Move the cursor to the desired offset number.
(5) Key in the data to be input with the data key.
(6) Press soft key [INPUT] to write absolute values.
Press soft key [+ INPUT] to write incremental values.
(7) —
Repeat steps (3) (6) above to write all offset amounts for the required tools.
O Offset screen I
I
ACTUAL POSITION
OOOOO NOOOOO
(ABSOLUTE 3
o . ooo TOOOO
X TOOOO
Y o . ooo
i Zi o .ooo OFFSET
NO. X Y 2 R 7
A o . ooo 01
02
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000 0
0.000 0
B o . ooo 03
04
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000 0
0.000 0
E o . ooo 05
06
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000 O
0.000 0
z2 o . ooo 07
09
09
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0
0
0
(ACTUAL SPEED )F 1 0 MMAUN 10 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
S1 0 RPM
F2 0 S 0 TOOOC
S2 0 RPM WOi **• 00:00:00 J-EAD1
ABS REL ALL OFFSET SET IMG (OPRT }
NOTICE
• When using the inch specifications, the data display will be 0.0000.
-I
;
|!
I
5
'
,i 7-36
,
I
£
of HEAD2 side Y, Z2 and E axes ;
(1) Press the MODE key HEAD2 I

Steps (2) to (7) are the same as for inputting the HEAD1 side offset.
O Offset screen i
I
vCTUAL POSITION
OOOOO NOOOOO
(ABSOLUTE ) .
TOOOO
X O . OOO TOOOO
T:;; Y O . OOO
z O . OOO OFFSET
NO.
0!
Y
0.000
Z
0.000
E
0.000
R
0.000 0
T
A O . OOO 02 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
03 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
B O'. OOO 04 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
05 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
E O . OOO
Z2
{ACTUAL SPEED FI
S'
0.000
0
0
M4/MIN
RFM
06
07
08
09
10
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0-000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0-000 0
0.000 0
0.000 0
0.000 0
0.000 0
I
F2 0 SYM/MIN S 0 TOOOC
S2 0 RPM MDI «*«
00:00:00 HEADS
ABS REL ALL OFFSET SETJNG (OPRT 3 4
NOTICE
• When using the inch specifications, the data display will be EJ.OOQO.
m
1
s
I
i
n
V
.T
0
s:
m
1
it
m
::
s
si,
1
7-37
I
.
'
7-12 Menu function

Display the menu screen with the following procedure.
(1) Press the MODE key HEAD1 [jjjgj or SIMUL |gg|.
(2) Press the CUSTOM key g.
The following menu screen will display.
1 NOTICE
®
If the menu screen is not displayed, press the soft key [MENU].
:
MENU W WALTER* ~ * WRONG**

NO - I TEMS
COUNTER ON
J_ OPT I ON COUNTER
*AI R CUT/DRY RUN*
2 OFFSET t GEOMETRY >
3 MACH INI NO DATA PRESET 99999
<4. KEEP RELAY
COUNT OOOOO
5 SERVO MONITOR
;
© I N FORMAT I ON RUNNING TIME QOQOH OOM 00. OS
~7 MAINTENANCE TIMER * ALTER-* P.C(T)~* DATA(Q)- INPUT-* INSERT
S 0 T000C
VDI **** *** 00:00:00 HEAD1
COUNT COUNT
ON OFF
• To call a desired screen from the items listed on this screen, press the numeric value of the
ft
item No. and INPUT| £> |.
• To return to the menu screen, press the soft key [MENU].
|
I a
;
;;
?'
7-38
|!;j
7-13 Counter fynction

The total number of machined parts will be counted with the "M20" command on the HEAD1 side :
while the program is running and will display on the screen. If the required number of parts is set with
PRESET, the machine will stop when the COUNT value reaches the set value.
j
1 (1) The counter will display on the right side of the menu screen.
MENU * *ALTER* * *WRONG*
I NO - I TEMS
COUNTER ON
J_ OPT I ON COUNTER
*A I R CUT/DRY RUN*
2 OFFSET < GEOMETRY >
3 MACH I N I NG DATA PRESET 99999
I At KEEP RELAY
COUNT OOOOO
5 SERVO MON I TOR
© I N FORMA T I ON RUNNING TIME 0000H OOM 00. OS
~7 MAINTENANCE TIMER * ALTER-* P.C<T>-» DATA(O)-* INPUT- INSERT
S 0 T000C
MDI *»»» 00:00:00 HEAD?
I
COUNT COUNT
ON OFF
(2) Press ALTER |j>] .

"*ALTER*" will be displayed in field and each numeric value can then be changed.
(3) j
To change the preset value, press [p] I DATA; INPUT j £> . The word PRESET will start 1
to flash.
V
To change the count value, press fC] iDATA! INPUT | £>|. The word COUNT will start
to flash.
(4) Press INSRTpg>|.
"*ALTER*" will disappear and PRESET and COUNT will stop flashing. Any number of
desired changes can be made before pressing INSRT »|> . j j
8
i
7-39
1
I
-
%
(5) The COUNTER ON or COUNTER OFF display is selected with the soft key [ON] or
[OFF].
COUNTER ON Counts with the count command (M20).
COUNTER OFF Does not count with the count command (M20).
NOTICE
® The numeric input will he ignored in the following cases.
When addresses other than P or C are input.
——
When the PRESET input value is other than 2 99999.
When the COUNT input value is other than 0 99997.
I
. • Always input at value that is two or more higher than the COUNT input valuefor the I
PRESET input value.
I * If the PRESET value is the [COUNT+1] value when the numeric value is changed,
"*WRONG*n will be displayed on the top of the screen to indicate a mistake in the
input. The characters "COUNTER" will flicker at this time, but can be released by
inputting the correct numeric value (PRESET value >[COUNT +1/ value).
I
• If the program is started in the state where the PRESET value [COUNT + 1] value,
or if the PRESET value-COUNT value during program operation, the program will
execute a one cycle stop (M20), and enter the count up state.
|
O State and canceling of count op

At the count up state, the program will stop with one cycle (M20), and the machine will enter the
feed hold state and light the warning light (option).
The CRT screen will change to the alarm screen, and the operator message ”2070 COUNT UP"
will be displayed.
The characters "COUNTER" will flicker on the counter screen.
To cancel the count up state, change to the PRESET value or COUNT value, and then press the
:>
START button [fTii or RESET j # j key.
|
:
7-40
i
.V
run hour display function
The cumulative running time during the automatic operation will be displayed. (The running time is
displayed on the lower section of the count display screen.)
MENU * * ALTER* * »WRONG*

f
I
NO . I TEMS
COUNTER ON
1 JL OPT I ON COUNTER
2 OFFSET ( GEOMETRY 5
* Al R CUT/DRY RUN*
3 MACH INI NO DATA PRESET 99999

i KEEP RELAY
:I COUNT OOOOO
1 5 SERVO MON I TOR
© I N FORMAT I ON RUNNING TIME 0000H QQM 00. OS
v
1 ~7 MAINTENANCE TIMER •ALTER-* P.C(T)— DATA(O)— INPUT- INSERT
5
|j MD1 ****
S
00:00:00
0 TQ00C
HEA01
COUNT COUNT
ON OFF L
The running time display is reset with the following steps.

(1) Stop the automatic operation. (Single block, one cycle stop, etc.)
t
(2) Press the ALTER |~§Tj key.
"*ALTER*" will be displayed on the upper left of the screen.
(3) Press [T] [Oj INPUT
|
(4) Press the INSRT j *|>| key.
i
The words "*ALTER*" will disappear. I:
i ;
1
mm
ii
7-41
Y
i
7-14 Star simple tool life management <Option>
The 30 piece counter will be counted with the "M20" command on the HEAD1 side while the program
is running and will display on the screen. If the required number of parts is set with PRESET, the
machine will stop when the COUNT value reaches the set value.
(1) j
Pressing [I] INPUT j *> on the menu screen will display the screen shown in the diagram
| below.
-WRONG- — COUNT UF>-

COUNTER ON
*P.C. B. AtN.X.ZJ —OAT A [ NO . 3 I NPUT
NO . PRESET COUNT NO . PRESET COUNT
7 ©999© ooooo 16 99999 ooooo
3 ©99©© ooooo 99999 ooooo
3 9999© ooooo 18 99999 ooooo
4- 9999© ooooo 1© 99999 ooooo
5 ©9999 ooooo 20 ©©99© ooooo
S ©999© ooooo 21 ©©©©© ooooo
~7 9999© ooooo 22 99999 ooooo
S 99999 ooooo 23 99999 ooooo
© 99©9© ooooo 24 ©99©© ooooo
1O ©99©© ooooo 25 9©©9© ooooo
11 99999 ooooo 2© 999©© ooooo
12 99©9© ooooo 27 9©99© ooooo
13 ©9©9©
©999©
ooooo
ooooo
23
2©
©9©©©
©999©
ooooo
ooooo
I
1
15 9999© ooooo 30 ©99©© ooooo
S 0 TOOOC
MDI **** 00:00:00 HEAD1
COUNT COUNT MENU v
0! i OFF
f
1
(2) Press Qsj] 1 Counter NO. (1—30)1 INPUT gj. |
:
An "~+" will be displayed on the left of the selected counter number to indicate the counter
that can be changed. It can also be moved by CURSOR j t |or | i |.
(3) To change the preset value, press [Fj I DATA 1 INPUT j £> . j
8
To change the count value, press [c] iDATAl INPUT [ £> j .
To set every preset value to some value, press [B] I DATA j INPUT|{> . j
1
5
O'
7-42
1
. ,1
NOTICE
• If there is a need to keep a counter between 1 — 30from counting, press DiH
i Counter No. l—30] INPUT jj>J .
II (Count No. will be disappeared.)
—
To enable it to count again, press [Zj I Counter No. I 30 } INPUT| £> j .
I
1
(Count No. will be displayed.)
® Numeric value input in the following cases will be ignored.

•When addresses other than N, P, C, A, X and Z are input
5:: • —
When values other than 1 30 are input to N, X or Z
®
® When count input values other than 0

——
When preset input values other than 2 99999 are input
99997 are input
® When a value other than 0 is input to A
® Always input at value that is two or more higher than the COUNT input value for the
PRESET input value.
* If the PRESET valued [COUNT+1] value when changing the numeric value,
if
"WRONG" will be displayed to indicate an input mistake.
B This condition can be released by entering the correct numeric value (PRESET value >
* [COUNT+1] value).
If the program is started in this erroneous condition (PRESET valued [COUNT+1]
1 value) or if occurs during program execution, the program will perform a one-cycle stop
i (M20) and enter the count-up status.
m • The initial preset values are all set to ''99999. "

• When usedfor the first time, clear everything.
1 (Press \X\ ® /MW [{)].)
O State and canceling of count up

At the count up state, the program will stop with one cycle (M20), and the machine will enter the
main and sub spindle stop, power tool motor stop, coolant stop, and feed hold state.
The CRT screen will change to the alarm screen, and the operator message "2085 COUNT UP
(OPTION)" will be displayed.
The characters "-COUNT UP-" will flicker on the counter screen, and "*” is displayed on the
left side of count No. that counted up.
To cancel the count up state, change to the PRESET value or COUNT value, and then press the
START button or RESET |ÿ| key.
7-43
:
!
;
i
7-15 Tool geometry offset function

The offset data can be input with automatic measurement using the tool setter or with key inputs.
Refer to the section 10-6 for the method of automatic measuring with tool setter, and section 8-
8-2 for the method of manual input.
!
How to display the screen
( 1) The following screen will display when [2j INPUT j £> j are pressed on the menu screen.
I
GEOMETRY OFFSET 1
EXECUTION MODE ; ON
i
ALL XCU) A(C) ZKW)
moo 0.000 0.000 0.000
T200 0.000 0.000 0-000
T300 0.000 0.000 0 . 000
, T400 0-000 0.000 0.000
T500 0 . 000 0.000 0.000
T600 0.000 0.000 0.000
T700 0.000 0.000 0.000
T800 0.000 0.000 0.000
I
S 0 T000C
M)I **** 00:00:00 HEAD'S
|| ADJUST SELECT EXECUT' IDISP.2 MENU
r NOTICE
• Note down the various setting data (X, A, Z) values. i
\
I
(2) The following screen will display when the soft key [ADJUST] is pressed on the screen
shown in (1) above. This screen is for automatic measuring with tool setter.
**EXECUTE** OFFSET ADJUST

*A.C. E-*D I AMETER T
X* B . D-RAD I US T4 U
DATA 1 C PO I NiT 1 ] ( A )
—> 00-000
-4
10 3 R
-
R
3 E
DAT A2 [ PO I NT 2] < B 00.000 T 1 SENSOR T
DAT A3 C PO I NIT 3] C C > = oo . ooo
DATA4 C PO I NJT -4 ] ( D ) = oo . ooo -f- A , B 1
.ÿ
WIDTH OR SENSOR ( E ) = 00.000 x-*
-V J — T
m
•+ÿ
X
V
1
:: TEST BAR D I AMETER (F)= 00-000 -A . B •
22- AX IS ADJUST ( G ) == OO . OOO

S 0 TOQOC it
:' DISP.1 D1SP.2
MDI 00:00:00 HEAD1
7-44
13
(3) The following screen will display when [DISP.2] is pressed on the screen shown in (1)
above.
If an ID No. is set with step (4) below, the tool number will change to the ID No.’s tool
number. i
GEOMETRY OFFSET 2
EXECUTION MODE : ON
Y(V) BID) ZKW) ECF5 V(V> B(D) ZKW) E(F)
T1 100 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 T 1600 0.000 0.000 0.000 o.ooc
T1200 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 T 1700 0.000 0.000 0.000 o.ooc I
;
T1300 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 T1800 0.000 0.000 0.000 0-00C
T 1 400 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
T15O0 0.000 0 . 000 0.000 0.000
S 0 T000C
Yf
* « $ * ft # 00T0:00 HEADt
'6
ADJUST : SELECT EXECUT ID NO. DISP. 1 MENU
SETiNG
NOTICE
® Note down the various setting data (Y, B, Zl, E) values. i
(4) The following screen will display when [ID NO SET] is pressed on the screen shown in
(3) above.
N".
ID No. of geometry offset 2 screen can be displayed by typing in 0 to 14 for the setting
I '
ii: data.
i
SET OR ID NO .
1 ID SETTING
! DATA
T11 0 WHEN ID NO. 00 IS USED. ID SETTING DATA=0 .,
T12 U WHEN ID NO . 31 . 32 . 33 ( TURN I NG TOOL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA =1
T13 0 WHEN ID NO. 34.35. 36 (TURNING TOODIS USED. ID SETTING DATA"2
i'S T 14 0 WHEN ID NO . 37 . 38 . 39 ( TURN I NG TGOUIS USED. ID SETTING DATA=3
T 15 0 WHEN ID NO .41 . 42 ( CROSS DR1LLHS USED. ID SETTING DATA =4
T 16 0 WHEN ID NO. 43. 44 (CROSS DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA=5
T 17 0 WHEN ID NO. 45. 46 (CROSS DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA=6
T 18 0 WHEN ID NO. 47. 48 (CROSS DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA =7
WHEN ID NO. 51 . 52. 53( FRONT DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA=8
WHEN ID NO . 54 . 55 . 56 ( FRONT DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA=9
WHEN ID NO. 57. 58. 59 (FRONT DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA=10
WHEN ID NO .61 . 62 ( FRONT DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA=1 1
WHEN ID NO. 63. 64 (FRONT DRILUIS USED. ID SETTING DATA= 12
WHEN ID NO. 65. 66 (FRONT DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DAT A= 1 3
WHEN ID NO. 67. 68 (FRONT DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA=14
S 0 T000C
$
** 00:00:00 HEAD1
OFFSET
7-45
it
i
.
- --
7-16 Machining data display function
( 1 ) Pressing [3j INPUT 1 £> [ on the menu screen will display the screen shown in th$:diagram
below.
(2) The cursor can be moved by pressing CURSOR key t or j j j"T~j. !
(3) Pressing [Data] INPUT | £> j, the data where the cursor stays will be changed'.;
MACH INI NC3 DATA
MATER I AL D I AMETER t #531 1 CA)-= 00.000 MM

'
PARTS LENGTH [ #530 KB) =0.00. OOO MM
SPINDLE SPEED [ #529 ] ( C ) = 0000.0... RPM
CUT-OFF TOOL. W I DT HC #528 3 (D) = O . OOO MTvl
QUANT I TY OF PARTS! #527 )( E ) = OOOOO RCS -

Z1 STROKE C #526 3(F) =000 . OOO MM
S 0 TOOOC
MD3 **»»
*** 00:00:00 HEAD1
!v£NU
NOTICE
• The data display for INCH specification is 0.0000 INCH.
MATERIAL DIAMETER [#531] (A) ....

The data set on this screen is required for using the AUTO CUT-OFF mode tool selection com¬
mand, or INITIAL POSITION mode, etc.
Input the material diameter.
During the AUTO CUT-OFF mode, the cut-off
tool will be positioned to the material diameter
1
;;
+1.0mm position.
PARTS LENGTH [#530] (B) For special specifications.
SPINDLE SPEED [#529] (C)
CUT-OFF TOOL WIDTH [#528] (D) ........ The material speed for the AUTO CUT-OFF mode
is input.
The cut-off tool width is input.
During the AUTO CUT-OFF mode, the cut-off
tool will move to the X position = -#528mm with
0.02mm/rev feed.
QUANTITY OF PARTS [#527] (E) For special specifications.
7-46
i
Input the max. Z 1-axis stroke.
;
Z1 Stroke [#526] (F) i
Display the program (HEAD1 side) to be executed
v, -
after lightening the MEMORY |Q| and the AIR
CUT jjrj by pressing those keys and then press the
Zl-AXIS STROKE CHECK jzTJ.
The stroke will be input after one cycle of idle op¬
eration by pressing the START button. :'
Always input this setting before executing INI¬
TIAL POSITION jg| .
%
;
III
7-47
ij
7-17 Keep relay conversational setting function

(1) Pressing [4j INPUT j £>~j on the menu screen will display the screen shown in the diagram
below. With this display it is possible to turn the keep relay conversational setting ON /
OFF. Also, it is easy to see what settings are currently effective.
1 **KEEP RELAY**
-ÿYES PROGRAM RESTART
NO ROTATE SR I NDLE AT MOO
NO EMERGENCY STOR AT NO STOCK!
NO USE SEPARATOR A
NO USE Mao AS WAT I NG CODE
NO CANCEL D I SPLAY OP MA I NT A IN T I ME Up
NO SK I R- BETWEEN M75&76 AT WORK OUT
NO PHASES SYNCHRONIZATION M©S
*
s o TOOOC
MDI 00:00:00 HEAD1
YES NO MENU
|
of keep relay
O Starting without returning to the head of the program (K02-bit 1 )
[YES] : When in SIMUL mode, the start button jfl~]i is effective no matter where start
position (cursor position) is (for both HEAD! and HEAD2 side programs).
[NO] : The start button fill will be effective only when the cursor is at the head of the pro¬
'i
gram (reset in EDIT mode), otherwise an alarm will result. This helps prevent acci¬
i dents due to inappropriate waiting commands in the program.
i:
I
O Do not stop spindle rotation with MOO (KOO-bit 2)
'
[YES] : The main and sub spindle rotation will not be stopped with MOO command. This fea¬
ture is recommended for use when small diameter material are machined, the main and
sub spindle continues to rotate while materials are changed.
[NO] : MOO will stop the main and sub spindle.
O Emergency stop when out of bar magazine (KOO-bit 3) i

[YES] : Emergency stop will be applied when the automatic barfeeder runs out of material.
[NO] : The operation will wait for supply of material when the automatic barfeeder runs out of
material.
:ÿ
7-48
O Use part separator A (K05-bitl)
[YES] : Use parts separator A [Type No.42415]
[NO] : Not use parts separator A [Type No.42415]
O Wait at M80 (K0O-bit5)

[YES] : Wait at M80.
[No] : Do not wait at 80.
O Display maintenance time up display (No. 2084) (K02-bit2)

[YES] : Do not display maintenance time up display (No. 2084).
[NO] : Display maintenance time up display (No. 2084).
O Skip / code between M75-M76 during product discharge confirmation (K05-bit3)

[YES] : Skip / code between M75-M76 during product discharge confirmation. :
[NO] : Do not skip / code between M75-M76 during product discharge confirmation.
O PHASES SYNCHRONIZATION AT M82 (K01-bit6)

, with M82 synchronous phase control is ON and
ill
[YES] : When MODE key is "SIMUL"
with M83 synchronous phase control is released.
..
[NO] : When MODE key is "SIMUL" Q , with M82 synchronous rotational control is ON
and with M83 synchronous rotational control is released.
Keep relay change procedure

(1) Move to the place you wish to change. The can be moved up or down with
| t |and| I |keys. When is at the top of the display and| t j key is
pressed, will move to the lowest position. When "-ÿ"is at the bottom of the display
[ j
and i key is pressed, the will move to the top position.
(2) To specify YES or NO for the keep relay function, use the YES and NO software keys at
the bottom of the CRT.
7-49
.
'
is
'
7-18 Servo monitor function
(1) Pressing [Sj INPUT [ £> j on the menu screen will display the screen shown in the diagram
below.
I With the servo monitor display programs are checked with dry runs while the servo torque
limit (limit on electric current) is in effect for the servo motor (Just to be sure that there is
I minimal damage if the unit should hit something during the dry run), and the load (volt¬
age) on the servo motor is checked.
SERVO MON I TOR

TOROUE L_ I M 1 TIER ON!
LIMIT DATA LOAD MAX LOAD

X 1 596 OO - OA OO - 096 OO . OA OO . 096
Z1 1 596 OO . OA OO . 096 OO . OA OO . 096
A 1 596 OO . OA OO . 096 OO OA OO . 096
Y 2 096 OO . OA OO . 096 OO . OA OO . 096
B 2096 OO . OA OO . 096 OO - OA OO . 096
E 1 596 OO . OA OO - 096 OO . OA OO . 096
Z2 1 596 OO . OA OO . 096 OO . OA OO . 096
S 0 TOOOC
MDI **»*
*** **« 00:00:00 HEAD!
ALL. CL MENU
|
f
The torque limiter is validated (ON displays) when the TORQUE LIMIT key is pressed.
If a current larger than the limit value flows due to an interference, the servo alarm 411 will occur.
The RESET j # |key will release the unit from the alarm, but be sure to turn off the power, and
determine the cause of the problem before turning on the power again.
II!
Press the TORQUE LIMIT jpQ| key and normal machining becomes possible again. Furthermore,
when the torque limit is on, rapid feed override automatically changes to 25% or less (1, 5% is effec¬
tive, 25, 100% 25% clamp), cutting feed override automatically changes to 70% or less (0 70% is
--*ÿ
—
—
effective, 80 150% 70% clamp).
-*ÿ
Also, when the torque limit is on, the feed override 100% ON command (MSS) become ineffective.
7-50
I
t NOTICE
• When a servo alarm 411 results, message No.1143 is displayed.
I
if
® When a setting is made that is less than the setting in the limit data, it is necessary to i.
lower the rapidfeed and cuttingfeed override, (if the override is high, then an alarm will i
result during speed changes)
* Rapidfeed -* 1%, cuttingfeed -* up to 70%. '
The electrical load is displayed simultaneously as a percentage of each respective setting and the
maximum electrical current load. Press the [ALL. CL] software key and the all data will be cleared. It
is convenient to use this capability together with the single block stop in a block by block check.
Because it takes a bit of process time to display the electrical load, it is not possible to check voltage
quickly in short periods of time such as during speed changes. !
settings are as shown below:
PMC PRM No. Axis Setting

D624 X-axis 39 (15%)
D626 Zl-axis 39 (15%)
D628 A-axis 39 (15%)
T
D630 Y-axis 51 (20%)
D632 B-axis 51 (20%)
§ D634 E-axis 39 (15%)
D636 Z2-axis 39 (15%)
I:
1
I
V
iI ::
4
1I «
7-51
I h
i
i
7-19 Machine specification display function
(1) Pressing [6j NPUT j £> [ on the menu screen will display the screen shown in the diagram
below.
This screen is used to display data required for maintenance, etc.
:
I
MACH I NE I NFORMAT I OW
MACH I NE SERIAL WO. OOOOOO
NC MODEL FS 1 6-TC i
1
WC SORT VSR . B1B1- oa
ORDERMADE MACRO VER . MA I W : BM30-QD
ORDERMADE MACRO VER . BACK -. BM80-QD
LADDER VER . A-NOCLVa
! S 0 TOOOO
MDI **» 00:00:00 HEAD1
[ MENU
7-52
A
7-20 Maintenance timer function

I
V;) (1) Pressing [_7J INPUT j £> j on the menu screen will display the screen shown in the diagram
below. f
This display is used for maintenance. By setting the preset value, the message is dis¬
played, when the operating time (start lamp lit up time) of the machine is reached to the
$ preset time.
MA I NTENANCE "T I MER
PRESET COUNT
I
TIMER 1 5QOH OOOOH I?
j
TIMER 2 1 500H OOOOH
TIMER 3 30 O OH OOOOH
TIMER -4 ©9©©H OOOOH
TIMER 5 9©©©H OOOOH

l
I S 0 TOGQC
MDI **** 00:00:00 HEAD'; -
CLEAR ALL CL MENU

1
O How to use
• Setting preset values
CD Use CURSOR| » j| x j to select the timer No. to be set in units of hours.
(2) Input the desired preset value (max: 9999 hours).
* Changing the count value

(D Use CURSOR j. t j [ i j to select the number of the timer to be changed.
(D Press the soft key [CLEAR] and the timer selected with the cursor will be cleared to 0.
—
(D Press the soft key [ALL CL.] and all timers from 1 5 will be cleared to 0.
7-53
—— HI
I
u
|
;ÿ
As shown in the table below, items for inspection can be reminded with timers 1 to 3. Each timer
displays a message when it has reached its preset time. For inspection procedure, refer to section 10.
)
Maintenance and inspection.
Timer setting time

'
Inspection Category Timert Timer2 Timer3 Timer4 Timers
500H 1 ,500H 3,000H OH OH
Clean chips from coolant tank O
Check amount of suitable hydraulic oil O
Clean chips from inside of collet sleeves of main and sub spindle o
Check emergency stop button o
Check door interlock function O
I Check coolant oil flow control sensor o
I O
1 Clean chips from inside front cover of revolving guide bushing
Check coolant oil level detector switch O
Check lubrication oil level detector switch o
Check broken cut-off tool detector O ft
Change hydraulic oil o
t Check amount of wear of shifter area O
I Check tension and damage of belt o
Check thermal breaker and other parts o I
O When time is reached ||

; The message below is displayed:
• 2084 MAINTENANCE TIME OVER
I
1 The machine will not stop operation. The number of the timer which time has been reached will
flash, and the count number will reset to 0. Once the count returns to 0, counting will begin
II again.
':
1
Press the START [fill or RESET j j button ON and flashing will stop.
|
If
if r\ NOTICE
® When a message is not necessary, set the keep relay K02-bit 2 to ”1
• Timers 4 and 5 are not in use normally, but may be used and set to any time desired. m
8
I
[
y
I \
7-54
Vmg
:g
tI 7-21 Display of registered program numbers

{PROGRAM LIBRARY LIST)
This function displays all recorded program numbers and the remaining number of characters in
memory.
I# HEAD1 and HEAD2 side have own separate display.
I; (1) Press the MODE key "EDIT"

W
S‘ (2) Press PROG g .
(3) Press the soft key [LIB].
PROGRAM DIRECTORY
00001 NOOOOO
PROGRAM CNUM . ) MEMORY (CHAR . }
USED; 16 3760
FREE: 47 12640
00001 00030
00002 00031
00003 00050
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008 ;;
00009
00010
O0011
00020
00021
i >_ S 0 TOOOC
EDIT 08:03:50 HEAD2
:
PRGRM DIR COPRT I
i
#
7-55
!
. : 7-22 Macro data setting
The values of the common variables (#100
ACTUAL POSITION
—#149, #500—#531) can be displayed on the CRT screen.
OOOOO NOOOOO
;i
: X
(ABSOLUTE 3
o . ooo TOOOO I
Y o . ooo TOOOO §
1 z, o . ooo VARIABLE
NO. DATA NO: DATA
Iill
A o . ooo 100
101
108
109-
o . ooo
'
1I
102 110
B 103 111
I:
E O - ooo 104
105
112
113
I z2 o . ooo 106
107
1 14
115
(ACTUAL SPEED 3F1 0 VM/MI N
0 RPM
i
SI
F2 0 Mvl/MIN >_ S 0 TOQOC
S2 0 RPM MD1 **** 00:00:00 HEAD1
ABS REL ALL MACRO (OPRT3 +
;ÿ
it
display
(1) Press the OFFSET SETTING . [jgjj
(2) Press soft key right end [ÿ ] and soft key [MACRO]. 1
If;
I 1
11
(1) Move the cursor to the desired variable number.
One way is to move the cursor with the PAGE [ $ j j j and CURSOR j t j
j j <- [ j -» j keys, and another way is to search for the No. by entering the
m
J i
variable number [No.SRHJ after pressing soft key [(OPRT)].

(2) Key in the value with the data keys.
I (3) Press the INPUT ii
ii'
Soft key [INPUT] can also be used.
ii
NOTICE
.i: ® Thefollowing macro valiables have already been used.
When macro program is made at your side, don 't use them.
HEAD1 side #526—#531
ill
I:'
l! 7-56
ii
I
I
I 7-23 Parameter display and change method
display
(1) Press the SYSTEM (3] .
(2) Press the soft key [PARAM].
Parameter setting
(1) Press the MODE key "MDI” or engage emergency stop.
(2) Press either HEAD1 |gg| or HEAD2 of MODE 1.
(3) Press the OFFSET SETTING . g
(4) Press the soft key [SETING].
(5) Display the SETTING (HANDY) screen by pressing the PAGE jpffj [ % j key.
i ACTUAL POSITION
OOOOO NOOOOO
>
[ABSOLUTE )
o . ooo TOOOO
X TOOOO
Y o . ooo
z, o . ooo SETTING (HANDY 3
o . ooo f
-=-
PARAMETER WRITE- O(0:D3SABLE
A TV CHECK 0(0:OFF 1 :ON )
B o . ooo PUNCH CODE U0:EIA 1:5S03 ;
E o . ooo
INPUT UNIT
I/O CHANNEL
SEQUENCE NO. -
=
0 (0 :Mvl 1: INCH)
0(0-3: CHANNEL NO.
0(0: OFF 1:ON3
3
Z2
(ACTUAL SPEED 3F1
o . ooo
0 MM/M1N
TAPE FORMAT
SEQUENCE
SEQUENCE'
STOP
STOP --
= OCO:NO CNV 1 :F15 3
0 (PRCXÿAM NO. 3
OCSEOUENCENO. 3
S' 0 RPM
F2 0 Mvl/MIN >_ S 0 T000C
S2 0 RPM MDI »*** 00:00:00 HEAD1
ABS REL ALL OFFSET SETING (OPRT 3 *
(6) Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE =, and then press [Tj INPUT . j |
The alarm "100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE" will display at this time. si
(7) Press the SYSTEM |(~5~|| key.
(8) Press the soft key [PARAM].
(9) Move the cursor to the number of the parameter to be changed.
1
The cursor can be moved by pressing the PAGE|$ j | j
keysand the CURSOR j \ j[ \ j
| j j j keys, or by pressing soft key [(OPRT)j and then searching for the parameter
-»
.
number with [No. SRH].
(10) Type in the value with the data keys.
(11) Press INPUT g.
The soft key [INPUT] can also be used. An incremental value can be input by using the
soft key [+ INPUT].
(12) After writing the parameter, display the screen in step (5) by pressing OFFSET SET¬
I TING g.
7-57
:
:
If
:
jl
( 1 3) Move the cursor to the parameter write position and press [oj INPUT . j |
j j
(14) Press the RESET # key to release the alarm " 100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE".
Note that if alarm "000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER” displays, the main power (main
breaker) must be turned OFF to release the alarm.
I
to change PMC PARAMETER -
(1) Press mode key MDI or engage emergency stop.
(2) Press OFFSET key g 1
(3) Press soft key [SETING].
(4) Display the SETTING (HANDY) screen with page keys j j j and set PARAMETER
WRITE = 1 to enable changing parameter.
At this time, alarm ”100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE” is displayed.
I
(5) Press system key |f3l|.
(6) After pressing soft key [PMC], press [PMC PRM], I
(7) Press soft keys [TIMER] / [KEEPRL] / [DATA] to display the screen to be changed.
To change the parameter on DATA screen, press the soft key [KEEPRL] to display the
PMC PRM (KEEPRELAY) screen and set K17-bit 7 to ”0”. Some of parameters are im¬
possible to change.
Pressing [DATA] displays the PMC DATA TBL CONTROL screen. To display the PMC
PRM (DATA) screen, press soft key [G DATA]. }:
PMC DATA TBL CONTROL screen will not be displayed when K17-bit 7 is "1”.
(the command makes the parameter change impossible.)
(8) Move the cursor to the position of parameter to be changed with page keys j j|$ j and
cursor keys |~T~| V ,
(9) Key in the value with data keys.

(10) Press OFFSET key [§§]. ~ M
(12) Display the SETTING(HANDY) screen with page keys j %[ j j.
$ The input of PARAM¬
=
ETER WRITE 0 makes the change of parameter impossible.
(13) To release the alarm "100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE", press reset key # j [.
I
11
7-58
fi
c
;; 7-24 Input / output interface
The normal setting is ISO code and baud rate 4800.
The setting parameters are shown below.

(1) Press OFFSET SETTING . g
(3) Display the SETTING (HANDY) screen by pressing the page keys j % |j j .
ACTUAL POSITION
(ABSOLUTE 3
OOOOO NOOOOO
TOOOO
X o . ooo TOOOO
Y o . ooo
z, o . ooo SETTING (HANDY 3
A
B
o . ooo
o . ooo
TV CHECK
PUNCH CODE --
PARAMETER WRITE- OCO:O!SA0LE 1:ENA8UE
0(Q:0FF
1 (0: E i A
1 :ON 3
1: J SO 3
?
I
E o . ooo
INPUT UNIT
I/O CHANNEL
SEQUENCE NO. -
= 0(0:Mvi 1: INCH)
0(0-3:CHANt€L NO. 3
•0(0:0FF 1:ON3
I
z2
(ACTUAL SPEED )Ft
O - ooo
0 JAVMIN
TAPE FOFMAT
SEOUENCE STOP
SEQUENCE STOP --
•0C0:N0 CNV 1 :F153
o (PROGRAM NO. 3
0 (SEQUENCER. 3
I
V
r
S1 0 RPM
II F2 0 Mvi/MIN >_ S 0 T000C
S2 0 RPM MDI V « #9 9 00:00:00 HEAD! I
ABS REL ALL OFFSET SETING (0PRT3
1
hYg I
1
ISOÿEIA, ESAÿiSO
EIA with PUNCH CODE=0
ISO with PUNCH CODE= 1 on above screen
baud rate 2400-ÿ4800, 4800ÿ2400

Baud rate 4800 with I/O CHANNELS
Baud rate 2400 with I/O CHANNEL=1 on above screen
. H:
.. I
:
I ft:
:ÿ
7-59
l
\
K
:
r
1
I
r
7-25 Background editing
i Turn the MEMORY INPUT key on the operation panel to ON (|) and then edit the background.
When editing of the background has been completed, turn the MEMORY INPUT key OFF (©)-
The programs other than the one selected in the foreground can be edited on the background regard¬
less of the MODE key selection or automatic operation of the program. I
Alarms that occur during background editing will not affect the program being run in the foreground. 111
In the same manner, alarms that occur in the foreground will not affect the background editing.
NOTICE
• Never press the RESET j j key in background mode.
An alarm can be released by pressing other keys.
• During background editing, the deletion of the whole program is impossible.
1
Is
input method
i (1) Press either HEAD1 SXMUL or HEAD2 of the MODE key.
7
In case of "SIMUL", program edition will be to the HEAD! side.

i
(2) Press PRGRM g. 1
This will display the PROGRAM screen. i
m
(3) Press the soft key [ (OPRT) ].
(4) Press soft key [BG-EDT].
(5) Specify the program to be edited.
• To create a program
Press jo] Program Number INSERT [ÿ] iEOBl INSERT pÿ]. 1
• To edit an existing program
Press [o] Program Number page j j . '
'1
(6) Program editing

Background editing is identical to foreground program editing.
(7) When program editing is completed, press soft key [BG-END] to terminate background
editing.
i
III
I
7-60
Program registration from external f/O device in background
Always turn the NC power OFF before connecting or removing the connection cable between
r the external I/O device and the RS-232C port (Refer to the diagram of machine operation panel
on section 7-1).
(1) Press either HEAD1 |gjg|, SIMUL or HEAD2 of the MODE key.
11 In case of "SIMUL", registration will be to the HEAD I side.
(2) Press the PROG jg)l| .
This will display the PROGRAM screen.
1 (3) Press soft key [(OPRT)].
I
v:;,
This will display the background editing screen.
(6) Press soft key right end [ÿ ] and soft key [READ].
(7) Execute the data transfer from the external I/O device.
I: f"' (8) Press soft key [EXEC].
(9) When the program registration is completed, press soft key [BG-ENDj.
H Program output from background

The program output procedure is the same as the one for the foreground. It is also possible to
punchout a program selected in the foreground.
(1) Press either HEAD1 SIMUL or HEAD2 j|jg|
of the MODE key.
In case of "SIMUL", punch out will be from the HEAD! side.
(2) Press the PROG g.
This will display the PROGRAM screen.
This will display the background editing screen.
(6) Press address fo] .
(7) Key in the program number to be output.
(8) Press soft key right end [ÿ ] and soft key [PUNCH].
Keying in [o] Q [9j H] [9j jl[] and pressing soft key [PUNCH] [EXEC] will output all
registered programs.
ig (10) After completion of program output, press soft key [BG-END].
:3
7-61
II
fi
')
*
i
r
7-26 Help function
The help function displays detailed infomiation regarding alarms that occur in the CNC and regarding
CNC operation on the CRT screen.
(T) If the CNC operation is mistaken or if a machining program containing an error is ex¬
ecuted, the CNC will enter the alarm state. If the help screen is referred to in this case,
detailed information about the occurring alarm will be displayed, and information regard¬
ing the cause and how to release the alarm can be viewed. Note that the alarms for which
detailed information is displayed are limited to those P/S alarms that are easily mistaken
and alarms for which the details are difficult to understand.
(2) If the help screen is referred to when the CNC operation method is not know, the operation
method for each operation item will be displayed.
(D If the help screen is referred to when the No. of the system parameter to be set or referred
to is not known, a list of parameter Nos. per function will be displayed.
O Operation method
(T) Press the MODE key "MDI and press the HELP | jp|| key. The initial help menu will
appear.
The screen for alarm details, operation methods or parameter tables can be selected with
soft keys from this screen.
1
ACTUAL POSITION
OOOQO NO O GOO I
(ABSOLUTE }
|
TOOOO 1
X o - ooo TOOOO
Y o . ooo /ÿ;
z, o . ooo HELPUN1TIAL MENU)
A o . ooo ««»*ÿ
HELP
1 . ALARM DETAIL
B o . ooo 2. OPERATION METHOD
E o . ooo 3. PARAMETER TABLE
i
Z2 o . ooo m
(ACTUAL SPEED Fl 0 fcM/MIN
SI 0 RFM
F2; 0 fcM/MIN S 0 TOOQC
S2 0 RFM MEM »*»* 00:00:00 HEAD1
ABS REL ALL ALARM OPERAT PARAM I
* Refer to the NC maker Operator’s Manual for details.
7-62
8. Explanation of program
A WARNING
•Execute memory operation or MDI operation after reading Chapter 7 Operation.
•Before changing the settings of the parameters in the explanations, refer to the section
Parameter display and change method in Chapter 7-23. \
I :
8-1 Programming ;
j,
1 The CNC automatic lathe will perform exactly as instructed by the program in its memory. The act of '
writing down commands in accordance with specific rules to control the tool number, tool route and :ÿ
|; other processing conditions when machining parts is called programming.
Discuss the tooling when the drawings of parts to be machined have been determined.
I
:
Drawing of parts to be machined :
Check of material to be cut
Check of dimensional tolerance :
Check of surface roughness
)
Tooling discussion Decision about machining range

Selection of machine and options
Decision of machining process
Decision of cutting tools, tool holders
and installation positions
Setting of processing conditions
;
I
Programming
>ÿ"
I 8-1
i-
.
4
i:
'
1
i
!
8“2 Organization of program
and command unit of address
Address Meaning Command unit

O (Note) Program number 4 digits (1—9999)
N Sequence number 5 digits (1—99999)
G Preparatory function 3 digits (1—999)
X*U X-axis movement command 0.001 mm unit (diameter value)
Y*V Y-axis movement command 0.001 mm unit (diameter value) 1
Z*W Zl-axis movement command, Z2-axis movement command 0.001 mm unit
A A-axis movement command 0.001 mm unit (radius value)
B B-axis movement command G.00I mm unit (radius value)
:}ÿ
E E-axis movement command 0.001 mm unit
I
:4 OB Main spindle angle indexing command 0.001 deg unit I
Sub-spindle angle indexing command 15 deg. unit (special 1.0 deg. unit)
tl
1
R Arc radius designation 0.001 mm unit
y I*K Arc center element 0.003 mm unit
,Q Passing point signal output position designation 0.001 mm unit
:
1 F Feedrate designation —
0.0001 mm/rev 6000 mm/min
ii
i s Spindle speed designation 5 digit min -1 unit
: T Tool selection number and tool offset number designation 4 digits
t M Auxiliary function 3 digits

; U*P*X Dwell time designation —
0.001 sec 99999.999 sec
i
p Subprogram number designation Low-order 4 digits
v
Subprogram repetition designation High-order 3 digits 1

p.Q Sequence number designation 5 digits (1—99999)
,A Approach command designation Gang Tool side 3 digits
Turret side 4 digits
r NOTICE
® For ISO code, ” can be used as the program number address.
|
%
§
4 •A 1-line unit in the program is called a block.
I •1 block is terminated by the end-of-block code, a i
•1 block can hold a maximum of 128 characters.
HWord
•Blocks are made up of words.
•Words are made up of addresses (alphabet letters) plus following data (numerical values).
(A + or - code may be added in front of the data.) !
8-2
§
I r;],'
input
•There are some restrictions depending on the address, but addresses that take units of distance,
speed and time can use decimal values.
•The table below shows the units, with their usable addresses, which can accept a decimal input.
Unit Address
Distance (mm) X*Y•Z*U*V*W•A*B*E*I*K*,Q»R
Speed (mm/rev, mm/min) F
Time (sec) U*X 1
!v
Angle (deg) C*H
1 Program number
:• •An integer number having up to four digits is placed at the head of the program to distinguish
differing programs.
•Up to 63 programs can be registered separately for the HEAD1 side and HEAD2 side in the
memory.
1
:
4‘
number
« A number up to 5 integer digits maximum can be placed at the head of a block.
I
i Block skip
I •If a slash code "/" is placed at the head of a block in a program and the BLOCK SKIP on the
machine operation panel is lit, the command in that block will be ignored.
£ :
•If the slash code "/" is not at the head of the block, the program from the slash code 7" to the end V
of block will be ignored.

* The block skip is processed when the program is read from the memory into the buffer.
•When the program is input or output from the memory, the slash code "/" will be input or output
regardless of the BLOCK SKIP [ÿ|state.
;
zero
•When data (numeric value) other than "0" is specified, following ”0" can be omitted. 11
(Example)
—
G01 G1
T0200 -> T200
F0.020 F0.02 (Don't omit 0 of first digit.)

X10.05 -*• X10.Q5 (Cantnot be omitted.)
?
;
8-3
_ . 1
I
!
a
1
iff
if
|
8-3 Dimension word I
The dimension word is a command that executes movement in any axis and consists of the address,
which specifies the axis, and the data, which specifies the direction and amount of movement.
II There are two command methods: absolute commands and incremental commands. I
|5
Diameter dimension Length dimension Verticai dimension
1
X-axis Y-axis Z-axis E-axis A-axis B-axis
I
Absolute X Y Z E A-axis B-axis
: (Absolute value expression) (Diameter dimension) (Diameter dimension) {Radius dimension) (Radius dimension)
I Incremental U V w
(Incremental value expression) (Diameter difference (Diameter difference
i dimension) dimension)
1
I
o tn c\j
CM O
* ..
15 13 12
o
co
-- CO
X
-
6 5
4 3 I
I
+x
Point Absolute command Incremental command !ÿ
1 X6.0 ZO
2 (X6.0) Z12.0 (UO) W12.0
3 X10.0 (Z12.0) U4.0 (WO)
4 (X10.0) Z25.0 (UO) W13.0

5 X8.0 (Z25.0) U-2.0 (WO)
6 (X8.0) Z40.0 (UO) W15.0
H NOTICE
®
If ike amount of movement is 0, as in ( ) above, it is not necessary to command.
8-4
8-4 Coordinate system
The X, Y, A and B axes use the center of the product as the respective zero point (XO, YO, AO, BO),
and the Zl-axis uses the product end after cutting off as the zero point (ZO). The E and Z2 axes use the
reference point as the respective zero points (EO, ZO). The reference point is a fixed point on the
machine, and is the position moved to with the reference point return operation or command.
!
+Y
&
T\pr°-n
+B f
-Y
Y240 . 0
EO.O s
L
+ Z2 -Z2
1
205s t. 136 2 100 ZO. 0
3
1 1 2st
\ riT
Ul
1/ r 159
-X -A
max .75 nax.75
max. 150
1i
-Z1 +Z1 ,
zo.o +A 20 300st.
+X
V6 304 s t .
X1 10 .0
320
( Y power-driven tool
I i J EO.O
Y240 .0
I ¥
j ©(o
80.0
:
A tn
Guide bushing <T (

+<! i-E
Ly J_5 in
in
_ &—i—
ui
+E_
3
-zip
EO
l in
CM <
S
tool 1 30.5st. <
200
8-5
:
If' \
;
i
i
If ,
If !
: if
;
;
i
if;'
1L,
,
235s t.
i. <-
2 <ÿ
233
:
I 1
i ;
T
7 r
nrrr s\ I
nni
-p * * » »\
tn JO
<o f-N HO
I
.'•I:
o OOr in
co
—n nn
V
il X
CM
Hi «5
§ s : I
i
CM
x
) i j
I ¥ t o r {
i
© S © t J
5
o o o to • o ) I .
?! *J
if 0 0 0 © © a s
© ©
W) i © s
S
$ 1
t
4
J
I
1 5 : :
f © © © l.L_UJ
i
i
i
38 -> 38 -3>- <£• 52 26.5 26.5 26. 5 .26.5
<-
if
ff 234
I
i X o
I I
o o
; a 235s t .
W l' <-*
+
f
<i o
X < -
•r~
<- •»
I '
X 2 <r
233
t
A
-P
CO
n
i i
©
%W. J
w ID
li
1
V
ISi o ID
f*V
r-. [o] LO]
in
tn
n
co
i
IIif
it X
to
it r
i in o
v
a
n
i n n
E 1 1
c :
CM CO
<’
rti tr 1t '' 1
f! tr I
' © © © :
: : :
o o o c 3 : o s
m
:< 0 © 0 @<! q J
I® 4 J
111
I !
4 4
I I I i
i
l I
s
I © ©
t
©
J
1.U..U
»
1
I 38 38 <-
52 -> <r
35 35 <- 35
233
I
f
i
! 8-6
II ;ÿ>
s
ill 8-5 Soft OT function by tool
.
Refer to the section 8-4 for the position related.

8
MS!
§ stroke and the first soft OT (No. ...Parameter No.)
Effective stroke The first soft OT

(mm) Machine position Absolute position
1 X-axis 57.0 -115.0- +1.0 X-5.0-X111.0

it Y-axis 130.5 -262.0- +1.0 Y-22.0 - Y241 .0
A-axis 235.0 -
-235.5 +2.5 A-233.5 - A2.5
—
]
B-axis 57.0 -26.0 - +32.0 B-26.0 B32.0

205.0 -0.5 - +205.5
No.1321 No.1320 Z-Q.5 - Z205.5
Standard (HEAD1 Z)
Z1-axis .
195.0 -0.5 -+195.5 .
No.1321 No.1320 Z-0.5 - Z195.5 ,
[42418] (HEAD1 Z)
|
E-axis 112.0
300.0
-100.5- +12.5
-
-0.5 +300.5
—
E-100.5 E12.5
No.1321 No.1320 Z-0.5 - Z300.5

| [421-04] (HEAD 2 ....Z)
Z2-axis
304.0 -0.5 -+304.5
[421-01] No.1321 No.1320 Z-0.5 -Z304.5
....
[421-91] (HEAD2 ....Z)
8 Z1-axis stroke . 205 st. Standard

H 195 st. Gripping unit [42418]
8
Z2-axis stroke 300 st. 4-station toolholder (ÿ!6mm) [421-04]
304.st. 5-station toolholder {ÿ12mm) [421-01]
304 st. 5-station tooiholder (ÿl/2inch) [421-91]
I
I NOTICE
® When tool selection of gang tool post is completed, all A-axis positions are A0.0,
is'v
• When tool selection of turret is completed, all B-axis positions are all B0.0.
®:
8-7
I
3i:
:
i
I;
8"S Feed function s
81Rapid feed speed V

* The GOO program command sets the speed of each axis independently of the others. i
Axis name Rapid traverse speed

I X-axis 1 5,000mm/mjn
t Y-axis 1 5,000m m/min
A-axis 1 5,000mm/min
B-axis 15,000m m/min
C-axis 9,000Vmin
Zl-axis 1 8,000mm/min
E-axis 18,000m m/min
Z2-axis 18,000m m/min
feed rate
• Address F commands the feed rate of each axis.
° The feed rate consists of the feed per revolution and the feed per minute, both of which are
specified by the G code.
Name G code Unit Program system Reference spindle

Feed per minute G98 Imm/min HEAD1/HEAD2 Main/sub
G99 0.0001mm/rev HEAD1/HEAD2 Main/sub
% Feed per revolution G101 0.0001mm/rev HEAD1 X-power driven tool
S
I G103 0.0001mm/rev HEAD1/HEAD2 Y-power driven tool
i
i r NOTICE
(i ® A change in the G code requires a new F command.
® Do not command 0 or negative values.
[
: ® The command value for the X-axis and Y-axis is the speed along the radial value.
® In the simultaneous interpolation with 2 or more axes, the speed is tangential speed.
0 The turning feed rate for each axis is shown in the following table.
I Feed per revolution Feed per minute it
X-axis
——
0.0001 20.0mm/rev I—10,000mm/mm
Y-axis 0.0001 20.0mm/rev
—
1 10,000mm/min
A-axis
B-axis
—
0.0001 20.0mm/rev
—
0.0001 20.0mm/rev
1
1
—
—
lQ,00Qmm/min
lO.OOOmm/min
C-axis 1—36,0007min (lOOmin'1)
Zl-axis —
0.0001 20.0mm/rev 1 — 10,0Q0mm/min
R-axis
——
0.0001 20.0mm/rev 1 — lQ,000mm/min
Z2-axis 0.0001 20.0mm/rev
—
1 10,000mm/min
8-8
1
8-7 Spindle function (S function)
f Address S can directly command the rotational speed.
Power-driven attachment! Command range]

Main spindle 500-10.OOOmin'1
Sab-spindle 500-I0,000min-‘ 1
X power-driven tool max. 6,000mm'1
Y power-driven tool 400-6,OOOmin-1
NOTICE
I; ® The permissible continuous time of 4500mm'1 or more for X power-driven tool is five
if;
II minutes.
If
® The spindle speed of the following power-driven tools differs from the speed of other
power-driven tools.
I
I
Power-driven tool unit Commanding method commanding range>
1 Slotting unit 50B Tool rotates with specified spindle speed X 0.3.
[421-53] Specified spindle speed = Desired spindle speed ri- 0.3
Slotting unit 50A

Specified Y power-driven tool feed per revolution (G103) =
Desired Y power-driven tool feed per revolution (G103) X 0.3
[421-54] <120- 1800min'!>
Tool rotates with specified spindle speed X 1 .7.
High speed 2-spindle Specified spindle speed = Desired spindle speed -r 1.7
If!I cross drilling unit ER11 Specified Y power-driven tool feed per revolution (G103) = '
I [423-52] Desired Y power-driven tool feed per revolution (G103) X 1.7
<670 - lOOOOmin-ÿ
;; Slotting unit 50B
V
[221-63]
I Slotting unit 50A
Tool rotates with specified spindle speed X 0.39. t
Specified spindle speed = Desired spindle speed 4- 0.39 j
[221-63H]
Adjustable slotting unit 508
Specified Y power-driven tool feed per revolution (G103) =
Desired Y power-driven tool feed per revolution (G303) X 0.39
[221-65]
Adjustable slotting unit 50A
-
<124 2338min'1>
[221-65H]
s
;
:
i:S
8-9
:
I
; I%
n V
M
B
I
m.
y
-
O’ Rotation command M code
Each spindle can be started in the forward/reverse directions and stopped by using M codes.
HEAD1 side command HEAD2 side command

Main spindle X-power driven } Y-power driven Sub-spindle Y-power driven
: too tool tool
; Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
M03
M04
M36
M37
M46
M47
M03
M04
M46
M47
Stop M05 M38 M48 M05 M48 I
NOTICE 9"
®Theforward rotation direction of the main spindle and the reverse rotation direction of
the sub-spindle are the same. II
• When issuing the speed S commandfor the power driven tool, command M36 (M46) or
M37 (M47) in the same block.
• Command M47 to use the right hand drillfor the back side of the counter-face drilling
I unit [221-56].
1 O Rotation direction
1221-56}
I
M46 f Q M46
M47 M47
-o-
Y power-driven tool Ijcp10
Main spindle, Sub-spindie
I
iu
.1
M04
M46
I
M47
M03
\
I
M03 M04
M37 M36
flftl
Guide bushing
X power-driven tool
8-10
j; 8-8 Tool function
8-8-1 Tool number
The tool position is expressed with the T3-digit/T4-digit tool number in this instruction manual.
tool post
V
V © © i-
T800 T800) »
1 0
T700 (T 7 0 0]
© |B= ©
I
:
(T600) [T 60 Oj
°(§> I 1500 O T4 00
i
H -Id)© o j
(T 400) -10® o © I T300 .
II ]§[
!@@
0
°©l — T300 T200 :
:
I# -KD© °®{-T IT 200] — o ©|— j T1Q0
i
1 T 1 00 ll @ »; ~T
ft
421-01.91 7 421-04 7
I
:
1 (moo)
;;
s T 1400
®S-
(l1200)
I
A
1 ©
[
©7 .
(n50o)-
°v+ /©
7
©
°@
o
iO°
© -
I (moo) (0
|
8-11
1
I
:
:
.
.
II
i :
r
is
i
ill
8-8-2 Tool function (T function)
I The tool functions include the tool selection and tool offset functions. These are commanded with
I address ”T’\
Function Command method Selected tool

1
I Tool selection function T3/T4-digit command I HEAD1 side.... T100-T500, T6GQ-T80Q
?ÿ Til 00-11800
; T4-digi£ command HEAD2 side TI 100-T1800
|
!
When the 3-station tooiholder, 2-spindle cross drilling unit, triple sleeve holder or double
sleeve holder are installed on Tl 100 to Tl 800, command the ID No. given in Table I as last
s two digits of the tool number.
:
Si:; Example: Tl 131, Tl 1 32, Til 33
f
£ Tool position offset function TI/2-digit command -
TO T32 (TO to T64 as option)
1
I
O Table 1
I
Too! holder ID No.
A 3-Station tooiholder (31, 32, 33) (34, 35, 36) (37, 38, 39)
ft 421-02
si
is;
i
421-03
421-92
0 3 1 . 34 . 37-
: 421-93 @ 32.35. 38-
I: @33.36.
1
1
li 2-spindle cross drilling unit (41, 42) (43, 44) (45, 46) (47, 48) I
IS 421-51 1i
li
y 421-52 @41 .43.45.47
i!;
;
! @42.44.46.48
;s
i
il: Triple sleeve holder (51, 52, 53) (54, 55, 56) (57, 58, 59)
I 421-11
/
II 421-12
Q .
I
)
51 54 .57
@52.55.58 00
i
@ 53.56.59 0 i;
I
Double sleeve holder (61 , 62) (63, 64) (65, 66) (67, 68)
i
;
221-12
62.64.66. 68 /
s
61 .63.65.67
!00
I \
ili
!
!i;
I
!
8-12
i
l!
I
:
NOTSCE
•The tool selection T code must be commanded as an independent command. "
•Cancel the tool offset before selecting the tool

:
® The G code in the process before tool selection must be GOO or G01.
® When using the turret on the HEAD1 side, command M131 in the process before tool
'
selection.
When using the turret on the HEAD2 side, command Ml32 in the process before tool I
selection. i
selection function
O To select a tool I;
TDOO; HEAD 1 side TDDAAQ0;HEAD 2 side |
- ID No. Ii:
> Tool No. 0—18 Tool No. 11—18
'
• If the same tool No. as which is selected presently is commanded, no axis moves.
• The turret index speed can be changed by RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE
1 • With the T100 to T800 command, the X-axis moves to the reference point, and then the com¬
I manded tool is positioned on a horizontal line at the center of the guide bushing and set as A0.0.
—
• With the T11AA T18AA command on the HEAD1 side, the Y-axis moves to the refer¬
1
*SiI ence point and then the E-axis moves to the reference point. After that, the B-axis moves to
each tool position, index to each tool number position, and becomes B0.0.
I
The tool selection of the same tool when 3-station tooiholder, 2-spindle cross drilling unit,
triple sleeve holder are installed, only B-axis moves to each tool number position 1.
In case of double sleeve holder, no axis moves.
—
• With the T11AA T18AA command on the HEAD2 side, the Y-axis moves to the refer¬ :
ence point and then the B-axis moves to each tool position, index to each tool number posi¬ :
tion, and becomes B0.0.

• The tool selection of the same tool when 3-station tooiholder, 2-spindle cross drilling unit,
triple sleeve holder are installed, only B-axis moves to each tool number position 1.
In case of double sleeve holder, no axis moves.
• For the 3/4-digit, input the tool number 1 to 18, and for the lower two digits, input "00". When
the 3-station tooiholder, 2-spindle cross drilling unit, triple sleeve holder or double sleeve
a holder are installed on Til 00 to T1800, command the ID No. given in Table 1 as last two
digits of the tool number.
s. Refer to Table 1 on section 8-8-1 for the ID No. positions.
i:
'0. 1
8-13
'
....
Example : When 3-station toolholder is installed on tool number 11
T1131, T1132, T1133
3-station toolholder (31, 32, 33) (34, 35, 35) (37, 38, 39)
2-spindle cross drilling unit (41, 42) (43, 44) (45, 46) (47, 48)
Triple sleeve holder (51, 52, 53) (54, 55, 56) (57, 58, 59)
Double sleeve holder (61, 62) (63, 64) (65, 66) (67, 68)
1
• After tool selection command, geometry offset will function with movement command of Z-
axis on HEAD1 and Z2-axis on HEAD2.
After tool selection, input Z-axis command in the GOO positioning block. i
!
i
I
t
J
If
1*1
.
#
I
1 Il;
i
if
«
%
I
1
.
.
i
8-14
;.:;4 :
III position offset function

This is called tool offset or offset in other words.
In tool position offset, there are tool wear offset and tool geometry offset. :
<0 Tool wear offset

This is used for size adjustment of machining part. When the size of machining part is to be
increased, input plus offset value, when to be decreased, input minus offset value.
Offset value is increased or decreased to the last position of programmed each block.
Refer to the section 7-11 for input method of offset value. I
i • Offset number commanding method
TDD
I
- —
Tool wear offset number 00 32 TOO is the cancel of tool wear offset function. t
There are 32 pairs of offset numbers for each HEAD 1 and HEAD 2. 1
Offset numbers are normally the same numbers as the tool numbers. However, for the offset ::
numbers of ID Nos., select from 20-32.
[HEAD1 side]
Too! No. Tool wear offset number Offset address t

T100 T01 X, Z 1
T200 T02 X,Z ::

T300 T03 X, Z i!
T400 T04 x,z
(T500) T05 x,z '
T600 T06 X,Z
T700 T07 x,z
T800 T08 X,Z
T1100 Til Y, Z
T1200 T12 Y,Z
T1300 T13 Y, Z
T1400 T14 Y,Z '
T1500 T15 Y, Z ;
T1600 TI6 Y,Z
T1700 T17 Y, Z
T1800 T18 Y, Z Z : Z1-axis
SJI
s
!ÿ
8-15
ri
I
I
[HEAD2 side]
Tool No. Tool wear offset number Offset address

Til 00 Til Y,Z,E
T1200 T12 Y, Z, E
1 T1300 T13 Y, Z.E
| TI400
T1500
T14
T15
Y, Z, E
Y, Z, E
T1600 T16 Y, Z, E
T1700 TI7 Y, Z, E
T1800 T18 Y, Z, E Z : Z2-axis
TOO will cancel the tool wear offset function that is currently commanded. Tool selection com¬
7
mand TdOO; or TtJOOO; can not cancel the tool wear offset. The cancellation must always be
performed with TOO or TO.
When a t code is commanded together with any address other than "Q" or "N", it is considered as
a tool wear offset and the first and second digits after "T" will be ignored.
(Example)
i:
GOO XI 0.0 Z20.0 T201 :
T code in this case will be interpreted as T01.
O Tool geometry offset

This is to offset tool shape or tool setting position.
With inputting the offset, it will be unnecessary to consider tool shift amount.
(Example)
If length of a tool, which is fitted on X-axis or Y-axis, is longer than standard tool length, input
the length difference in plus value.
2 X (fitted tool length - standard tool length) = value of tool geometry offset
Standard tool length : Tool length upto the center of the guide bushing during position 0 posi¬
tioning
Guide bushin
: I 91
3i
X power-driven tool Y power-driven tool
331-50 221-50
I
.25 0
l °; ]
Standard tool length example rn
Tool geometry offset will shift work coordinate (ABSOLUTE). This means that position after
tool selection is shifted in plus or minus direction by tool geometry offset.
1
8-16
1 NOTICE
® In order to work Z-axis geometry offset, command Z-axis coordinate value in a block
for GOO positioning after tool selection.
* Be sure to record each setting data.
• Method of command
Tool geometry offset can be input by automatic measurement with tool setter or key entry
from CNC operation panel.
As to method of automatic measurement with tool setter, please refer to 10-6.
<Tool geometry offset input>
To input geometry offset of each tool by key entry, follow the procedures below.
1
(1) Press custom jfjT)| key, then menu screen will appear.
(2) Press [2]and input j »|>| key, then tool geometry offset 1 screen for gang tool post will
appear.
If soft-key [screen 2] is pressed on tool geometry offset 1 screen, then tool geometry
offset for turret will appear.
(3) Move arrow
Arrow
(4) Press[xj,
can be moved with cursor keys t
[offset data | and input
| [, j |,
-~
on the screen to select a tool number, to which offset will be input.
i j <- |, j j
on NC operation panel.
key, then X-axis geometry offset of the selected tool
will be set. In the same way, if "A", "Z", "Y", "B", or "E" is input in place of "X", then j
geometry offset for A, Z, Y, B, or E-axis can be set.
(5) Press[uj, [ increase / decrease data j and input »|> key, then X-axis geometry offset of the
| |
selected tool will be increased or decreased. In the same way, if "C", "W", "V", "D", or
1
"F” is input in place of "U", then geometry offset for A, Z, Y, B, or E-axis can be in¬
creased or decreased.
1
If
8-17
I
1
i
?!
8-9 Approach function

The approach function includes the approach movement that approaches the tool to be used next to
near the machining preparation position to prepare for the next process.
The tool replacement time can be shortened by using this function.
This function is used for the HEAD1 side tools. II$
1 P
NOTICE
I • If approach function is commanded during tool nose radius compensation, approach¬ if
1"i ing is executed in theformer block.
'
/
n
8-9-1 Approach operation I
O Command method
— —
The ,A100 ,A800 commands are valid during T11AA T18AA machining. The ,A11A
— —
A ,A18AA commands are valid during T1G0 T8G0 machining.
Even if the tool is called with an approach command, the T code tool selection cannot be omit-
ted.
ID No. . AA: Normally 00
i
3-station toolholder (31, 32, 33) (34, 35, 36) (37, 38, 39)
i;.)
2-spindle cross drilling unit (41, 42) (43, 44) (45, 46) (47, 48)
Triple sleeve holder (51, 52, 53) (54, 55, 56) (57, 58, 59)
Double sleeve holder (61, 62) (63, 64) (65, 66) (67, 68)
[Gang tool post]

V
P.
G170 XV; Approach position command
,AD00; This address is read as "comma A".
: Tool No. 1 to 8
[Turret]
;
j
G170 YV; IJ
| Tool No. 11 to 18
AA: ID No.
,
:
.
:
I 1
8-18 1
i:
!
O Operation :
(1) The tool number commanded with ,AD00 or ,A(ZDAA is selected.
;
• For the gang tool post, after the X-axis moves to the reference point, the A-axis will move
i
to each tool position.
* With the turret, after the Y-axis moves to the reference point, the B-axis will move to each
tool position, and then will index to each tool number position.
(2) The axis will rapid traverse to the "preset diameter dimension".
• The "preset diameter dimension" refers to the position commanded with G170 XV; or i
,
G170 YV ; in the program. :ÿ!
• XV and YV can be set to random dimensions, but normally, these are set to the "material
diameter + 1.0mm".
• The XV and YV values commanded with G170 are cleared by resetting. ,
• The approach command should be placed in the turning process if possible. ;
O The approach function can also be commanded in a movement command block, 1
(Example)
When machining a product as shown below, T200 is the cutting process from ® to © , so
if ,AI6Q0 is commanded, T1600 will be selected and will move to the "material diameter
+1.0mm" position.
TI600
O’
A;s-
©
© T200
i
V:
j;
8-19
I!
I
i
a
i
8-10 Preparatory function (G function)

G code table
G code Division Function Group Remarks

;ÿ
B Positioning (rapid traverse) 01 o
I
G01 B Linear interpolation (cutting feed) o
G02 B Circular interpolation CW # o
G03 B Circular interpolation CCW # o 1
G04 B Dwell oo o
:
G10 B Programmable data input o
G17 B X-Y plane selection 16 o I!
VG18 B Z-X plane selection o
G19 B Y-Z plane selection o
B Stored stroke check ON 09 Single block command o
G23 B Stored stroke check OFF Single block command o
B Spindle speed fluctuation detection OFF 08 Single block command o
I G26 B Spindle speed fluctuation detection ON Single block command o ,
G28 B Return to reference point 00 o v;
G30 B Return to second reference point o |

G32 B Thread cutting 01 o
G34 O Variable lead thread cutting O
B Tool nose radius compensation cancel 07 O |
G41 B Tool nose radius compensation left o
G42 B Tool nose radius compensation right o
G50 B Coordinate system setting oo o
B Spindle maximum speed setting Valid daring constant surface speed control o
G65 B Macro program call 00 o
G66 B Macro modal call 12 O
G67 B Macro modal call cancel o
G70 B Finishing cycle 00 Only Z-X plane is valid for O
G71 B Outer diameter rough cutting cycle HEAD1 side. o
G72 B End face rough cutting cycle Only Z-Y plane is valid for o
G73 B Closed loop cutting cycle HEAD2 side. o
h
G74 B End cut-off cycle o
G75 B Outer diameter cut-off cycle o
.
G76 B Automatic thread cutting cycle o i!:
B Canned cycle for drilling cancel 10 o
l G83 B Front drilling cycle o
G84 B Front tapping cycle o t
G85 B Front boring cycle o
I G87 B Side drilling cycle o
G89 B Side boring cycle o
8-20
G code Division Function Group Remarks
G90 B Outer and internal diameter cutting cycle 01 O
G92 B Thread cutting cycle o
G94 B End face turning cycle o
G96 B Constant surface speed control 02 o
VG97 B Constant surface speed control cancel o
(Speed constant control)
j G98 B Feed per minute (mm/rain) 05 o
VG99 B Feed per revolution (mm/rev) o
'C
G101 B X power driven tool feed per revolution A
(mm/rev)
G103 B Y power driven tool feed per o
1 revolution (mrn/rev)
G107 O Cylindrical interpolation 00 Valid in G150 and G18 mode A
- G112 O Pole coordinate interpolation mode 21

on HEAD1 side
Valid in G150 mode A
A
O Pole coordinate interpolation cancel mode with turret
G120 B Zi-axis coordinate system setting A
G121 B Zl-axis coordinate system recovery A

B Z2-axis coordinate system cancel X
G131 B Z2-axis coordinate system setting X
for part pick-up
G132kk B Z2-axis coordinate system setting X
for back machining
I ’VG140 B E-axis coordinate system cancel X
G141 B E-axis coordinate system setting X
B Z-X plane selection A
G154 B Z-Y plane selection O

G158 B E-Y plane selection X
G170 B Approach position setting Unique A
G171 B Tool select with short cut route

to
STAR o
G184 B Front threading cycle Valid only in G99 mode with G25 A
G20G B Sub-spindle indexing X
G201 B Sub-spindle indexing (Command angle +180°) X
G202 B Cs-axis coordinate system recovery A
G203 B Cs-axis coordinate system 180° shift A

G284 B Back threading cycle Valid only in G99 mode with G25 X
G384 B X-cross threading cycle Valid only in G101 mode A
G484 B Y-cross threading cycle Valid only in G103 mode o
G784 B X-cross rigid tapping cycle Valid only in G101 mode A
G900 Jj B HEAD2 single operation block jump X
8-21
a'
I
|
I?
K
ji
f?ii
Multiple G codes can be commanded in the same block as long as each code belongs to a It
different group (01 to 09).
1
If two or more G codes belonging to the same group are commanded in the same block, only
the last G code commanded will be valid.
i
1
The G code with the mark is automatically selected when the power is turned ON. II
B in the division column is the standard specification, and O is the special accessory specifi¬
cation.
The 00 group G codes are non-modal G codes.
|
If a G code not given in the G code table is commanded, the alarm ”010" will display.
The special accessory specification (option) G code is valid only when the corresponding
function is added. Thus, if the function is not added and the G code is commanded, the alarm
I "010" will display.
The marks given in the remarks column have the following meanings:
O: G code that can be commanded to both the HEAD1 side and HEAD2 side.
A: G code that can be commanded only to the HEAD1 side.
X : G code that can be commanded only to the HEAD2 side.
#: G code that requires G150 (Z-X plane) or G154 (Z-Y plane) to be commanded.
A: G code that can be commanded with the G150 (Z-X plane).
11'
1
{{
3
8-22
:=ÿ :
'ÿi
8-10-1 Positioning (GOO)
This command will execute movement in rapid traverse from the current position to the specified
position.
O Format
GOO X(U) ••-A* •*Y(V) ••*B» •*Z (W) ••*E (H) •••;
V
• Addresses X, A, Y, B, Z, E and C are absolute commands, so the numeric values that follow
are the coordinate values (finishing point coordinates) of the position after movement. \
C is an angle. \
• Addresses U, V, W and H are incremental commands, so the movement direction and dis¬ 1
:
tance (H is an angle) using the current position as a reference are written. l
• The rapid traverse rate is constant. The X, Y, A and B axes can move at 15 m/min and the Zl, 1
E and Z2 axes at 18 m/min using the GOO command.
1
(Example)
GOO X22.0 ; X position moves to 22.0. :
GOO U-10.0 Z80.0 ? The X position moves to 12.0 and the Z position moves to :
80.0 simultaneously.
G00 X10.0 W30.0 ; The X position moves to 10.0 and the Z position moves to
110.0 simultaneously.
8-10-2 Liner interpolation (G01)

% This command will move (turn) the tool in a straight line from the current position to the specified
position at a feed rate commanded by the F code.
<C> Format
G01 X(U)**»A***Y(V) ...B***Z(W) ;
• The coordinate values (finishing point coordinates) of the position after movement are writ¬
ten after the addresses X, A, Y, B, Z and E.
• The movement direction and distance using the current position as a reference are written
after addresses U, V and W.
20
(Example) 10
GOO XO Z-1.0 ?
G01 ZO F0.1 ;
G01 X6.0 ;
in
G01 X10.0 Z10.0 F0.15 ; + zÿ ©
-e
G01 X15.0 ; \
G01 Z20.0 F0.2 ;

•
G01 X17.0 ;
i hI
+X
8-23
:
'
I
I 8-1 0-3 Circular interpolation (G02, G03)
|| This command will move the tool from the current position to a designated position in an arc of the
commanded radius.
;
O' Circular interpolation direction
Z-X plane A-X plane Z-Aplane
+A +A
+Z< - .G02
A
;{ sG03
G03,
: G03' G02
'G02
+x
+ X«- +z«ÿ
I Z-Y plane B-Y plane Z-B plane E-Y plane
1
A
+B
A
+B +Y
A
!
X302 G02. sG02
a sG03
QOS' "G03 002* GOt
j
i +z<- +Y +Z<ÿ +E<r i
O HEAB1 format
fj
Zl-X plan (G18) [ G02
G03
X(U) Z (W)ooooo [ I»Q« K»»Q
F *•* ;
G02
; A-X plan G17 [ G03 X(U) A»* [ R.o.® F •••;
G02 R-o*
Zl-A plan G19 [ G03 A ••••« Z (W)ooooo [ J°»» K»o»
F ;
G02 Row
Zl-Y plan (G18) [ G03 Y(V) Z (W)o**o* [ I K»oo
OOP
F ;
G150:
B-Y plan G02 R»—
G17 [ G03 [ I«»« J»««
F oo® ;
G150: f
G02 Roooo
Zl-B plan G19 [ G03 B»o. Z (W) [ Jooo KOOQ
F ;
OHEAD2 format
Z2-Y plan G154: G02 I

G18 [ G03 Y(V) Z (W)ooooo [ Roooo
I»»» Ko»»
F— ;
G154:
B-Y plan
G17 [ G02 Y(V) jg®®*®®©®®®© [ Roooo F •••;
—
G03
G154:
Z2-B plan
G19 [ G02
G03
B ••ÿ••••••••
Z (W)' [ RooooK»»o
loop
F ;
E-Y plan
G158:
G02 Roooo
» I
(018) [ G03 Y (V) E« [ Jooo K«»«
F ;
8-24
f; :
?'ÿ
X, A, Y, B, Z, E: Finishing point coordinates of Starting point
i
K 1
circular arc
:
R: Arc radius value (incremental command
for X, Y, Z can be possible)
I
I : Diameter direction distance to center of
circular arc looking from starting point
(incremental radius value)
-
K: Longitudinal distance to center of circular
arc looking from starting point (incremen¬
Finishing point
ix \
+
Circular arc
center
tal value) :
F: Feedrate following arc
i
NOTICE
•The circular arc command must be issued within 180 If an arc exceeding 180°is to be
commanded, split the program into two blocks. (
® The plane selection (G17 to G19) is requiredfor the HEAD1 side circular interpolation
command. 1
(Example)
'T: The example shows outer diameter cutting, but the inner diameter process is the same.
£
GOO XO Z-1.0 ; 20
I G01 ZO F0.1 ;
:a
I G01 X3.0 ;
to
!
m G02 X5.0 Z1.0 R1.0 : :
1
i
G01
G03
G01
Z8.0 ;
X9.0 Z10.0 R2.0 ;
X11.0 ;
+z
<o ID
•e — A i
s G02
G01
X15.0 Z12.0 R2.0 ;
Z20.0 ;
r
1x
G01 X17.0 ; +
':v
The following example does not specify R as the previous one did but uses I and K.
GOO XO Z-1.0 ;
I G01 ZO F0.1 ;
1 G01 X3.0 ;
G02 X5.0 Z1.0 (10) K1.0 ;
G01 Z8.0 ;
GO 3 X9.0 Z10.0 12.0 (KO) ;
ji
G01 X11.0 ;
G02 X15.0 Z12.0 K2.0 ; (I and K can be omitted when they are 0)
G01 Z20.0 ;
G01 X17 . 0 ;
8-25
!;
,
m
8-1 0-4 Dwell (G04)
A timer will function for the commanded time, and then the next block will be executed.
O Format
G04 U***; or GQ4 X •••; or G04 P»*»;
• U, X and P can be used for the time setting addresses, but in this manual, only U is used.
• After completing the previous block, the program will move to the next block after the time
commanded by U, X or P has passed.
• G04 is non-modal, so it is valid only in the commanded block.
If
• The time that can be designated is 0 to 99999.999 seconds.
• A decimal point in second units can be input for addresses U and X.
(Example) 1
To dwell for 0.5 seconds:
GQ4 U0.5; or G04 X0.5; or G04 P500;.
i
; 8-10-5 Programmable data input (G10)
The tool offset amount can be set and changed.
Si
f When G10 is commanded with an absolute input, the commanded offset amount will become the tool
1
£
offset amount. If commanded with an incremental input, the commanded value will be added to the SI
currently set tool offset amount and will be used.
f:
<0 Format
P : Tool offset number

X
A :
—
G10 P •••X(U) •••A***Y(V) •••B*«*Z(W) E— R(C) Q •••;
- 1
S'
8
Y : Absolute input
B : These rewrite the commanded tool offset amount.
Z :
E
I U :
V :
W :
] Incremental input
These add the commanded amount to the former tool offset amount.
1
R : This rewrites in the commanded tool nose radius amount. (Absolute input)
C : These value commanded are added to the former tool nose radius amount.
I
Q : This rewrites the imaginary tool nose position for the tool nose radius compensation.
(Example)
1
G10 P2 XOI W-0.035 ;
This will reduce 0.035mm to the Z offset.
i This will set the X offset to 0.1mm.
This will specify tool offset number 02.
8-26
I
1
8-10-6 Plane selection (G17, G185 G19)
The plane selection must be commanded for the circular interpolation and nose radius compensation. I
ORefer to section 8-10-3 for the format

G17 : A-X plane, B-Y plane I
5 G18 : Z-X plane, Z-Y plane
i G19 : Z-A plane, Z-B plane
•
• G18 is selected when the power is turned ON.
• G18 is a command to return the circular interpolation plane to the basic Z-X plane or Z-Y
plane, so always command it after the G17 or G19 machining process.
* Cancel the offset and nose radius compensation when changing over to G17, G18 or G19. $
8-10-7 Stored stroke check ON / OFF (G22, G23)
The tool entry prohibited range can be divided into two ranges and set as shown below. The shaded :
section is the range where the tool cannot move.
i ;|
S
1
ill
gi
i
*1
I First limit : The boundary is set with a parameter (#1320 to #1321).
The outer side of the set boundary is the prohibited range.
|l Second limit : The boundary is set with a parameter (#1322 to #1323) or with a program command.
The inner side or the outer side of the set boundary is the prohibited range.
I Whether the inner side or the outer side is the prohibited range is set with parameter
(#1300-bit0).
I Tool entry into the second limit prohibition range is prohibited with G22, and is entry
. OFormat
is allowed with G23.
G22 X— Z •••I— K~; (X>I, Z>K)

* X, Z, I and K are the distance to the A point and B point using the machine zero point as 0.
* The contents of the parameters can be rewritten with this command. (The contents can also be
rewritten with the MDI command.)

* G22 and G23 must be commanded in single blocks.
8-27
.
;
8-10-8 Spindle speed fluctuation detection ON / OFF (G26, G25)

This function will trigger an alarm if the rotational speed of the main spindle or sub-spindle fluctuates
above or below the commanded speed.
O The format is
G26 P •••Q •••R •••• D ; spindle speed fluctuation detection ON
G25 ; spindle speed fluctuation detection OFF
|
P : The time from when the speed change commanded is issued to when check is started, (unit:
msec)
Q : The permissible ratio for determining if the commanded value has been reached when the
speed has been commanded or changed.
The check will start after this, (unit: 0.1%)
I R : The permissible fluctuation ratio for determining if the rotation is abnormal.
If this value is exceeded, an alarm will occur, (unit: 0.1%)
D : The rotation fluctuation range for determining if the rotation is abnormal.
If this value is exceeded, and alarm will occur, (unit: min'1)
• G26 sets the spindle fluctuation detection ON mode, and G25 sets the spindle fluctuation
detection OFF mode.
* The values commanded for P, Q, R and D will be stored to the parameters even if G25 is
commanded.
Thus, the P, Q, R and D values set (stored) in the parameters will be valid just by command¬
ing G26.
• Command these in independent blocks.
• Before rotation direction is changed or threading (tapping or die cutting) is executed, com¬
mand G25 (spindle speed fluctuation detection OFF).
• G25 (spindle speed fluctuation detection OFF) state is selected when the power is turned ON.
* Main/back initial parameter values
Parameter No. Setting value Unit Actual

P. #4914 3000 msec 3 sec.
.
Q #4911 10 0.1% 1%
R #4912 20 0.1% 2%
D #4913 50 min'1 SOroin'1
8-28
*CI
I 8-1 0-9 Reference point return (G28)
1
O Format
G28 X(U)
X(U)
A
Y(Y)
— A***Y(V) •••B—Z(W) —E— ;
Middle point to reference point

B
Z(W)
E
• The commanded axis will be positioned to the middle point with rapid traverse, and then will
move from that point to the reference point with rapid traverse.
• Cancel the offset before starting.
• Tool selection must be commanded when the tool positioning is commanded after reference
point return of A-axis or B-axis has been done.
8-10-10 Second reference point return (G30)
1
i
O Format
G30 X(U) •*« A***Y(V) •••B—Z(W)
X(U)
A
Y(Y)
— E— ;
Middle point to second reference point
B
Z(W)
E
|jl
• The commanded axis will be positioned to the middle point with rapid traverse, and then will
move from that point to the second reference point with rapid traverse. (Excluding the move¬
ment to the second reference point, the operation is the same as the reference point return with
the G28 command.)
* The second reference point position must be set in the machine coordinate system for each
axis beforehand with the parameter (No. 1241). (The initial value is 0 for each axis.)
•5? • Cancel the offset before starting.
I
1
8
8-29
If
n
;
8-10-11 Th read cutting (G32)
This G code will cut straight, taper, front (scroll) and continuous threads.
NOTICE
® Portions of the lead at the beginning and end of thread cutting will be incorrect due to
:
: delays in the servo system (while accelerating or decelerating). The program must,
therefore, compensate for these incorrect portions. (Refer to the section 8-10-18, G92 i
gang tool post cyclefor details.)
•Single block stop will not work in the G32 command block.
® A G32 command cannot perform the ckarmfering. Use G92 or G76
if the chamfering is
needed.
® Thefollowing operations are ignored during thread cutting.
Feed override operation It is considered to be 100%

Feed hold operation
® Thead cutting (G32) cannot be commanded in the mode except
for G99 (feed per revolution).
1
® Do not command an M code when commanding continuous thread cutting.
If it is com¬
manded, the machine will wait at that block and will not cut a continuous thread.
® Do not use the constant
surface speed control (G96) command. (The thread lead will be
illegal)
•The "thread cutting cycle retract"function is invalid.
I
<0 Format
G32 X (U) ••• Y (V) •- Z (W) «* F •••;
(X, Y and Z are the finishing point coordinates, and F is the thread lead (L) specification.)
(Example) Thread lead L=L0mm

Straight thread $ l=2mm |;
5-2 10 1 S 2=1mm
Cutting depth each time=0.5mm
<Progaram example>
GOO X17.0 ; |
<0
+ z GOO U-5.0 ;
G32 W13.0 F1.0 ;
GOO U5.0 ; 11
t W-13.0 ;
U-6.0 ;
l
+X
G32 W13.0 ;
GOO U6.0 ;
8-30
:
(Example) Thread lead L=2.0mm
Taper thread cutting o l=3mm
d 2=2mm
62 10 61 Cutting depth each time=0.2mm
m <Program example> I
I GOO X17.0 ?
GOO X4.6 ;
1 G32 U7.5 W15.0 F2 . 0 ;

CD O if)
•e- GOO X17.0 ? :

;
;
i
W-15.0 ; r
X4.2 ;
4
G32 U7.5 W15.0 ;
V
;
+X
GOO X17.0 ;
(Example)
1
Continuous thread cutting
+ z
r © © :I
!
!
J 31
i
+X
<Program example>
g: GOO X (U) ••• ;
1 G32 X (U) •••Z (W) ••• F« •• ;
8
G32 X (U) (W) ••• ;
||
GOO X (U) ••• ;
t
8-31 V:
!,
.
I
;
I
m
8-10-12 Variable lead thread cutting (G34) <0ption>
Variable lead thread cutting can be performed by commanding an increasing or decreasing amount of
:] lead per 1 thread rotation.
f
'! NOTICE
|
® This is the same as thread cutting with G32 exceptfor the increase or decrease of lead
(K) command.
® Portions of the lead at the beginning and end of thread cutting will be incorrect due to
delays in the servo system (while accelerating or decelerating). The program must,
1 therefore, compensate for these incorrect portions. (Refer to the section 8-10-18, G92
gang tool post cyclefor details.)
•Single block stop will not work in the G34 command block.
•A G34 command cannot perform the chamfering.
•The following operations are ignored during the chamfering.
Feed override operation ® ® ® It is considered to be 100%
I Feed hold operation
•Thread cutting (G34) cannot be commanded in the mode exceptfor G99 (feed per revo¬
lution).
® Do not command an M code when commanding continuous thread cutting. If it is com¬
manded, the machine will wait at that block and will not cut a continuous thread.
•Do not use the constant surface speed control (G96) command. (The thread lead will be
illegal.)
® The ’’thread cutting cycle retract"
function is invalid.
O Format
G34 X(U) •••Y(V) •- Z(W) •••F K ;
X(U) :1
Y(V) End point coordinate
Z(W) I
F Lead in longitudinal direction at start point
K Increase or decrease of lead per 1 thread rotation
: III!
8-32
a•i
8-10-13 Tool nose radius compeosatson (G40, G41, G42)
It sometimes happens that a tool with a round tool nose cannot be offset by the tool offset command
when performing taper or circular arc cutting. But these codes will automatically calculate the differ¬
ence and execute the appropriate offset.
:
<0 Command code

Commanding which side the material is on relative to the tool advance direction will determine
the tool nose compensation direction.
it G code Tool offset direction Material side H

G40 Cancel Cancel i
G41 To the left side in advance direction The right side in the advance direction
.
G42 To the right side in advance direction The left side in the advance direction
/Q G42 3
These are modal G codes. Do not command G41 again in G41 mode. Also, do not command
G42 again in G42 mode.
Set cancellation G40 mode if tool nose radius compensation is not needed.
O Tool nose radius amount

• Input the radius value of tool nose radius beforehand at address R on the OFFSET screen.
I
Radius value of tool nose radius V
1
{;
1
:ÿ?
;
8-33 ,
:ÿ
It
i:
<0 Imaginary tool nose number
• This is input to address T on the OFFSET screen.
• The imaginary tool nose is a point that does not actually exist but is used in order to maintain the
same conceptual approach as programming with a tool whose nose has an edge but no radius.
®
The direction of the imaginary tool nose, which is viewed from the tool nose radius center,
must be determined by the direction of the tool in cutting. That direction is then made the
! imaginary tool nose number, and the number must be input in advance to address T on the
OFFSET screen in the same way as the offset amount.
• Imaginary tool nose No.O and No.9 are recognized the tool nose radius center.
:!
Z
w I
/ \
I ( Y ) / \
i
% 1
Imaginary tool nose No.1 imaginary tool nose No.2
: /
/ \
\
l
Imaginary too! nose No.3 Imaginary tool nose No.4
imaginary tool nose No.5

I
Imaginary tool nose No.6

I
8!
Sit
1
i
i
W
ImaginaryÿtooS nose No.7 Imaginary tool nose No.8
;
8-34
I II
I
O Start-up block
The start-up block is the first block containing a G41 or G42 command after a G40 tool nose
radius compensation cancel mode.
This block carries out transient movement in which the tool nose radius compensation func¬
tions, and moves so that the center of the tool nose radius comes to a position perpendicular to
the next block.
NOTICE
®
If there is no axis movement commandfor two continuous blocks during tool nose ra¬
dius compensation, the same movement as cancellation will take place.
•The tool nose radius compensation will not function in the G74, G75, G76 and G92 \
cycles.
® The tool nose radius compensation will not function on commands inputfrom MDI.
y
• A circular arc smaller than the radius of tool nose radius cannot be machined.
:
® Grooves smaller than the diameter tool nose radius cannot be machined.
« When machining a step smaller than the radius of tool nose radius, command the step
as a straight line. \
;
•If the offset number 00 is commanded with the T code, the block will be canceled. !
•Do not issue the approach command during tool nose radius compensation.
(Example) ;
+Z
A
3
C 8 \
\ 1
D \
W F
E
\
\
R
Auxiliary vector (K=1.0)

Gb-1
<Program example>
i
•f
i
X Toot nose radius 0.8
T200 ;
G41 GOO X (A) ZJAI T02 ;
G01 X(B) Z (B) F_ ;
G01 XIC) ZIC) ;
1) G01 X (D) Z (DI ;
'
G01 X(E) 2(B) ;
i;; G01 X (F) Z (F) ;
G40 GOO X (G) Z (G) Kl.O ; r
[Set the radius value 0.8 of tool nose radius to R and imaginary tool nose number 4
to T of the OFFSET No.2.]
8-35
;
if
:\
I
8-10-14 Coordinate system setting •Spindle maximum speed setting (G50) '15
\k
II Coordinate system setting
O Format
I G50 X(U) A Y(V) ••• B ••• Z(W) ••• E ;
-
I
Input the current position of each axis in absolute coordinate system points (X, A, Y, B, Z, E).
• The setting is the distance (with code) from the position which is to be the coordinate origin
(0, 0) in the program to the current tool tip position. In other words, the G50 command speci¬
II>
fies the absolute coordinate origin position.
• If incremental (U, V, W) specifications are used, the program adds the incremental values (U,
V, W) to the already specified absolute coordinate system and then sets them as the new I
coordinate system.
NOTICE
i
® Input GOO when commanding the M, S and T codes in the first block following a GSO
h command.
* GSO is a non modal G code that is only effective in the commanded block. The other G
codes and the M, S and T codes cannot be commanded in the same block.
® Command G50
after the tool offset and tool nose radius compensation cancel.
: •If G120 is set, do not command G50for Zl-axis.
maximum speed setting

The spindle's maximum RPM can be clamped during constant surface speed control.
j5
O Format
G50 S
-
• Directly command the upper limit of the speed with the value after address S.
The spindle's maximum speed will be clamped by this upper limit value during constant
surface speed control (G96).
(Example)
GSO S2 0 00 ; The maximum spindle speed is clamped at 2,000 min'1.
NOTICE
•This is only effective during G96 (constant surface speed control) mode.
It does not operate in G97 mode.
8-36
1
S.'
li 8-10-15 Macro program call (G65 to G67)
program call
G65 P ••• L ••• <argument designations
i; With the above command, the macro program having the program number designated with P will
be called and repeated the number of times designated with L.
If the L designation is omitted, the program will be executed once.
If arguments must be designated in the macro program, use <argument designations
"Argument designation" refers to assigning a real number to the "local variables" used in the macro
program.
Macro program modal call

G66 P ••• L ••• <argument designation>
With the above command, the mode to call the macro program having the program number desig¬
nated with P will be entered. When the movement command is executed, the designated macro will
be executed L times.
With the G67; command, the modal call mode will be canceled.
8-10-16 Multiple canned cycle (G70 to G76)

These are canned cycle commands that make programming easier. By commanding a finishing shape
program, the rough-cutting tool route can be automatically determined.
G code Name Remarks

G70 Finish cycle
Valid only on gang tool post side for HEAD1 side
G71 Outside rough cutting cycle
Valid only Z-Y plane (G154) on turret side for HEAD2
G72 End face rough cutting cycle
Tool nose radius compensation valid
G73 Closed loop cutting cycle
G74 End face cutting-off cycle
Valid on both gang tool and turret
G75 Outside cutting-off cycle
Tool nose radius compensation invalid
G76 Automatic threading cycle
; IP
NOTICE
—
* The G70 G73 commands are valid only during memory operation.
* Command GOO in the block following the G70 G76 cycle.
—
•The F, S and T in the G70 command ignores the F, S and T commands in the G71, G72
and G73 commanded blocks. The F, S and T code commanded between sequence Nos.
ns to nf will be valid.
•Tool nose radius compensation can be executed to the G70 G73 cycles. —
•Refer to the NC maker’s (FANUC) operation manualfor the details of G70, G71, G72,
G73 and G75.
8-37
\
I
face cutting-off cycle (G74)
This cycle performs the movement shown in the diagram, and can dispose of cuttings from outside
diameter cutting.
If X(U) and P are omitted, only the Z-axis moves and can execute a deep hole drilling cycle.
I
+ Z<-
w
x
:1 !:
B <3,,
!
~
;
<L
! 3-
X> I *—n
(R
(Ft
>
‘
S
P3tFj. S
RT_
-< 7=XPL
(F)
) 1 R
<3., D
<3
C )
<3U
* SA 0< A i 1 £A 1
Ak t Ak Ak 0< Ak I £ A k
z
V
+ x
1
$
i
|l
1
;
8-38
1
<0 Format
G74 R(e) ;
f G74 X(U) Z(W) P(Aj) Q(Ak) R(Ad) F(f) ;
e : Return amount
This command is modal and effective until the next command.
It can also be set by parameter (No. 5139), and the parameter value can be changed by ;
program command. |
X : X coordinate at point B
U : Incremental amount of A-HB i
Z : Z coordinate at point C I
II
I W : Incremental amount of A—
| Ai : Movement amount in X direction (radius specification)
:
This is commanded without code.
Ak : Cutting amount in Z direction
This is commanded without code.
Ad : Clearance amount at cutting bottom
f : Feed rate
I
(Example)
20
1
+Z
<0 iri I
;
+x
<Program exampel>
GOO X17.0 ZO ;
R0.5 ;
Ii G74 X5.0 Z20.0 P2000 Q5000 R1 . 0 F0.05 ; if
1
8-39
threading cycle (G76)
This cycle performs the thread cutting cycle shown in the diagram.
j
+z<% z
I w
:
\
X
il
|
1
8I
:
C T5
9k ”2rtd t!fn£" c
A 1st timÿ 1
i \
( F >
( R )
B
a
i <R)
i (R)
i
v
+ x III
1
1
!
:
0
I
III
I
I
S
'
IS
ill
1
8-40
O Format
G76 P(m) (r) (a) Q (Admin) R(d); I
C G76X(U) 2(W) R(i) P(k) Q(Ad) F(L);
m —
: Number of final finishing repetitions 1 99
It can also be set by parameter (No. 5142), and the parameter value can be changed by
program command.
r : Thread finishing (chamfering) amount
—
Assuming the lead is L, this is commanded with a 2-digit numerical value (00 99) in
—
the range from 0.0L 9.9L in 0.1 Ls.
This command is model and effective until the next command.
program command.
a : Angle of tool tip (angle of thread ridge)
Six angles can be selected: 80, 60, 55, 30, 29 and 0 degrees. It is commanded with the
1
same 2-digit number as the angle. :
k
§ program command. I
m, r and a are commanded together by address P.
(Example) If m=2, r=1.2 and a=60 degrees, command with P021260.
Admin: Minimum cutting amount
If the one-time cutting amount (Ackh-AdV n-1 ) becomes smaller than Admin, it will
I-
1 be clamped to Admin. i

program command.
I d : Finishing allowance
v: This command is modal and effective until the next command.
I It can also be set by parameter (No. 5141), and the parameter value can be changed by ;
program command.
£ i : Radius difference at thread portion
3i:
: If i=0, G76 will execute straight thread cutting.
k : Thread ridge height (Distance in X-axis direction is commanded with radius value)
i
m
Ad
L
: First time cutting amount (radius specification)
: Thread lead (same as G32)
;
/ A .
60' ii
8-41 a
3
(Example)
15
I
+ Z-
<o
m fC
oj
\iX1 8 . 0
I
th
+X
1 <Program examplo
GOO X18.0 Z15.0 ;
!
G76 P031260 Q100 R0.Q5 ;
G76 X(x) Z35.0 RO P(k) Q50 F (L) ;
:|
NOTICE
1
•This isfixed to 100% during thread cycle regardless of the override switch.
i. ® Threading cycle retract <Option>
If the machine is equipped with this option, pressing the FEED HOLD Jfoj] button
I during threading will cause the program to complete threadfinishing and then return
immediately to starting point P. Pressing START jnTH ot starting point P will repeat the
I
machining that has just been performed one more time.
;
FEED HOLD
ri
/
The route
followed with
FEED HOLD
C
I Starting point
X Threading cycle route without
FEED HOLD
,
•If the machine is not equipped with the threading cycle retract option, threading will be
continued even if the FEED HOLD jf~o][ button is pressed during threading and the
•t
cycle will not stop until point C, where escape movement is completed.
li
a
8-42
§
8-10-17 Canned cycle for drilling (G80, G83, G84, G85, GST, G89)
These are drilling programs for which specific movements covering several blocks have been simpli¬
fied into one block commands.
There are three types of cycles in the Z-axis direction and two types of cycles in diameter direction (X-
axis, Y-axis) for drilling.
I ®
I
Refer to the following example. Command positioning axis and drilling axis depending
X on the each plane (Z-X, Z-Y, E-Y).
•For the detailsfor G80, G83, G84, G85, G87 and G89, refer to the operation manualfor
i CNC (FANUC) maker.
I ---
Hole base
(dowel)
© ! Rapid traverse
R point
* Cutting feed
©! !©
6 Initial point
The movements from © to (4) are executed as one cycle.

©Rapid traverse to R point
©Hole machining to hole base
©Dwell at hole base
it ©Return to R point or initial point
Pi Front drilling cycle G83
O Format
G83 Z(W) ••• R ••• Q •• P • F •• • ;
G87 X(U) R • Q •• P •••
F •• ;
i
Z(W) .... G83 hole base coordinate command
X(U) .... G87 hole base coordinate command
R : Distance from initial point to R point commanded with incremental value
I Q : Cut-in amount per time (radius value) commanded with incremental value
| P : Dwell time at hole base (command PI 000 for one second dwell)
F : Cutting feedrate
I 8-43
I
.
I
O Movement pattern
If there is a Q command, the feed will be intermittent. However, if there is no Q command, the
cutting feed will take place at once to the hole base.
1 (1) When there is no Q command
I
::!!
6
FT
i
I I
i
|initial point
Hole base (dowel)
R point
---
< Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
(|
(2) When there is a Q command
• When parameter No. 5101-bit2 is "0"
s
Remaining distance Hole base (dowel)
to hole base J
3
---
!
o
o
.
!
P3 < Rapid traverse

a\ R point -Cutting feed
“
:
Initial point
if
I 6
• When parameter No. 5101-bit2 is "1"
*1 Hole base (dowel)
4
o
i
!
UM
t: R point
|initial point
<
<
--- Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
i
I:
I
£ !
Here, the d amount is set in parameter No. 5114.
8-44
1
tapping cycle G84
O Format
G84 Z(W) ••• 0 • • R • P • • F •• ;
Z(W) 0 : G84 hole base coordinate command 1

R : Distance from initial point to R point commanded with incremental value
i
P : Dwell time at hole base (command PI 000 for one second dwell) i
F : Cutting feedrate
O Movement pattern v
(Spindle stop)
Spindle
reverse run l
Hole base (dowel)
6
i !
R point
point
<
---
Spindle forward run
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
Whether to stop the rotation when reversing directions at the hole base is set with parameter No. j
5101-bit6.
1
When parameter No. 5101-bit6 = ”0": Direction is reversed without stopping rotation.
When parameter No. 5101-bit6 = "1": Direction is reversed while stopping rotation. }
Front boring cycle G85

% O Format
X G85 Z(W) ••• R • • P •• F • •• ;
G89 X(U) • • • R • • P • •• F ••• ;
Z(W) .... G85 hole base coordinate command f

X(U) .... G89 hole base coordinate command
if R : Distance from initial point to R point commanded with incremental value
11
P : Dwell time at hole base (command PI 000 for one second dwell)
F : Cutting feedrate !
1 O Movement pattern base (dowel)
---
F 2F
-
R point
I I initial point Rapid traverse
4,
i Cutting feed
8-45 ;
cycle cancel G80
By commanding G8Q, the drilling cycle (G83 to G85) will be canceled, and the following operation
I
i
will be the normal operation.
1 ii
m
I
f
|
#
'
I
!
!
1
iI
!
i
I
HI
8-46
"
8-10-18 Single canned cycle (G90, G@2» G94)

Use of this canned cycle can simplify a cutting program equivalent to the 4 blocks of (a) cutting in—*
(b) cutting (thread cutting)-*(c) escape-*(d) return without the need to command GOO, G01 and G32. I
These can be commanded with Z-X, Z-Y, E-Y plane. 1
r~ NOTICE
® The M, S and T commands which act as cutting commands should be commanded in the
block before the G90, G92 and G94 command block as a principle. I-
® The canned cycle is valid until just
before a G code other than the 01 group (GOO, G01,
etc.) is commanded in a block after the G90, G92 and G94. To cancel the canned cycle,
v*
command GOO. (Note that caution will be required when MDI is issued.)
•While single block
completed.
is lit up, the program will not stop until the cycles (j) (4) are
•Refer to the NC maker’s (FANVC) operation manualfor the details of G90 and G94.
— :
i
!
cycle table
i
Machining on the Z-X plane is used as an example. When machining on the Z-Y plane, interpret the .
X section as Y and the U section as V.
Straight cycle Taper cycle
G90 X(U)— Z(W)— F— G90 X(U)"*Z (W) *‘R’**F ** ;
i
x
1m TFT
--
tF )
CM £
G90 u. ec \
3 iL \
1
s (R)
1R) =>,
4
1I w
z_
+\
w
z_
n
a I
G92 X(U)**’Z{W)”’F‘"; G92 X (U) ‘*'Z (W) •••R"*F*** ;
Chamfering amount x r .Chamfering amount
1
Is
G92
w (
TFT
R!
§ \
3
'4 w
£
TFT
CRJ
a
\
3,
w
z
lb w
z
h I
i'
G94 X(U)— Z(W)—F— ; G94 X(U) *"Z (W) *"R"*F"*;
I X X
'
<F) <F)
II G94 \ CC \ ir
3 3 in
(R) (R)
_w_
z_
8-47
;
i
];
I
cycle (G92)
r~ NOTICE
•Tool nose radius compensation cannot be used.
•An inaccurate thread will be created at the start and end of thread cutting. Thus, when
determining the start and end positions, the following cautions will be required.
4
.
K5-2, J£JJ
+z
---
«, Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
i
+x
® In the diagram above portions Slat the start of cutting and S2 at the end of cutting
will have inaccurate leads. Calculate the approximate values of Si and S2 with the
followingformula.
LXS
8 1= X4 L : thread lead
1800 S : spindle speed
LXS
82=-
1800
® The following limit will apply between the spindle speed and thread lead.
L XSÿs 6000 (mmlmin)
® This is fixed to 100% during thread cycle regardless of the override switch.
® Threading cycle retract <Option>
If the machine is equipped with this option, pressing the FEED HOLD |f<5]| button
during threading will cause the program to complete threadfinishing and then return
immediately to starting point F. Pressing START full at starting point P will repeat the
machining that has just been performed one more time. II
||
FEED HOLD
1 / I 11
[1 The route
11
followed with
FEED HOLD II
L
X Threading cycle route withoutStarting point
FEED HOLD
8-48
!
!
—
(a) Straight thread cutting cycle
O Format :
G92 X(U) Z(W) F ••• ;

F : This specifies the thread lead (L).
This will execute up to the following cycles (D (D. —
w
z_
r
+Z
\
X
-
*——
<* Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
B
S'
1 ©
-fl:
\
v— @
.}
+x
(Example)
Z2 Z
---
w
+ z 5 ro
x X
Rapid traverse
: Gutting feed
f-
I 1
+X
1 Since G92 is modal, the program will be as follows.

GOO X (xl) Z (zl) (M23) ;
G92 X (x2) Z (z2) F (L) ; L: thread lead
X (x3) ;
X (x4) ;
!
X (xn) ; I
GOO X **•Z •••(M24) ;
If M23 (chamfering ON) is active when G92 is command, chamfering will performed .
—
The amount of chamfering y is in the range of 0 25.5L, and it can be set to the parameter No.
5130 in O.lLs. :
8-49
I
I
——
_
(b) Taper thread cutting cycle
I <0 Format
G92 X(U) •••Z(W) •••R F ;
F : This specifies the thread lead (L).
This will execute up to the following cycles © —
1 L
:f
•QJ |about 45°
X
B
I ;
::
I
iI
ii
\
3 KD
1 ®__LL
w
*x
+
I
--- Rapid traverse

-Cutting feed
For X, command B point position.

The sign of address R is specified by the direction from pdint B to the line that runs through A’.
I I
Since G92 is a modal code, the block after G92 will execute the taper thread cutting cycle only
with a cutting in command in the X-axis direction.
(Example) 1
(D oo
•9 -e •e
31
| uV'
1
ou
i,
10
uS
1
+X
GOO X18.0 Z15.0 M2 3 ; 1
G92 X16.0 W10.0 R-1.5 F2 . 0 ; (lead 2.0} 1
X15 .0 ;
X14.0 ;
.
GOO X50.0 Z15.0 M2 4 ;
8-50
if
I !ÿ
8-10-19 Constant surface speed control (G96, G97)
The spindle speed is controlled so that the surface speed is always the specified value in correspon¬
Iii, dence with the X-axis or Y-axis position.
r NOTICE
i
•The constant surface speed control can be used on either the main or sub-spindle.
•Max. spindle speed clamp is valid during the command of constant spindle speed con¬
> trol ON (G96).
This S value, also, is memorized during constant spindle speed control OFF (G97) and
I when the program is returned to G96, S is valid again.

(If the power supply is turned OFF, this memory is deleted.)
•Constant surface speed control regulates the surface speed in correspondence with X-axis
I
,
!
;
1ti or Y-axis moving command position on program and no offset amound will be added.
® Do not use constant
surface speed control in threading.
i • Constant surface speed control cannot be used on the HEAD2 side while main spindle
i
: feed per revolution (M91) is commanded on the HEAD2 side.
t:
H Constant surface speed control ON command
O Format 1
I§ G96 S •- ;
S specifies the constant speed. For mm input, use m/min.
For inch input, use ft/min.
The constant surface speed control remains active until G 97 is commanded.
surface speed control OFF command !

O Format •v-gf
G97 S ;
S specifies the speed (min’).
If S is not specified, it will be set to the speed of the G96 command just before command of G97.
Main spindle maximum spindle speed clamp

<0 Format
G50 S ;
The maximum main spindle speed for the constant surface speed control is specified with "S" in
min’’ after G50. This command will clamp the maximum spindle speed.
it
I
i
I
8-51
§§
I
8-10-20 Feed function specification (G98, G99, G101, G103)
This function is used to designate a feed unit as [mm/rev] or [mm/minj before the cutting feed F code
is commanded.
NOTICE
:
® Both HEAD1 side and HEAD2 side are in G99 mode when the power is turn on.
® Address C and H cannot be commanded in the same block.
1
l —
•When G98 G103 are commanded, a new feed (F) command will be required.
—
•After commanding one of G98 G103 which are modal, command rotational command
suitable for this.
per minute (G98)

* Commanding G98 will execute the following F code command in [mm/min].
• If G98 is commanded in the HEAD1 side program, the feed unit for the X, A, Y, B and Zl- 1
axes will be [mm/min].
• If G98 is commanded in the HEAD2 side program, the feed unit for the Y, E, B and Z2-axes
will be [mm/min].
1
:
Feed per revolution (G99)
• Commading G99 will execute the following F code command in [mm/rev].
• If G99 is commanded in the HEAD1 side program, the feed unit for the X, A, Y, B and Zl-
axes will be [mm/rev] relative to the rotation of the main spindle.
• If G99 is commanded in the HEAD2 side program, the feed unit for the Y, E, B and Z2-axes
n
r
will be [mm/rev] relative to the rotation of the sub-spindle.
per revolution for X-power driven tool (G1Q1) Valid only on HEAD1 side .
Commanding G101 will execute the following F code command in [mm/rev].
• If G101 is commanded in the HEAD1 side program, the feed unit for the X, A, and Zl-axes
will be [mm/rev] relative to the rotation of the X-power driven tool.
per revolution for Y-power driven tool (G103) Valid on HEAD1 side and
HEAD2 side
• Commanding G103 will execute the following F code command in [mm/rev].
i
I * If G103 is commanded in the HEAD1 side program, the feed unit for theY, B and Zl-axes
will be [mm/rev] relative to the rotation of the Y-power driven tool.
• If G103 is commanded in the HEAD2 side program, the feed unit for theY, B, E and Z2-axes
will be [mm/rev] relative to the rotation of the Y-power driven tool. 1
%
1 8-52
1
;;
l!
1 8-10-21 Cylindrical interpolation (G107) <Option> '
This function machines a shape created by developing a product cylinder surface with linear interpo¬
lation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02, G03) using the Zl-axis and C-axis.
<0 Format
G107 C_ ; Cylindrical interpolation mode ON (C: Cylinder radius value)
G107 CO ; Cylinder interpolation mode OFF (Cancel)
O Coordinate system (Developed drawing)
V
-360'
vG02
— 270’
1
§ -180*
J
1 <t>2
-90'
1g.
6
+ Z<r
503*
kC=d> -O'
i
J* 1o
cy
41
20
O Cylindrical interpolation format (Plane selection command)

G150 Selection of circular interpolation plane in cylindrical interpolation
G18HOWO; Selection of circular interpolation plane in cylindrical interpolation
G02 (G03) ZfW> CflHD R F_ ;
G18 ; Standard plane selection
1
I NOTICE
| • Thisfunction is valid when the gang tool post or turret is selected on the HEAD1 side. I-
•The radius R designation must be used. Designation with I and K is not possible. §
• With cylindrical interpolation, the G02 and G03 machining path will be the reverse of
f the standard path.
G02: CCW (Counterclockwise)
:
G03: CW (Clockwise)
i
8-53 "
I
:
i
ii
:
:
O Program example
T1500 ;
G150 ;
G103 M5 ; Change F when commanding G98 instead of G103.
M8 ; G98 MS ;
M46 S1000 ;
GO Y8.0 Z10.0 CO T15 ;
| G107 C2.5~~n
I G1 Y5.0 F0.12 ; F120.0
G1 W10.0 F0.2 ; F200.0 I
1 G18 HO WO ; 1
G03 W5.5 H90.0 R5.5 F0.15 ; F150.0
G1 C180.0 F0.2 ; F200.0
G02 W5.5 H90.0 R5 . 5 F0.15 ; X command F150.0
! G1 W5.0 F0.2 ; cannot be F200.0
;
G1 Z41.0 C90.0 F0.2 ; issued F200.0
G1 Y8.0 F0.5 ; F500.0
j G18 ; 1
1 G107 CO FI
M9 ;
M48 ;
GO TO ;
G154 ;
NOTICE
®The workpiece coordinate system (G50) command cannot be issued in the cylindrical
!
interpolation mode.
1
•The rapid traverse positioning (GOO, G28, etc.) command cannot be issued in the cylin¬
drical interpolation mode.
•Do not turn the cylindrical interpolation ON/ OFF during tool nose radius compensa¬ I
tion (G41, G42) command.
; Tool nose radius compensation can be executed during the cylindrical interpolation
IlfII
mode.
111
Iff
I I
III
II
I
8-54
ii
I
,. ,
: >:
": 8-10-22 Pole coordinate interpolation (G112, G113) <Option>
This function machines the shape looking from the product end with the linear interpolation (G01) and
circular interpolation (G02, G03) commands using the Y-axis and C-axis.
t
O Format (Independent command)
G112: Pole coordinate interpolation mode ON
G113: Pole coordinate interpolation mode OFF (cancel)
1
O Coordinate system
+C 1
f ;
:
G03,
2 \
1
P5, / !
-Y +Y
!:
/
Si
Qr7'j
:
1 GO$ l
pet P7
Y (V) : Diameter value
|
C (H) : Radius value ;ÿ
1 End mill diameter : <j>4

I
-c
i
O Circular interpolation format
G150 ; \
G02 (G03) Y£V) C£ffi R_ F_ ;
NOTICE
•Thisfunction is valid only when the turret is selected on the HEAD1 side.
•With pole coordinate interpolation, the G02 and G03 machining path will be the same
as the standard path.
G02: CW (Clockwise)
:
;
ij
G03: CCW (Counterclockwise)
® The Gil3 mode will be entered when the RESET key is pressed. 1
« The G codes that can be commanded in the G112 mode are G01-G04, G40-G42, G65,
G98 and G99. GOO cannot be commanded.
I
(i
l
i
Y; 8-55
;
t
:
5:
i :
.
! ;
!
!
r-
1 <0 Program example
;
T1400 ;
J
G150
‘i
__
G98 M5 ;
M8
M46 S1000 ;
;
!
GO Y20.0 Z10.0 CO T14 ; PI
G112 ;
I G1 W5.0 F200 ;
; G1 Y8.0 C4.0 ; P2
G1 Y-4.0 ; P3
I G03 V-5.0 H-2.5 R2 . 5 F150.0 ; . . . P4
%: :
!
G1 CO F200 ; P5
G03 YO C-4.5 R4.5 F150 ; P6
1;
G1 Y8.0 F200 ; P7
: G1 C4.0 ; P8
i
G113 ;
5
I GO Y20.0 ;
M9 ;
M48 ;
G154 ;
i
*
i
s
i
I
Ii
I
;li
I
1
i
!
;
1:
1
J
i ||
!•
;/ ;
|r I
8-56
i,
I
8-10-23 Coordinate system setting
(G120, G121, G130, G131, G132Kk, G140, G141)
NOTICE
®
Before commanding G131 or G141, the Zl-axis coordinate system setting (G120) must
be commanded at the HEAD1 beforehand.
Si coordinate system setting (G120) <Command on HEAD1 side>
1: O Format
I1 G120Z_ ;
• Set the absolute zero point of the Zl-axis.
The absolute zero point is the point (front end of material when cut-off) commanded with G120
1 Z0.
• Before commanding G131 or G141, the Zl-axis coordinate system setting (G120) must be
i
commanded at the HEAD1 beforehand.

• When only G120 is commanded, it will be interpreted as the G 120 Z0 command.
• When commanding G120, do not command G50 for Zl-axis.
O Method of Zl-axis absolute zero point setting with G12Q (Zl-axis coordinate system setting)
•Setting method 1
©Light the MEMORY g.
©Light the AIR CUT |FJ
If
©Display program (HEADl) to be executed on the screen.
iff ©Light the HEADl g. i
©Light the Zl-AXIS STROKE CHECK |zT].
(One cycle stop will be automatically validated.)
©Press the START jfjfll button.
One cycle of the program will be executed, and the Zl-axis maximum stroke will be set on
the machining data screen. I
©After one cycle stop, light the SIMUL , and then light the MACRO pa].
©Light the INITIAL POSITION g .
©Press the START |j|button. 'i;
The Zl-axis will move to the absolute zero point, X-axis will move to the cut-off complete
position and the other axes will move to the reference point. The Zl-axis G120 Z0 setting ;;
will be made.
•Setting method 2 T;
©Using MDI or JOG operation, move the Zl-axis to the absolute zero point position.
©Command G120 Z0 ; at the HEADl.
8-57
I
I
;
I
I
•Setting method 3
Using memory operation, set the Zl-axis absolute zero point.
Program example <HEAD1>
i NO;
;( M5 ;
Mil ;
G28 WO TO ;
I GOO Z__ ; Command the Zl-axis absolute zero point
i G120Z0;
M99 ;
coordinate system setting for re-chucking (G120) ccommand from HEAD1>

1 O Format
G120 Z_ ; or G120 W ; coordinate system setting for re-chucking
Example [HEAD1]
f Position of collet open for re-chucking (T)

GOO 7,150-0 ;
MO 5 ; Main spindle rotation stop
G04 U0.1 ; Dwell 0.1 second
Ml 2 ? Barstock gripping unit (option) on
Mil ; Collet open
GOO Z0 ; Position of collet close for re-chucking
Z : value commanded in preceding G120 Z _ *
'
G120 Z 150.0 ; Zl-axis coordinate system setting for re-chucking

Z : value commanded in Z_ at (D above
M10 ; Collet close
Ml 3 ; Barstock gripping unit (option) off
M03 Main spindle forward rotation
Machining process
!
Barstock absence detection process
Mil ;
GOO Z150 . 0 ; Z is the preceding value of Zl-axis coordinate system setting
for re-chucking
G120 ZO ; Reset Zl-axis coordinate setting to the setting at program start
M99 ?
® After completion of barstock absence detection process, be sure to reset Zl-axis coordinate
system setting to the setting at program start (G120 Z0).
8-58
coordinate system recovery (G121) cCommand on HEAD1 side>
O Format
G121 Z_ ;
•The Zl-axis coordinate system setting (G120) that has been made can be recovered to the ,
G121 command even after the power has been turned OFF. Move the Zl-axis to the G120 Z0
from the current position using rapid traverse with the G121 command, and set the coordinate
system. Then, move to the coordinate value commanded with G121 with rapid traverse.
:
•When only G121 is commanded, it will be interpreted that G121 Z0 has been commanded.
It
1I .........
fflZ2-axis coordinate system selection (G130, G131, G132Kk)
!
'h:
1
G130
G131 .........
<Command on HEAD2 side>
Z2-axis coordinate system setting cancel
Z2-axis coordinate system setting at part pick-up
G132Kk .... Z2-axis coordinate system setting during back working machining
k: Part length from sub-spindle end (mm)
!
•Command G130, G131 and G132Kk independently.

•Before commanding G131, the Zl-axis coordinate system setting (G120) must be com¬
manded beforehand.
•Command G131 while the Z1-axis is stopped.
• Even if the Zl-axis is moved after G131 is commanded, the Z2-axis absolute value will not
£
be affected. To reflect the movement on the Z2-axis, command G131 again.
•The k value commanded with G132Kk is a modal value.
I
,
:ÿ •Before commanding G132Kk, input a value (with E-axis at the reference point, distance be¬
tween tool tip of cut off tool and tool tip for back machining.) of E-axis in geometry offset 2 :
screen.
•Even if the E-axis
•:
is moved
••
after G132• is commanded, the Z2-axis absolute value willV not be
.. ‘
C>' '.**
*
5
‘
affected. To reflect the movement on the Z2-axis, command G132 again.

•Command G132Kk after selecting the tool with offset cancel (TOO) state in HEAD2.
V-
O Format
L For G131
1
•r
G131 Z2-axis coordinate system setting at part pick-up
I:
GOG Z_ ; sub-spindle cap end position from front end of main spindle material
Example: When Z-3.0 is commanded, the Z2-axis will move to a position 3 ;
I mm before the sub-spindle cap end from the front end of the mate-
rial.
G130 ; Restores the Z2-axis coordinate system setting.
3
r
!
8-59
I
For G132
G132kk ; Z2-axis coordinate system setting during back working machining
GOO Z_ ; Position of sub-spindle part end from turret end
i Example: When Z-2.0 is commanded, the Z2-axis will move to a position 2
mm before the sub-spindle part end from the front end of the tool
.
at the turret.
G140 : Restores the Z2-axis coordinate system setting.
© 221-72
o
Xk Sub-spindie
j
I:
coordinate system setting (G140, G141) <Command on HEAD2 side>
G140. Cancel
G141 E-axis coordinate system setting
•Command G140 and G141 independent block.
•Before commanding G14I, the Zl-axis coordinate system setting (G120) must be com¬
manded beforehand. I
* Before commanding G141, input a value (with E-axis at the reference point, distance between
tool tip of cut off tool and tool tip of tool on the turret) of E-axis in geometry offset 2 screen.
•Command G141 while the Zl-axis is stopped, after selecting the tool with offset cancel state
in HEAD2.
•Even if the Zl-axis is moved after G141 is commanded, the E-axis absolute value will not be
affected. To reflect the movement on the E-axis, command G141 again.
!
I* •Command either one of G132Kk or G141, do not command both, when the counterface drill
sleeve is used on the toolholder and is used for front and back working.
O Format
G141 ;.... Cancel
GOOE_ ; Turret tool end position from main spindle material front end
Example: When E-1G.0 is commanded, the turret tool end will move 10mm in
the E-axis minus direction from the material front end.
G140 ; Return to the E-axis coordinate system setting.
421-51
y
Guide bushing
4-U
8-60
i
1! I
£
I ]ÿ
IS 8-10-24 Plane selection function (G150, 154, 158)

V;
If circular interpolation or tool nose radius compensation is commanded on a plane that includes the
A, B or E axes, the plane selection G17, G18 or G19 must be commanded. In this case, the G15G,
G154 or G158 plane selection must be made beforehand. Refer to section 8-10-3 for the format.
G150 : Z-X plane selection function f.
G154 : Z-Y plane selection function
G158 : E-Y plane selection function
NOTICE I
•Command these in independent block.
!*
•Before commanding G150, G154 or G158, cancel (G40) the tool nose radius compensa¬ \)
tion (G4I, G42).
1 |
8-10-25 Approach position setting (G170)
position setting (G170) cCommand on NEAD1 side>
This command sets the approach position. ;
,
O Format .
G170 X_ Y_ ;
G01 Z_ ,A_ ;
The tool commanded with ,A is positioned to the position set with X orY inG170.
£
8-10-26 Tool select with short cut route (G171)
Tool selects without moving X-axis (gang tool) or Y-axis (turret) if tool select T code is commanded
I with G171 in the same block.
O Format
G171 T_ ;
NOTICE
•Command with carefor the distance between the material and the tool.
|gg|
:
'
;
"
l: ?!
8-61
:
:
;
8-10-27 Sub-spindle indexing (G200, G201)
This function indexes the sub-spindle to 360° in 15° increments.
I
O Format
G200 C_ ; Sub-spindle indexing ... (C: Absolute)
I G200 H_ ; Sub-spindle indexing ... (H: Incremental)
G201 C_ ; Sub-spindle indexing (command angle + ISO0) ... (C: Absolute)
1 M59 ; Sub-spindle unclamp
;
MOTICE -
'
i ?
i •G200 and G201 must be commanded independent blocks.

* M03, M04 and M59 cannot be commanded in the same Mock as the C or H command.
1 ® The first indexing command must be executed with C (absolute).
® C (absolute) command must be used with the G201 command.
11
'! il
!
8-10-28 C-axis coordinate system shift (G202, G203) Ilf

This function shifts or returns the C-axis coordinate system of the main spindle by 180°.
I
NOTICE
® G202 and G203 must be commanded independent blocks.
O Format
G202 ; Return the C-axis coordinate system
1
G203 ; Shift the C-axis coordinate system by 180°
aill
11
I
s
i!
8-62
.
8-10-29 Threading cycle (G184, G284, G384, G484)
j.
A series of operations for tapping or die machining can be carried out.
—
.
{
Machining — reverse, retract —
dwell for 1 sec. forward run
NOTICE
®Command these independent blocks.
I Command G25 (spindlefluctuation detection OFF) before commanding G184 or G284.

® During the threading cycle, the override will be
fixed at 90% during cutting and 100%
during the return regardless of the switch setting.
•The spindle rotation will change to forward rotation when the threading cycle ends.
•An axis other than that determined with theformat cannot be commanded.
|
® Cancel (G40) the tool nose radius compensation (G41, G42)
before starting.
•Parameter setting according to various cutting conditions
Tapping reverse rotation waiting time for G184: No.9206 250 =
Tapping reverse rotation waiting timefor G284: No.9207 = 200
Tapping reverse rotation waiting timefor G384: No.9208 =50
Tapping reverse rotation waiting timefor G484: No.9209 = 150
The above are initial setting values. They may have to be changed depending on cut¬
ting conditions (rotation speed andfeed rate). Adjust them to appropriate values so as
to suit particular cutting conditions.
(T)If tap sleeve or tapping collet is pulled out when spindle starts reverse rotation or
tapping tool is just to leavefrom workpiece, increase the above setting value. *
rj;
(2)If tap sleeve or tapping collet is pressed in when spindle starts reverse rotation or
tapping tool is just to leave from workpiece, decrease the above setting value or
feed command (F value) of program. ,
•Override at cutting in can be set in thefollowing parameters.
For G184:prm. No. 9215 setting range 0 to 100 (unit %) default 90% 'I
For G284:prm. No. 9216 setting range 0 to 100 (unit %) default 90%
For G384:prm. No. 9217 setting range 0 to 100 (unit %) default 90% ;
For G484 : prm. No. 9218 setting range 0 to 100 (unit %) default 90%
It I
i
V
8-63
1s
({
threading cycle (G184) cCommand on HEAD1 side>

O Format
I G99 ;
G25 ;
_
G184 Z(W) F_ ;
G26 ;
Z(W) : Thread cutting amount
F : Thread pitch
. Back working threading cycle (G284) cCommand on HEAD2 ssde>

i O Format
G99 ;
G25 ;
_
G284 Z(W) F__ ;
G26 ;
Z(W) : Thread cutting amount
F : Thread pitch
threading cycle (G384) <Command on HEAD1 side>

'f O Format
!
G101 ;
M36 S_ ;
G384 X(U)_F_;
X(U) Thread cutting amount
F : Thread pitch
M36 : X-power driven tool motor forward rotation, (right hand thread) ;
Command M37 (X-power driven tool motor reverse rotation) for the left hand thread.
if§
flk
8-64
3
threading cycle (G484) cCommand on both HEAD1 and HEAD2 sides>
O Format
G103 ;
M46 S_ ;
G484 Y(V) F_ ; _ 1
Y(V) : Thread cutting amount
F : Thread pitch
M46 : Y-power driven tool motor forward rotation (right hand thread).
Command M47 (Y-power driven tool motor reverse rotation) for the left hand thread.
8-10-30 Cross rigid tapping cycle (G784)

A series of operations for tapping can be carried out.
Machining reverse, retract
-*ÿ
MOTICE
®Command the thread cutting amount with address U (incremental).
® Command M38
before commanding G784.
; •If S6000 or higher is commanded in the G784 address S command, an alarm will occur.
I •Thefeedfunction designation will be G98 (mm/min) when the G784 cycle is executed.
rigid tapping cycle (G784) cCommand on HEAD1 side>

t Command this on the X power-driven tool side.
O Format
M38 ; X-power driven tool motor stop
_
G784 U F_ M36 S_ ;
U : Thread cutting amount
F : Thread pitch
S : Tool speed
M36 ; X-power driven tool motor forward rotation.
Command M37 (X-power driven tool motor reverse rotation) for the left hand thread. l
8-65
•I
:
s
8-10-31 Head2 single operation block jump (6000 J j)
This function is to jump from block of G9Q0 Jj to sequence number Nj in HEAD2 [gjgj single opera¬
tion.
When machine runs in HEAD2 pgjjjjj
single operation, be sure to command this block jump in head to
skip unnecessary program for main side machining.
Sample program
Run in one cycle operation (light up one cycle key in SIMUL mode until a program
j will stop at M20. Press HEAD2 j|gjg|
key (light up HEAD2 key). Press start button jf~|| to run in
jj
,
HEAD2 single operation (to finish only a workpice chucked in sub-spindle). In this case, com¬
mand this block jump function as explained below.
O Format
[HEAD 2]
01234 ;
: Starting program
| :
M20 ;
M2 5 ;
: Machining to cut-off end
Parts ejection
} G900 Jj ; HEAD2 single operation block jump
: Main side operation j: Sequence number (decimal input impossible)
with turret Example: G900 J50 ;
: Parts pick-up :,
Sequence number N50 ;
Nj ; 1
M99 ;
I
f
8-68
{!
i; m
8-11 HEAD1 side auxiliary functions (M functions) v
HEAD1 side M code table
Code Description Code Description K
MOO Program stop M68 Z1 -axis torque limit ON
M01 Optional stop A M69 Z1 -axis torque limit OFF
M02 Program end
MOO Main spindle forward rotation M77 Single block key invalid
,
M04 Main spindle reverse rotation A M78 Single block key valid
A M05 Main spindle stop M79 ,Q command valid I
M06 Main spindie clamp ON M80 Barstock absence detection
: A M07 Main spindie damp OFF M81 Special block skip release f
ft
s
M08
A M09
M10
C-axis ON
C-axis OFF
Main collet close
A
M82
M83
Main/sub-spindie synchronous rotation control ON
Main/sub-spindie synchronous rotation control OFF
Parte conveyor ON
A M11 Main collet open A *M85 Parts conveyor OFF
*M12
A*M13
Grip ON (feed torque OFF)
Grip OFF (feed torque ON) MSS Override 100% ON
;
f:
A M89 Override 100% OFF
M19 M12 valid during spindie rotation
| /
i t>- M20 One cycle stop M98 Subprogram call 8
M21 Error detect ON M99 End of program
A M22 Error detect OFF
M23 Chamfering ON M1 10 Sub-cqliet close
A M24 Chamfering OFF A Mill Sub-collet open
M25 Coolant ON
A M26 Coolant OFF A M121 Turret index speed high speed
M27 Broken cut-off tool detection ON Ml 22 Turret index speed medium speed
M1 23 Turret index speed low speed
*M29 Rigid tap (front) *M125 Coolant 0.8MPa ON
M30 Program end A-&M126 Coolant 0.8MPa OFF
|
M3S X power-driven tool motor forward rotation A M131 Use turret on HEAD1 side
M37 X power-driven too! mbtorreverse rotation M132 Use turret on HEAD2 side
V i
» A M38 X power-driven too! motor stop
M140 Z1-E synchronous control ON !'
1 M40 Z1 -Z2 synchronous control ON A M141 Z1-E synchronous control OFF
A M41 Z1-Z2 synchronous control OFF
,
m
M46 Y power-driven tool motor forward rotation .
M47 Y power-driven too! motor reverse rotation M150 Spare M code 1 ON
$ A M48 Y power-driven too! motor stop A M151 Spare M code 1 OFF
M152 Spare M code 2 ON if
M50 X-Y synchronous control ON A M153 Spare M code 2 OFF
r®
A M51 X-Y synchronous control OFF M154 Spare M code 3 ON if I
1 M52 Y-X synchronous control ON A M155 Spare M code 3 OFF
A M53 Y-X synchronous control OFF M156 Spare M code 4 ON
_ ___
A M157 Spare M code 4 OFF
’
§'
M62 Automatic barfeeder feed torque OFF Spare M code 5 ON
A M63 Automatic barfeeder feed torque ON A&M159 Spare M code 5 OFF
Chip conveyor ON Spare M code 6 ON ji
A*M65 Chip conveyor OFF A*M161 Spare M code 6 OFF
}y.
M200 M999— Wait

P
i
When power is switched on, the M code with this mark A. will automatically be selected.
is M code for option. I
mi
» 8-67
'•
I
Il
I $
l
r
;
t
r
%
it
I
1 ,;c rl;
1
I
i
V"
stop commands
O MOO : Program stop
When MOO is commanded during automatic operation, after the block execution is pi
completed, the execution of the following program will be stopped. When the START
Imi button is pressed, the automatic operation will resume.
If the program is stopped with MOO, the main spindle rotation will stop. However, if -
"ROTATE SPINDLE AT MOO" is set to YES on the keep relay conversational setting
screen, the main spindle will continue rotating.
stop commands
O M01 : Optional stop
When the "OPT. STOP" ji»j
lamp is lit, the machine will stop at the position where
the MO1 code is executed during automatic operation. Pressing the START |T1[ key
will restart automatic operation.
spindle rotation commands

O M03 : Main spindle forward rotation
The main spindle will start rotation in the forward direction.
This cannot be commanded when C-axis ON (M08), main spindle clamp ON (M06) or
grip ON (Ml 2) is commanded.
i
O M04 : Main spindle reverse rotation
The main spindle will start rotation in the reverse direction.
This cannot be commanded when C-axis ON (M08), main spindle clamp ON (M06) or
grip ON (Ml 2) is commanded.
O M05 : Main spindle stop
The main spindle rotation will stop. m
is
spindle clamp ON / OFF commands
<> M06 : Main spindle clamp ON
#
The main spindle will be clamped.
A
This cannot be commanded while the main spindle is rotating. (Issue the command
M05.)
O M07 : Main spindle clamp OFF
The main spindle will be unclamped.
ON / OFF commands
I
O M08 : C-axis ON
The C-axis control will turn ON.
This cannot be commanded while the main spindle is clamped. (Issue the command
M07.)
O M09 : C-axis OFF
The C-axis control will turn OFF. (M07 transaction is executed at the same time)
8-68
:?r;
m }
i
collet close / open commands

O
c M10 : Main collet close
This command will close the main collet, and the "COLLET CLOSE" |||Jlamp on the j
operation panel will light. V
O Mil : Main collet open
This command will open the main collet, and the "COLLET OPEN" lamp on the
operation panel will light.
unit OM / OFF (Feed torque OFF / ON) <Option>

O M12 : Grip ON (feed torque OFF)
The gripping unit will turn ON and will grip material.
A signal to stop the automatic barfeeder’s feed torque will be output.
This cannot be commanded while the main spindle is rotating. (Issue the command
M05.)
To command this while the main spindle is rotating, issue M19 first.
O M13 : Grip OFF (feed torque ON)
The gripping unit will turn OFF.
The signal to stop the automatic barfeeder's feed torque will be released.
The M12 command valid (M19) state during main spindle rotation will be released.
Ml 2 valid during main spindle rotation command

O M19 : M12 valid during spindle rotation
M19 command will enable the M12 (grip ON) command during spindle rotation.
It remains effective until M13 is commanded or the RESET key jjf’j
is pressed.
cycle stop command

O M20 : One cycle stop
This command will increase the counter value by 1 each time it is commanded. When
the "ONE CYCLE" fp]lamp on the operation panel is lit, the program will stop at the
point where the M20 command is executed. Pressing the START button will
resume automatic operation.
Error detect ON / OFF

O M21 : Error detect ON
I--
This is used to avoid comer roundness.
£ O M22 : Error detect OFF
This is used to smoothly connect the blocks.
When the power is turned ON, the M22 "Error detect OFF" state is valid.
t 1
8-69
I
1
I
:
v
r
ON / OFF commands
O M23 : Chamfering ON "-"I
This command will carry out diagonal thread finishing at the end of the thread using
the G92 (threading cycle) or G76 (automatic threading cycle) commands.
;
O M24 : Chamfering OFF
This command will not carry out diagonal thread finishing at the end of the thread
1 using the G92 (threading cycle) or G76 (automatic threading cycle) commands. This is
- used when there is an undercut in the threading.
: When the power is turned ON, the M24 "Chamfering OFF" state is valid.
ON / OFF commands
I gji :
O M25 : Coolant ON
This command is used to start the coolant oil pump motor and start discharge of the
coolant oil.
The coolant oil will be discharged when the COOLANT A key switch on the opera¬
tion panel is set to ON (|), but will not be discharged if set to OFF (0).
When a chip conveyor is installed and controlled from the machine unit side, a signal
to turn the chip conveyor ON will be output with this M code command.
O M26 : Coolant OFF
This command will stop the coolant oil pump motor.
Execute coolant O.SMPa OFF <option> (M126).
Note that if M25 is commanded on the HEAD2 side, the pump motor will not stop.
1
y
V.
Broken cut-off tool detection command <Option>
O M27 : Broken cut-off tool detection ON
s
Command M27 after the product pick-up is completed. This command will detect
; broken cut-off tools.
tap <Option>
O M29 : Rigid tap
The front rigid tap mode will be commanded.
Program format
G150 ;
G99 M05 ; Feed/rev. spindle stop
M29 S_ ; Rigid tap speed: S
G84 W_ F_ ; Rigid tap machining length: W, pitch: F
G80 : Rigid tap mode release
G154 ;
:
8-70
I
Program end commands
O M02 : Program end
(
The automatic operation will end, and the machine will stop.
O M30 : Program end
The automatic operation will end, and the machine will stop. :
:
power-driven tool motor rotation commands
O M36 : X power-driven tool motor forward rotation
The power driven tool will rotate in the forward direction.
Command the speed S at the same time. 5
O M37 : X power-driven tool motor reverse rotation
. The power driven tool will rotate in the reverse direction.
w Command the speed S at the same time.
I
O M38 : X power-driven tool motor stop i
The power driven tool will stop.
m
HZ1-Z2 synchronous control commands
M40 (M41) on HEAD1 and M40 (M41) on HEAD2 wait each other.
O M40 : Z1-Z2 synchronous control ON
The Z2-axis will be synchronized to the Z1-axis movement command.
This control can be released by pressing the RESET j # j.
'ÿV
This command is valid only when the MODE key "SIMUL" is pressed, and
AUTO operation is being executed. I
O M41 : Z1-Z2 synchronous control OFF
The M40 command will be released.
power-driven tool rotation commands

O M46 : Y power-driven tool motor forward rotation
The power driven tool will rotate in the forward direction.
Command the speed S at the same time.
1
I O M47 : Y power-driven tool motor reverse rotation
$ The power driven tool will rotate in the reverse direction.
I Command the speed S at the same time.
O’ M48 : Y power-driven tool motor stop
The power driven tool will stop.
i synchronous control commands

O M50 : X-Y synchronous control ON
The Y-axis will be synchronized to the X-axis movement command.
sI This control can be released by pressing the RESET j # j.
8-71
£
;
1
1
f
g§
I
&
:
!
?
!
O MSI : X-Y synchronous control OFF

synchronous control commands

O M52 : Y-X synchronous control ON
The X-axis will be synchronized to the Y-axis movement command.
This control can be released by pressing the RESET j.
O M53 : Y-X synchronous control OFF
barfeeder feed torque ON / OFF

O M62 : Automatic barfeeder feed torque OFF
The automatic barfeeder feed torque will be turned OFF.
O M63 : Automatic barfeeder feed torque ON
The automatic barfeeder feed torque will be turned ON.
The M63 "Automatic barfeeder feed torque ON" state is entered when the power is
.-iV: turned ON.
conveyor commands <Option>

Commands cannot be issued to the chip conveyor wires to the chip conveyor 3-phase power supply
terminal block XT201 (wire No. 204).
!;ÿ
O M64 : Chip conveyor ON I
A signal to turn the chip conveyor ON will be output.
<0 M65 : Chip conveyor OFF
A signal to turn the chip conveyor OFF will be output.
The M65 "Chip conveyor OFF" state is entered when the power is turned ON.
5
1
torque limit ON / OFF commands
O M68 : Zl-axis torque limit ON 1
The Zl-axis servomotor torque will be limited.
5 At this time, the rapid traverse rate for all the axes will be 25% or less, and the cutting
feed will be 70% or less. i
If an alarm occurs, it can be released by turning the CNC power OFF.
O’ M69 : Zl-axis torque limit OFF IS
The Zl-axis servomotor torque limit is released.
NOTICE
® Do not issue the Zl-axis movement command in the same block as an M68 or M69
command.
8-72
1
BLOCK key invalid / valid commands
O M77 : SINGLE BLOCK key invalid
This command will be active, even if the "SINGLE BLOCK" [Q]
lamp is "ON", until
M78 is commanded.
O M78 : Single block key valid
The SINGLE BLOCK key invalid (M77) state will be released.
signal output function command

O M79 : ,Q command valid
The notch signal output function (,Q command) will be validated for one block.
This function will execute the M code (auxiliary function) in the block where it is
: commanded when the remaining movement distance has reached the specified posi¬
tion.
The specified position means the remaining movement distance from the block finish¬
ing point.
O Command method
M79 :
GOO (GOI) X
— M ;
-ÿ Remaining movement distance
NOTICE
igj
®This address reads "comma Q".
•Enter the M79 command just before the blockfor each "Q" command.
•MOO, M01, M20, M79, M98 and M99 can not be used with the ”Q" command.
•The G codes that can be used with the "Q” command are only GOO and G01.
1
,1
I
:
8-73
i)
Barstock absence detection commands
O MS® : Barstock absence detection
When the barstock absence signal is output, this command will execute the /code pro¬
gram up to the special block skip release (M81) command.
If a barstock absence signal is not output, the / code program up to the special block
skip release (M81) will be skipped.
If the keep relay KOQ-bit 5 is set to "1”, the program will wait for the HEAD2 side M80
command.
O’ MSI : Special block skip release
When the barstock absence signal is output, the / code program from M80 will be
executed.
1 Command the program required when barstock is absent between M80 and M81 using
/ codes.
If the barstock absence signal is not output, the / code program between M80 and M81
will not be executed.
synchronous rotation control ON / OFF

O M82 : Main/sub-spindle synchronous rotation control ON
When the MODE key "SIMUL" is pressed, the program will wait for the HEAD2
side M82, and will carry out synchronous rotation. (Phase synchronous rotation con¬
trol can be executed by setting keep relay KOI-bit 6 to 1.)
Issue the M82 command for phase synchronous rotation control after the G25 com¬
mand.
Issue the G26 command after the phase synchronous rotation control is completed.
When the MODE key HBAD1 |gg| is pressed, the process will be completed immedi¬
ately.
I O M83 : Main/sub-spindle synchronous rotation control OFF
When the MODE key "SIMUL” ||jj|is pressed, the program will wait for the HEAD2
side M83, and the synchronous rotation will be released.
When the MODE key HEAD1 |gg| is pressed, the process will be completed immedi¬
ately.
I
conveyor commands <Option>
O’ M84 : Parts conveyor ON
The parts conveyor will start moving.
If the operation is not interrupted, the conveyor will automatically stop after approxi¬
mately 20 seconds. (Set with PMC TIMER No. 6.)
O MSS : Parts conveyor OFF
The parts conveyor will stop.
8-74
100% ON / OFF commands
O M88 : Override 100% ON
The cutting feedrate will be executed with the program commanded value.
The OVERRIDE (0 to 150%) setting will be invalidated and instead fixed at 100%.
This command is invalid while the TORQUE LIMIT is lit.
O M89 : Override 100% OFF
The cutting feedrate will be the speed obtained by multiplying the OVERRIDE (0 to
if
! 'ÿ
150%) with the program commanded value, and OVERRIDE will be validated.
call command
O M98 : Subprogram call
The 01234 program will be called and repeated five times with the M98 P51234 com¬
mand.
of program command
O M99 : End of program
This is commanded at the end of the HEAD1 main program and subprogram.
When commanded at the HEAD! main program, the program will return to the head
of the HEAD! main program.
When commanded at the HEAD1 subprogram, the program will return to the HEAD!
main program.
close / open commands
1
Only when MODE is set to "SIMUL" j|||
and during MEMORY operation, this command is
effective.
O MHO : Sub-collet dose
1 This command will close the sub-spindle collet, and the "SUB COLLET CLOSE” |||j|
lamp on the operation panel will light.
I O Mill : Sub-collet open
This command will open the sub-spindle collet, and the "SUB COLLET OPEN" ||p|
lamp on the operation panel will light.
1 index speed commands

I The M121, M122 and M123 turret index speed will differ according to the RAPID TRAVERSE
I OVERRIDE (%) setting.
O M121 : Turret index speed high speed (100%)
The turret will index at a high speed.
O M122 : Turret index speed medium speed (25%)
The turret will index at a medium speed.
O Ml 23 : Turret index speed low speed (5%)
The turret will index at a low speed.
8-75
:
f
:
;
O.SyPa ON / OFF commands <Option>

The coolant oil can be supplied when T1200, T1400, T1600 or T1800 is selected.
<C> M125 : Coolant 0.8MPa ON
The coolant 0.8MPa pump motor will start, and the coolant oil will be discharged.
Coolant ON (M25) is executed. The coolant is discharged when the coolant 0.8MPa
ON / OFF switch is ON |
( ) on the operation panel, but is not discharged when
it is OFF (©).
O M126 : Coolant ®.8MPa OFF
The coolant 0.8MPa pump motor will stop.
usage mode
I O M131 : Use turret (except E-axis) on HEAD1 side
When the MODE key "SIMUL" is pressed, the program will wait for the HEAD2
side Ml 31, and then the turret (except E-axis) can be used on the HEAD1 side.
When the MODE key HEAD1 is pressed, the command is ignored and the pro¬
cess will be completed immediately.
O M132 : Use turret on HEAD2 side
When the MODE key "SIMUL" |gg| is pressed, the program will wait for the HEAD2 1
side Ml 32, and then the turret can be used on the HEAD2 side.
When the MODE key HEAD! jjgjgj is pressed, the command is ignored and the pro¬
cess will be completed immediately. |
synchronous control commands

M40 (M41) on HEAD1 and M40 (M41) on HEAD2 wait each other.
O M140 : Zl-E synchronous control ON
The E-axis will be synchronized to the Zl-axis movement command.
This control can be released by pressing the RESET [ # j.
This command is valid only when the MODE key"SIMUL” is pressed, and
AUTO operation is being executed.
O M141 : Zl-E synchronous control OFF I
The M140 command will be released. 1
HI:
II
I1
8-76
I
*
i USpare M code output ON / OFF commands
O M150 : Spare M code 1 ON
The spare M code output 1 contact signal will be turned ON (closed).
O M151 : Spare M code 1 OFF
The spare M code output 1 contact signal will be turned OFF (opened).
<0 M155 : Spare M code 3 OFF
O M158 : Spare M code 5 ON <Option>
O M159 : Spare M code 5 OFF <Option>
O Ml60 : Spare M code 6 ON <Option>
.
;
8-77
i
commands
: O M200 — M999: Wait
All of the M codes from M2Q0 to M999 can be used as wait commands.
When the"SIMULr' |gg| operation is on, the next block will not be advanced to until
i the same M3-digit command is found in the HEAD2 side.
NOTICE
®
If one of thefollowing alarms occurs while the wait M code (including M40, M41, M80,
M82, M83, M131, Ml32, M140 and M141 ) is commanded, the single Mock stop will
i |
f occur, and the waiting will be forcibly ended. When one of the following alarms does
occur, release the cause and then confirm that the wait M codes accurately match be¬
fore restarting. If there is an error, move the cursor with the EDIT mode P$T| and then
restart.
1 Alarm 2071 LOW LEVEL OF COOLANT OIL
t: Alarm 2074 NO STOCK ON SINGLE BARFEEDER
Alarm 2075 NO STOCK ON AUTOMATIC BARFEEDER
Alarm 2077 PART EJECT ERROR
9 M80 is not the command of wait normally.
Set keep relay K00-bit5 to "1", ifM80 is used as a wait command.
c;'
IP
1
II
|
8-78
;
11 !
I
8-12 HEADS side auxiliary functions (M functions)

HEAD2 side P code table
Code Description Code Description
MOO Program stop M75 Back machining block skip valid
M01 Optional stop A M76 Back machining block skip invalid 5
M02 Program end M77 Single block key invalid
M03 Sub-spindle forward rotation A M78 Single block key valid I
, M04 Sub-spindle reverse rotation M79 ,Q command valid ;
ill
A M05 Sub-spindle stop M80 Barstock absence detection r
M81 Special block skip release
M82 Main/sub-spindle synchronous rotation control ON I
I
lii A M83
*M84
Main/sub-spindle synchronous rotation control OFF
Parts conveyor ON :
A M10 Sub-collet dose A*M85 Parts conveyor OFF
M11 Sub-coiiet open
Cutting feed override 100% ON
'!
M88
,j..
A M89 Cutting feed override 100% OFF
II! Air blow ON
I A-&-M15 Air blow OFF M91 Main spindle feed per revolution !
A M92 Sub-spindle feed per revolution 1I
M17 Parts separator B advance
A M18 Parts separator B retract M98 Subprogram call
M99 End of program is
1 M20
M21
One cycle stop
Error detect ON Parts separator A parts pick-up s
A M22 Error detect OFF Parts separator A parts ejection
M23 Chamfering ON
A M24 Chamfering OFF A M121 Turret index speed high speed 1t
M25 Coolant ON M122 Turret index speed medium speed
A M26 Coolant OFF M123 Turret index speed sow speed
TSTM27 Parts pick-up and ejection detection ON !
lii
*M125 Coolant O.SMPa ON
Rigid tap (rear) A-&-M126 Coolant O.SMPa OFF
M30 Program end
* A MT31 Use turret on HEAD1 side
II
M40
M41
Z1-22 synchronous control ON
Z1 -Z2 synchronous control OFF
M132 Use turret on HEAD2 side
1
>. A
M140 Z1-E synchronous control ON
M46 Y power-driven tool motor forward rotation A M141 Z1-E synchronous control OFF
M47 Y power-driven tool motor reverse rotation
A M48 Y power-driven tool motor stop M150 Spare M code 1 ON
m A M151 Spare M code 1 OFF
1:
Yi
A M59 Sub-spindle unclamp Ml 52 Spare M code 2 ON
A M1 53 Spare M code 2 OFF
:: •A-M64 Chip conveyor ON M1 54 Spare M code 3 ON
__
;
A-&-M65 Chip conveyor OFF A M155 Spare M code 3 OFF 8
I M156 Spare M code 4 ON
jggajc
M68 212-axis torque limit d§jfj| A M157 Spare M code 4 OFF
A M69 Z2-axis torque limit OFF Spare M code 5 ON
A-&-M159 Spare M code 5 OFF
I -&M160 Spare M code 6 ON
i
A-&-M161 Spare M code 6 OFF
M200 M999— Wait
} I
When power is switched on, the M code with this mark A will automatically be selected.
is M code for option. . :
8-79
m-
«•"»
ik.;
I
1
I
II
t;
. 1
;
'
If
Program stop commands

O MOO : Program stop
When MOO is commanded during automatic operation, after the block execution is
completed, the execution of the following program will be stopped. When the START
fflj button is pressed, the automatic operation will resume.
If the program is stopped with MOO, the sub-spindle rotation will stop. 1
I;
| Optional stop command
O M01 : Optional stop
When the “OPT.STOP” fj->| key lamp is lit, the machine will stop where the M01
code is executed during automatic operation. Pressing the START |~f][ button will 1
restart automatic operation.
;l Sub-spindle rotation commands

O M03 : Sub-spindle forward rotation
The sub-spindle will start rotation in the forward direction.
This cannot be commanded during sub-spindle indexing. (Issue command M59.)
: O M04 : Sub-spindle reverse rotation
The sub-spindle will start rotation in the reverse direction.
This cannot be commanded during sub-spindle indexing. (Issue command M59.)
O M05 : Sub-spindle stop
The sub-spindle will stop.
close / open commands

O M10 : Sub-collet close
3 This command will close the collet, and the “SUB COLLET CLOSE”
the operation panel will light.
lamp on
<0 Mil : Sub-collet open

This command will open the collet, and the “SUB COLLET OPEN” jÿp| lamp on the
operation panel will light.
blow ON / OFF commands <Option>

M14 : Air blow ON
O Mis
The air blow will turn ON.
: Air blow OFF
I
The air blow will turn OFF.
8-80
L
!
i
Parts separator B advance / retract commands
O M17 : Parts separator B advance
The chute will advance.
Move Y and Z2 axes to the reference point before M17 is commanded.
<0 M18 : Parts separator B retract
The chute will retract.
One cycle stop command

<0 M20 : One cycle stop
When the “ONE CYCLE” fp] lamp on the operation panel is lit, the machine will
stop at the position where the M20 command is executed. Pressing the START jffll
button will restart automatic operation.
Error detect ON / OFF commands

O M21 : Error detect ON
This is used to avoid comer roundness.
C> M22 : Error detect OFF
This is used to smoothly connect the blocks.
When the power is turned ON, the M22 “Error detect OFF” state is valid.
Chamfering ON / OFF commands

O M23 : Chamfering ON
This command will carry out diagonal thread finishing at the end of the thread using
the G92 (threading cycle) or G76 (automatic threading cycle) commands.
O M24 : Chamfering OFF
This command will not carry out diagonal thread finishing at the end of the thread
using the G92 (threading cycle) or G76 (automatic threading cycle) commands. This is
used when there is an undercut in the threading.
When the power is turned ON, the M24 “Chamfering OFF’ state is valid.
ft
8-81
;
§~
Coolant ON / OFF commands

O M25 : Coolant ON
This command is used to start the coolant oil pump motor and start discharge of the
coolant oil.
The coolant oil will be discharged when the COOLANT key A switch on the opera¬
1 tion panel is set to ON ( jf ), but will not be discharged if set to OFF (O)-
O M26 : Coolant OFF
This command will stop the coolant oil pump motor.
Coolant O.SMPa OFF (Ml26) <option> is executed.
Note that if M25 is commanded on the HEAD1 side, the pump motor will not stop.
; When a chip conveyor is installed and controlled from the machine unit side, a signal
to turn the chip conveyor ON will be released with this M code command.
Parts pick-up and ejection detection commands <Option> f

O M27 : Parts pick-up detection ON
This is commanded when the sub collet is closed.
If the pick-up fails, the feed hold state will be entered and an alarm will occur.
O M27 : Part ejection detection ON
This is commanded when the sub collet is opened.
If the ejection fails, both the HEAD! and HEAD2 sides will be single block stop, and
an alarm will occur.
Eject the part and then press the START jfTli button to restart operation.
tap <Option>
O M29 : Rigid tap
The back working rigid tap mode will be commanded.
Program format
G99 M05 ; Feed/rev. spindle stop
M29 S_ ; Rigid tap speed: S
G84W_F„; Rigid tap machining length: W, pitch: F
G80 : Rigid tap mode release
I
Program end commands
:T
O M02 : Program end
O M30 : Program end
1
8-82
i.
if ®Z1-22 synchronous control commands
M40 (M41) on HEAD1 and M40(M41) on HEAD2 wait each other.
O M40 : Z1-Z2 synchronous control ON
The Z2-axisJ|,ill
be synchronized to the Zl-axis movement command.
This control can be released by pressing the RESET j j.
This command is valid only when the MODE key “SIMUL” |gg| is pressed, and
O M41 : Z1-Z2 synchronous control OFF
BY power-driven tool rotation commands

O M46 : Y power-driven tool motor forward rotation
The power-driven tool will rotate in the forward direction.
Command thg speed S at the same time.
O M47 : Y power-drf|en tool motor reverse rotation
The power-driven tool will rotate in the reverse direction.
Command the speed S at the same time.
O M48 : Y power-driven tool motor stop
8 The power-driven tool will stop.
I 11Sub-spindle unciamp
O M59 : Sub-spindle unclamp
The sub-s
pile’sclamp pin lock will be released
,-mrm
II Chip conveyor commands <Option>
Commands cannot be issued to the chip conveyor wires to the chip conveyor 3-phase power supply
terminal block XT201 (wire No. 204).
O M64 : Chip conveyor ON
A signal to turn the chip conveyor ON will be output.
O M65 : Chip conveyor OFF
I& A signal to turn the chip conveyor OFF will be output.
The M65 “Chip conveyor OFF” state is entered when the power is turned ON.
li
i
i Z2-axis torque limit ON / OFF commands
O M68 : Z2-axis tor<||elimit ON
The Z2-axis servomotor torque will be limited.
At this time, the rapid traverse rate for all the axes will be 25% or less, and the cutting
feed will be 70% or less.
If an alarm occurs, it can be released by turning the CNC power OFF.
8-83
!
O M69 : Z2-axis torque limit OFF

The Z2-axis torque limit is released.
NOTICE
•Do not issue the Z2-axis movement command in the same Mock as an M68 or M69
command.
Back machining block skip commands

O M75 : Back machining block skip valid
When the sub-collet is opened, the / code program up to the back machining block skip
cancel (M76) will be skipped.
When the sub-collet is closed, the / code program up to the back machining block skip i
cancel (M76) will be executed.
If the [SKIP 7" BETWEEN M75&M76 AT WORK OUT] is set to [YES] on the keep
relay conversational setting screen, the / code program between M75 and M76 will be
skipped.
When using the part ejection detection unit [unit No. 53409] (when keep relay K05-
bit3 is set to 1), the / code program up to M76 will be skipped to the ejection state
1
regardless of the sub-collet open or close state.
O M76 : Back machining block skip invalid
The back machining block skip invalid (M75) command will be released.
BLOCK key invalid / valid commands

O M77 : SINGLE BLOCK key invalid
This command will be active, even if the “SINGLE BLOCK” |Q][ lamp is lit, until
M78 is commanded.
j O M78 : SINGLE BLOCK key valid
The SINGLE BLOCK key invalid (M77) state will be released.
Passing point signal output function command

<0 M79 : ,Q command valid
The passing point signal output function (,Q command) will be validated for one
block.
1
This function is used to execute an M code (auxiliary function ) in a block when the
remaining movement distance reaches a designated position.
1
The designated position refers to the remaining movement distance from the end of the
block.
8-84
i ;
!ÿ
:
O Command method
M79 :
GOO (GOi) X *•* Z ••• M »»» ;
-ÿ Remaining movement distance
1 NOTICE
* This address is read as “comma Q”.
The M79 command must be inserted in just before each block where “,Q command” is
®
issued.
•The M codesfor which “,Q command” cannot be issued are MOO, M01, M20, M79, M98
and M99.
® The G codes for which “,Q command” can be issued are GOO and GOI only.
Bat-stock absence detection commands

£ O M80 : Barstock absence detection
When the barstock absence signal is output, this command will execute the /code pro¬
gram up to the special block skip release (M81) command.
If a barstock absence signal is not output, the / code program up to the special block
skip release (M81) will be skipped.
If the keep relay KOO-bit 5 is set to “1”, the program will wait for the HEAD1 side M80
command.
O M81 : Special block skip release
When the barstock absence signal is output, the / code program from M80 will be
executed.
c Command the program required when barstock is absent between M80 and M81 using
/ codes.
If the barstock absence signal is not output, the / code program between M80 and M81
1 will not be executed.
:;U
Main/sub-spindle synchronous rotation control ON / OFF
;i§| O M82 : Main/sub-spindle synchronous rotation control ON
When the MODE key “SIMUL” is pressed, the program will wait for the HEAD1
side M82, and will carry out synchronous rotation. (Phase synchronous rotation con¬
trol can be executed by setting keep relay KOI -bit 6 to 1.)
Issue the M82 command for phase synchronous rotation control after the G25 com¬
mand.
Issue the G26 command after the phase synchronous rotation control is completed.
<; When the MODE key HEAD2 is pressed, the process will be completed immedi¬
ately.
8-85
1
,
O M83 : Maim/sub-spindle synchronous rotation control OFF
side M83, and the synchronous rotation will be released.
i
[ When the MODE key HEAD2 is pressed, the process will be completed immedi¬
ately.
Parts conveyor commands <Option>

<0 M84 : Parts conveyor ON 1
The parts conveyor will start moving.
If the operation is not interrupted, the conveyor will automatically stop after approxi¬
: mately 20 seconds. (Set with PMC TIMER No. 6.)
O M85 : Parts conveyor OFF
The parts conveyor will stop.
Override 100% ON / OFF commands

O M88 : Override 100% ON
The cutting feedrate will be executed with the program commanded value.
The override (0 to 150%) setting will be invalidated and instead fixed at 100%.
j O
This command is invalid while the torque limit key pQ is lit.
M89 : Override 100% OFF
The cutting feedrate will be the speed obtained by multiplying the override (0 to i
150%) with the program commanded value, and override will be validated.
spindie/sub-spindle feed per revolution

O M91 : Main spindle feed per revolution
When machining with the turret, the feed per revolution using the main spindle can be
validated. (This is valid during the G99 mode; the constant surface speed control can¬
not be commanded.)
O M92 : Sub-spindle feed per revolution
When machining with the turret, the feed per revolution using the sub-spindle can be
validated. (This is valid during the G99 mode.)
M92 “Sub-spindle feed per revolution” is valid when the power is turned ON.
call command 1
O M98 : Subprogram call
The 01234 program will be called and repeated five times with the M98 P51234 com¬
mand.
8-86
:
it ;
1
i': End of program command
<0 M99 : End of program
This is commanded at the end of the HEAD2 main program and subprogram.
When commanded at the HEAD2 main program, the program will return to the head i
of the HEAD2 main program.
When commanded at the HEAD2 subprogram, the program will return to the HEAD2 ;
main program.
Parts separator A parts pick-up/ejectsom commands <Option>

O Ml17 ; Parts separator A parts pick-up
When the parts separator [Type No.42415] is installed and this is commanded, the Z2- j
axis will move to the parts pick-up position.
<0 M118 : Parts separator A parts ejection
When the parts separator [Type No.42415] is installed and this command is used after
completing cut-off of the parts, the series of parts ejection operation will take place.
(The Z2-axis will move to the reference point, and the parts separator B will advance
and retract.)
index speed commands

The M121, Ml 22 and Ml 23 turret index speed will differ according to the RAPID TRAVERSE
OVERRIDE (%) setting.
O M121 : Turret index speed high speed (100%)
The turret will index at a high speed.
•it
<0 M122 : Turret index speed medium speed (25%)
The turret will index at a medium speed.
O M123 : Turret index speed low speed (5%)
The turret will index at a low speed. i
r
Coolant O.SMPa GM / OFF commands <Option>
The coolant oil can be supplied when T1200, T1400, T1600 or T1800 is selected.
O M125 : Coolant O.SMPa ON
The coolant 0.8MPa pump motor will start, and the coolant oil will be discharged.
Coolant ON (M25) is executed. The coolant is discharged when the coolant Q.8MPa
% ON / OFF switch <f* is ON |( ) on the operation panel, but is not discharged when
it is OFF (O)-
O M126 : Coolant O.SMPa OFF
The coolant 0.8MPa pump motor will stop.
8-87
!
;
let usage mode

!M131 : Use turret on HEAD1 side
side M131, and then the turret can be used on the HEAD1 side.
When the MODE key HEAD2 is pressed, the process will be completed immedi¬
ately.
M132 : Use turret on HEAD2 side
When the MODE key “SIMUL” jjgjÿis pressed, the program will wait for the HEAD1
side Ml 32, and then the turret can be used on the HEAD2 side.
When the MODE key HEAD2 is pressed, the process will be completed immedi¬
ately.
S1Z1-E synchronous control commands

M140 (M141) on HEAD1 and M14Q (M141) on HEAD2 wait each other.
O M140 : Zl-E synchronous control ON
The E-axis will be synchronized to the Zl-axis movement command.
This control can be released by pressing the RESET \#\
This command is valid only when the MODE key”SIMUL” |g[j]| is pressed, and
/O M141 : Zl-E synchronous control OFF
The Ml 40 command will be released.
MSpare M code output ON / OFF commands

O’ M152 : Spare M code 2 ON
: The spare M code output 3 contact signal will be turned ON (closed).
•
) O M156 : Spare M code 4 ON
<0 M158 : Spare M code 5 ON <Option>
8-88 -v.
O M160 : Spare M code 6 ON <Option>
.
Wait commands
$
—
O M2O0 M999: Wait
All of the M codes from M200 to M999 can be used as wait commands.
When the”SIMUL”|ÿ|operation is ON, the next block will not be advanced to until
I the same M3-digit command is found in the HEAD1 side.
y
NOTICE
•If one of thefollowing alarms occurs while the wait M code (including M40, M41,M80,
M82, M83, M131, MI32, M140 and M141) is commanded, the single block stop will
occur, and the waiting will be forcibly ended. When one of the following alarms does 1
occur, release the cause and then confirm that the wait M codes accurately match be¬
3;
1 fore restarting. If there is an error, move the cursor with the EDIT mode |j$T| and then
restart.
I
88
Alarm 2071 LOW LEVEL OF COOLANT OIL

8. Alarm 2074 NO STOCK ON SINGLE BARFEEDER
i» Alarm 2075 NO STOCK ON AUTOMATIC BARFEEDER
1 Alarm 2077 PART EJECT ERROR

I ® M80 is not the command of wait normally.
Set keep relay K00-bit5 to "1”, ifM80 is used as a wait command.
!
8
I
8
V
l
8-89
:
i
:
.
!:
! s
8-13 Sub-program function
I Programming can be simplified if fixed command sequences or repeated patterns in the program are |
written as sub-programs and then registered in the CNC memory.
*
11Command method
• M98 PAAA ; ||
Sub program number
;
v Number of repetitions (3-digit commands are possible). It can be omitted for a
single call.
L Sub-program call
I
• M99 PDCXO;
O When this is commanded at the end of a sub-program, program execution will return to the
sequence number that is specified by P in the main program.
O When this is commanded in the main program, execution will jump to the sequence number
specified by P in the main program.
.
A NOTICE
®Sub-programs can be nested up to four levels.
•This is only valid in MEMORY operation and be not commanded in MDI mode. |
i Program flow 1
<Main program> <Sub program> 9
A 02234 ; 03234 ;
N1 ; Ni ;
N2 ; N2 ;
N3 M98 P33234 ; N3 ;
N4 ; N4 M99 ;
;
m
t
N5 ;
N6 M99 ;
\k
!
i
i
I
I
8-90
I
8-14 Macro program call (G65 to G67)
It is possible to make a special program by storing a certain group of commands in the part program
memory. The G65 or G66 can then call and execute this program group. This special program is called
a macro program. It is created and recorded in the same way as a sub-program.
Main Program Macro Program
09001 ;
G65 P9001 ;
r Variables
Arithmetic
(Argument assignment) I Operation
L Contro!
M99 ;
Main Program Sub-Program
!
01234 ;
!
M98P1234; •i
M99 ;
However, a macro program and a sub-program differ in the following points.

• "Variables" can be used.
• Operations can be performed on variables and constants.
• Control commands such as a conditional jump are possible
I; These features permit a macro program to produce a program that can made complex operations or
1
-
judgments over a wide range of applications.
Specifying the arguments when calling a macro program from a main program allots the actual values
i and numbers to the variable groups of the macro in the correct sequence. As a result, a macro program
s is executed as a series of concrete programs that accompany tool movement. :
1 In this manual, a macro program will sometimes be called a "macro".
8-91
1
!:
:
i
!
Macro Program call command

There are five ways to call a macro program as shown in the table below.
No. Call method Code Remarks

1 Simple call G65
2 Modal call G66 G67: cancel
3 Optional G code call GXX
4 M code call MXX
i
5 T code call TXXXX 4-digits maximum
|
O Simple call (G65)
G65 P •** L <Argument assignments*;
This command will call the macro program for the program number specified by P and execute
it L number of times. If L is omitted, it will be executed only once. If there are any arguments
that must be specified for the macro program, specify them with <argument assignments*. "Ar¬
;
gument specification" means to allot actual values and numbers to local variables used by the
I macro program.
O Modal call (G66, G67)

G66 P •••L ••• <Argument assignments*
This command will call the macro program for the program number specified by P. From this
point on, each execution of a movement command will also execute the specified macro L |
number of times.
1
G67;
This command will cancel the modal call mode.
assignment
an argument is an actual value that is passed to the variable used in the macro program. Therefore,
the argument assignment is the allotment of the actual values to the macro variables in the correct
sequence. There are two types of argument assignment, type I and type H , and they may be freely
mixed.
O Argument assignment I
Argument assignment is possible with all 21 addresses except G, L, N, O and P.
i I, J and K only must be specified in alphabetical order, but other addresses need not be specified
in alphabetical order.
!
O Argument assignment II
In addition to the fact that arguments can be assigned in addresses A, B and C, a maximum of ten
sets of arguments can be set for addresses I, J and K. In this case, it is necessary to specify the
group in the order of I, J and K.
8-92
%
I NOTICE : ,
•Argument assignment types I and II can befreely mixed. If the same variable is mistak¬
:;v
enly specified in two arguments, the one specified last is effective.
.ÿI •In both types I and II, addresses I, J and K only must be specified in alphabetical order.
The order of assignment of the other addresses is free. j
:
® Signs and decimal points can be used in argument assignment

for all addresses.
® Always command G65 or G66
before any argument assignment in a G65 or G66 block.
|
program summary
|| A macro program is created by combining the following command groups.
O Variables 1
—
• Local variables (#1 #33)
——
'
• Common variables (#100 #149, #500 #531)
• System variables (#1000 #5104)
— 1
O Arithmetic commands
• Arithmetic operations (+, X , /,•••)
• Function operations (SIN, COS, ROUND,•••)
O Control commands
• Divergence commands (IF [Conditional expressionÿ GOTO n)
• Iteration commands (WHILE [Condition expression>] DO m)
3
I: These commands will permit the creation of programs that perform complex operations and condi¬
tional judgments for a wide range of applications. It is therefore characteristic of a macro program
that it can program CNC functions themselves and then store them in the unit for use with simple
machining cycles similar to subprograms or particularly complex canned machining cycles.
M .
When a macro program uses a variable instead of a numeric value directly passed to an address, a
call to this numeric value during execution will take the value stored in the variable area and make
it the address value.
:
:
Variables comprise local variables, common variables and system variables and can be distin¬
: guished by their respective variable numbers.

In the case of local variables, actual numeric values can be passed with the argument assignment in
the macro call commands G65 or G66.
l
I
8-93
1
'r?
o Locai variables (#1—#33)

:
j
The local variable is used locally in each individual macro. This means that the variable area
—
(#1 #33) is maintained independently for each macro call, and variables can store a certain
value by argument assignment or by result of operations in the macro.
Therefore, even the same macro, variable #1, #2, #3,. .. can have different values at different call times.
These local variables are reset at each macro call and recorded by argument assignment. How¬ •V':
ever, any unspecified variables will become empty. When the power is turned ON or the ma¬
chine is reset, then all local variables become empty.
(However, they will not be affected by the reset operation if parameter #6001-bit7 is set to "1.")
Main Program First level macro Second level macro
G9201 ; G9205 ; 1
If
1 G65 P9205 ;
I #1 , #2, #3
G65 P9205 ;
#i
#2
I
#3
I II
Read Read
Write Write
!
possible possible
Argument assignment
#1: #1= ••
#2: #2=
#3= #3= •••
Local variable area of first Local variable area of second

I
level macro level macro
i O Common variables (#100—#149, #500—#531)

Common variables are variables that can be used commonly by all macros at all nesting levels.
This means that it is possible for all macros to refer to the results of operations in one macro. '
Common variables are divided into the follwoing two types whose clear conditions differ from
each other.
8
#100 ~ #149 : When power is turned ON, common variables will become empty <empty>.
However, if parameter No. 6001 - bit 6 is set to ”0", resetting makes common
variables empty.
•#500 ~ #531 : Even if power is turned ON/OFF, common variables are not cleared.
Common variable area
#100 #500
#149 #549
OK /oK OK\ OK
1st level macro 2nd level macro 3rd level macro 4th level macro
1
8-94 ''"'A;
NOTICE
® The following macro variables have been already used. When macro program is made
.
at your side, don't use them
HEAD2 side #146—4149, #526—#531
O System variables
These are variables whose application is determined by the system, and come in the following j
types.
• Interface input signal : #1000—#1015
#1032
—
• Interface output signal : #1100 #1115
#1132, #1133
• Tool offset amount and tool coordinate data, tool wear amount
#2000—#2032, #2401—#2432,
#2101—#2132, #2701—#2732, :
#2201—#2232, #2801—#2832, .
#2301—#2332, #2901—#2932,
• Alarm message display: #3000
* Clock: #3001, #3002
• Single block stop, auxiliary function completion wait control: #3003

* Feed hold, feed rate override, exact stop check control: #3004
• Number of part: #3901, #3902

• Modal data: #4001—#4120
• Position data: #5001—#5104
i
.
'I
f
i
1
. i'
I
;
8-95
:
f
. ..
T
IS Arithmetic commands
Arithmetic can be performed with or between variables and constants.
The arithmetic format is
#i=<expression>,
and <expression> is a general arithmetic operation which combines variables and constants with
arithmetic operators or functions. The following operators or functions can be used, and constants
can be substituted for #j or #k in the following format.
i;
O Definition and substitution of constants
I #i=#j Definition, Substitution
#i=# [#j+#k] indirect specification
O Addition arithmetic
#i=#j+#k Addition
I
v
#i=#j-#k Subtraction
#i=#j OR #k Logical sum (at every bit of 32 bits) !
#i=#j XOR #k Exclusive OR (at every bit of 32 bits) I
O Multiplication arithmetic
*
#i=#j*#k Product
#i=#j /#k Quotient
I
IS
#i=#j AND #k Logical product (every bit in 32 bits)
II
O Functions :
#i=SIN[ #j ] Sine (degrees)
#i=COS[ #j ] Cosine (degrees)
I #i=TAN[ #j ] Tangent (degrees)
#i=ATAN[#j/#k] Arc Tangent
#i=SQRT[ #j ] Square root
#i=ABS[ #j j Absolute value
#i=BEN[ #j ] Conversion from BCD
#i=BCD[ #j ] Conversion to BCD I
#i=ROUND[ #j ] Integer formed by rounding down from .4 or up from .5
:
#i=FIX[ #j ] Truncation of decimal portion
#i=FUP[ #j ] Rounding up of decimal $v
:
II
:
Ill
8-98 I
1 commands
There axe 2 types of commands to control the flow of a macro program.
• Divergence commands:IF [cConditional expressionÿ GOTO n;
* Iteration commands: WHILE [cConditional expressionÿ DO m;
; i
'
O Divergence commands
• IF [cConditional expression:?-] GOTO n;
The use of this command with a conditional expression will execute a jump to the block with j
sequence number n in the same program.
• The use of variables or expressions in place of n can change the block to which the program :
jumps.
• If a condition is false, the program will go to the next block.
iF expressions-] GOTO n ;
o
!
1 T3
O
B
Nn
* A simple jump command is possible by omitting IF [cConditional expressionÿ.
s
S I
I-
.5.
-- GOTO n ;
;
Nn
;
fl
8-97
l
I
EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE and LE can be used in conditional expressions and are written as shown in
the table below. I
!
Conditional expression
#i EQ #j
Meaning
(#i=#j)
i
#i NE #j
#i GT #j
(#i #= #j)
(*>#j)
*
#i LT #j
#i GE #j (#i S #j)
#i LE #j
1
Constants or <Expressions> can be used in place of #i or #j
O Iteration commands *v
• WHILE [Conditional expression>] DO m; (m=l, 2 or3)
ENDm ;
This command repeats the block from [DO m] to [END m] so long as the conditional expression
8
is true.
&
If the condition is false, the program jumps to the next block after [END m],
WHILE [<Conditional expression:*] DO m

o iCZ
§
g3
! 1
1O
1 s
5
ENDm; -
(next block after END m)
11
1
8-98
i
• If the WHILE [cConditional expression?-] is omitted in the command, the program will re¬
peat the block from [DO m] to [END m] in an infinite loop. Generally, this type of repeat
?
command is used in the following way.
I
I1 DO m ;
|8 S'
If
o o
IF [<Conditionai expression*] GOTO n ; "w
I
l
8 S
1c S £
END m ; 1
1g> o
I CL tS
® 8. Nn
i— 22
Registration of macro programs

O Macro program registration method
The method of registration and editing macro programs is identical with that of the usual part
and sub-programs.
There is, then, no program capacity limit for macro programs as such. The sum of part pro¬
grams, sub-programs and macro programs will be stored up to the limit of the unit's part pro¬
1 gram memory capacity.
<0 Program number usage classification

Program numbers are classified by use according to the table below. Freely select according to
I use.
i
i Program number Usage classification
00001—07999 Free recording, deletion and editing can be performed.
08000—08999 If parameter #3202 bitO=l, program, deletion and editing will not be performed.
09000—09999 If parameter #3202 bit4=l, program, deletion and editing will not be performed.
i NOTICE
® Thefollowing macro valiables have been already used. When macro program is made at
your side, don't use them.
HEAD1 side 09010, 09810, 09820
HEAD2 side 09010, 09020, 09021
U ' 8-99
;
i
II
I!
;
(
illMOTE
I O Relation to MDI operation
• A sub-program call instruction can be specified from MDI. However, a macro call instruction
'
cannot be executed from MDI if any nesting is specified during memory operation.
• If a single block stop is commanded during macro program execution, an MDI write com¬
1 mand that is not related to the macro can be executed.
O Relation to address search

• A sequence number search within a macro program is impossible with address search.
O Relation to single block key

| • The arithmetic and control command blocks will not perform single block stop even if the
single block key is ON (lit up). The single block key is effective in all other blocks.
! • However, if setting #600Q-bit5=l, the single block key will be effective in arithmetic com¬
: mand and control command blocks.
O Relation to optional block skip

• A / (slash) used on the right side of an arithmetic expression or in a [] is regarded as a division
operator. It does not mean an optional block skip.
O Relation to feed hold

• If feed hold becomes active during execution of a macro statement, feed will stop after the
macro has been executed. (It will also stop with reset or an alarm.)
|
O Relation to multiple repetitive canned cycle
• Macro statements cannot be used with multiple repetitive canned cycles (G71, G72 and G73).
O Nesting
i • A maximum of 4 level macro calls is possible.
• A maximum of 8 level sub-program calls are possible with macro calls.
* A maximum of 3 level WHXLE-DO repeat sequences is possible.
®
A maximum of 5 level formula [ 3 is possible.
I!
Ill
8-100
8-15 Program pattern
Program pattern diagram
© i
m/
Turret
O
"@1
o
I 1ÿ0 Y
1 Main spindle
''N,
jfW~ i' \ Sub-spindle
_'N1©
* \
BE Z2
iI
A
J
Z1
© Gang tool post
\
(D
(2)
(D
........
........
........
Main machining (gang tool post, turret)
Main machining (gang tool post)
Back machining (turret)
HEAD1 (HEAD2)
HEADI
HEAD2
i
I
'
1 I
1
I
I
1
8-101
j
1
:
i •:
system diagram
• Z1 axis stroke: ....205 st.: Standard
195 st.: Barstock gripping unit [42418]
• Z2 axis stroke: .... 300 st.: For 4-station tool holder for tool shank Ql6 mm [421-04]
: 304 st.: For 5-station tool holder for tool shank Ql2 mm [421-01]
ili;
304 st.: For 5-station tool holder for too! shank Dl/2 inch [421-91]
!
1 +Y -B mrr'
+E -E o
1 O if
+B
I -Y I
Y240 . 0
EO . 0 il
L
205s t. 136 2 11* too +Z2*a
zo.o—s>-Z2
i
111
i r\ rt
1 1 2st -
-n I
Ml li
U 159
r
max.75 pax .7ÿ
“X-A i
if
-Z1
ZO . 0
+Zt
•9- A4" +x 20. 30 0 s t . (When 421-04 is mounted)
max. 150 .
il
i, '
_320_ „
16 304 s t(When 421-01 or 421 -91 is mounted)
X1 10.0
Y power-driven tool
EO . 0
Y240 . 0
BO . 0
iill
©
27 ©to
i Guide bushing "\ in
/
\i a la
15
-P
V)
10
-Y>
+ E_]
*-E
—a =7
ZJ a
f \
\si'
in
CM \
<!
®©
ZJ
1 :
X power-driven tool 130. 5st. @

200
8-102
I
i'll
Program pattern
• Command the wait M code (M200) in the block before M20.
• The E-axis command is valid only on the HEAD2 side.
• When executing HEAD2 operation independently, command M25 (coolant ON) and G9Q0 j
:
Jj; Nj ; (HEAD2 single operation block jump) in the HEAD2 program.
Example: G900 Jj ; Nj ; G900 J50 ; N50 ;
[HEADlj [HEAD2]
01234 ; 01234 ;
G130 ;
G140 ;
Ml.3! ; - M131 ;
G99 G40 G97 M09 ; G99 G40 G94 MO 9 ;
MO 3 S500 ; MO 3 S500 ;
Mil ; TOO ;
GOO ZO TOO ; G28 WO ;
G28 VO ; G50 ZO ;
M2 00 ; - M2 00 ;
M20 ; M20 ;
MlO ; M2 5 ;
T100 ;
i M2 7 ; <Option>
I GOO Z-0.5 TOO M2 5 ;
G28 JCJ0_ _
M132 ; M132 ;
(|) : Zl-axis is limited during back machining. (D : Back machining
(Machining with gang tool post) (Machining with turret type tool post)
Part ejection
s
I
G900 J50 ;
(HEAD2 single operation block jump)
M131 ;-M131 ;
© : (Machining with gang tool post and
turret)
1M6 do "7 i (M600 ;) —r
M82 ; M82 ;
Cut-off Parts pick-up !.
M83 ;- M83 ;
(M700 ?) - (M700 ;)
Barstock absence detection
N50 ; J
M99 ; M99 ;
'
8-103
j
i
1
i
: 8-15-1 HEAD1 side machining program pattern P|

For a position command of each axis, see Section 6-4, "Tool holder related dimensional drawing" and
Section 8-4, "Coordinate system".
[Setting of absolute zero point of Z1-axis (Command on by HEAD1 side)

O Format
1 G120 Z _ ;
8
Set the absolute zero point of the Zl-axis.
The absolute zero point is the point (front end of material when cut-off) commanded with
:
G120Z0.
8 When G131 or G141 is commanded at the HEAD2, the Zl-axis coordinate system setting
(G120 ZO) must be commanded at the HEAD1 beforehand.
• When setting G120, do not command G50 for Z1-axis.
O Method of Zl-axis absolute zero point setting with G120 (Z1 axis coordinate system set¬
ting)
I
Setting method 1
J5J. It will light.

(DPress the MEMORY key
! ©Press AIR CUT key JTJ It

the will light.
©Display the program to he
(HEAD1) executed on the screen.
i
©Press HEAD1 g. It will light.
the key
©Press the Zl-AXIS STROKE CHECK key jzT|. It will light.

(One cycle stop will be automatically validated.)
©Press the START button fill.
One cycle of the program will be executed and the Zl-axis maximum stroke will be set on
the machining data screen.
©Press the macro key |ea| after one cycle stops. It will light.
©Press the INITIAL POSITION key g. It will light.
©Press the START button |JQ|.
The Zl-axis will move to the absolute zero point, X-axis will move to the cut-off complete
position and the other axes will move to the reference point. The Zl-axis G120 ZO setting
will be made. I
Setting method 2
©Using MODI or JOG operation, move the Zl-axis to the absolute zero point. 11
|
©Command G120 ZO; at the HEAD1.
8-104
I
* Setting method 3
Using MEMORY operation, set the Zl-axis absolute zero point.
Program example <HEAD1>
NO ;
M5 ;
Mil ; I
GOO TOO ;
G28 WO ;
G120 ZO ;
GOO ; Command the Zl-axis absolute zero point.
G120 ZO ;
M99 ;
<0 Zl-axis coordinate system recovery (G121) <Command on HEAD1 side>

* Format:
G121 Z. ; ?
• The Zl-axis coordinate system setting (G120) that has been made can be recovered to the
G121 command even after the power has been turned OFF. Move the Zl-axis to the G120 ZO
from the current position using rapid traverse with the G121 command, and set the coordinate
system. Then, move to the coordinate value commanded with G121 with rapid traverse.
• When only G121 is commanded, it will be interpreted that G121 ZO has been commanded.
beginning
V [HEAD1]
!ÿ
01234 ; Program number
Ml 31 ; The turret is used by the HEAD1 side (waiting for the HEAD2
side)
G99 G40 G97 M09 ; Feed per revolution, tool nose R conpensation cancel, constant
surface speed control cancel, C axis off
|
M03 S500 ; The main spindle rotates forward 500 min*’
Mil ; The main collet opens
!ÿ:
GOO ZO TOO ; The tool moves to ZO by rapid traverse and the tool offset is
:
canceled.
G28 VO ; The Y axis moves to the reference point.
M2 00 ; Waiting for M200 on the HEAD2 side
M20 ; One cycle stop
M10 ; The main collet closes.
. The cutting-off tool is selected. (T100 is only for the cutting-
T100 ;
off tool.)
M2 7 ; (op.) Broken cutting-off tool detection ON
i. GOO Z-0 . 5 TOO M2 5 ; A material is separated from the cutting-off tool by rapid
traverse. Coolant ON.
G28 UO ; The X axis moves to the reference point.
8-105
i :
I
'
Barstock absence detection program

[HEAD 1]
M80 ;
/GOO X (material diameter + 1.0> W-0.5 ;
/GOO W (cuttina-o££ tool width) ;
/M98 P7000 ;
M81 ;
M99 ;
1
BBe sure to add / (slash code) to the top of the process between M8Q and M81. Only when a no I
material signal is outputted from the barfeeder side, this block is executed.
• Determine the sub-program 07000 to the following specifications and register it in the CNC
:|
memory beforehand with reference to the example on the next page. I
Specification for material supply device Specification for guide bushing 1

1 Single barfeeder Stationary guide bashing
2 Single barfeeder Revolving guide bushing
3 Automatic barfeeder Stationary guide bushing
4 Automatic barfeeder Revolving guide bushing
5 Automatic barfeeder (Inching movement ) Revolving guide bushing (machining of profile barstock)
O Single barfeeder O Single barfeeder

Stationary barfeeder Revolving barfeeder |
[HEAD 1] [HEAD 1] 1
07000 ; 07000 ;
N1 G01 U-2 . 0 F0.015 ; N1 G01 U-2.Q F0.015 ?
N2 G00 U2.0 M2 6 ; N2 GOO U2.0 M2 6 ; I
N3 MO 3 S500 ; N3 M03 S500 ;
N4 G01 W-50.0 F3.0 ; N4 G01 W-50.0 F3.0 ;
N5 MO 5 ; N5 MO 5 ;
N6 Mil ; N6 Mil ;
N7 G28 WO TO i N7 G28 WO TO ;
N8 MOO ; N8 MOO ; i
N9 M10 ; M9 M10 y
N10 MOO ; N10 MOO ;
Nil M03 S1500 ; Nil M03 S500 ;
N12 G04 U3.0 ; N12 G04 U3.0 ;
N13 M2 5 ; N13 G01 W50.0 F3.0 ;
N14 G01 X-2.5 F0.01 ; N14 MO 3 S1500 ;
N15 M99 ; N15 M2 5 ;
N16 G01 X-2.5 F0.01 ;
N17 M99 ;
* For the single barfeeder, perform rope with "N10 M10;" after confirming the stop of the
machine.
!
8-106
•:
if
O Automatic barfeeder, standard specifi¬ O Automatic barfeeder, inching specifica¬
cation tion
Stationary guide bushing Revolving guide bushing
Revolving guide bushing [HEAD 1]
[HEAD 1] 07000 ;
07000 ; Nl G01 U-2.0 F0.015 ;
II Nl G01 U-2.0 F0.015 ; N2 GOO U2.0 M2 6 ;
N2 GOO U2.0 M2 6 ; N3 MO 3 S500 ;
N3 MO 3 S500 ; N4 G01 W-50.0 F3.0 ;
N4 G01 W-50.0 F3.0 ; .... (D N5 MO 5 ;
N5 MO 5 ; N6 GO 4 U3 .0 ; if
N6 G04 U3.0 ; N7 M62 ;
N7 M62 ; N8 Mil ; I
N8 Mil ? N9 GOO W50.0 ;
N9 MOO ; (D N10 MOO ;
N10 M10 ; Nil MO 3 S3 00 ? l
Nil MO 3 S500 ; N12 G04 U10.0 ;
N12 G01 W50.0 F2.0 M25 ; . (3) N13 MOO ?
N13 M03 S1500 ; N14 GOO W-50.0 ;

N14 G01 X-2.0 F0.02 ; N15 Ml O' ;
N15 M99 ; N16 MO 3 S500 ; *
o
N17 G01 W50.0 F2.0 M25 ;
N18 MO 3 S1500 ;
N19 G01 X-2.0 F0.01 ;
VZ&ZZZL N20 M99 ;
Adjust the inching timer of the barfeeder to a

50
value greater than the dwell time of N12.
.
=q © f
z
I
1 20—30
8-107
LM
i
:
l
it
diameter cutting
1 O Machining drawing
10 15
p.
| &
<o,
?
+Z
LD & O
w
M
K.
+X
o ll
f§|
jil
fj
I
<0 Program example
Machining on the gang tool post side
[HEAD 1]
1
T200 ; I;
GOO X16.0 Z-0.5 T02 M03 S2500 ?
G01 X8.0 FO.l ;
G01 X10.0 Z0.5 F0.02 ; |i
G01 Z15.0 F0.03 ;
GO 4 U0.05 ;
G01 X10.8 F0.02 ;
G02 X14.0 W1.6 R1.6 FO . 02 ;
G01 Z25.0 FO . 04 ;
GO 4 U0.03 ;
G01 X16.0 W1.0 FO . 02 ?
• For machining on the turret side, change X of the above program to Y.

|l|
II
||
SI
ft;
;
1
1
:
.J
8-108
SlCircular interpolation machining
This command will move the tool from the current position to the specified position in an arc of the
commanded radius. The radius command is set within 180°. When setting a circular arcs that ex¬
ceeds 180°, divide the value into 2 blocks.
O Circular interpolation direction
Z-X plane A-X plane Z-A plane
+A -f-A
+Z<- A
.G02 sG03
GO3,
GOt G02
1302
+x<- +Z<-
+x
Z-Y plane B-Y plane Z-B plane

+Y +B +B
A A
«G02 G02. sG03
GOt 1303 GOt
:
+Z<- -=>+Y + Z<r
<0 Format on the HEAD1 side

Zl-X plane (G18)
G02
[G03 X(U) Z(W)
cr K
F
I
A-X plane G17
G02
[G03 X(U) A [ IR J
F ;
|
s
Zl-A plane G19 r002
LG03
A Z(W)
C? K
F ;
1
5
Zl-Y plane (G18) [G02 Y(V) Z(W) [R K

F ;
1 G150 ;
G03
I
G02
B-Y plane 017 [ G03
Y (V) B [f j:
F
G150 ;
Zl-B plane G19 [G02
G03
B Z(W) [? K
F ;
X, A, Y, B, Z: Circular arc finishing position. (X and Y indicate a diameter value.): The ad¬
dresses X, Y, and Z can be changed to incremental commands.
Start point K
R: The radius of circular arc.
I: The diameter direction distance to the cen- +Z<ÿ
r
ter of the arc as viewed from the starting
| point. (Incremental radius value)

K: The longitudinal distance to the center of
j !_
the arc as viewed from the starting point.
(Incremental value)
F: The feed rate along the circular arc.
End point 1 +X
Center of
circular arc
8-109
{
:
I
O Machining drawing O Program example

(1) Machining on the gang tool post side
[HEAD 1]
4 5
T200 ;
GOO X11.0 Z-0.5 T02 ;
GOO X6.0 ;
G01 Z3.0 F0.03 ;
o CO G03 X10.0 Z5.0 R2.0 F0.02 ;
+Z
•s
t:
G01 X11.0 F0.05 ;
TOO ;
:I: T200
LO
O
0.5
1 (2)
T130Q
Machining on the turret side
O 16 mm standard wedge type [221-01]
2 [HEAD 1]
M131 ;
to
V T1300 ;
GOO Y11.0 Z6.0 T13 ;
G01 Y10.0 F0.03 ;
G02 Y6.0 Z8. 0 R2.0 FO . 02 ;
<0 o
+Z G01 Z11.5 FO . 03 ;
G01 Y11.0 F0.1 ;
TOO ;
_
The Z dimension includes the tool width
3 6 (2 mm).
: 8-110
If,
8!Single point threading

!
O Machining drawing
22 10
\ M1 0* P 1 . 0
Guide bushing
F
P Starting point
/ G001
i
IGOO (greater than thread diameter + 2 pitch)
L
GOO
O Program example
20 mm-overhang tool adapter is used for the 5-station tool holder of the gang tool post.
[311-01,311-02]
£ [HEAD 1]
T400 ;
K, MO 3 S2000 ;
I
I
GOO X17.0 Z32 . 0 T04 ; The Z axis command value includes a tool edge shift of
(20+2) mm.
GOO X11.0 M2 4 ; Chamfering OFF
G01 X8.73 F0.03 ; -
Under cut machining (root diameter) (0.02 ~ 0.1)
GOO X13 . 0 ; The X position of the starting point is greater than the
thread diameter + 2 pitches.
MO 3 S1000 ;
G04 U1.0 ; Rotation waiting time
G92 X9.58 W9.0 FI . 0 ;
I I
i X9.26 ;
I X9.03 ;
.
1
.
<
X8.93 ;
X8.83 ;
GOO X17.0 S_
TOO ;
;
I
• Chamfering ON/OFF M code

? ON M23: There is an incomplete thread portion.
OFF M24: There is no incomplete thread portion, (when power is
* turned on)
||| < ;
• The chamfering width L is set in the parameter #5130 in units of 0.1
lead. T
The initial value is 10, so that L is set at 1 lead. :
J
8-111
:
i
i
:
I
Turret
16 mm standard wedge type is used. [221-01]
[HEAD 1] [HEAD 2]
Ml 31 ; Ml 31 ;
T1400 ; G140 ;
M132 ; Ml 3 2 ;
V;
M131 ; T1400 ;
<il
GOO Y17.0 Z32.0 M03 S2000 T14 ; GOO E-20.0 ;
GOO Y11.0 M2 4 ; M131 ;
I
G01 Y8.73 F0.03 ;
f GOO Y13.0 ;
M03 S1000 ; 1
G04 U1.0 ;
G92 Y9.58 W9.0 Fl.O ; ;
Y9.26 ; 1
Y9.03 ;
Y8.93 ;
Y8.83 ;
GOO Y17.0 S ;
TOO ;
: • An E axis command is issued by HEAD2. 1

When an E axis command is issued after a tool on the turret side is selected by HEAD1,
command M132 as a former block and M131 as a latter block in the G140 mode.
: .
1
8
.
8-112
A
M 10
Drilling
O Machining drawing 7
\
/
Guide bushing 10
N
i:
/
2.2
8.5
O Program example
Turret Turret $
When the single sleeve holder is used When the triple sleeve holder is used
[221-11] [421-11,421-12] [
Center: T11Q0 Center: T1351 Y46.0 side i-
Drilling: T1200 Drilling: T1352 Y-20.G side it
[HEAD 1] [HEAD I]
M131 ; M131 ;
T1100 ; T1351 ;
MO 3 S2000 ; GOO Y90.0 Z-0.5 M03 S2000 T31 ;
GOO Y90.0 Z-0.5 Til ; GOO Y46.0 •;
GOO YO ; GOO Z1Q.0 ;
GOO Z10.0 : G01 W2.2 F0.03 ;

G01 W2.2 F0.03 ; GO 4 UO.l ;
(
GO 4 UO.l ; GOO Z-0.5 ;
GOO Z-0.5 ? TOO ?
I
GOO Y90.0 TOO ; T1352 ;
G28 VO ; GOO Y-20.0 MO 3 S2500 T32 ;
T1200 ; GOO Z10.0 ;
GOO Y90.0 Z-0.5 S2500 T12 ; G01 W8.5 F0.04 ;
GOO YO ; G04 UO.l ;

GOO Z10.0 : GOO Z-0.5 TOO ;
G01 W8.5 F0.04 ; G28 VO ;
G04 UO.l ;
GOO Z-0.5 TOO ; 5
i
G28 VO ;
« _
Z : Adjust the value according to the tool installation length. I
8-113
:
s
I
\
i
r and die machining 1o
<C> Die machining drawing \ 5( W)
Guide bushing
;
;
'
/ i 1 .0
P
f
I
I O Program example
; Turret I
Triple sleeve holder used [421-12]
Die sleeve: T1353 Y46.0 side
: [HEAD 1] [HEAD 2]
•O-
M131 ; M131 ;
T1353 ; G140 ;
Ml 32 ; M132 ;
M131 ; T1353 ;
MO 3 S500 ; GOO E-8.0 : I
GOO Y90.0 2-0.5 T30 ; M131 ?
1
GOO Y46.0 ?
I
GOO Z10.0 t
.
G184 W5.0 F1.0 ;
GO 4 U1.0 ;
Threading of front, W: parts thread length, F: thread pitch
-- •
GOO Z-0.5 TOO ;

G28 VO ?
• The program example shows machining of a right-handed screw.

• When machining a left-handed screw, change M03 to M04.
II
• An E axis command is issued by HEAD2. When an E axis command is issued after a tool
on the turret side is selected by HEAD1, command Ml 32 to a former block and Ml 31 to
1
a latter block in the G140 mode.
_ _
• E , Z : Adjust the value according to the tool installation length.
:
8-114
Front rigid tapping <Optsonai> 10
O Machining drawing _9_
5
\
Guide bushing
/
1
M5*R0 . 8
/
i 0.5
O Program example ;
!
Turret t:
Triple sleeve holder is used [421-11, 421-12]
Drill sleeve: T1353 Y46.0 side
I
[HEAD 1]
M131 ;
T1353 ; ,i
G28 WO ;
;
GOO Y90.0 Z-0 5 T30- ;
GOO Y46.0 ; 5
GOO Z10.0 ;
G150 ;
|1
G99 MO 5 ;
M2 9 S1000 ;
G84 W5 . 0 FO . 8 ;
G80 ;
GOO Z-0. 5 TOO ;
....... Feed per revolution, main spindle stop
Rigid tap rotation command
Threading of front, W: Parts thread length, F: thread pitch
Cancel of rigid tap
G28 VO ;
G154 ;
• Command G99 M05 before M29.

• Command the M29 block and the G84 block continuously.
• The program example shows machining of a right-handed screw (G84).
When machining a left-handed screw, set the keep relay K07- bit6 (front rigid tap) and
K07-bit7 (rear rigid tap) to 1.
• The maximum rotation speed during rigid tapping is 1500 min'!.
• Z_ : Adjust the value according to the tool installation length.
8-115
:
II
I
1
;i
Main spindle indexing method <C axis command method>

•Issue a first indexing command by positioning of the C axis reference point (CO).
» The plus indexing angle direction and the plus selection rotation direction are the rotation M03
|
direction of the main spindle. I
<0 Angle command address
Absolute command C Example Command value Rotational angle with machining part
Incremental command H CI.O 1°
H1.0 1°
O Command code for C axis
M07:
——
M06: Main spindle clamp ON
Main spindle clamp OFF I
M08:
M09:
—— C axis ON
C axis OFF (M07 process is performed at the same x A
% Y
time.)
—
GOO C_ or GOO H_: Indexing of angle
G202: - The coordinate system of the C axis is returned to the 180*
original one.
G203: - The coordinate system of the C axis is shifted by 180°.
O' Command method
!
*
Machining by gang tool post:

Machining by turret:
<0 Program example

[HEAD 1]
------
When the 90° indexing position (D is machined from the machining position (D (C axis refer¬
ence point) of the gang tool post
Command GOO C90.0 or GOO H90.0.
Command G203 C90.0, GOO H- 90.0, or GOO C270.0.
S
I
I
MO 8 ; C axis ON
GOO CO ; Indexing of main spindle reference point
MO 6 ? Main spindle clamp ON
:
:
MO 7 ; Main spindle clamp OFF
GOO C90.0 ; 90° indexing (position of 90° from reference point)
: MO 6 ; Main spindle clamp ON
:
:
GOO H180.0 ; 180° indexing (position of 270° from reference point)
M06 ; Main spindle clamp ON
:

Caxis OFF
8-116
11 Hi Cross drilling and cross tapping program
I
NOTICE
•During cross drilling and cross tapping, be sure to put a Z axis command into the GOO
positioning block after the tool selection command is issued.
!
• In the program example, center machining is omitted.
• Input the program of center machining to an actual program.
1 • Center machining can be executed by the same method as that of the drilling program.
drilling and cross tapping

i; O Machining drawing
31
25 11
Standard
too! length
Material Dia : <j)20

Thread :M6P1.0
36 0.5.1,10,
Drill : <{>5.13 ; I
L
25 11 13 .,.10,
Standard
too! length
\
Guide bushing i
36 /
L
#
u
|
8-117
O When the milling unit ER 16 [331-50] is mounted on the gang tool post and a tap is used,
the X cross rigid tap cycle (G784) is used.
• Command the thread cutting depth of G784 by the address U (incremental).
• When a tool rotation speed of G784 of S6000 or more is commanded, an alarm is occured.
• Program example
[HEAD 1]
T700 ; Tool selection
! MO 8 ; C axis ON
i
G101 ; X power driven tool feed per revolution iiV<
M3 6 S2000 ; Forward rotation of X power driven tool 2000 min4
GOO X43.0 Z23.0 CO T07 ; Positioning X = 20+(0.5 x 2)+[(36- 25) x 2] = 43.0 1
Positioning Z = 10 + 13 = 23 1
The X power driven tool is shifted 13 mm in the Z
I
direction.
M0 6 ; Main spindle clamp ON
G01 U-28.Q F0.04 ; Drilling
GOT X21.0 F0.1 ; Drill retract
M38 ; X power driven tool stop
I
1
GOO TOO ;
T800 ;
Offset cancel
Tool selection
nsi
GOO X43.0 Z23.0 T08 ; Positioning X = 20+(0.5 x 2)+[(36- 25) x 2] = 43.0 I
Z= 10+13 = 23.0
Be sure to command after tool selection.
G784 U-20.0 F1.0 M36 S500 ; Threading, U = thread length on the drawing x 2
M3 8 ;
MO 9 ;
GOO TOO ;
X power driven tool stop
C axis OFF
Offset cancel
-1
G28 U0 ; Reference point return of X axis
G99 ; Feed per revolution
Positioning X = material diameter + (allowance x 2) + [(tool length - standard tool length) x 2]

Standard tool length: Tool length up to the center of the guide bushing during
:
X0 positioning
Z = machining position on the drawing + shift amount of tool in the Z direction a
: |||
]
.
8-118 1
!
O When the cross tap unit ER 11 [221-51] is mounted on the turret and a tap is used, the Y
cross threading cycle (G484) is used.
• Machining drawing
18 15
Standard
too! length
1 80'
1 0, 33
V L
il * Program example
[MEAD 1]
' V MO 7 ; Main spindle clamp OFF
I GOO H180.0 ; 180° indexing
MO 6 ; Main spindle clamp ON :

G103 ; Y power driven tool, feed per revolution
; M46 S500 ; Forward rotation of Y power driven tool 500 min'1
GOO Y60.0 Z35.0 T12 ; Positioning Y = 20 + (2 x 2) + [(33 - 15) x2] = 60.0
Z = 10+25 = 35
Be sure to command after tool selection.
G484 V-20.0 F1.0 ; Threading, V=thread length on the drawing x 2
M48 ; Y power driven tool motor stop
MO 9 ; C axis OFF
GOO TOO ; Offset cancel
G28 V0 ; Reference point return of Y axis
Positioning Y = material diameter + (allowance x 2) + [(tool length - standard tool length) x 2]

Standard tool length: Tool length up to the center of the guide bushing dur¬
ing Y0 positioning
Z = machining position on the drawing + shift amount of tool in the Z direction
* The program example shows machining of a right-handed screw.
1
1
-
I
8
1
'
8-119
:
1
I
I
:
.
:•
:
Milling
O Machining drawing
f
•i 6(H) 20(A)
2» 25 20 Tool length
Tool shift amount
in the Z direction 1
0.
x s.
i;*
Guide
bushing
j
i
!
f
•-T-'
(/ \(
e-
i
5
I
D
o
CM -- -o
O
4( L )
I A : Tool length
a : The clearance between material and tool
(
B = P+d
)
+a <t> D : Material diameter
2 0d : Tool diameter
H : The cutting height from the center of material
Y = ( A + H-15) X 2
O Program example
1 When the cross drill unit ER16 [221-50] is mounted on the turret and machining with B axis.
[HEAD 1]
T1700 ;
MO 8 ;
G103 ;
M46 S1000 ;
GOO B15.5 Z45.0 CO T17 ; B=(D+d)/2+a=(20+10)/2+Q.5=15.5
MO 6 ; Z = machining position on the drawing + shift amount
of tool in the Z direction = 20 + 25 = 45 1
GOO Y22.0 ; Y = (A + H - 15) x 2 = (20 + 6 - 15) x 2 = 22
G01 B-10.0 F0.03 ;
GOO Y50.0 ;
i
TOO ;
i
G28 VO ;
M48 ;
MO 9 ;
G99 ;
:! j
:. .]
i
I
I 8-120
I '
!
|
!
The rotation speed of the cutter is 0.3 times of the command value. Therefore, set the command r
value to cutter actual rotation speed -r 0.3, cutter actual feed x 0.3.
O Machining drawing
!
!:
111 9r
&
I
Guide bushing
D
T
a : The clearance between material and too!
o
<j> D : Material diameter CJ :
0d : Tool diameter
W : The depth of slotting
-6 : 6 mm shift of slotting unit in the B direction / I
2ÿ c5( W)
_2_
B= + v/ ( d/2 f -<d/2-W)z +a- 6 27.5
O When the slotting unit [421-53, 421-54] is mounted on the turret and a material Is ma¬ i.
chined on the B axis I

f.
8
Program example i
[HEAD 1]
T1800 ;
MO 8 ;
G103 ;
M46 S500 ; Y axis power driven tool forward rotation command S500
GOO B21.0 Z-0.5 CO T18 ; B=D/2 (d/2)2 - (d/2- W)2 + a - 6 = 10 +
+J - 202 + 2 - 6 = 21
J252
MO 6 ;
GOO Y26.0 ; One cutter is mounted.
G01 W5.5 F0.5 ;
G01 B-17.0 F0.08 ;
G01 Z-0.5 F0.5 ; Slotting

M48 ;
MO 9 ;
;
GOO TO ;
G28 VO ;
G99 ;
8-121
:
1
j
\\
~T~
(Y-X) synchronous control function

This function will synchronize movement of the Y (X)-axis so it moves the same amount as the X
(Y)-axis is commanded to move. When the X (Y)-axis moves in the plus (+) direction, the Y (X)-
axis moves in the plus (+) direction and when the X (Y)-axis moves in the minus (-) direction, the
Y (X)-axis moves in the minus (-) direction.
I
| • Machining such as circular interpolation, tool nose R compensation and canned cycle is also
;
Ji possible.
II
* The X axis and Y axis do not synchronize with each other in other than the MDI p|| and
MEMORY fp] mode.
* During synchronous control, a Y axis command cannot be issued in the case of M50. An X axis
command cannot be issued in the case of M52.
* When power is turned on, M51 and M53 are set.
• During synchronous control (M50 or M52), do not change the offset.

• An E axis command is issued by HEAD2. Command the tool number before the E axis command. I
When the E axis command is issued after a tool on the turret side is selected by HEAD1, com¬
mand Ml 32 as a former block and M131 as a latter block in the G140 mode.
O Command M code
. M50 Y axis synchronous control by X axis command. M52 X axis synchronous control by Y axis command.
M51 .. X-Y synchronous control,cancel M53 Y-X synchronous control cancel.
O Machining drawing +Y *
/ Tjÿ . __ 04jLj T 1400
j Finish
§
+Z
!ÿ
Rough
1
O Program example + x
[HEAD 1] [HEAD 2]
M131 ; M131 ;
X
T500 ? G140 ;
T1400 ; M132 ;
4
M132 ;
T1400 ;
M131 ;
i GOO X21.0 Y21.0 Z-1.0 T14 M03 S2500 ;
GOO E-0.2 ;
GOO X13.0 Y9.0 ; M131 ;
M52 ; l
G01 Z10.0 F0.1 ;
G01 Y10.0 F0.1 ; X-axis movement command is
G01 Z18.0 F0.15 ; impossible in this interval.
G01 Y21.0 W5.5 F0.2 ;
M53 ;
GOO X25.0 Y25.0 TO ;
G28 UO VO ;
!
8-122
8-15-2 HEAD2 side machining program pattern
For a position command of each axis, see Section 6.4, "Tool holder related dimensional drawing" and
Section 8.4, "Coordinate system".
Program beginning
[HEAD2]
01234 ? Program number
G130 ; Z2 axis coordinate system setting cancel
I G140 ; E axis coordinate system setting cancel
ml
m M131 ; The turret is used by the HEAD1 side (waiting for the HEAD!
side)
G99 G40 G97 M59 ; Feed per revolution, tool nose R compensation cancel, constant
I surface speed cancel, sub-spindle unclamp
MO 5 ; Sub-spindle stop
i
'-.f TOO ; Offset cancel
G28 WO
G50 ZO ;
; Reference point return of Z2 axis
Coordinate system ZO
I
M2 00 ; Waiting for M200 on the HEAD1 side
1
M20 ; One cycle stop
M2 5 ; Coolant ON
H Parts ejection process

[HEAD2]
I
m
MO 5 ;
TOO ;
Sub-spindle stop
Offset cancel
;T . G28 VO WO ; Reference point return of Y axis and Z2 axis
Ml 7 (op. ) Parts separator B advance
1
%
Mil
M84 (Op. }
The sub-collet opens.
Parts conveyor ON
G04 U1.0 ; Dwell 1 second
I M18 ; (op.)
M2 7 ; (op.)
Parts separator B retract
Parts ejection detection ON
|
1 j
8-123
;
:
'
\ r?
operation of HEADS side

j When performing an independent operation of HEAD2 |g{gj , be sure to command the HEAD2 inde¬
pendent operation block jump function (G900 Jj, Nj) for the part of the HEAD2 program to be block-
jumped.
The HEAD2 independent operation block jump function is a function for jumping from the G900 Jj
I block to the blocks of up to the sequence number Nj during independent operation of HEAD2 |gj7j|.
I Example: When the one cycle key is turned on by the SIMUL |gg| operation, and the program is
stopped by M20, and the inode HEAD2 |gg| key is pressed and turned on, and the start
I button jff1 is pressed, and the HEAD2 side independent operation (only a part chucked by
the sub-spindle is machined) is performed, be sure to command the part of the HEAD2
program to be block-jumped.
I
O Format
[HEAD 2]
01234 ;
: Program beginning
:
M20 7
M2 5 ;
: Back machining
Parts ejection
G900 Jj ; HEAD2 independent operation block jump
: Front machining j : The sequence number is commanded.
Parts pickup (The decimal point should not be inputted.)
: Example: G900 J50 ;
Nj ; Sequence number N50 ;

M99 ;
8-124
Parts pickup in cutting-off process
<0 Program example
[HEAD1 side] [HEAD2 side]
G99 MO 3 S ?
GOO X Z
_ _
T100 ; Cut-off tool selection
T01 ;
(Cutting-off positioning)
M82 ; (waiting) M82 ; (waiting) Synchronous rotation control ON
G131 ; Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system for
parts pickup
GOO Z-l . 0 ; Position at a distance of 1 mm from
the material face
M68 ;
G98 G01 Z _ Z2 axis torque limit ON
F2000 ; (Pickup positioning) i
_M_6_9_ ; _
Z2 ax_is_ torque limit OFF_
M500 ; (waiting) M500 ; (waiting)
MlIO ~f Sub-collet closed
G01 X-2.0 F0.02 ;
(Cutting-off process)
M510 ; (waiting) M510 ;
i MS 8 ;
GOO W-10.0 ; Parts pickup
MS 9 ;
M83 ; (waiting)
M80T
"" —
'
M83 ; (waiting) Synchronous rotation control OFF
"M"2"7" (op7)~ Partsplckup detection ON
' " "
I TOO ;
! (Barstock absence G28 WO ; Reference point return of Z2 axis
detection process) G130 ; Z2 axis coordinate system setting cancel
MO 5 ; Sub-spindle stop
i
M81 ; N50 ; Block jump sequence number
M99 ; End of program M99 ; End of program
I • Issue an independent block command to G130 and G131.

• When commanding G131, be sure to command Z1 axis coordinate system setting (G120)
beforehand.
I
.3
Z1 axis coordinate system setting (G120) cCommand by the HEAD1 side>
• Command G131 when the Z1 axis stops.
Even if the Z1 axis moves after the G131 command is issued, the absolute reference point of
the Z2 axis is not reflected by the movement. To make the absolute reference point of the Z2
I axis be reflected, command G131 once again.

!
!'.
8-125
(
?
i <C> Pickup related diagram

+Y
+B T O
-Y
«
Y240 . 0
EO . 0
L
+ Z2 -Z2
205st 1 36 12* 100 20 . 0
1 2st-
~1
-X j
nr
Ml
max.75
159
€
gaxÿ7|
I
4d
A
~Z1 + Z1
max 150 ,
zo . o
c 300 s t
(When 421-04 is mounted)
8
l X1 1 0 . 0
16 304st (When 421-01 or 421-91 is
mounted)
320
\
i • The maximum length of parts to be picked up is 150 mm.
it * The maximum parts length of each picked-up parts from the front face of the sub-spindle is
75 mm.
|
• The maximum inserted length of each picked-up parts from the front face of the sub-spindle
is 75 mm.
[G131 Z-1.0: Position diagram]

I
.1
8-126
:
_
diameter machining [HEAD2]
O Linear, taper machining drawing
!=
!ÿ
T 1 332 !
T1 331
to
Jlli°
o Sub-spindle
+ Z«- a !
•©
a?
19 21 _7
G 1 32k30 . 0 :
G00Z-1 . 0 : 1 30 ( k )
|
• Tool holder related dimensional drawing
l|
I
421-03
Reference point of E axis
3
1 59 159
(E)
30 ( k
1 )
BE
|
2 Reference point of Z2 axis
1 (E): Geometry offset E of tool number [
(k): G132k!s
I
I !
8-127
II
;
it
I
t
1ir
O Program example
Turret
3-station toolholder for inverse tool setting for backworking ( 12 mm) is used [421-03]
[HEAD 2]
TOO ;
M132 ;
i T1331 ;
GOO E-100.0 ;
MO 4 S2000 ; Sub-spindle reverse rotation.
G28 WO ;
G132 K30.0 ;
GOO Z-1.0 T31 ;

Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back ma¬
chining, protruded length from sub-spindle 30 mm.
The Z2 axis moves from the tool tip to the position at a
distance of 1 mm from the parts face of the sub-spindle.
I
GOO Y11.0 ;
I
G01 Y6.0 F0.05 ;
G01 Y8.0 Z0.5 F0.02 ;
G01 Z19.0 F0.04 ;
G01 Y11.0 Z20.5 F0.02 ;
GOO Y40.0 TOO ;
T1332 ;
G132 K30.0 ; Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back ma¬
chining, protruded length from sub-spindle 30 mm.
GOO Z23.0 E0 T32 ; The Z2 axis moves from the tool tip to the position at a
GOO Y11.0 ;
G01 Y8.0 F0.02 ;
G01 Y11.0 F0.05 ;
;
GOO Y40.0 TOO ;
G28 VO WO ;
|
----
G130 ; The setting of the Z2 axis coordinate system is returned I
to the original one.
a G130: Cancel of Z2 axis coordinate system setting

—
• G132 Kk: Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machining
k: — Parts length from the front face of the sub- spindle (mm)
• Issue an independent block command for G130 and G132 Kk.
* The k value commanded by G132Kk is a modal value.
a When commanding G132Kk, be sure to input the geometry offset E (plus value) of the tool
number used by G132Kk on the geometry offset 2 screen beforehand. §

E: -Distance from the edge of the cutting-off tool to the edge of back machining tool at the
reference point of the E axis
®
Command G132Kk after the HEAD2 side cancels the offset (TOO) and selects a tool.
• Even if the E axis moves after the G132Kk command is issued, the absolute reference point
of the Z2 axis is not reflected by the movement. Command G132Kk once again.
8-128
I Circular interpolation machining [HEA02]
This command will move the tool from the current position to the specified position in an arc of the
commanded radius.
O Circular interpolation direction
Z-Y plane B-Y plane Z-B plane E-Y plane
+B +B +Y
A A
.G02 GO 2. «G03 sG02
GOS' G02' QOS'
+Z<- +Y +z<- +E<-
O Format on the HEAD2 side

1
G154;
Z2-Y plane G18
GI54;
[G02
G03
Y(V> Z(W).
It K-
F- •;
B-Y plane G17 [G02

G03
Y(V> B-
Zl K‘
F-
G154;
Z2-B plane G19
G02
L G03 B- Z(W)•
& JL
F- 1!:
;
G158;
E-Y plane (G18) [G02
G03
Y (VI¬ E¬
£ JO
F-
Si
Y, B, Z, E: Circular arc finishing position: The addresses Y and Z can be changed to incremen¬
tal commands.
R: The radius of circular arc
I: The diameter direction distance to the center of the arc as viewed from the starting point.
(Incremental radius value) i
K: The longitudinal distance to the center of the arc as viewed from the starting point.
(Incremental value)
Start point K
F: The feed rate along the circular arc
+ Z<-
h
1
|
|
End point
1
+X
Center of circular arc
(ÿ
The radius command is set within 180°. When setting a circular arc that exceeds 180°, divide the value
into 2 blocks.
8-129
:
i
I
I O Machining drawing T14
Sub-spindle
f 0L5,
2
w* *
10
—
20 ( L )
; O Program example
Turret, wedge-free type 016 mm for backworking is used [221-72]
[HEAD2]
TOO ;
M132 ;
T1400 ;
MO 3 S2000 ;
GOO E-100 . 0 ;
G28 WO ;
G132 K20.0 ; Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during
back machining, protruded length from sub¬
spindle 20 mm
GOO Z-0.5 T14 ; The Z2 axis moves from the tool tip to the posi¬
tion at a distance of 0.5 mm from the parts face
of the sub-spindle.
GOO Y11.0 ;
GOO Y 4 . 0 ;
1 G01 Z2.0 F0.03 ;
G154 ;
G18 G02 Y6.0 Z3 . 0 R1. 0 FO . 02 ; Circular interpolation !
G01 Z10.0 FO . 03 ;
i G03 Y10.0 Z12.0 R2.0 FO . 02 ; Circular interpolation
G01 Y11.0 FO . 05 ; f
|
GOO Y40.0 TOO ;
----
fi G28 VO WO ;
G13 0 ; Cancel of Z2 axis coordinate system setting
• G130: Cancel of Z2 axis coordinate system setting

—
• G132Kk: Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machining
k:
— Parts length from the front face of the sub- spindle (mm)
• Issue an independent block command for G13G and G132 Kk.
» The k value commanded by G132Kk is a modal value.
* When commanding G132Kk, be sure to input the geometry offset E (plus value) of the tool
number used by G132Kk on the geometry offset 2 screen beforehand.
E: --Distance from the edge of the cut-off tool to the edge of back machining tool at the
* Command G132Kk after the HEAD2 side cancels the offset (TOO) and selects a tool.
of the Z2 axis is not reflected by the movement. When issuing E-axis command or tool selec¬
tion on HEAD2 side, command G132Kk once again.
8-130
\
point threading [HEAD2] y
I
i-
:
O Machining drawing j.
Start point
(greater than thread diameter + 2 pitches) i
2 ;ÿ
;•
GOO
T
GOOI 1GOO
F
12, / r
<o Sub-spindle S'
M 10* P 1 . 0 30 ( k )
Si
3
O Too! holder related dimensional drawing f
I
i:
£
221-72 IS
;o
2 157(E) 159
i
:
30 ( k.)
Guide bushing Sub-spindie
Reference point of Z2 axis
(
&
1 (E): Geometry offset E of tool number ?v
(k): G132kk 15
11
I I
i
1
if
8-131 :
i
I
:
¥
l !
:
f
i1
t
%
I
r
<0 Program example
Turret
Wedge-free type Dl6 mm for backworking is used [221-72]
[HEAD2]
. TOO ;
i M132 ;
T1600 ;
GOO E-100.0 ;
G28 WO ;
G132 K30.0 ; Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back ma¬
chining, protruded length from sub-spindle 30 mm
| GOO Z-2.0 T16 ; The Z2 axis moves from the tool tip to the position at a
GOO Y13.0 M2 4 ; Chamfering OFF. The Y position of the start point is
"greater than thread diameter + 2 pitches ".
MO 3 S1000 ;
G04 U1.0 ; Rotation waiting time
G92 Y9.58 W11.0 Fl . 0 ; W is length of thread (allowance included).
Y9.26 ;
Y9.03 ;
Y8.93 ;
Y8.83 ;
si GOO Y17.0 TOO
G28 WO ;
; 8
Cancel of Z2 axis coordinate system setting
G13 0 ;

—
k:
* Issue an independent block command for G130 and G132 Kk.
• The k value commanded by G132Kk is a modal value.
• When commanding G132Kk, be sure to input the geometry offset E (plus value) of the tool
E: --Distance from the edge of the cut-off tool to the edge of back machining tool at the S
reference point of the E axis.
• Even if the E axis moves after the G132Kk command is issued, the absolute reference point 1
of the Z2 axis is not reflected by the movement. When issuing E-axis command or tool selec¬ I
If
* Chamfering
ON M23: There is an incomplete thread.
OFF M24: There is no incomplete thread. (Status when power is turned on)
• Chamfering width
L = parameter #5130 in units of 0.1 lead
r
When the value of #5130 is 10, L - 1 lead.
8-132
|:
i: f
!
Drilling [HEAD2] I:
O Machining drawing j:
11 r
:
3.5,
. !
!.
i- :
---
:
T 1 452
T 1 451
-
-*ÿ
Drill
Center
N
in
3J7
Sub-spindle
i ::
Ip 30 ( k )
<0 Sieeve holder related dimensional drawing

I,
I 421-11 Reference point of E axis

”
193
r
:
Drill
§ !ÿ
eÿ- 30 ( k, )
Center
70 Reference point of Z2 axis

2
125 55
IS
«j
f;:
5 T 1451(E)
T 1 452 ( E ? (E): Geometry offset E of tool number

f
(k):
?G132kk I
• ;
.
i
I! 8-133
i
...
, V I
j
5 ki—
O Program example
Turret
Triple sleeve holder is used (421-11, 421-12)
Center: T1451 Y46.0 side
Drilling: T1452 Y-20.0 side
[HEAD2]
TOO ;
M132 ;
T1451 ;
; GOO E-90.0 ;
M03 S2000 ;
G28 WO ;
G132 K30.0 ; Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machining,
1 GOO Z-1.0 T21 ;
protruded length from sub-spindle 30 mm.
The Z2 axis moves from the tool tip to the position at a distance
of 1 mm from the parts face of the sub-spindle.
GOO Y9G.G ;
1
GOO Y46.0 ;
G01 W3 .5 F0.03 ; Centering
G04 U0.1 ;
GOO Z-1.0 TOO ?
T1452 ;
; G132 K30.0 ; Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machining,
MO 3 S1500 ; protruded length from sub-spindle 30 mm.
GOO Z-1.0 T22 ;
I GOO Y-20.0 ;
The Z2 axis moves from the tool tip to the position at a distance
of 1 mm from the parts face of the sub-spindle.
G01 Wll.O F0.04 ; Drilling
G04 U0.1 ;
G01 Z-1.0 F0.1 ;
TOO ;
----
G28 VO WO ;
G13 0 ; Cancel of Z2 axis coordinate system setting

• G132 Kk: — Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machining
* When commanding G |32Kk, be sure to input the geometry offset E (plus value) of the tool
E: —Distance from the edge of the cut-off tool to the edge of back machining tool at the
• Command G132Kk after the HEAD2 side cancels the offset (TOO) and selects a tool.
8-134
.
and die machining [HEAD2]
O’ Tapping diagram
\
!:
10 r
i;
2 !:
!
i
:
AAAAAAAAAÿ
y. Sub-spincSIe \
-E-Vwwvwÿ-ÿ
—
!
!:
HHnHHttmHH
T 1 453 Tap
M5 * PO . 8
30 ( K )
<0 Sleeve holder related dimensional drawing ii-
IS!
421-11
193
1i;
1 -ft
_ ft.
B&- 36 (k )-i_.
t
Tap
Guide bushing
— E- Sub-spindle
Reference point of 72 axis
i 125 60
I T1453CE)
(E): Geometry offset E of tool number
(k): G132kk
i
8-135
. . ..
i
|
O Program example:
Turret
— G284
Triple sleeve holder is used [421-11, 421-12]

Tap sleeve: T1453 Y46.0 side
[HEAD2]
TOO ;
M132 ;
I T1453 ;
M03 S1000 ;
G28 WO ;
S G132 K30.0 ; Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machining, pro¬
I GOO Z-2.0 T23 ;
truded length from sub-spindle 30 mm
The Z2 axis moves from the tool tip to the position at a distance of I
GOO Y90.0 ;
GOO Y46. 0 ;
2 mm from the parts face of the sub-spindle.
|
M
G284 W10.0 F0.8 ; Threading of rear, W: parts thread length, F: thread pitch
| G04 U1.0 ;
TOO ;
G28 VO WO ;
Pis
?1
G130 ; Cancel of Z2 axis coordinate system setting

• G130: Cancel of Z2 axis coordinate system setting sI
—
• G132 Kk: Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machining I
k:
* The k value commanded by G 132Kk is a modal value.
E: -Distance from the edge of the cut-off tool to the edge of back machining tool at the
i
11
|
:
:
8-136 ;
MRear rigid tapping <Optionai> :
O Program example
:
r Turret F
Triple sleeve holder is used [421-11, 421-12] i
Drill sleeve: T1453 Y46.0 side
i
[HEAD2]
TOO ; i
M132 ;
T1453 ;
G28 WO ;
G132 K30.0 ; Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machining, pro¬
truded length from sub-spindle 30 mm
GOO Z-2.0 T23 ; The Z2 axis moves from the tool tip to the position at a distance of
2 mm from the parts face of the sub-spindle. :
GOO Y90.0 ;
GOO Y46.0 ;
G99 M05 ; 1
M2 9 S1000 ? Rigid tap rotation command
G84 W10.0 F0.8 ; Threading of rear, W: parts thread length, F: thread pitch
G80 ; Cancel of rigid tap
TOO ;
G28 VO WO ; i!
G130 ; Cancel of Z2 axis coordinate system setting
| f
1 • Command G99 M05 before M29.
•Command the M29 block and the G84 block continuously.
* The program example shows machining of a right-handed screw.
When machining a left-handed screw, set the keep relay K07- bit6 (front rigid tap) and K07-
i;!
v:
• G130:
---
bit7 (rear rigid tap) to 1.
« The maximum rotation speed during rigid tapping is 1500 min'1.
—
k:— Parts length from the front face of the sub- spindle (mm)
!
f
* When commanding G132Kk, be sure to input the geometry offset E (plus value) of the tool
number used by G132Kk on the geometry offset 2 screen beforehand. F
—
E: Distance from the edge of the cut-off tool to the edge of back machining tool at the
v
:
8-137
F
j
indexing method (15° indexing)

• Issue a first indexing command by positioning of the reference point (G200 CO).
• Issue an independent block command for G200 and G201.
* The indexing angle direction is the rotation M04 direction of the sub-spindle. With respect to
the selection rotation direction, a shortcut is selected. 1
Example: * G200 C90.0
f The sub-spindle rotates toward the 90° M04 direction from CO (reference
point).
• G200 C30Q.0
The sub-spindle rotates toward the 60° M03 direction from CO (reference
point).
Use C (absolute) to command G201.
Example: • G201 C90.0
!!«
The sub-spindle rotates toward the 90° M03 direction from CO (reference
| point).
O Sub-spindle indexing command code

G2QQ:
— Sub-spindle indexing
G201:
M59:
—— Sub-spindle indexing (command angle + 180°)
Sub-spindle unclamp
I
Absolute command C Example . Command value Rotational angle with machining part
Incremental command H C15.0 15.0°
H15.0 15.0°
Minimum set unit: 15.0° (divided by 24)
O Program example
I
[HEAD2]
M0 5 ; Sub-spindle stop
G200 CO ; Indexing of sub-spindle reference point
:
; :
G200 C15.0 ; 15° indexing (position of 15° from reference point)
:
:
G200 H15.0 ; 15° indexing (position of 30° from reference point)
i :
fl
:
G201 C45.0 ; 225° indexing (position of 225° from reference point)
: 225 = 45 + 180
. : II
M59 ; Sub-spindle unclamp
J 111
i
:
! 8-138
I
.. ..
drilling, cross tapping [HEAD2]
<0 Machining drawing
T 1 600
T1ÿ0Q
T1 600
tu
.
CO
T 1 500 M5*P0 8
CO co
CO Prepared hole <|>4.3
in
o o
V
in" in Sub-spindle
CM '
:
i
19* 20
II
a
30 ( k )
O Tool unit related dimensional drawing

22;1 -50
I
Guide bushing
f Sub-spind!e
Reference point
1
30 ( k ) of Z2 axis
b !
2 25 293
Ti
(k): G132kk
Positioning Y = material diameter + (allowance X 2) + [(tool length - standard tool length) X 2]

Standard tool length: Tool length up to the center of the guide bushing during
......
;
YO positioning
Z= machining position on the drawing (position from the front end of parts),
for G132Kk
*
I
}
8-139
l
:
I
:
l
:
?
in
O Program example
Turret: Cross drill unit ER16 [221-50] T1500
Cross tap unit ER11 [221-51] T1600
[HEAD2]
TOO ;
M132 ;
T1500 ;
GOO E-100.0 ;
MO 5 ;
M46 S2000 ; Forward rotation of Y power driven tool 2000 min'1
G28 WO ;
G132 K30.0 ; Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machin¬
ing, protruded length from sub-spindle 30 mm
GOO Y47.0 Z1G.0 T15 ; Positioning Y = 10+(0.5x2)+[(33-15)x2] = 47.0
The Z2 axis moves from the tool tip to the position at a
G01 V-25.0 F0.04 ; Drilling
G04 U0.1 i
G01 Y47.0 F1.0 ; Drill retract
GOO TOO ; Offset cancel
] G132 K30.0 ; Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machin¬
ing, protruded length from sub-spindle 30 mm
M46 S500 Forward rotation of Y power driven tool 500 min'1 S •
GOO Y50.0 Z10.0 T16 ; Positioning Y = 10+(2x2)+[(33-15)x2] = 50.0

I Be sure to command the Z command after tool selection.
G484 V-10.0 F0.8 ; Threading, V = thread length on the drawing x 2
M48 ; Y power driven tool stop
M59 ; Sub-spindle unclamp
GOO TOO § Offset cancel
G28 V0 WO ; Reference point return of Y axis and Z2 axis
G130 ; ‘
* When machining a left-handed screw, change M46 to M47.

—
* Even if the E axis moves after the G132Kk command is issued, the absolute reference point
8-140
1 :
[HEAD2] r i
I
O Machining drawing
c k
?
:
20(A) .6(H)
!.
Tool length 10,. 20
5
1 0.
22 1-50
I
'"'i i -T-
•o Q
! Sub-spindle
o o
CM
1 s
a/ * \a
4(L)
!
A : Tool length
. a : The clearance between material and tool j
B= ( D + d ) /2+ a tp D : Material diameter
<pd : Tool diameter
Y = ( A + H- 1 5 ) X2 H : The cutting height from the center of material
;
* <0 Tool unit related dimensional drawing
1 •
'
•••!/
: I
JR 22,1 -50 Reference point of E axis
¥
3
*

|®
b 30 ( k )
j.
2 25 293
E
If s
(k): G 1 32kk
is
!.
8-141 !
i
i
f
;
O Program example
When the cross drill unit ER16 [221-50] is mounted on the turret and machining with B axis.
[HEAD2]
TOO ;
M132 ;
T1700 ;
GOO E-100.0 ;
MO 5 ;
1
l G200 CO ;
G103 ; Indexing of sub-spindle reference point
M46 S1000 ; Y power driven tool, feed per revolution 111
G28 WO ; Forward rotation of Y power driven tool 1000 mitr!
G132 K30.Q ;
t Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machining, I
G00 B15.5 ; protruded length from sub-spindle 30 mm
:
GOO Y22.0 Z10.0 T17 ; Positioning B = (D+d)/2+a=(20+10)/2+0.5 = 15.5
Positioning Y = (A+H-15)x2=(20+6-15)x2 = 22
? The Z2 axis moves from the tool tip to the position at a dis¬
G01 B-10.0 F0.03 ? tance of 10 mm from the parts face of the sub-spindle.
GOO Y50.0 ;
TOO ;
G28 VO WO ;
M48 j
M59 ;
G99 ;
* G130: Cancel of Z2 axis coordinate system setting

* G132 Kk:
— Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machining
1
E: —Distance from the edge of the cut-off tool to the edge of back machining tool at the I?!
reference point of the E axis I!
• Command G132Kk after the HEAD2 side cancels the offset (TOO) and selects a tool. I
• Even if the E axis moves after the G132Kk command is issued, the absolute reference point |||
•
8-142
mill*
ir,
/ÿ
H Front and rear simultaneous machining [HEAD2]
O Drilling drawing ;
A
\
4 .2.5
[ HERD2 ] ( HERD 1 ]
1 1
Center T1551 T1551 center
S
Prepared hole T1552 prepared
drill T1552 hole drill
Tap T1553 \ T1553 tap
6 8
!
M4*P0.7 M3*PQ.5
10 12
O' Sleeve holder related dimensional drawing
421-1 1
Guide bushing l /
—
51
52
-&T Sub-spindle
'i
c Reference point
i 53 of Z2 axis
g \ 47.5 i
11 J 64 50 57.5 30 I
<k)
T1551 ( E )
f
2 T 1 552 ( E )
T 1 553 ( E )

t
(k): G132kk
:
i
r
8-145
r
i
!
;;
|:
I
[V .'V
O Program example
? r Turret
IU Triple sleeve holder is used [421-11, 421-12]
Center: T1551 Y46.0 side i? 1
Drilling: T1552 Y-20.0 side
Tap: T1553 Y46.0 side
M131 ;
T1551 ;
MO 3 S2000 ;
GOO Z10.0 T21 ;
[HEAD1 side]
-- Ml 31 ;
[HEAD2 side] 1
I
i
---
v
GOO Y90.0 ;
GOO Y46.0 ;
i
5 M132 ; Ml 3 2 ; II
T1551 ; m
GOO EO ;
MO 3 S2000 ; jl
G28 WO ;
G132 K30.0 ; Setting of back machin¬
ing Z2 axis coordinate system
GOO Z-1.0 T21 ;
M400 ;
G01 W2.5 F0.Q4 ; Centering
— M400 ;
G01 Z3.0 F0.03 ; Centering
:
G04 UO .1 ; G04 U0.1 ; 1

GOO Z10.0 ; GOO Z-30.0 ; I
TOO ; TOO ;
Ml 31 ; M131 ;
|
T1552 ;
MO 3 S3000 ;
GOO Z10.0 Y-20.0 T22 ;
M132 ; -Ml 3 2 ;
T1552
M03 S2500 ;
---
G132 K30.0 ;
GOO Z-1.0 T22 ;
i
| MS 00 ; -MS 00 ?
1 G01 W12.0 F0.06 ; Prepared hole drilling G01 Z10.0 F0.04 ; Prepared hole drilling
1
G04 U0.1 ; G04 U0.1 ;
---
GOO Z10.0 ; GOO Z-30.0 ;
-ÿ!
TOO ; TOO ?
M131 ; -Ml 31 ;
1
1i ! : iv.
i
8-146
1.
i
I [HEADI side] [HEAD2 side]

T1553 ;
M3 S600 ;
GOO Z10.0 Y46.0 T23 ;
M132 ; •Ml 3 2 ?
T1553 ; :
M03 S500 ;
G132 K30.0 ;
GOO Z-1.0 T23 ; 1
M600 ; -M600 ;
1 G184 W8.0 F0.5 ; G284 W6.0 F0.7 ;

G04 U1.0 ; G04 U1.0 ;
GOO Z-0.5 ; GOO Z-30.0 ;
TOO ; TOO ;
M700 ; --- -M700 ;
G28 VO WO ;
G130 ; Cancel of Z2 axis coordinate
system setting
• G130:
----
When machining a left-handed screw, change M03 to M04.
—
• Even if the E axis moves after G132Kk command is issued, the absolute reference point of
the Z2 axis is not reflected by the movement. When issuing E-axis command or tool selection
on HEAD2 side, command G132Kk once again.
8-147
I
.
i
If
synchronous control function

This function will synchronize movement of the Z2-axis so it moves the same amount as the Zl-
axis is commanded to move. When the Z1 axis moves in the plus (+) direction, the Z2 axis moves
in the minus (-) direction and when the Zi axis moves in the minus (-) direction, the Z2 axis moves
in the plus (+) direction.
Machining such as circular interpolation, tool nose R compensation and canned cycle is also possible.
O Command M code
These are commanded by the program of HEAD1.
M40 Z1-Z2 synchronous control ON 2 n 22 50 .28. 10
I M41 Z1-Z2 synchronous control OFF C\J
O Machining drawing
Guide bushing f
Sub-spindle
O Program example
M12»Pt.25
l---'I ft :
20 mm-overhang tool adapter [311-01,311-02] is used for the 5-station tool holder of the gang
tool post.
[HEAD 1] [HEAD 2]
M131 ; M131 ;
II
T400 ; M82 ;
M03 S1000 ; G131 ;
GOO X15.0 Z60.0 T04 ; GOO Z-1.0 ;
M82 ; M68 ;
M40 ; Z1-Z2 Synchronous control ON G98 G01 Z10.0 F2000 ;
MHO ; G99 ;
G92 X11.5 W50.0 PI. 25 ; M69 ;
\
Xll.l ; M40 ; Z2-axis movement command
X10.84 ; M41 ; is impossible in this interval.
X10.64 ;
X10.44 ;
M83 ;
GO 4 ;
— I Z2-axis movement command
is impossible because M41
command has been executed. I
i
X10 .34 ; TOO ;
X10 .3 ; G28 WO ;
GOO TOO ; G13 0 ;
Mill ;
i
M41 ; Z1-Z2 Synchronous control OFF
M83 ;
G99 ;
8-148
I
« These are only valid when commanded during SIMUL |||| operation in MEMORY fp]
:
mode.
i; • During synchronous control, it is not possible to issue Z2-axis moving command. i
Even if the mode is switched to JOG pwT| or STEP p\T] mode, the synchronous command is
kept valid. It is impossible to move only the Z2 axis. When the Z1 axis moves, the Z2 axis
moves in synchronous with it.
'
• After M41 (Z1-Z2 axis synchronous control OFF) is commanded, do not give the Z2 axis ;
movement command for 2 blocks (3 blocks during tool nose R compensation) in the program
on the HEAD2 side.
• There will be no effect on the Z2-axis work coordinate system if work coordinate system shift
commands or geometry offset commands, which only change the work coordinate system
without moving the machine, are executed on the HEAD1 side.
• When the HBAD1 side issues wear offset commands or tool nose R offset commands, the Z2
axis movement path is shifted by the offset but no offset amount is set. (An offset vector will
not be created.)
II [ |
When RESET # key is pressed, the synchronization is turned off.
• Be sure not to make interference of tool unit with sub-spindle.
'
’b-', • Command G130orG131inan independent block.

• In case commanding G131, be sure to command Zl-axis coordinate setting (G120) before¬
hand.
11 Zl-axis coordinate setting (G120) cCommand on FIEADI side>.
m « Command G131 when Z1-axis is stopped.
;
If Zl-axis moves after G131 command, the absolute reference point of the Z2-axis is not
reflected by the movement.
To reflect it, command G131 again.
1
1 i
I
:
:
8-149
;
O When the slotting unit ER16 (421-53, 421-54) is mounted on the turret and machining with
B axis
• Program example
[HEAD2]
TOO ;
M132 ;
T1800 ;
GOO E-100.0 ;
MO 5 ;
M46 S500 ; Forward rotation of Y power driven tool 500 min1 I
G28 WO ;
G132 K30.0 ; Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machining,
protruded length from sub-spindle 30 mm
GOO B21.0 Z-0.5 T18 ; Positioning:B=D/2 +
The Z2 axis moves from the tool
+ a - 6 = 10 +
tip to the
J252~202 + 2- 6 = 21
position at a dis¬ |!|
tance of 0.5 mm from the parts face of the sub-spindle.
GOO Y26.0 ;
G01 W5.5 F0.5 ; 81-
G01 B-17.0 F0.Q8
G01 Z-0.5 F0.5 ;
; ] Slotting
GOO TOO ;
G28 VO W0 ;
M48 ;
----
M59 ;
G99 ;
I:
ffj
• G132 Kk: — Setting of Z2 axis coordinate system during back machining
k:
I
:
E: —Distance from the edge of the cut-off tool to the edge of back machining tool at the
A
p|
II
Jll
8-144
iij:
• These are only valid when commanded during SIMUL |gji| operation in MEMORY pzp]
mode.
• During synchronous control, it is not possible to issue Z2-axis moving command.
Even if the mode is switched to JOG or STEP py| mode, the synchronous command is
;
moves in synchronous with it.
• After M41 (Z1-Z2 axis synchronous control OFF) is commanded, do not give the Z2 axis
on the HEAD2 side.
| • There will be no effect on the Z2-axis work coordinate system if work coordinate system shift
commands or geometry offset commands, which only change the work coordinate system :

• When the HEAD! side issues wear offset commands or tool nose R offset commands, the Z2
axis movement path is shifted by the offset but no offset amount is set. (An offset vector will
not be created.)
• When RESET j # [ key is pressed, the synchronization is turned off.
• Be sure not to make interference of tool unit with sub-spindle. "j
• Command G130orG131inan independent block.

• In case commanding G131, be sure to command Zl-axis coordinate setting (G120) before¬
If hand.
Zl-axis coordinate setting (G120) <Command on HEAD1 side>.
• Command G131 when Z1-axis is stopped.
jll
If Zl-axis moves after G131 command, the absolute reference point of the Z2-axis is not
reflected by the movement.
I
To reflect it, command G131 again.
f
|*
8-149
:
N |
HZ1-E simultaneous machining [HEAD2J

O Machining drawing
11841 Center
T1842 Drill
10
<t> 7 (V
54
zs->
Guide bushing i!»
i
2 13,1719 25
;
<t> 8 lO
CM
r
T800 T 600
End mill Center
O Tool unit related dimensional drawing
421-51
25(E)
Guide bushing
1 '+
Sub-spindle
b
:
49 5
2 318
:•
:
:
/
8-150
\
O Program example
Gang tool post Turret
i II
i
Milling unit [331-50] 2-spindle cross drill unit [421-51]
Center: T600 Center: T1841 Y62.0 side
Milling: T800 Drilling: T1842 Y88.0 side
[HEAOl side] [HEAD2 side]
T600 ? |
---
MO 3 S500 ;
GOO Z47.0 TO 6
M82 M82 ; Main/sub spindle synchronous {.
rotation control ON
G131 ; Setting of Z2 axis coordinate
f
system for parts pickup
GOO Z-1.0
M68 ; Z2 axis torque limit ON ;
G98 G01 Z5.0 F2000 ; Parts pickup
G99 ;
M69 ; Z2 axis torque limit OFF
M83 ; •M83 Main/ sub spindle synchronous
!
rotation control OFF I
MO 8 ;
GOO CO ;
M40 ; ---M40 Z1-Z2 synchronous control ON
:
MHO ; TOO ;
M132 ;
G101 ;
— --- ---Ml 32
T1841
; Turret used on the HEAD2 side
I
M3 6 SHOO ; G141 ; Setting of E axis coordinate system
GOO E25.0 ; Positioning of machining %
---
G103 ;
M46 S2000 ;
Ml 40 ; Ml 40 ; Zl-E synchronous control ON
GOO X21.0 ; GOO Y83.0 T21 ; %
G01 X15.0 F0.05 ; Centering G01 Y78.0 F0.03 ; Centering
G04 U0.1 ; G04 U0.1 ; T
GOO X21.0 GOO Y110.0 TOO

TOO ; T1842
i:
G28 U0 ; GOO E25.0 T22 ;
T800 ; M46 SHOO |
8-151
I
4
]
1
||
I:.
I |'v
|
;i:
[HEADI side] [HEAD2 side]

! Drilling
M36 SIOOO ; G01 V-40.0 F0.07 ;
GOO X21.0 TO 8 ; G04 U0.1 ;
G01 X14.0 F0.03 ; milling GOO Y110.0 ;
GO 4 U0.1 ;
G01 W7.0 F0.03 ; milling
GO 4 UO.l ;
#
|
: GOl X21.0 FO.l ;
M600 ; ; Waiting
.
Mill ;
M41 ;
Ml 41
M3 8 ;
---
— - -M41 ;
M48 ;
GO 4 ;
;
Z1-Z2 synchronous control OFF
Zl-E synchronous control OFF 1I
MO 9 ;
TOO ; TOO
G28 UO ; G28 VO WO ; I
G99 ? G130 ; Cancel of Z2 axis coordinate 1
system setting
G140 ; Cancel of E axis coordinate
system setting
G99 ;
• M40 is valid only when it is commanded during SIMUL |g[i]| operation in MEMORY mode I
0
• During Z1-Z2 synchronous control, it is not possible to issue Z2-axis moving command. IJ
Even if the mode is switched to JOG or STEP py] mode, the synchronous command is $
: moves in synchronization with it. l!
* After M41 (Z1-Z2 axis synchronous control OFF) is commanded, do not give the Z2 axis
:
: movement command for 2 blocks (3 blocks during tool nose R compensation) in the program
on the HEAD2 side.
• There will be no effect on the Z2-axis work coordinate system if work coordinate system shift I!
I,
: * When the HEAD1 side issues wear offset commands or tool nose R compensation commands
after M40 is commanded, the Z2 axis movement path is shifted by the offset but no offset
amount is set. (An offset vector will not be created.)
• When RESET key \#\ is pressed, the Z1-Z2 synchronization is turned off.
• Ml 40 is valid only when it is commanded during SIMUL|ÿg| operation in the memory mode
0
II
I
.
8-152
I
• During Z1-Z2 synchronous control, it is not possible to issue E-axis moving command. ;
Even if the mode is switched to JOG pwT| or STEP mode, the synchronous command is
kept valid. It is impossible to move only the E axis. When the Z1 axis moves, the E axis
moves in synchronization with it.
• After M141 (Zl-E axis synchronous control OFF) is commanded, do not give the E axis
on the HEAD2 side.
• There will be no effect on the E-axis work coordinate system if work coordinate system shift
• When the HEAD1 side issues wear offset commands or tool nose R compensation commands
after Ml 40 is commanded, the E axis movement path is shifted by the offset but no offset
amount is set. (An offset vector will not be created.)
• When RESET key [ is pressed, the Zl-E synchronization is turned off.
• Issue an independent block command to G130 and G131.
beforehand.
Z1 axis coordinate system setting (G120) <Command by the HEAD1 side>
• Command G131 when the Z1 axis stops.
Even if the Z1 axis moves after the G131 command is issued, the absolute reference point of
the Z2 axis is not reflected by the movement. To make the absolute reference point of the Z2
axis be reflected, command G131 once again.
• Issue an independent block command to G140 and G141.
beforehand.
* When commanding G141, be sure to input the geometry offset E (plus value) of the tool
number used by G141 on the geometry offset 2 screen beforehand.
) • Command G141 when the Z1 axis stops after the HEAD2 side cancels the offset (TOO) and
selects a tool.
* Even if the Z1 axis moves after G141 command is issued, the absolute reference point of the
E axis is not reflected by the movement. To make the absolute reference point of the E axis be
reflected, command G141 once again.
8-153
I
:* !
!
:
I j
I
} ;
t
8=18 Test piece program example
T 1 800
T 1 600 T 1 700 T 1 500 T 1 200
j
T 1 300
-
«E
8 3» <- 28
T1453 T1 452
22 ->
M5 P0.8 depth 8 M18P1 -5 18—
U '
It 452
T1451
O
C\J
-0
(O
K
—&
A
t
3
”3.1
9 M—to
CVJ
co
-o
’vT
-0 T 1 45 1
i
M N if\
v
M1 2P1 . 0
43227 15 * f«A> !fl
tEK
•6
18 -=><£- ->
20 30 12,>
•a-jte--
M5P0 . 8
107 9>
<-
Section A-A 1 1
i
k
T 1 00
P 1200 T400T600 T800 T1100
T500 !
Section B-B
T700 l
T100 T200 T300 T400 T500 T600 T700 T800 T1400
R O
os i
-
•94—f6
1,8.5
i
J
i
=
3
i
J
*4 jgL*
~n tHF"
if-
I
Cutting off Grooving
FT™JD
Single "point
threading
Turning
f rough) Milling
nrn
Cross drilling Cross centering
I
Front centering/driliing
T14S2
Too! width 2 mm Tool width 2 mm $8.0 $4.3 90", $8, right edge 90", <|>8, right hand, £6.0
421-01 421-01 421-01 421-01 331-50 331-50 331-50
311-01 ER16-<J>8/<t>6
ER11-$6 ER16-$5 ER1S-$8
421-11
T1100 T1200 T1300 T1500 T1600 T1700 T1300
Rear centering
IU
i : TH51
-I
P 3
} 90°, 4 8, right hand
l-lt
3
I 5
J 3 421-22
j r_. ! !
..
» ER16-d8
3 0
I
*•
J Rear driilring
|
S
jss 0.2
LD
13, Il3
—
le~ a. $4.3
421-22
Tt452
i angiegomt Turning (finish) Slotting Cross centering Turning Milling Cross tapping ER16-<j>5
threading
i $50X$12.7X2 90",$ 8, right hand For HEAD2 $8.0 M5*P0.S Reartappring TUBS
i
221-01 221-01 421-53 221-50
ER16-P8
221-72 221-50
ER16-$8
221-50
£R16-$6
M5*P0.8
421-22
ER16-$6
B-
i
8-154
I
t I
:
[HEAD1 side]
01234 ; GOO Z10.0 Y46.0 T23 ;
M131 ; N6 M132 :
G99 G40 G97 M09 ; M42 0 ; I'
M03 S500 ; N7 M132 ;
Mil ; N8 M131
GOO ZO TOO ; M43 0 ;
:
-Hi
'
G28 VO ; T500 ;
i
M2 00 ; T1200 ; :
t
I I
M2 0 ; N9 Ml 3 2 ;
i
i
M10 ; NlO Ml 31 ; j|
i T100 ; MO 3 S3000 ! I
GOO Z-0.5 TOO M2 5 ; GOO X22.0 Y22.0 Z-0.5 T05 ?
i;
G28 UO ; GOO X13.0 Y9.0 ;
I N1 M131 ; M52 ; ;
.
I?;: T1451 ; GOl Y11.88 Z1.0 F0.05 ;
M03 S2000 ; GOl Z12.2 FO.l ;
GOO Z10.0 T21 ; GOl Y19.98 W4.0 F0.05 ;
GOO Y90.0 ; GOl Y20.02 W2.0 F0.2
GOO Y46.0 ; M53 ;
N2 Ml 3 2 ; GOO X50.0 Y50.0 TOO ;
il
M40 0 G28 UO VO ;
GOl W4.0 F0.05 ; M500 ;
G04 UO.l ; TllOO ; .1
i
GOO Z10.0 ; Nil Ml 3 2 ;
I N12 M131 ; ;
GOO TOO ;
v N3 M131 ; M03 SIOOO ;
I
T1452 ; GOO Y22.0 Z15.0 M23 Til
MO 3 S2500 ; GOO Y16.0 ; 1
f
GOO Z10.0 Y-20.0 T22 ; G92 Y11.88 W15.0 FI . 0 ; i 1
N4 M132 ; Y11.55
M410 ; Y11.2 ;
GOl W18.0 F0.05 ; Y10.95 ; I
GOO Z10.0 ; Y10.75
r
G04 U0.5 ; YIO . 65
GOl W17.5 F0.3 YlO . 6
GOl W5.0 F0.035 ; GO Y50.0 Z-0.5 TOO ;
G04 UO.l ; T1300 I
GOO Z-0.5 TOO ; MO 8 ;
N5 M131 ; G103 ; Vi
"3
T1453 ; M46 S500 ;
n
8-155
|.
I
l
i
:
i
I
m
;
I
&
M
¥:
GOO B17.0 Z-0.5 CO T13 ; G28 UO VO ;

GOO C90 . 0 ; T700 ;
MO 6 G101 ;
i
[
GOO Y26.0 ; M3 6 S3 OOO
G01 W6.0 F0.5 ; GOO X42.0 Z31.0 T07 ;
G01 B-14.0 F0.08 ; G01 X36.0 FO.l ;
G01 Z-0.5 F0.5 ; G01 U-14.0 F0.04 ;
M48 ; X36.0 FO.l
MO 9 ; M07 ;
GOO TOO ; GOO C180.0 ;
G28 VO ; MO 6
G99 ; G01 U-14.0 F0.04 ;
T500 ; G01 X36.0 FO.l ;
T1200 ; GOO X50.0 TOO ;
N13 Ml 3 2 ; G28 UO ;
N14 Ml 31 ; T1800 ;
G99 MO 3 S3 000 N17 Ml 3 2 ;
: GOO X22 .0 Z12.0 T05 ; N18 M131 ;
! G01 X17.0 Y14.0 F0.3 ; M46 S500 ;
i
M52 ; GOO Y32.0 Z43.0 T18 ;
G01 Z42.2 F0.15 ; G01 Y27.0 F2.0 ;
G01 Y19.98 W3 .5 FO.l ; G484 V-16.0 F0.8
G01 Y20.02 W2.0 F0.2 ; GOO Y30.0
M53 ; MO 7
'
GOO X50.0 Y50.0 TOO ; GOO H180.0 ;

G28 UO VO ; MO 6 ;
T800 ; G01 Y27.0 F2.0 ;
T1500 G484 V-16.0 F0.8 ; )
N15 M132 ; GOO Y50.0 ;
N16 M131 ; GOO Y100.0 TOO I
MO 8 M07
G101 ? GOO H90.0 ;
; * G103 ; MO 6 i
M3 6 S2000 ; T600 ;
M46 S2000 T1700 ;
GOO X32.0 Y32.0 Z31.0 CO T08 ; N19 M132 ;
!
MO 6 ; N20 M131 ;
G01 X25.0 Y25.0 FO.l ; G101
i G01 X18.0 Y18.0 F0.03 ; G103 ;
•1 ! GOO X32.0 Y32.0 M48 ; M3 6 S1500 ;
| GOO TOO ; M46 S1500 ;
8-156
|
! !
GOO A-12 . 0 B12.0 Z45.0 T06 ; GOl X20.4 F0.3 ;
GOO X5.0 Y5.0 ; WO . 4 ; i
GOl XO Y10.0 FO.l ; X19.6 W-0.4 FO . 02 ;
| i
GOl A12 . 0 33-12 .0 FO . 05 ; X20.4 FO . 3 ;
GOO X50.0 Y100.0 TOO ; W-0 . 4 ;
G28 UO VO ; X19.6 WO. 4 FO . 02 ? :ÿ
M38 ; X21.0 F0.3 ;

M48 ; GOO X50.0 TOO ;
i I
I
MO 9 ; G2 8 UO
G99 ; T100
T1200 ; M03 S2000 ; 1
MO 3 S3 000 ; GOO X21.0 Z109.0 T01 ?
G170 X21.0 ; M82 ; 3
GOO Y22.0 Z42 .0 T12 ; M500
GOl Y17.85 F0.3 ,A400 ? Ml10 ;
GOl Z62.0 FO . 15 ; GOl X-1.5 FO . 03 ;
Y21.0 W1.5 FO . 07 ; M510 ; :ÿ
GOO Y50.0 TOO ; M83 ?

'
G28 VO ; M80 ; 1
iI
T400 ? /GOO X21.0 W-0. 5 ;
MO 3 S1000 ; /GOO W2.0 ?
I
GOO X22.0 Z59.0 T04 ; /M98 P7000 ;
G76 X15.83 W21.0 RO P1010 M81 ;
I:
Q300 FI. 5 ; M99;
GOO X50.0 TOO ; ;
i
G28 UO VO ; I
T200 ; y /ÿ:/ w
!
MO 3 S2500 ; '
GOO X21.0 Z79.0 T02 ;

i.
GOl X16.0 FO . 03 ; NO ;
G04 U0.2 ; MO 5 7
|
GOl X20.4 FO . 3 ; Mil ;
:
WO. 4 ; GOO TOO ; i
X19.6 W-0.4 FO . 02 ; G2 8 WO 7
|
X20.4 FO . 3 7 G120 ZO 7
• I
I
W-0.4 ; GOO Z70.0 7
S X19.6 WO. 4 FO . 02 ; G120 ZO
I
GOO X20.4 ; M99 ;
GOO Z84.0 ;
GOl X16.0 FO . 03 7 .!
:
G04 UO . 2 ;
8-157
J;;
1
);
/
! It
1I
*
f.
i]
ft ;
n \
i:
i!
;
I; i [HEAD2 side]
01234 ; GOO EO ;
G13 0 ; G132 K31.0 ;
G140 ; GOO Z-1.0 T23 ;
M131 ; M42 0 ;
G99 G40 G97 M59 ; G99 MO 5 ;
MO 5 ; M2 9 S500 ;
TOO G84 W8 . 0 FO . 8 ;
G28 WO ; G80 ;
G50 ZO ; GOO Z-30.0 TOO ;
M2 00 ; G130 ;
M20 ; N7 Ml 3 2 ;
M2 5 ; T1600 ;
N1 Ml 31 ; GOO EO ;
N2 Ml 3 2 ; MO 3 S3 000 ;
i i
T1451 ; G28 WO ;
i:
GOO EO ; G132 K31.0 ;
M03 S2000 ; GOO Z-1.0 T16 ;
G28 WO ; GOO Y21.0 ;
:
G132 K31.0 ; G01 Y13 .0 FO .3 ;
; GOO Z-1.0 T21 ; G01 Y16.0 W1.5 FO . 05 ;
1
M40 0 ; G01 W18.0 FO.l ;
G01 W4.0 FO . 05 ; G01 Y21.0 W2.5 F.0.05 ;
i •: GO 4 UO.l ;
GOO Z-30.0 ;
GOO Y50.0 TOO ;
G28 VO WO ;
a: GOO TOO ; G13 0 ;
N3 Ml 31 N8 M131 ?
I !; I
2SF4 M132 ; M05 ;
T1452 ; TOO ; ].
GOO EO ; M17 ;
M03 S2500 ; Mil ;
G132 K31.0 ; G04 U1.0 ;
-
I GOO Z-1.0 T22 ; Ml 8 ;
I M410 ; G13 0 ;
I G01 W13.5 FO . 05 ; G90 0 J50
I GO 4 UO.l ; M43 0 ;
GOO Z-30.0,
.s ;' N9 Ml 3 2
f |
GOO TOO ; T1200 ;
N5 Ml 31 ; GOO E-0.2 ;
N6 M132 N10 M131 ;
If T1453 M500 ;
8-158
i; :
Nil Ml 3 2 ;
T1100 ;
I ( GOO E-20.0 ;
I t|I
N12 Ml 31 ;
N13 Ml 3 2 ;
T1200 ;
GOO E-0.2
N14 M131 ; i?-•
N15 M132 ;
T1500 ;
GOO E12.0 ;
f N16 M131 ;
\ N17 M132 ;
T1800 ;
GOO E12.0 ; J.
N18 Ml 31 ;
.: m
N19 M132 ;
T1700 ;
GOO E12.0 ; :>
p
N20 Ml 31 ;
M82 ;
G131 ;
GOO Z-1.0 ; I
M68 f
i
G98 GOl Z76.0 F20G0 ;
G99 ;
M69 ? i
.Y.
M5 00 ;
M510 7
M68 7
! GOO W-10.0 7
!
M69 7
I:
M83
I TOO
G2 8 WO 7
G130 ;
MO 5 7
N50
j M99 7
8-1 59 f I
I
: ft
i I
1
~ <y*>v £*<,;x < #*<*? x: X X;- XXX4X>'
'7 Vf<y.N> £«•;'-.. : X S&'TZ&y/''****-ÿ<>' tf-jTÿ'i* 7>-<-ryr„ T-T'A
:
?
;
250 a
F 7
7 7 7 T; 250
l
240
7 7 x 240
230
220
Feed rate (m/min)
/
t A
7
/
/ 7
/
7
7
X
230
220
10
O I
210
200
1 90
7000
/ 6000 7
/ •5000 /
t
z /z
/ 7
7
7
z /
X
210
~7 200
190
CD
m
3 I
4500 CP
1 80 7 180
4000 CO
1 70
7 3500/ 77 170 m
3
i
I
1 60 7" 7 160 o !ÿ.
l-
7 X CO
tn © iI;
150 •3000 a
1 40 7 7 X 2500
X i i
< OG 150
1405 c &
:
:
1 30 7 7 /
130 \
G »
00 5 G
1 20 \ 1
120 ~
0)
o 1 10 / 7 7 C/)
1 10
100
77 y
7 1 500 x
90 777 z7 7
7 o 100
90
80 A7 X 1 200 <J)
80
X >*•
70
60
A*77 A.
o
CO
~~<j)
ir
70
\
X “800~ 60
77 7 700
50 7 50
600
40 V // 00 40
30 30
20 20
10 £3 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
<p Bar diameter (mm)
VX4
; r:‘X :-- - XÿV. .
-7-XXv—:X'-X:7 -.--:•---. - >' -X

f
f:
•Standard feed rate
A=tool with carbide .if
B=insert tool 1
(mm/rev)
Material to be out I
f
.
BsBM SUM S45C SUS

1
Machining process
!
!
Side turning
A 0.05—0.35 0.03—0.07 —
0.03 0.05 —
0.02 0.03
I B
A
0.1—0.4
0.02—0.05
—
0.05 0.3
0.02—0.04
0.05—0.25
0.02—0.03
0.05—0.1
0.01—0.02
;
Cutting in
B 0.04—0.08 0.03—0.06 0.02—0.05 0.02—0.04
:
A 0.03—0.05 0.02—0.04 0.02—0.03 0.01—0.02 I =
Grooving I
B —
0.05 0.08 0.05—0.15 0.05—0.1 0.03—0.05
Chamfering
A 0.02—0.04 —
0.02 0.03 0.02—0.03 0.01—0.02
|
B 0.05—0.2 0.05—0.1 0.05—0.1 0.03—0.05
A 0.03—0.05 0.02—0.04 0.015—0.03 0.01—0.02 l
Boring
B 0.05—0.15 0.05—0.1 0.05—0.07 0.03—0.05 I
Driiiing SKH drill 0.05—0.15 0.03—0.15 0.02—0.1 0.02—0.07 ;ÿ .51
A 0.02—0.04 0.01—0.03 0.01—0.02 0.007—0.012

Cutting-off
B 0.05—0.1 0.05—0.07 0.03—0.05 0.03—0.05 ir
i :
i
i
* Surface speed (m/min.)
Outside diameter cutting inside diameter cutting Driiiing

(carbide) (carbide) (HSS)
Free cutting steel SUM 100—150 50—100 20—50 ;
Brass BsBM 120—250 60—120 40—90

Aluminum
Carbon steei
Ai
S45C
100—200
60—120
—
50 120
40—80
60—100
15—25
!
Stainless steei SUS 40—100 30—70 5—20
, Surface speed (m/min.) X 1,000

Mam spindle speed (min'1) =
Diameter dimension (mm) X n ;ÿ
8-161 if
??
— ’
i
.i
I
j!
: iii
7
1
I'
i
i
i
i
:
?
i;
!
•Main spindle speed for tap and die cutting
{
Steei Brass
M3XP0.5 500xpm 60Qrpm
M4XP0.7 500rpm 550rpm

I M8XP1.25 350ipm 450rpm
M10XP1.5 300rpm 400ipm

M12XP1.75 300rpm 350rpm
•Main spindle speed for end mill cutting
Brass Steel Stainless steel

Surface speed m/min.
Turning feed mm/cutting edge
—
15 40
0.03—0.05
10—30
0.02—0.04
5—20
0.01—0.02
I * Main spindle speed for slotting
Brass Steel Stainless steel

I
Surface speed m/min. 25—50 15—30 10—15
Turning feed mm/cutting edge 0.004—0.006 0.001—0.003 0.001—0.002
1
:
8-162
a
•Single point threading dimensions

unit: mm
.
Throw away tool Brazing tool
Thread Pitch (P) Outside Root diameter Root diameter
diameter diameter (D) (di> Nose R (R) (d2) Tool width (W)
*M3.0 0.50 2.93 2.28 0.05 2.40 0.09
M3.0 0.35 2.94 2.57 0.06
*M3.5 0.60 3.42 2.63 0.05 2.79 0.11
M3.5 0.35 3.44 3.07 0.06
*M4.0 0.70 3.91 2.97 0.05 3.17 0.14
M4.0 0.50 3.93 3.28 0.05 3.40 0.09
*M4.5 0.75 4.41 3.40 0.05 3.62 0.15
M4.5 0.50 4.43 3.78 0.05 3.90 0.09
I *M5.0 0.80 4.90 3.82 0.05 4.06 0.16
M5.0 0.50 4.93 4.28 0.05 4.40 0.09
i
M5.5 0.50 5.43 4.78 0.05 4.90 0.09
*M6.Q 1.00 5.88 4.60 0.10 4.83 0.20
M6.0 0.75 5.91 4.89 0.05 5.12 0.15
*M7.0 1.00 6.88 5.60 0.10 5.83 0.20
| M7.0 0.75 6.91 5.89 0.05 6.12 0.15
*M8.0 1.25 7.87 6.22 0.10 6.56 0.26
M8.0 1.00 7.88 6.60 0.10 6.83 0.20
M8.0 0.75 7.91 6.89 0.05 7.12 0.15
*M9.0 1.25 8.87 7.22 0.10 7.56 0.26
M9.0 1.00 8.88 7.60 0.10 7.83 0.20
M9.0 0.75 8.91 7.89 0.05 8.12 0.15
j *M10.0 1.50 9.85 7.83 0.10 8.28 0.32
| M10.0 1.25 9.87 8.22 0.10 8.56 0.26
j 1.00 9.88 8.60 0.10 8.83 0.20
M10.0
i'-.fe:
; MI 0.0 0.75 9.91 8.89 0.05 9.12 0.15
*M11.G 1.50 10.85 8.83 0.10 9.28 0.32
MILO 1.00 10.88 9.60 0.10 9.83 0.20
{
Ml 1.0 0.75 10.91 9.89 0.05 10.12 0.15
*M12.0 1.75 11.83 9.44 0.10 9.99 0.37
Ml 2.0 1.50 11.85 9.82 0.10 10.27 0.32
Ml 2.0 1.25 11.87 10.21 0.10 10.55 0.26
Ml 2.0 1.00 11.88 10.60 0.10 10.83 0.20
*M14.0 2.00 13.82 11.25 0.20 11.72 0.43
Ml 4.0 1.50 13.85 11.83 0.10 12.27 0.32 V
Ml 4.0 1.00 13.88 12.60 0.10 12.83 0.20

M15.0 1.50 14.85 12.83 0.10 13.27 0.32
M15.0 1.00 14.88 13.60 0.10 13.83 0.20
*M16.0 2.00 15.82 13.25 0.20 13.72 0.43
MI 6.0 1.50 15.85 13.83 0.10 14.27 0.32
M16.0 1.00 15.88 14.60 0.10 14.83 0,20
: M17.0 1.50 16.85 14.83 0.10 15.27 0.32
1!
J M17.0
*M18.0
1.00
2.50
16.88
17.79
15.60
14.48
0.10
0.20
15.83
15.17
0.20
0.55
M18.0 2.00 17.82 15.25 0.20 15.72 0.43
.
M18.0 1.50 17.85 15.83 0.10 16.27 0.32
Ml 8.0 1.00 17.88 16.60 0.10 16.83 0.20
*M20.0 2.50 19.79 16.48 0.20 17.17 0.55
M20.0 2.00 19.82 17.25 0.20 17.72 0.43
M20.0 1.50 19.85 17.83 0.10 18.27 0.32
1 M20.0 3.00 19.88 18.60 0.10 18.83 0.20
I;
8-163 1
.•
fllWil -I-..
.1 \
i
J. A
:
5-
%
'
I
jI
j
J :
;ÿ
i !
;•
® The nose R dimensions can be found using the threwaway section data. If the nose R
dimension is changed, it will also be necessary to change the root diameter.
® Thin screws cannot be machined, because the material will bend.
® * is standard screw size.
:
:
:
Throw away tool Brazing tool
'
: oo
Q "D D
P •& P -&
i-
?
llli
|
1
1
1!
:
'
Si
8-164
\
ail r s| |
:
I
•Tap prepared hole diameter
i
\
f Thread diameter Prepared hoie Root diameter of Thread diameter | Prepared hole | Root diameter of
X pitch diameter male thread X pitch diameter mate thread ;ÿ
1.0X0.25 0.780 0.693 5.5 X 0.5 5.090 4.857

1.ox 0.2
:
0.830 0.754 6.0 X 1.0 5.130 4.743
1.1 X0.25 0.880 0.793 6.0X0.75 5.350 5.050
:
1.1X0.2 0.930 0.854 7.0 X 1.0 6.100 5.743
1.2X0.25 0.980 0.893 7.0X0.75 6.350 6.050
1.2 X 0.2 1.030 0.954 8.0X1.25 6.850 6.427 i
1.4X0.3 1.140 1.032 8.0 X 1.0 7.130 6.743

1.4X0.2 1.230 1.154 8.0X0.75 7.350 7.050
1.6X0.35 1.300 1.151
1.6X0.2 1.430 1.337
1.7X0.35 1.400 1.251
;
1.7X0.2 1.530 1.440
i
1.8X0.35 1.520 1.351
1.8 X 0.2 1.630 1.537
2.0X0.4 1.650 1.490
2.0X0.25 1.780 1.675
!} 2.2X0.45 1.830 1.628

2.2X0.25 1.980 1.875
2.3 X 0.4 1.970 1.790
2.5X0.45 2.130 1.928
2.5X0.35 2.220 2.051
2.6X0.45 2.230 2.028
3.0X0.5 2.590 2.367
3.0X0.35 2.720 2.550
¥ |;
j 3.5 X 0.6 3.010 2.733
I 3.5X0.35 3.220 3.050

4.0 X 0.7 3.390 3.119
4.0 X 0.5 3.590 3.357
4.5X0.75 3.850 3.550
4.5 X 0.5 4.070 3.857
5.0X0.8 4.310 4.994
5.0 X 0.5 4.590 4.357
8-165
t '
1
w
m
it
!
t
!ÿ ;i ;
9. Preparation and inspection before starting operation
9-1 Preparation and inspection before turning power on
Be sure to execute the following preparation and inspection work before turning power on,
9-1-1 Cleaning of chips

Be sure to clean chips every day.
. A WARNING
®Be sure to stop the machine before starting to clean chips.
•Do not touch chips directly because there is a possibility of getting hurt.
•Do not blow air toward chips because chips scatter causing a hurt.
(1) Open the door CD.
(2) Remove the lid (3).
(3) Scrape chips collected in the chip receiver © by a tool such as a chip scraping bar.
(4) When chips are collected at the bottom of the chip tank (D, pull out the chip receiver ©
from the machine and scrape chips through the door © using a tool such as a chip scraping
bar. When the cover (2) is removed, chips can be scraped from the coolant oil outlet.
(5) Insert the chip receiver © into the machine.
(6) Attach the lid (3).
(7) Attach the cover (2).
i
(8) Close the door ©.
; 1=]'
n~s
n tz;
(
;
[
5
]
—
h PV
o cT
: L E 4 £5
i
ni X Mk. £5L
_
JS
1 Y 2 3 X 4 X 5
9-1
.
:
9-1-2 Cleaning and inspection of coolant device

Type of coolant oil
:
•Coolant oil containing chlorine causes to shorten the life of rubber products such as a f
i
belt and seal. Therefore, do not use such coolant oil.
Coolant oil cools a tool and part during cutting, realizes a satisfactory cutting finish surface by the
;
antifriction function, and lengthen the life of the tool. In this machine, use oil-based coolant oil.
I
Position of coolant tank
|
C=T
.BEJ l
c
j ; »
-
i 1 x
|
&
TL
I
im \
1 A 2 A 3
A L ns.
4 15
/ /_n
Y 6 Y 7 j
8 Y 9 JM0Y11Y12Y13Y14Y15
16 &
:
TJ
I *57 r
1 a
x I
17
18
;
i
I
9-2
i
i
1
i
Inspection of coolant oil level and replenishment of coolant oil
AWARNING
® When the discharge amount of coolant oil is insufficient due to shortage of the coolant
oil level, there is a possibility of a fire. Be sure to replenish coolant oil every day.
Ilf
Use the oil gauge (3) to check the coolant oil level. Be sure to replenish coolant oil before starting
operation every dav. The capacity of the coolant tank is 170L. Supply oil fully up to the upper limit
of the oil gauge CD when the machine is stopped.
Cleaning of coolant tank
AWARNING
® When chips are collected in the coolant tank, it may cause insufficiency of the discharge
amount of coolant oil or afailure of the coolant pump and there is a possibility of a fire.
When a large amount of chips are collected in the coolant tank, shortage of coolant oil
may not be detected by the coolant oil level detector.
• Cleaning of chip filter

Be sure to clean the chip filter © in the coolant tank every dav according to the following
procedure.
(1) Remove the lid (2). I
(2) Pull out the coolant tank CD about 150mm in the front of the machine.
(3) Remove the chip filter © from the coolant tank CD and clean it.
(4) Attach the chip filter © to the coolant tank (D.
(5) Insert the coolant tank © deep into the machine.
(6) Attach the lid ®. I
• Cleaning of coolant tank

Be sure to clean the coolant tank once or more in a week according to the following proce¬
dure.
I (1) Remove the connector © from the receptacle (7) and the connector © from the recep¬
tacle (6). When the coolant unit 0.8MPa [42458] is selected, also remove the connector
j © from the receptacle (D.
(2) Loosen the nut © of the union and remove the coolant hose © from the coolant pump.
When the coolant unit 0.8MPa [42458] is selected, loosen the adaptor © and also re¬
move the coolant hose © from the coolant pump.
(3) Pull out the coolant tank © from the machine, and remove the chip filter © and the net
plates ®, (D, and © from the coolant tank, and clean chips collected at the bottom of
! the coolant tank and chips clogged in the holes of the net plates.
1
9-3
(4) Attach the chip filter © and the net plates ®, CD, and © to the coolant tank CD. '
(5) Insert the coolant tank ® deep into the machine.

(6) Tighten the nut © of the union and attach the coolant hose © to the coolant pump.
When the coolant unit 0.8MPa [42458] is selected, tighten the adaptor © and also
attach the coolant hose © to the coolant pump.
(7) Attach the connector @ to the receptacle ® and the connector © to the receptacle (6).
When the coolant unit 0.8MPa [42458] is selected, also attach the connector © to the
receptacle (D.
Inspection of coolant oil cock and coolant nozzle
AWARN1NG
•If coolant oil is not supplied sufficiently to the cutting point, there is a possibility of a
fire. Set the coolant nozzle surely toward the cutting point and supply coolant oil suffi¬ :
ciently. !
Be sure to inspect the coolant oil cock and coolant nozzle every day according to the following
procedure.
(1) Open the door of the cutting room. f
(2) Set the coolant nozzles ® (5 pcs.) for the turret toward each cutting point.
.
(3) Set the pipe © as shown in the drawing and tighten the lever (D to fix the pipe ©.
1 (4) Set the coolant nozzles CD (4 pcs.) for the gang tool post toward each cutting point.
(5) Open the coolant oil cocks © and © fully (in the positions shown in the drawing).
||
1 (6) Close the door of the cutting room.
& '
* r :
I!
!
|
WMV nl !;
jjl h
.
;
\
I
1X2X3X4a5X6X7
|
:
S' ;
1
9-4
:
i
:
9-1-3 Inspection of hydraulic oil 1
Type of hydraulic oil
The hydraulic oil used by Star is “Shell Tellus Oil 32”. Do not use oil of any other brand together
because there is a possibility of reduction in the performance of the hydraulic oil. When oil of IiS:
another brand is to be used unavoidably, flush the device and then exchange the whole hydraulic
oil. In this case, select hydraulic oil under the following specification.
* Use classification: Hydraulic oil
• Viscosity grade: ... ISO VG32
r NOTICE
|
•Never use hydraulic oil of a different brand together because there is a possibility of
reduction in the performance of the hydraulic oil.
Position of hydraulic unit

To maintain the hydraulic unit, loosen the screws (2) (4 pcs.) and remove the cover (T). When the
maintenance ends, attach the cover (D with the screws (2) (4 pcs.).
I
m -
C=Z3
r
[
I
: Z3
Sli
u
oo 0
:
1 I 2 I 3
I |
9-5
I!
;
t1
I I
Inspection and replenishment of hydraulic oil level
!
ACAUTION !
® Shortage of hydraulic oil may cause a fail¬

I 7~T
ure of the hydraulic unit and a malfunction.
Inspect and replenish hydraulic oil every
day and exchange hydraulic oil every 3.000
w ;
I
hours.
® A failure of the hydraulic unit is often 4
caused by dust. When supplying oil, care
should be taken to prevent the hydraulic
tankfrom dust.
;T'
I
Use the oil gauge (3) to inspect the hydraulic oil
level. When the level of hydraulic oil is lower than
the center position of the oil gauge (D, replenish
hydraulic oil.
The capacity of the hydraulic tank is 10L. Remove
the cap (D and supply hydraulic oil fuily up to the
;
upper limit of the oil gauge (3) when the machine is
stopped and attach the cap ©. I
:
:
j
:
!
'
1
;
9-6
t
;
1
9-1-4 inspection of lubricant

8 Type of lubricant
This machine uses the automatic centralized lubricating supply system.
|
The lubricant designated by Star is “Mobil Vactra oil No. 2 SLC”. Do not use lubricant of any other
1
brand together because there is a possibility of reduction in the performance of the lubricant. When >:
lubricant of another brand is to be used unavoidably, flush the unit and then exchange the whole
1
lubricant. In this case, select lubricant under the following specification.
• Use classification: Slideway lubricant
• Viscosity grade: ... ISO VG68
NOTICE
® Never use lubricant of a different brand together because there is a possibility of reduc¬
tion in the performance of the lubricant.
Inspection and replenishment of lubricant level
•Shortage of lubricant may cause a failure of the unit and a malfunction. Be sure to 1
inspect and replenish lubricant every day.
Use the H line (upper limit line of the lubri¬ i

cant level) and the L line (lower limit line of
the lubricant level) on the side of the lubri¬
cant tank as a guideline to inspect the lubri¬ @ \ I
ft/o
cant level. When the level of lubricant is I M
lower than the center position of the H line
H
and L line, replenish lubricant.
X
The capacity of the lubricant tank is 1.8L.
x
Remove the cap CD, supply lubricant, and at¬
e
tach the cap (3).
L
h~
9-7
,
I 9-2 Preparatiori and inspection before starting operation after
j:
power is turned on
Be sure to execute the following preparation and inspection work before starting operation after the
machine is put into the machine ready state.
j|
9-2-1 Confirmation of alarm message
Be sure to check every day that no alarm message is displayed on the screen when the machine is put
into the machine ready state.
When an alarm message is displayed on the screen, remove the cause of the alarm according to Sec¬
tion 11, “Troubleshooting” and erase the alarm message.
9-2-2 Inspection and adjustment of hydraulic pressure
® When the hydraulic pressure is not suitable, a failure of the hydraulic unit or a mal¬
function may be caused. Be sure to inspect the pressure every day.
The hydraulic pressure is set at factory before shipment. However, when it is changed for some rea¬
son, adjust the pressure according to the following procedure. For the position of the hydraulic unit,
see Section 9-1-3, “Inspection of hydraulic oil”.
(1) Loosen the lock nut (3).
(2) Adjust the pressure adjustment screw © so that the pressure gauge © indicates 3.4MPa
(35kg/cm2) and the pressure gauge © indicates 4.9MPa (50kg/cm2). Turning the pressure
ill
adjustment screw © clockwise increases the pressure and turning the pressure adjustment
screw © counterclockwise decreases the pressure. j
(3) Tighten the lock nut (3).
IT
3
4
M
1 Y 2 !
9-8
j
,
:
j
!
9-2-3 Inspection of air unit

Adjustment of pressure
j
ACAUTION
•When the air pressure is not suitable, a failure of the air unit or a malfunction may be
caused. Be sure to inspect the pressure every day.
The air pressure is set at Q.5MPa (5kg/cm2). However, when it is changed for some reason, adjust
the pressure according to the following procedure. Check the air pressure by looking at the pressure
gauge (D through the window ©.
(1) Loosen the screws (3) (2 pcs.) and remove the cover (2).
(2) Pull up the pressure adjustment handle © and release the lock.
I
(3) Adjust by the pressure adjustment handle (4) so that the pressure gauge © indicates
0.5MPa. Turning the pressure adjustment handle © clockwise increases the pressure and
turning the pressure adjustment handle © counterclockwise decreases the pressure. When
the pressure adjustment handle @ is just turned, a correct pressure may not be indicated.
Check the pressure after adjustment by turning one of the solenoid valves ON and OFF
j
once. £
I
(4) Press in and lock the pressure adjustment handle ©.
(5) Attach the cover © with the screws © (2 pcs.).
: 1
©
!
Unlocked
Locked
s
:
j
4
+
5
i in n 1 1 n nj
V 1
o
CZ3 ©
1
112 13
II
9-9 '
1;l
9-3 Handling of automatic bar feeder
Interface of automatic bar feeder <Optional>
This machine is provided with the following signal contacts for the automatic bar feeder. The
contact outputs axe ail relay contact (with contact) outputs. .
(1) Machine automatic bar feeder (maximum load DC30V and 1.5A)
-*•
• MOO (program stop) signal

This signal is output when the program stop command (HEAD1/2*M0Q) is executed. The
:
output time is 1 second. The contact is closed for output.
• Feed torque stop
This signal is output when the grip ON command (HEAD1*M12) and the automatic bar
feeder feed torque OFF command (HEAD1«M62) are valid. The contact is open for output.
When the grip OFF command (HEAD1«M13) and the automatic bar feeder feed torque ON
command (HEAD1*M63) are executed, the output is turned off.
• Main collet close
This signal is output when the main collet is closed (the M code command is HEAD1«M10).
Either of closing and opening can be selected for the contact for output.
• Emergency stop
This signal is output when the machine enters the emergency stop state. The contact is open
for output.
(2) —
Automatic bar feeder ** machine (no-voltage contact)
• Barstock absence signal
When a bar becomes too short to machine, output this signal for each bar. Open the contact
for output.
« Bar feed completion
When the bar exchange is completed after bar lack, output the signal in one shot (100ms or
more). Close the contact for output. By this signal, the program stopped by MOO automati¬
cally restarts.
• All barstock absence
Output this signal when all the bars of the automatic bar feeder are exhausted. When the
program is stopped by MOO by the aforementioned barstock absence signal after this signal is
output, the following alarm message is displayed on the screen. If this occurs, the main
spindle, sub-spindle, power-driven tool, and coolant motor of the machine are stopped.
2075 NO STOCK ON AUTOMATIC BAR FEEDER
Open the contact for output.
9-10
: J
if
\
:
:s
; * Abnormal signal
Output this signal when the automatic bar feeder enters the abnormal state. When the signal is
output, the following alarm message is displayed on the screen. If this occurs, the machine
enters the feed hold state and the main spindle, sub-spindle, power-driven tool, and coolant
motor are stopped.
1002 BAR FEEDER ALARM
Open the contact for output.

®
Preparation completion signal
Output this signal when the automatic bar feeder enters the preparation completion state.
When this signal is turned off in the memory mode, the following alarm message is displayed
on the screen. If this occurs, the machine enters the single block stop state.
2076 AUTOMATIC BAR FEEDER NOT READY

|
If this occurs, the automatic operation function cannot be started. Close the contact for out¬
put.
;
::
Precautions for use of automatic bar feeder
* When using the automatic bar feeder, please read the operation manual of the automatic bar
feeder as well as this operation manual before starting operation so as to fully understand the
contents. If duplicated contents are found between this operation manual and the operation
manual of the automatic bar feeder, give priority to the contents of this operation manual.
j
• When operating this machine idly without machining a bar, turn the power source of the
automatic bar feeder off and put the machine into the bar-free state.
* The remnant bar length when a barstock absence signal of the automatic bar feeder is output
: varies with the product shape. Adjust the position for outputting a barstock absence signal
/: according to the product shape.
{
9-11
I
;
10. Setting and adjustment
NOTICE
•Determine a person in charge of management of the machine and be sure to inspect and
adjust the machine with consent of the person in charge of management.
•During inspection and adjustment of the machine, indicate it with a mark so that others
can understand it definitely.
•Otherwise, a reduction in the work efficiency or an unexpected accident may be caused.
Do not leave a used operation tool and tool unit on the machine but arrange them.
10-1 Attaching and adjusting of main collet

The structure of the main collet section is as shown in the drawing below. Attach the collet and adjust
the chucking force according to the following procedure.
A WARNING
•Be sure to stop the machine before starting inspection and adjustment of the machine.
Turn the door interlock key switch
® OFF (Qj), open the door, and then start the
work. Be sure to execute the work under supervision of the person in charge of manage¬ I
ment of the machine and pay attention to the movable part of the machine. !
:
•Be sure to check whether the graspingforce of the collet is sufficient. When the grasp¬
ingforce of the collet is insufficient, there is a possibility that a bar is projectedfrom the
spindle and it is very dangerous.
3 (1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(2) Return the all axes to their reference points.
y (3) Turn the door interlock key switch on the machine operation panel OFF (Q) under
supervision of the person in charge of management of the machine and open the door of
: the headstock room.
(4) Loosen the knob screw © and remove the cover
(5) Remove the cap © (right hand screw), insert the spring (D and the collet © into the inner
diameter of the sleeve (9), and then tighten the cap ©. When attaching or removing the cap
hook a hook spanner wrench on the cap and insert the handle © into the hole ® of the :
toggle holder (I).
(6) Loosen the screw © and pull out the axis ®.
i
:
ii
:
i
10-1
:
\
(7) When checking the chucking force, insert a bar into the collet, insert the handle © into the
hole © of the shifter lever ©, and move the shifter lever © by hand. When increasing the
; chucking force, loosen the screw (T) and turn the adjustment nut (2) in the forward rotation
direction (toward the operator’s side) of the main spindle. When decreasing the chucking
:
force, turn the adjustment nut (D in the backward rotation direction (toward the innermost I
side) of the main spindle.
(8) After adjustment, tighten the screw (T), fix the adjustment nut (D, and tighten the plug-in 1
screw © of the shaft @.
i (9) Press the jog key to select the jog mode. iI
(10) Press the main collet close key to close the collet.
(11) Adjust by turning the piston © so that the toggle (D is surely positioned on the hatched
1
st
part (see the drawing below) of the shifter (D and the tip of the toggle © is not in contact
with the shifter (5) (see the drawing below). Turning the piston © toward the operator’s
side moves the shifter (D to the right and turning the piston © toward the innermost side
I moves the shifter (D to the left. Loosen the nut © before turning the piston ©.
415
.I Gap necessary
f: I
,
:
1
1
\
i
al
‘
-A
(12) Tighten the nut © to fix the piston ©.

(13) Press the MDI key to select the MDI mode and press the program key |(j>)j| to display
:
the program (MDI) screen.
1
(14) Press the HEAD1 key jfffijgjj
to select the HEAD1 mode.
(15) Execute the main collet close command (HEAD1 side, M10) and check whether the op¬
eration is completed. When the adjustment of the proximity switch (D is not satisfactory,
; the following alarm message is displayed on the screen by the M10 command. If this
occurs, loosen the screws © (2 pcs.) in the main collet closed state and adjust the proxim¬
I
i ity switch (D in the transverse direction so that the proximity switch (6) turns on. When the
; proximity switch is in the ON state, the pilot lamp of the proximity switch is on.
1011 SQ250 SIG. IS DISCONNECTED
' (16) Attach the cover © and fix it with the knob screw ©.
(17) Close the door of the headstock room and turn the door interlock key switch on the
machine operation panel ON ( ). J
I
:
10-2
LL-S
•
J
1 I 2 I A I 3 4 I 5 6 I 7 8 I 9 110111 I!
ft.
1
B ft
s :
i
ftr ft TT
!!
l O
: :
s
TT
%
;
ft
I
ID
©
©\ft ©
© tap X
P &
I
•
| :
'
!
D
12113
ftftijvft
|
141151161171 B T 181 19 ;
5
i
j p
;
:
; J D D
\
5 Ift.
I{
O D r m
o j;!.
ft
i ft,
O
O
-Ek ii
S
1 I 1
ft
o
D i
C
;
ftft
ft
" -.1
ft
|; j
•
i
!
ft1!;
ft
10-3
i
:»« w v •; w .ÿ
4
'
i
I
;
ft i
ft,
; i m
ft ft ft
ft;
1. 1
;y ift
ft
Ift;
ft
[
I
$
10-2 Attaching and adjusting of guide bushing

;
The guide bushing device is the heart of the Swiss type automatic iathe and a part for affecting the
machining accuracy most. Therefore, handle the guide bushing device carefully.
A WARNING
®Be sure to execute this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF (0)
state.
•Check whether the gap between, the guide bushing and a bar is suitable. When the guide
bushing is excessively tightened, it may cause seizure of a bar or a fire.
:
; • While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of a tool. :
!
:: NOTICE
•To prevent seizure or fluctuations in the machining dimensions due to great fluctua¬
tions in the outer diameter of a bar, it is recommended to lap the inner diameter of the
guide bushing with a bar.
•Before starting this work, return the X, Y, Zl, and Z2 axes to their reference points
beforehand.
I
I w
r
"HI
3
a PS
9 j
I
; 7
1 X2X3X4X5X6X7X8X9
(1) Open the door of the headstock room and the door of the cutting room in the emergency
stop state or the main breaker OFF (0) state.
(2) Loosen the screws © (2 pcs.), insert the guide bushing © in accordance with the key ©
of the sleeve ©, and turn the adjustment nut © to fix the guide bushing.
i
(3) Insert the jig © into the sleeve © and tighten the knob screw © to fix the rotation of the
;
sleeve©.
10-4
(4) Adjust the gap between the guide bushing © and a bar by the adjustment nut © so that
5 you feel resistance (rather strongly) when the bar is let pass through the guide bushing ©
j
and moved to right and left by turning it by hand. Use the pipe ® to turn the adjustment
nut ©. As the diameter of a bar decreases, the gap with the bar is generally adjusted so as
to become narrower.
!:
(5) When the gap adjustment is completed, tighten the screws © (2 pcs.) and fix the adjust¬
ment nut ® with the clamp ring ©.
(6) Confirm the gap between the guide bushing © and the bar once again.
(7) Finally, be sure to remove the iig (9) and return the sleeve (7) to the rotation ready state.
i
1:1
5:
; .
f:
:
10-5
I
;
|
:
:
i
:
:
j 10-3 Attaching and adjusting of sub-collet
The structure of the sub collet section is as shown in the drawing below. Attach the collet and adjust
the chucking force according to the following procedure.
: A WARNING l
® Turn the door interlock key switch OFF ((f)), open the door, and then start the
work. Be sure to execute the work under supervision of the person in charge of manage¬
ment of the machine and pay attention to the movable part of the machine.
® Be sure to check whether the grippingforce of the collet is sufficient. When the gripping iff
i: force of the collet is insufficient, there is a possibility that a bar is projectedfrom the
: spindle and it is very dangerous.
® While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of a tool
\
,AcwmoN.
® Tighten the sleeve ©and the bushing ©surely. If the bushing ©is loosened during
machining, damage may be caused to the machine.
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

(3) Turn the door interlock key switch on the machine operation panel OFF (Q) under
the cutting room. 1
(4) Loosen the knob screws © (2 pcs.) and remove the cover
mm (5)
(6)
Loosen the screw © and remove the cover ©.
Remove the cap ® (right hand screw), insert the spring © and the collet © into the inner
diameter of the sleeve @, and then tighten the cap ©. When attaching or removing the cap
®, hook a hook spanner wrench on the cap and insert the handle (D into the hole (B) of the
toggle holder (Z).
(7) Loosen the screw © and pull out the shaft ®.
(8) When checking the chucking force, insert a bar into the collet, insert the handle © into the
hole ® of the shifter lever CD, and move the shifter lever CD by hand. When increasing the
chucking force, loosen the screw (D and turn the adjustment nut (D in the forward rotation
direction (toward the innermost side) of the sub-spindle. When decreasing the chucking
force, tum the adjustment nut (D in the reverse rotation direction (toward the operator’s
side) of the sub-spindle.
10-6
lip
(9) After adjustment, tighten the screw ®, fix the adjustment nut ®, and tighten the plug-in
screw © of the shaft ®.
(10) Attach the cover © with the screw ©.
(11) Press the jog key pwj to select the jog mode.
( 12) Press the sub-coliet close key Ggj to close the collet.
( 1 3) Adjust by turning the piston @so that the toggle © is surely positioned on the hatched
part (see the drawing below) of the shifter (5) and the tip of the toggle © is not in contact
with the shifter (D (see the drawing below). Turning the piston © toward the operator’s
side moves the shifter © to the right and turning the piston ® toward the innermost side
moves the shifter © to the left. Loosen the nut © before turning the piston ©. ;
5 16
Gap necessary i.
i
i
1 i
(14) Tighten the nut ® to fix the piston ©.
(15) Press the MDI key to select the MDI mode and press the program key |ff))j to display
(16) Press the HEAD2 key p5ijj|
(17) Execute the sub-collet close command (HEAD2 side, M10) and check whether the opera¬
tion is completed. When the adjustment of the proximity switch © is not satisfactory, the
following alarm message is displayed on the screen by the M10 command. If this occurs,
loosen the screws © in the sub-collet closed state and adjust the proximity switch © in
the transverse direction so that the proximity switch © turns on. When the proximity j
switch is in the ON state, the pilot lamp of the proximity switch is on.
1121 SQ255 SIG. IS DISCONNECTED
(18) Attach the cover © with the knob screw @.

(19) Close the door of the cutting room and tum the door interlock key switch on the
machine operation panel ON ( j ).
10-7
jy i
1 ::
: -j
P, 1
1
1
: i
:
1
I l A
u
i>b i
•:
I
m. i
:
i
Tm n
i o o l<tfi o
I
r
:;!!
v -f- o S3 o
it
tt
-e-
i
1 : o wo »
o
I
a
®MU4
34
1
il
1 10ÿ0]
ii
|i
.)•
Jj
1
-•S', 4r jjpzxsxx jr sr a ~
=
I
A
I .
: !i
1 I 2 3 4 5 6 B I 7 I 8 9
: I
; j
•I 101111121131141151161171181191 A 120121 I22
II
I J o
i
/ / ji
i
BE
I
:
{ WEI T"T •Dr;
A
30 3
o
I'ji
S3' [©Toll
1
-3-~-
s
I
I !.
A '
}
i
i 3: .
10-8 |
I;
1
if
10-4 Handling of posh rod

10-4-1 Attaching of posh rod
A WARNING
•Be sure to execute this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF (Q)
f state.
I
I
: r NOTICE
I ®
Before starting this work, return the Z2 axis to its reference point beforehand. Ij.
:
S (1) Open the door of the cutting room in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF
O state-
;:i
i;
(2) Loosen the screws © (4 pcs.) and remove the cover ®.
(3) Loosen the screw ® and remove the cover ©.
(4) Remove the cap © and the sleeve ®. When attaching or removing the cap (D, hook a
hook spanner wrench on the cap and insert the handle into the toggle holder.
(5) Remove the dog © and insert the push rod © into the sub-spindle from the right side of
the machine (the cover (D side).
(6) Insert the spring © from the sub-collet side and attach the dog © with the screw ©.
(7) Insert the sleeve ®, the spring ®, and the collet ® and tighten the cap ®.
(8) Attach the cover © with the screw ®.
(9) Attach the cover ® with the screws © (4 pcs.).
7 i
1
S :
I.
2
,
+ :
8IS !
i
1
1I
I 10-9
1
1
:
. .
:
i
: •:
i
11
3141516X718 9 Y lOY 1 1 Y 1 2\ 1 3
i ;
l
I v
S
—J/i ,
i— ;-ÿTH
'
7sP
L
I
?
1
;
I
|
fafcdL
a
I TtBEZE
;
10-4-2 Exchange of ejector pin

Exchange the ejector pin depending on the chucking diameter of a product according to the following
procedure.
A WARNING
•Be sure to execute this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF fQ)
state.
ACAUTION
•Tighten the ejector pin (4)and the push rod ®surely. If the ejector pin (?) is loosened
during machining, damage may be caused to the machine.
NOTICE
•For a detailed shape of the ejector pin, see Section 6-1, “Consumable tool list”.
•Before starting this work, return the Z2 axis to its reference point beforehand.
10-10
(1) Open the door of the cutting room in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF
(Q) state.
(2) Loosen the screw (7) and remove the cover ®.
(3) Remove the cap (D and the sieeve (D and puli out the ejector pin © up to the tip of the sub¬
spindle. When attaching or removing the cap (D, hook a hook spanner wrench on the cap I
and insert the handle into the toggle holder.
(4) Exchange the ejector pint ®.
(5) Insert the sleeve (D, the spring (9), and the collet © into the sub-spindle and tighten the
cap (3).
(6) Attach the cover © with the screw (7).
10-11 :
l
;
:
10-5 Attaching and adjusting of tool unit

•
ACAUTON
® When a tool unit other than the designated one is used, defective machining or a ma¬
chine interference accident may be caused. Be sure to use a tool unit indicated in Sec¬
tion 6, “Tooling system ”.
® Attach the tool unit and attachments to the machine correctly. Otherwise, machine
damage or an unexpected accident may be caused.
‘i 1
10-5-1 Attaching and adjusting of tool to gang tool post
Attaching of overhang tool adapter
Attach the overhang tool adapter [311- 01, 311-02, 331-01] to the basic tool holder according to the
following procedure. The attaching position is T400 in the case of the 5-station toolholder [421-01,
421-91, on the upper part of the drawing] and T300 in the case of the 4-station toolholder [421- 04,
1
on the lower part of the drawing].
3 5
lL
MTTo
o 1 —IWm£3
@o
\
\o\©
\ T~
\ °© I I
W.
-j@@ j -i©ÿ
2 5 6
1 jMili 5
5 I
i
!§>©
ICD©
AWARNING
•Be sure to execute this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF (IQ)
state.
•While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of a tool
10-12
1It NOTICE
•If the overhang tool adapter (§)is dug into the tool attaching slot of the basic tool holder i
(5)and cannot be removed when the overhang tool adapter is to be removed, screw one
of the screws (6) into the screw hole ®and raise the tool holder (§X
® When the overhang tool adapter is attached to the 5-station toolholder [421-01, 421-91],
no tool can be attached to T300.
* Before starting this work, return the X, Y, and Z2 axes to their reference points before¬
hand.
1 (1) Open the door of the cutting room in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF
1 (Q) state.
(2) Remove the screws (T) and (D (2 each respectively) and the fixtures (D and (3) of T400 and
T30Q in the case of the 5-station toolholder and T300 in the case of the 4-station ;
toolholder.
1. (3) Insert the overhang tool adapter © into the tool attaching slot of the basic tool holder and
tighten the screws ® (2 pcs.) to fix it.
Attaching of tool and input of geometry offset
A WARNING ;
®Be sure to stop the machine before starting inspection and adjustment of the machine.
•Before starting this work, turn the door interlock key switch OFF (Q) and open the
door. Be sure to execute the work under supervision of the person in charge of manage¬
® During exchange
of a tool, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of the
n
§.
tool.
:
Jÿ(5)(6P
1 1
0o o @
I 2
3
Z7
O
:
1"
.; 4 -f(p@ o @|—
: o o
#1
A
1 ou I-
I ©
o
I 516 17
10-13
!
:
.
:
r
( 1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
:
I (3) Turn the door interlock key switch on the machine operation panel OFF (0) under
the cutting room.
I (4) Press the MDI key jÿlj to select the MD1 mode and press the program key j|T)]j to display
{ the program (MDI) screen.

(5) Press the HEAD1 key ||g| to select the HEAD1 mode.
(6) Issue the tool selection command (TOO, etc.) for attaching a tool.
(7) Instruct the diameter of a bar. (GO X material diameter ;)
(8) Take out a bar from the guide bushing.
j (9) Loosen the screw (D and insert the tool ® into the tool attaching slot of the tool holder CD.
\\ In the case of the overhang tool adapter (D, loosen the screw (D and insert the tool © into
the tool attaching slot of the tool holder (3).
! (10) Let the tools © and © slightly touch the outer diameter of the bar, determine the position
of each tool in the direction of the diameter, and tighten the screws © and (D slightly so as
to prevent the tools from dropping.
j
(11) Press the jog key [pm| to select the jog mode.
(12) Press the axis direction selection key to retract the tools in the direction of the diam¬
eter and tighten the screws © and © to fix the tools.
(13) Press the custom key
(14) - Press the-[2] and
jpj>)| to display the menu screen.
j £> j keys to display the geometry offset 1 screen indicated below.
i
GEOMETRY OFFSET 1
EXECUT I ON-: MODE : ON
ALL X(U) .A(C) Z1CW)

—»*T10Q
T200
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
T300 0.000 0.000 0.000
T400 0.000 0.000 0.000
T500 0-000 0.000 0.000
T600 0.000 0-000 0.000
1700 0.000 0.000 0.000
T800 0.000 0.000 0.000
S 0 T000C
MDI ***» * 00:00:00 HEAD1
ADJUST SELECT EXECUT D1SP.2 MENU
10-14
;
(15) Press the MDI key jÿj to select the MDI mode and press the program key to display
(16) To lower the top of each tool, move the cursor to the position of the tool number to be
adjusted and input [A] -0.5 j Q j.
(17) Issue a tool selection command other than the tool number during adjustment once and
then issue the tool selection command during adjustment once again. The geometry offset
;
111 value will be valid.
(18) Cut the end face of the bar, measure the diameter of the dowel, and input the measured
value as [c] [measured value/2] j £> |.
(19) Repeat (6) to (18) and attach all the necessary tools.
(20) Close the door of the cutting room and turn the door interlock key switch -•£?-- on the
machine operation panel ON | ( ).
i
Removal of tools :
!
AWARNiNG j
.
I
•Be sure to execute this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF (Q)
f:
s •While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of a tool
!
*
NOTICE
•Before starting this work, return the X, Y, and Z2 axes to their reference points before¬
- hand.
:
II (1) Open the door of the cutting room in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF !
f (Q) state. :
B (2) Loosen the screws (D and (6).
(3) Remove the tools © and © from the slots.
If the fixture (D is dug into the slot and the tools cannot be removed, remove one of the
z screws (6), screw it into the screw hole ® of the fixture (D, and raise the fixture (D.
Attaching and adjusting of power-driven tool

A cutting tool of the power-driven tool [331-50, 331-51] is clamped and fixed by the collet. The ;
"f
reference position (the position is the center of the guide bushing at X0.0) of a cutting tool from the
;
end face of cap and the maximum ejection length are shown in the drawing below. Set the ejection
length of a cutting tool to the maximum ejection length shown in the drawing below or less.
Attach the power-driven tool according to the following procedure.
>
10-15
:
:
i
I
I
A WARNING
•Be sure to execute this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF ((f))
state.
• While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of a tool
. ACAUTION j.
' •Before starting to operate the machine, be sure to attach the power-driven tools CDinto
all the attaching holes (at 3 locations). Coolant oil and chips enter the power-driven tool
drive mechanism from an attaching hole where no power-driven tool (l)is attached and
damage may be caused to the mechanism.
f\ NOTICE
: •Before starting this work, return the X, Y, and Z2 axes to their reference points before¬
hand.
:
11
O state-
(2) Insert each power-driven tool CD into the attaching hole with the drain hole down as
shown in the drawing.
(3) Fix the power-driven tool CD with the screws (D (4 pcs.).
:
max .35.5
XO 0 .
! 24.5
: i
© CO
© 1
J
U1
1
-©ÿ
i
0 II
© u>
1 '
© _© 25
2
max. 36 Drain hole

|
10-16
1
1 10-5-2 Attaching and adjusting of tool to turret

Attaching of too! unit
Attach the tool unit to the turret according to the following procedure.
A WARNING
•Before starting this work, turn the door interlock key switch -•&- OFF (Q) and open the
I •During exchange of a tool, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of the \
I tool.
>
A ACAUTION I
;
j
® Be sure to attach the blind lid (§)to the turret surface to which no tool unit is attached.
Coolant oil and chips enter the drive systemfor power-driven attachmentfrom the refer¬ I
1 ence hole where no blind lid @ is attached and damage may be caused to the mecha¬
nism.
•To keep the accuracy of the reference hole of the turret surface is important to attach 1
m the tooling unit accurately. Attach or remove the tool unit carefully so as to prevent the :
reference hole from deformation due to excessiveforce applied to it.
I
f in
NOTICE
•Determine the arrangement of a tool unit on each turret surface in consideration of the
:
i weight balance. if
•Before attaching the tool units to the turret surfaces, be sure to wash the attaching
£ surfaces of the tool units, reference pins, turret surfaces, and reference holes cleanly.
I
|
II
£ 0 .
11 (o° © :
Ii ©o © H
,© o © H~
3
0-- l
'o ©o @ ri .
© t#
h-
[ O
Jt :
i
i
m
Hi
2
10-17
I
: i
: i
ON
® When the turret forward key pg)| is pressed in the macro mode, the turret moves to YO.O
: on the operator’s side (does not move in the direction ofB and E axes). Take great care
to interference of the machine.

: supervision of the person in charge of management of the machine and open the door of
the cutting room.
(4) Press the jog key jw,“]j to select the jog mode.
; (5) j
Press the axis direction selection key| and determine the E axis coordinate when the
tool is attached. In this case, take great care to prevent the tool unit attached to the turret ©
at present and the tool unit to be attached hereafter from interfering with the guide bushing
and the bar of the sub-spindle when the turret moves to YO.O.
(6) Press the macro key to select the macro mode.
(7) Press the: turret1forward rotation/backward rotation keys |Q| to select the turret sur¬
face to which the tool unit is to be attached.
(8) Press the turret forward key |(g)j to move the turret toward the operator’s side.
i
(9)
(10)
Insert the tool unit © into the tool positioning holes ® and ® of the turret ©. If the tool
unit (4) cannot be inserted, loosen the screw (2) for both adjacent tool units once and then
insert it.
Tighten the screw (2) by pressing the tool unit (4) against the turret surface and fix the tool
i
unit © with the clamp piece (3). The recommended tightening torque of the screw (2) is
i 2.4kg«m.
(11) Repeat (7) to (10) and attach the tool units to all the necessary turret surfaces. Attach the
blind lids © to the turret surfaces to which no tool units are attached.
(12) Press the turret backward movement key pg)j tO move the turret to the reference point of
t the Y axis.
(13) Close the door of the cutting room and turn the door interlock key switch ~y~ on the i
i
\
%
!
10-18
Attaching of too! and input of geometry offset
A WARNING
•Before starting this work, turn the door interlock key switch OFF ((f)) and open the
ill •During exchange of a tool, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of the
1
I-
tool. :
'.e 20-1 ZV !
l; rm
:
.© o @ b 1 ;
P 2 5
-
1@®C 3 is
5
Mo © ? 4
A
UJ
7

I
the cutting room. ;
(4) Press the MDI key to select the MDI mode and press the program key j(jgj]|
to display
(5) Issue the tool selection command (T1132 ; etc.) for attaching a tool.
(6) Instruct the diameter of a bar. (GO Y material diameter ;) :
I
v| (7) Loosen the screws © and © (2 each respectively) and insert the tools © and © into the
tool attaching slots of the tool holders © and (6).
,
(8) Take out a bar from the guide bushing, let the tools © and © slightly touch the outer
diameter of the bar, determine the position of each tool in the direction of the diameter,
and tighten the screws © and © slightly so as to prevent the tools from dropping.
(9) Press the jog key |vw, j to select the jog mode.
(10) Press the axis direction selection key |to retract the tools in the direction of the diam¬
eter and tighten the screws © and © to fix the tools.
!;'': (11) Press the custom key |j~f)| to display the menu screen.
(12) Press the |T| and j~£)| keys to display the geometry offset 1 screen. W:
10-19
:
!
:
'
in
n t
I if: I
1n
;
i
. i i
I:
s
= I
a
:
(13) Press the soft key [DISP.2] to display the geometry offset 2 screen.
(14) Press the soft key [SET OF ID NO.] to display the ID No. setting screen indicated below.
i
SET OR ID NO.
ID SETTING
DATA
T1 1 1 WHEN ID NO. 00 IS USED. ID SETTING DATA*0 I
T12 T5 WHEN ID N0.31.32.33(TURN1NG TOOL) IS USED- ID SETTING DATA=1
T13 4 WHEN ID NO . 34 . 35 . 36 ( TURN I NG T00UIS USED. ID SETTING DATA=2
T14 0 WHEN ID NO. 37.38. 39CTURNING TOOL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA=3
T15 2 WHEN ID ND .41. 42 C CROSS DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA“4
T16 0 WHEN ID NO. 43, 44 (CROSS DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA=5
T17 8 WHEN ID NO. 45. 46 (CROSS DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA =6
! - T18 0 WHEN ID NO. 47. 48 (CROSS DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA=7
WHEN ID NO. 51 .52. 53 ( FRONT DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA=8
WHEN ID NO. 61 .62 (FRONT DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA= 1 1
WHEN ID NO. 63. 64 (FRONT DRILL) IS USED. ID SETTING DATA=12
t I WHEN ID NO. 65. 66 (FRONT DRILL) IS USED.
WHEN ID NO. 67. 68 (FRONT DRILL) IS USED.
ID.SETTING
ID SETTING
DATA=13
DATA=14
S 0 TOOOC
;• X NO I **«*
** *. * * * 00:00:00 HEAD!
i
OFFSET
(15) Set the necessary ID No. (see Section 8-8-2).

I -=
(16) Press the soft key [OFFSET] to display the geometry offset 2 screen shown below.
it
i
I
GEOMETRY OFFSET 2
— >T1 131
32
V(V)
0.000
0.000
B(D)
EXECUT I ON MODE.. ON
0.000
0.000
Z 1 (W)
0.000
0.000
E(F5
0.000
0.000
T1600-
V(V)
0.000
B(D)
0.000
2KW)
0.000-
E(F)
0.00C
1 ;
33 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
T 1200 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 T 1751 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
52 0.000 0.000 0.000 o.ooc
: 53 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
T1341 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 T 1800 0.000 0.000 0.000 o.ooc
42 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
T 1400 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
T1534 0.000 0, 000 0.000 0.000

35 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
36 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 S 0 TOOOC
] * « ** #*#
** * 00:00:00 HEAD1
ADJUST SELECT EXECUT ID NO. DISP.1 BACK MODE MENU

SETING
(17) Press the MDI key |ÿ|to select the MDI mode and press the program key (g))j to display l
1I the program (MDI) screen.
j
m
!
i # 10-20
I
f i
(18) To raise the top of each tool (to lower in the case of the tool holder for inverse tool setting),
move the cursor to the position of the tool number to be adjusted and input the following:
1
[B! 0.5 £>| (forward rotation tool holder) or
[B~l -0.5 [ £> j (tool holder for inverse tool setting).
(19) Issue a tool selection command other than the tool number during adjustment once and !
then issue the tool selection command during adjustment once again. The geometry offset
value will be valid.
(20) Cut the end face of the bar, measure the diameter of the dowel, and input the measured !
value as follows:
IT)] [-measured value/2] [ £> j (forward rotation tool holder) or
[p] [measured value/2]| £> | (tool holder for inverse tool setting).
(21) Repeat (5) to (20) and attach all the necessary tools,
(22) Close the door of the cutting room and turn the door interlock key switch on the
.
if Removal of tools
K j;.
a AWARNING
It ® Be sure to stop the machine before starting inspection and adjustment of the machine .
•Before starting this work, turn the door interlock key switch OFF ((f)) and open the
I'i door. Be sure to execute the work under supervision of the person in charge of manage¬
Ii ® During exchange
tool
of a tool, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of the
II i
1
1
•When the turretforward key |[(g)| is pressed in the macro mode, the turret moves to YO.O
on the operator’s side (does not move in the direction of B and E axes). Take great care
to interference of the machine.
1 ;
1
I (1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.
I (2) Return the all axes to their reference points.
I
:.k'
(3) Turn the door interlock key switch -ff- on the machine operation panel OFF ((f)) under :
the cutting room.
>ÿ
:
(4) Press the jog key |wT| to select the jog mode.
I
1
§:ÿ
10-21
:
: ;
I
:
j
H
:
:
:
(5) Press the axis direction selection key [3] and determine the E axis coordinate during
I
operation. In this case, take great care to prevent the tool unit attached to the turret from
interfering with the guide bushing and the bar of the sub-spindle when the turret moves to
Y0.0.
(6) Press the macro key pa] to select the macro mode.
(7) Press the turret forward rotation/backward rotation keys |iQ| |{Q| to select the turret sur¬
; face from which a tool is to be removed.
(8) Press the turret forward key jÿj to move the turret toward the operator’s side. i
:
: (9) Loosen the screws © and © (2 each respectively) of the tool holders © and ©.
(10) Remove the tools (2) and © from the slots.
I
If the fixture © is dug into the slot and the tools cannot be removed, remove one of the
j screws ©, screw it into the screw hole ® of the holder ©5, and raise the tool holder (D.
(11) Repeat (7) to (10) and remove all the necessary tools.
! (12) Press the turret backward movement key to move the turret to the reference point of
the Y axis.
(13) Close the door of the cutting room and tum the door interlock key switch on the
I:
!
:
1
iii
:
•:.r I
V
i
1
i 1
10-22 f
; I!
:
r
1!
11 10-5-3 Handling of fool unit for turret :ÿ
A WARNING
® During adjustment of a tool, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of 1
the tool.
"
Center adjustment of wedge type tool holder [221-01, 221-07]

(1) Insert the tool © into the tool attaching slot of
the tool holder.
rq
(2) Put in or out the taper spacer © in the direction 2
of the arrow shown in the drawing to adjust the

It
(3)
center height of the tool ©.
Tighten the screws © to fix the tool ©.
I!
:
Center adjustment of wedge-free type tool holder [221-03, 221-08, 221-72] :

:
(1) Insert the tool © into the tool attaching slot of the tool holder ©.
(2) Tighten the screws © to fix the tool ©.
tft (3) Loosen the screws ©, ©, and © fixing the main unit © and the tool holder ©.
(4) Loosen the clamp screw © and adjust the center height of the tool © by the center height
i
adjustment screw ©.
(5) Tighten the screw © and fix the main unit © and the tool holder © temporarily.
(6) Confirm the center height of the tool. Repeat (3) to (5) until the desired center height is
obtained.
(7) Tighten the clamp screw © and the screws © and © to fix the main unit © and the tool ;
; holder©
a :
1 X2 Y 3 14 (51617 8 19
[T3 i
'II
;
/
(§) I
221-03
I w w
10-23
:
i 1s
j
:
i
?
Exchange of cutter of slotting unit [421-53, 421-54]

(1) Loosen the screws ® and remove the support (2). II
(2) Remove the nut (D.
(3) Remove the collars (4) and the cutters © from the spindle ©.
(4) Insert the collar (4) and the cutter © to be exchanged into the spindle (5).
(5) Fix the collar © and the cutter © with the nut ®.
rI (6) Attach the support © and fix it with the screws CD.
i 2 13 14 15
o
«m—}—
I
m IF
t
i
/ i
© T" 6
i
13- 3.5
j
27
1
Adjust the number of cutters © according to the number of collars @. Adjust the position of each
cutter © according to the thickness T of the collars (4). Prepare the collars ©in the shape indicated
below by the user.
o
S* .3#
a•9
©
CD £
I
w
6> <]o
EH T
*-\//\ 0.005 A
HH T
«— -|//|0-005jA|
Undesiqnated corner C0.3

For 421-53 For 421-54 Bar S45C or equivalent
|;
j
!
10-24
1
I
Angle adjustment of angle adjustable cross drilling unit ER11 [421-55]
I
(1) Loosen the screws (D fixing the main unit © and the plate ©. 1
(2) Incline the main unit © at an optional angle (0 to 60°) as shown in the drawing against the
plate ©. In this case, read the graduation shown in the drawing as an angle.
(3) Tighten the screws © to fix the main unit © and the plate ©.
i
/ 1
Graduation
/
/ ‘o'
o / /
/
B I
VT~/
1 <)
IZ i
1
j
i.;
-& I
\
2 13)
1 i
1 10-25
•:
!
:
LI
I
: i
I
:
! 'll
|
!
!
i
!
.*
10-6 Handling of fool setter

Attach the tool setter [424-21, optional} to the back attachment. By using it, the geometry offset in the
;
center height direction of the tool can be automatically set inside the machine.
:
Tools which can be measured by tool setter
i
:
• Gang tool post .... Tools for HEAD1 side forward rotation (M03)
i • Turret Tools for HEAD1 side forward rotation (M03)
Tools for HEAD2 side reverse rotation (M04)
11
1
;l Tools which cannot be measured by tool setter
I
A CAUTION S
: « When the tool sensor interferes with the tool during measurement, the tool sensor may
.
be damaged. Be careful in this regard.
: I
(1) When the edge of the tool touches the contact part of the tool sensor, the tool setter mea¬
/:
: sures the geometry offset of the tool. Depending on the shape of the edge of a tool, it may f 1
be difficult to let the edge touch the contact part of the tool sensor. If this occurs, the
IS
geometry offset cannot be measured by the tool setter.
The relational dimensions of the contact part of the tool sensor are shown below. Before
using the tool setter, be sure to check the shape of the tool edge with the shape of the %
contact part of the tool sensor and check whether the measurement by the tool setter is 1
possible.
I
S
9.5
Guide bushing I
in
Contact J
rv
; o OJ
to Contact Too! sensor
o> 0.5, _5
\
; 38
V~T
T
—if /
; to 1
39
i ; 12
i
;
10-26 II
I 1
;
(2) In the 5-station toolholder [421-01, 421-91] of the gang tool post and the 3-station
toolholder [421-02, 421-03, 421-92, 421-93]) of the turret, the gap between adjacent tools
is narrow, so that when a tool having a large edge like some throw away tools is attached,
the just previous tool (T100 in the case of T200) may not be measured by the tool setter. :
!
© © interference
ill
U 7
"-f- 4]
in
4r
4' © in'1
OJ J-
(VI
© 3~ ;
V ;
1 ;
;
CM
V
_ i
SLIt
(VI
Z interference .
10-27
4-
:
!
:
.
1
10-8-1 Attaching of tool setter
!
A WARNING
® Be sure to stop the machine before starting inspection and adjustment of the machine.
:
i
® While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge
of the tool
i
:
A CAUTION I
I • When coolant oil enters the connector (§) or the receptacle (7), a malfunction of the
sensor or afailure of the control unit may be caused. When connecting or disconnecting
I
j the connector, take great care to prevent coolant oilfrom entering the connector. When
the connector (§)is removedfrom the receptacle (JX be sure to attach the cap (6)to it.
I (1) Put the machine into the machine ready state.

;gi
the cutting room.
(4) Clean the tool setter attaching surface of the upper part of the sub-spindle and the attach¬
ing surface of the tool setter and then attach the tool setter (2). Tighten the knob screw © I
by pressing the pin (3) of the tool setter (2) against the sub-spindle.
(5) Remove the cap ® of the receptacle (7) on this side of the sub-spindle. 1
(6) Connect the connector (5) of the tool setter to the receptacle (7).
'V;.
(7) The pilot lamp (D of the tool sensor lights.
If the pilot lamp © does not light, defective connection of the connector (D and the recep¬
tacle (7) can be considered. Turn the main breaker OFF (Q) and check the connection of
the connector (5) and the receptacle (7).
C 1 A 2 I 3 X 4 5 YeY 7 c
c I
£
B
! X i->-|
i
i
l ;
10-28
1
1 NOTICE
•When the connector (5) and the receptacle (7) are con¬
nected, the machine cannot be started up in the memory
1
and MDI modes.
•A protective cover is attached to the tool setter attaching
surface of the upper part of the sub-spindle. To obtain
stable measurement accuracy by the tool setter, when the
tool setter is removed, be sure to attach this cover to it.
tfir 1
10-6-2 Measurement of relative position of tool sensor

To execute a geometry offset of a tool with high accuracy using the tool setter, it is necessary to
measure the relative position of the tool sensor to the center of the guide hushing which is the refer¬
ence of machining with accuracy. Measure the position of tool sensor according to the following
procedure.
|
When the tool setter is purchased at the same time with the main unit of the machine, the measurement
and input of measured value are carried out at factory before shipment. Therefore, when the tool setter
purchased at the same time with the main unit of the machine is used, this measurement is not re¬
I quired. However, when the measurement accuracy of the tool setter is insufficient for some reason or
a tool setter which does not correspond to the inputted measured value is used, execute this measure¬
ment.
If
AWARNING
Be sure to stop the machine before starting inspection and adjustment of the machine.
®
•While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of the tool
I
1
;
® When an object to be measured moves 2mm or more from the light-out position of the
pilot lamp of the tool sensor in the direction of pressing the tool sensor during measure¬
ment, the tool sensor may be damaged. Be careful in this regard.
i
lit
?ÿ
1 10-29
I
S
I '
I
:
i Preparation
(1) Put the machine into the machine ready state. 1
i (3) Turn the door interlock key switch on the machine operation panel OFF (Q) under I-ÿ
the cutting room.
(4) Display the geometry offset 1 screen (see Section 7-15) and set all the offset values of
T300 to 0.
(5) Prepare a test bar or a bar (<j> 20 or less). Measure the outer diameter of the test bar or bar
accurately with a micrometer and input it to Data “F” on the offset adjustment screen (see :
:
Section 7-15).
(6) Prepare a knife tool. Measure the width across flat of the shank of the knife tool with a
\\: micrometer accurately and record it as a value of “H”.
(7) Prepare a block gauge. Measure the width across
l;
flat of the block gauge with a micrometer accu¬
rately and record it as a value of “I”. If no block s
gauge can be prepared, a tool can be substituted for X
(8)
it.
Remove all cutting tools such as tools and drills on
/ £
UL
(9)
the tool post.
Insert the test bar or bar so that it is protruded 10 to
35mm from the guide bushing as shown in the
V \ 10ÿ35
Test bar
drawing on the right. When the bar is used, close

the main collet and fix the bar.
Measurement of relative position of tool sensor
NOTICE
® Unless otherwise specified, the coordinate values of the axes described in this section
are all absolute coordinate values.
(1) Press the MDI key to select the MDI

I mode and press the program key |jjg))| to dis¬
\
(2)
(3)
play the program (MDI) screen.
Press the HE AD1 key
HEAD! mode.
Select the T300 tool.
to select the
—KB©
IIJS ~ O ®M
o
*
+
m
(4) Attach the tool of which the width across flat -ICD© 30.
H of the shank is measured in the previous
section to T300 with a tool overhang of ©_ o
30mm as shown in the drawing.
10-30
ll||
I
(5) Press the jog key p4j to select the jog mode.
(6) Press the axis direction selection key jÿ|and feed the A axis to A0.Q±1.0 (0.010.04 inch)
(machine coordinate).
(7) Press the axis direction selection key |pr*]| and feed the X axis to X0.011.0 (0.010.04 inch) ;
(machine coordinate).
(8) Set the jog feed rate override to 60mm/min or less.
(9) Press the axis direction selection key||~A| and feed the A axis to a position between the
tool and the test bar where the block gauge can be inserted.
(10) Set the jog feed rate override to 2mm/min.
(11) Press the axis direction selection
Block gauge
key fi~*| and feed the A axis to a
position where no gap exists be¬ O© H
tween the tool, test bar, and
block gauge.
(12) Press the axis direction selection i
key and return the A axis to
a position where a gap is formed
between the tool, test bar, and
block gauge.
(13) Press the step key py] to select the step mode.
(14) Press the axis direction selection key||~*'j and feed the A axis to a position where no gap
exists between the tool, test bar, and block gauge by step feed. i 1
(15) Press the position key j[Hr|| to display the position screen, confirm the coordinate of die A
axis, and record it as a value of “K”.
(16) Press the jog key pwT| to select the jog mode and set the jog feed rate override to
60mm/min or less.
(17) Press the axis direction selection key p*Aj to retract the tool from the test bar.
(18) Press the axis direction selection key p*] to feed the X axis to the neighborhood of the
reference point.
(19) Remove the test bar or bar from the guide bushing.
(20) Press the axis direction selection key |ÿ'| and feed the Z2 axis to Z218.510.2
(8.6024+0.008 inch).
(21) Press the axis direction selection key|j'A| and feed the A axis to A-14.0±0.2 (-
0.551210.008 inch).
(22) Press the axis direction selection key |ÿx| and feed the X axis to X21.010.2 :
(0.826810.008 inch).
(24) Attach the tool setter to the back attachment. (See Section 10-6-1.)
:
10-31 1
;
:
1
!1
!
(25) Press the axis direction selection key and feed

the A axis until the tool sensor comes in contact
with the tool and the pilot lamp of the tool sensor
switches from the ON state to the OFF state.
(26) Press the axis direction selection key |“p‘| and re¬ - i©@ °©l—
turn the A axis to a position where the pilot lamp
turns on once. © [ © 1
(27) Press the step key p\Jj[ to select the step mode.
(28) To obtain a more accurate tool sensor position, press the axis direction selection key |j*A|
and feed the A axis to a position where the tool sensor comes in contact with the tool and
:ÿ
(29)
(30)
the pilot lamp goes off by step feed.
Press the position key
Press the jog key

jfFF)jto display the position screen, confirm the coordinate of the A
axis, and record it as a value of “L”.
|wT| to select the jog mode and set the jog feed rate override to
i
60mm/min or less.
(31) Press the axis direction selection key to retract the A axis from the tool sensor.
i (32) Press the axis direction selection key f/*| to feed the X axis to the neighborhood of the
i reference point.
(33) Press the axis direction selection key and feed the A axis to A17.0±0.2
(0.6693±0.008 inch).
(34) Press the axis direction selection key and feed the X axis to X7.0+0.2 (0.2756±0.008
inch).
i
(36) Press the axis direction selection key fj~*|
and feed o
i the A axis until the tool sensor comes in contact
with the tool and the pilot lamp of the tool sensor o@j—
switches from the ON state to the OFF state. Q~©1—
(37) Press the axis direction selection key and re¬
turn the A axis to a position where the pilot lamp © 11 ©o
1I turns on once. it
1
(38) Press the step key select the step mode.
(39) To obtain a more accurate tool sensor position, press the axis direction selection key||'A|
and feed the A axis to a position where the tool sensor comes in contact with the tool and
I the pilot lamp goes off by step feed.
1 (40) Press the position key j fFFlj
to display the position screen, confirm the coordinate of the A
axis, and record it as a value of “M”.
(41) Press the jog key |W| to select the jog mode and set the jog feed rate override to
f;
60mm/min or less.
(42) Press the axis direction selection key to retract the A axis from the tool sensor.
10-32
:
(43) Press the axis direction selection key to feed the X axis to the neighborhood of the
reference point.
(44) Remove the tool setter from the back attachment. ! I
(45) Input the values of data “B” and “D” shown below onto the offset adjustment screen (see
Section 10-6-3).
* Shift between centers of tool holder and guide bushing: J=K-(F/2+H+I)
• Data 2 [Point 2]: B=L-J
.
• Data 4 [Point 4]: D=M-H+J
Example:
§
•Test bar diameter: F=<j> 19.868mm (0.7822 inch) I
* Shank width of knife tool: H=11.932mm (0.4986 inch)
i * Block gauge width: I = 10.003mm (0.3998 inch) !
1
•Reading of A axis coordinates: K=31.872mm (1.2896 inch)
L=-12.514mm (-0.4922 inch) 1
'!ÿ
M=11.437mm (0.4798inch)
J=0.003mm (0.0001 inch)
B=-12.517mm (-0.4923 inch)
D=-0.492mm (-0.0187 inch) J—
These values axe inputted onto the offset adjustment screen.
:
i
!
10-33
:
m :!
10-6-3 Offset adjustment screen

This screen is a screen onto which necessary data is input when the geometry offset is automatically 1
measured. Display this screen according to the following procedure. I
l
(1) Press the custom key jff>)|
to display the menu screen.
1 (2) [
Input [2j| £> to display the geometry offset 1 screen.
;
(3) Press the soft key [ADJUST] to display the following offset adjustment screen. 11
t§
! ••EXECUTE** OFFSET ADJUST
11
1
:
** A . C . R-— D I AMETER T
* B . D— 2 US T4 U
: DATA 1 C PO I N'T"
DATA 2 C PO I NT
1 1 ( A
2HB)
> =ÿ=
=
no. 000
-12-51 1 T1
10 3
•4
2
tCTJ-
R
R
E
T
s
DAT A3 C PO I NT 33 CC) = 1 *4 . OOO 1
DATA4 [ PO I NT 4] (D)= - O . -4©S -*ÿ
A . E3
i
T
WIDTH OR SENSOR(E)= 12.000 -+-X«- m -*—X
- Y 4. -+- Y
.
TEST BAR D I AMETER = < F ) 1© - e©s -A B
Z2-AX IS ADJUSTTG > = O . OOO
i S 0 TOOOC
: MDI *•** 00:00:00 h£AD1
D1SP.1 DISP.2
gg|
i
• When the soft key [DISP.1] is pressed, the screen can be returned to the geometry offset 1
screen. *
• When the soft key [DISP.2] is pressed, the screen can be moved to the geometry offset 2
screen.
l • When the geometry offset measurement program execution mode is ON, **EXECUTE**
is displayed on the upper part of the screen. If this occurs, no data can be changed.
* Japanese and English on the screen are switched by Keep Relay K00-bit4.
I j 1 Japanese, 0 -*•English
i IS
V i
ill
II
v
fI
:
I
'
10-34
I
1 { M
The adjustment data on the screen are 7 types of A to G. Press the cursor keys j j
j and i j to move
the cursor and select the data to be input. The content of each data is shown below.
A: The diameter direction of the tool sensor and the position data (diameter) of the point 1 on
the screen are input.
•Setting value: 10.0mm (0.3937 inch)
B: The center height direction of the tool sensor and the position data (radius) of the point 2
1
i
C:
•Standard value: ........
on the screen are input.
For the data setting method, refer to the section 10-6-2.
-12.5mm (-0.4921 inch)
Input a value less than -10.5mm (-0.4134 inch).
The diameter direction of the tool sensor and the position data (diameter) of the point 3 on
:
the screen are input.
•Setting value: 14.0mm (0.5512 inch)
....
D: The center height direction of the tool sensor and the position data (radius) of the point 4
1 For the data setting method, refer to the section 10-6-2.

* Standard value: -0.5mm (-0.0197 inch)
I E:
Input a value within a range from -2.5mm to 1.5mm (-0.0984 inch
to 0.0591 inch) or more.
The width of the tool sensor and the distance between the end faces of the points 1 and 3
•Setting value: 12.0mm (0.4724 inch) i;
F: The data is used to check the relative position of the tool sensor. Input the diameter of the t
test bar (bar).
G: When the shift amount is set in this data if the position of the detection unit of the tool ?•
sensor in the longitudinal direction is to be adjusted during measurement, the position can 11
be adjusted by shifting the Z2 axis back and forth.
•Standard value: 0
Input a value of 0.5mm (0.0197 inch) or less. i
• Shift direction: Guide bushing side: Plus
Back attachment side: Minus
:
10-35
l
!
H
:
:
u
10-6-4 Automatic compensation of tool by tool setter
A WARNING
I •To avoid danger, be sure to close all the doors before starting measurement of the geom¬
etry offset of a tool by the tool setter.
® Turn the door interlock key switch OFF ((f)), open the door, and then start the
work. Be sure to execute the work under supervision of the person in charge of manage¬
•While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of a tool.
I r NOTICE
i • When thisfunction is used, the measurement data on the offset adjustment screen (see
Section 10-6-3) should be input correctly.
Gang tool post

|
(2) Return the ail axes to their reference points.
(3) Press the custom key jfj>)| to display the menu screen.
(4) Press the \2\ and j £> j keys to display the geometry offset 1 screen indicated below.
GEOMETRY OFFSET 1
EXE COT I ON MODE ON =
— ALL
»-*T100
T200
T300
XtU)
0.000
0.000
0.000
ACC)
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z1(W)
0.000
0.000
0.000
T400 0.000 0.000 0.000
TS00 0.000 0.000 0.000
T600 0-000 0.000 0.000
T700 0.000 0.000 0.000
1800 0.000 0-000 0.000
S 0 T000C
K/DI *»»» 00:00:00 HEAD1
ADJUST SELECT EXECUT DISP.2 K€NU
I
i
i
10-36
1
;
(5) Set the geometry offset of the Z1 axis.

+
•Input the distance from the standard edge position (2mm
from the guide bushing) of the edge of each tool as a ge¬ 2*1 JL
.
ometry offset value of the Z1 axis of each tool number.
• Move the display of arrow on the screen up and
down and select the tool number to be measured. The dis¬
s play moves up and down by pressing the cursor keys
D
[ t j and j i |on the CNC operation panel.
* When [Zj [offset data] and j £> j are input, the geometry
offset of the Zi axis of the tool is set.
j
• When (Wj [increase and decrease data] and £> j are input, the geometry offset of the Zl
axis of the tool can be increased or decreased.
(6) Select the tool number to be measured.
Firstly, move the display of arrow on the screen up and down and select the tool
number to be measured. The display moves up and down by pressing the cursor keys
j t j and| 4 j on the CNC operation panel. f
•When only a necessary tool number among T100 to T50G is to be measured
Move the display to the position of the tool number to be measured among TICK) to
T500 and press the soft key [SELECT]. A mark is displayed on the left of the tool
p
number selected by the display and the tool number to be measured is decided (a
plurality of tool numbers can be selected). To cancel the decision, move select the
tool number, and press the [SELECT] key. The “*” mark is erased and the tool will not
be measured.
•When TOO to T500 are all to be measured
!:
Move the display to the position of “ALL”. When “ALL” is selected, the mark
is not displayed. ;
I (7) Turn the door interlock key switch on the machine operation panel OFF (Q) under
I
:
; the cutting room.
I (8) Attach the tool to the tool holder (see Section 10-5-1, do not input the geometry offset).
(9) Attach the tool setter to the back attachment (see Section 10-6-1).
(10) Close the door of the cutting room.
I (II) Press the macro key |ÿ|to select the macro mode.
(12) Press the SIMUL key jjggl to select the SIMUL mode.
(13) Press the soft key [EXECUT] to turn the execution mode ON.
To turn the execution mode OFF, press the [EXECUT] key once again. When the execu¬
tion mode is on, no data can be changed.
(14) When the start button fil is pressed, the measurement program is started up. Note that
each axis moves during measurement.
Jiff
1
10-37
1
j
j
j
ri~
:
:
(15) When the measurement ends, the following message is displayed.
3012 PROGRAM END

— RESET ON
Press the reset key j yf |. The measured geometry offset value is displayed in the area of
A (C) of each tool number.
(16) Execute (3) and (4) to display the geometry offset 1 screen.
(17) Set the geometry offset value of the Z1 axis to 0.
'
Turret
NOTICE
: •In automatic measurement of the geometry offset of a tool attached to the turret, only
measurement of the tool attached to the turret 1surface is possible by one startup of the
program.
I
(3) Press the MDI key to select the MDI mode and press the program key j[T)]| to display
|!
(4) Execute the tool selection command (T1100 etc.) for measuring.
(5) Press the custom key to display the menu screen.
(6) j
Press the \2\ and g> j keys to display the geometry offset 1 screen.
(8) Press the soft key [ID NO. SETINGj to display the ID No. setting screen.
(9) Set the necessary ID No. (see Section 8-8-2). I
(10) Press the soft key [OFFSET] to display the geometry offset 2 screen shown on the next
page.
10-38
_
GEOMETRY OFFSET 2
EXECUT I ON MODE : ON!
B(D) Z!1(W) E(F)
—
Y(V) B(D) ZUW) E(F> Y(V>
>* T1 131 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 T1600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.00C
* 32 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
* 33 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
T1200 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 T1751 0-000 0.000 0.000 O-OOC
52 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.00C
53 0.000 0.000 0.000 0-00C
T1341 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 T 1800 0-000 0.000 0.000 0-000
42 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
I T1400 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
'ÿ
i? T1534
35
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
36 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 S 0 TOOOC
MDI **** 00:00:00 HEAD1
ID NO.
ADJUST SELECT EXECUT SETING DISP. 1 SACK MODE MENU ;
ii
(11) Set the geometry offset of the Z1 axis.
IJ Input the distance from the standard edge position (2mm from the guide bushing for
main, 161mm from the guide bushing for back) of the edge of each tool as a geometry
offset value of the Z1 axis of each tool number.
ill i
Move the display of arrow on the screen up and down and select the tool number
I
*
to be measured. The display moves up and down by pressing the cursor keys t j j
| |
and j on the CNC operation panel.
I » When \z\ [offset data] and j £> [ are input, the geometry offset of the Z1 axis of the tool
II is set.
:.:T * When [wj [increase and decrease data] and | £> |are input, the geometry offset of the Z1
-
:V
d
;
EO . 0 J
!
11 _L IhJ Ld
:
:
I
2 b c
+
161
+ !
10-39
s
1 i:
;|
1
i
(12) Select the tool to be measured.
Move the display of arrow on the screen up and down by pressing the cursor keys
| t j and j i j and select the tool number to be measured. Display a mark on the left of
; the tool number selected by the display by pressing the soft key [SELECT] and
decide the tool number to be measured. When measuring tool numbers having ID No. (see #
! Section 8-8-2) other than 00, display a mark for all the tool numbers to be measured.
To cancel the decision, move select the tool number, and press the [SELECT] key. II
The mark is erased. Move the display **—ÿ” to the tool number to be measured last.
(13) When the tool holder for measuring is a holder for back, press the soft key [BACK
MODE] to turn the back mode ON. To turn the back mode OFF, press the [BACK 1
:
MODE] key once again.
: (14) Turn the door interlock key switch on the machine operation panel OFF ((2)) under §|
- supervision of the person in charge of management of the machine and open the door of
Iff
the cutting room.
; (15) Attach the tool holder and tool to the turret (see Section 10-5-2, do not input the geometry 1
i;
offset).
: (16) Attach the tool setter to the back attachment (see Section 10-6-1).
(17) Close the door of the cutting room.
i
(18) Press the macro key to select the macro mode. It
(19) Press the SIMUL key to select the SIMUL mode.
(20) Press the soft key [EXECUTj to turn the execution mode ON.
I To turn the execution mode OFF, press the [EXECUT] key once again. When the execu¬
tion mode is on, no data can be changed.
: (21) When the start button jfTi is pressed, the measurement program is started up. Note that
each axis moves during measurement.
(22) When the measurement ends, the following message is displayed. II
11
3012 PROGRAM END
— RESET ON
!j
Press the reset key j j. The measured geometry offset value is displayed in the area of A
(C) of each tool number. Ill
(23) Execute (5) to (7) to display the geometry offset 2 screen. *
(24) Set the geometry offset value of the Z1 axis to 0.
;
S
10-40
Keying of geometry offset
When keying the geometry offset of each tool, use the following procedure. (When keying the
geometry offset of T100 to T800, do not execute (4) to (7).)
(2) Press the custom key jpgT|j to display the menu screen.
(3) Press the [2j and [ £> |keys to display the geometry offset 1 screen.
(5) Press the soft key [ID NO. SETXNG] to display the ID No. setting screen.
(6) Set the necessary ID No. (see Section 8-8-2).
(7) Press the soft key [OFFSET] to display the geometry offset 2 screen.
(8) Set the geometry offset.
•Move the display of arrow on the screen up and down and select the tool number
to be input. The display moves up and down by pressing the cursor keys j t j and
| i | on the CNC operation panel.
•When \x\ [offset data] and | 4> j are input, the geometry offset of the Z1 axis of the tool i
is set.
When “A”, “Z”, “Y”, “B”, and “E” are input in place of “X” in the same way, the
geometry offsets of the A axis, Z1 axis, Y axis, B axis, and E axis are set. i
j |
•When [u] [increase and decrease data] and £> are input, the geometry offset of the X
When “C”, “W”, “V”, “D”, and “F” are input in place of “U” in the same way, the
geometry offsets of the A axis, Z1 axis, Y axis, B axis, and E axis can be increased or
decreased.
1
i
1
i
10-41
t:
i;
ji
:
I
;
;
i
Alarm message
When a maloperation, missetting, or a machine error occurs during operation of the tool setter, one
of the following alarm messages is displayed on the screen. If this occurs, the machine enters the
feed hold state and the main spindle motor, sub-spindle motor, power-driven motor, and coolant
motor are stopped. To cancel an alarm, press the reset key #[ j.
1016 MODE IS NOT MACRO
When a program is being executed in the macro mode, the operation mode is
switched to another mode. S
, 1137 EXECUTION MODE IS NOT OFF

I
:
\!i
When the execution mode is ON, the start button (ml is pressed in the
memory or MDI mode.
,
: 2082 REMOVE THE TOOL SETTER is
When the tool setter is attached, the start button fnP is pressed in the memory |
or MDI mode.
.
3000 MACRO MODE IS NOT READY

1 The start button jfilj is pressed in one of the following statuses.
• The SIMUL mode is not selected (HEAD1 or HEAD2 mode). 1
• The macro mode is not selected (memory mode or MDI mode). 1
3001 SENSOR IS DISCONNECTED
The tool setter is not attached or the cable of the tool setter is disconnected.
3002 DATA A IS WRONG

The value of data A on the offset adjustment screen is not within a range from
1t.
il
8.0mm to 12.0mm (0.3150 inch to 0.4724 inch).
fi
3003 DATA B IS WRONG
1 The value of data B on the offset adjustment screen is -10.5mm (-0.4134 inch) ai:
1 or more. li
3004 DATA C IS WRONG
If The value of data C on the offset adjustment screen is not within a range from
I
v
M
I
10-42
1 I
£
V
i:
3005 DATA D IS WRONG
The value of data D on the offset adjustment screen is out of the range of - 1;
— —
2.5mm 1.5mm (-0.0984 inch 0.0591 inch). {.
1 3006 DATA E IS WRONG :|
1 The value of data E on the offset adjustment screen is not within a range from
!
s
3007 SENSOR ALARM
— POINT 1
When the measurement program is executed, the point 1 of the tool sensor
(see Section 10-6-3) is not turned ON. '
II V
•:
3008 SENSOR ALARM
— POINT 2
::
;
'
(see Section 10-6-3) is not turned ON.

II
i
g
3009 SENSOR ALARM
— POINT 3
;
(see Section 10-6-3) is not turned ON. !
3010 SENSOR ALARM

— POINT 4
1
I (see Section 10-6-3) is not turned ON.
3011 Z2 POSITION IS WRONG '
In the measurement program, there is a movement command that it is more

than 219.0mm (8.6220 inch) in Z2 axis coordinate and 78.0mm (3.0709 inch)
in the back mode. Check the shift amount (data E) of the Z2 axis on the offset
11 adjustment screen and the geometry offset value of the Z1 axis on the geom¬ ;
If etry offset 1 and 2 screens.
!
3017 ID NO. IS NOT 0, 1, 2, 3 1
An attempt is made to measure a tool on the turret for which ID setting data
JJ other than 0 to 3 is set on the ID No. setting screen. 1
I
1 10-43
I
I!
i1
:
.
:
: .1
H ; 3018 TOOL IS NOT SELECTED

An attempt is made to execute the measurement program for a tool on the
turret in one of the following statuses.
• No mark is displayed for the tool number selected by the display
on the geometry offset 2 screen.
j
•The tool number (turret surface) to be measured now is not indexed. 1
U(
11
1
!§
;
;
1
1
if
10-44
,
I if
10-7 Handling of tool presetter \
When the tool presetter [424-22, option] is used, a tool of the tool unit for the turret can be adjusted
I
outside the machine.
—
Nos. ©—© are used in the section 10-7-1 10-7-4. Refer to those sections.
•
i
I;
<j?j o
©@
©,
©
@© @©
©
©
D I
}
o
o _L
I iW o
m £ @j
SailBx
&h ?»
v
1 X2X 3 6A7A8X9X 1°X 1
O
121 13Y 14 15Y16X17
I '
!
a
O O
O G
© ®
£ o |
£ t=y Sj
is
Q i i
10-45
i
NOTICE
•There are two types of reference holes for attaching the tool unit of the tool presetter
: such as tf> 44 (holes A to D shown in the drawing) and <p 10 (holes 1 to 9 shown in. the
drawing) and the tool unit is attached using one reference hole of <p 44 and <t> 10 respec¬
tively. |
;
The reference holes to be used vary with the tool unit type. In this section, the tool unit
attaching positions are indicated as shown below using the reference holes to be used.
i Tool unit attaching position: 0-4S
A ; <p 10 hole position (1 to 9)
!
Example:
O: <p44 hole position (A to D)
.
When the <p 44 hole position is A and the (p 20 hole position is 4:.....
A-4
•To set a tool outside the machine by the tool presetter with accurate, observe thefollow¬
ing use environments.
•Ambient temperature: 10 to 30° C (recommended temperature: 20 ° C)
® There should be no devices generating electromagnetic waves such as a motor and
:
power supply line around the lathe.
i
:
10-7-1 Handling of scale unit

A measurement of a tool by the tool presetter is taken by the scale unit’d).
I
® When using the tool presetter, please read the operation manual of the scale unit before
I
starting operation so as to fully understand the contents. If duplicated contents are
found between this operation manual and the operation manual of the scale unit, give
priority to the contents of this operation manual.
•Prevent the scale unitfrom a shock causing scratch and deformation. Do not use mark¬
ing by an electric pen.
* Soil of the slideway of the scale unit may cause a maloperation. Wipe out soil of the
$ slideway with soft cloth with a small amount of oil having low viscosity contained.
H;
I
1
i
:
:
:
10-46
•
iiffi
I 1
Name and function of each unit of operation device
An enlarged view of the head unit of the scale unit ® is shown on the right. The name and function
of each unit are as shown below.
© in/mm button :
18119120
The button is used to switch inch display
and mm display.
© LCD display 1 ft/mm | |ORIGIN
® ORIGIN button
The button is used to set an absolute refer¬ 0.00.
ence point (ABS 0.0). ON/OTF ZERO/ABS
© ON/OFF button
© ZERO/ABS button !
The button is used to switch incremental
21 \22\23\2A I
display and absolute value display.
© Battery lid :
The lid is removed when the battery is to be exchanged.
!•
Incremental display and absolute value display I

• Incremental display ;
Incremental display coordinate (INC coordinate):
INC (ÿÿÿ•ÿ•ÿ indicates a coordinate.value.)
The incremental display indicates a relative position coordinate on the basis of an optional posi¬
tion (INC 0.0). Move the measure scope © to the position to be set to INC 0.0 and press the
t
!
ZERO/ABS button © short (less than 1 second). “0.00” and “INC” are displayed on the LCD
display © and the position of INC 0.0 is set.
• Absolute reference point (ABS 0.0)
Move the measure scope © to the position to be set to the absolute reference point and press the :
ORIGIN button for 1 second or more. “0.00” is displayed on the LCD display © and the posi¬
tion of ABS 0.0 is set. In this case, “INC” is not displayed. When the battery is exchanged, be
I
• Absolute value display
........
sure to set the absolute reference point.
Absolute value coordinate (ABS coordinate):

ABS (ÿÿÿ.ÿÿ indicates a coordinate value.)
The absolute value display indicates a coordinate on the basis of the absolute reference point
(ABS 0.0). Unless “INC” is displayed on the LCD display ©, an ABS coordinate is displayed.
When “INC” is displayed, press the ZERO/ABS button © long (2 seconds or more). The dis¬
%
:
i
;
play of “INC” on the LCD display © is erased and an ABS coordinate is displayed.
When the ON/OFF button © is pressed to turn power ON, an ABS coordinate is always dis¬ !
played.
f.
10-47
!1
:
Exchange of battery
i
ACAUTON
® Be sure to me a battery of SR44 (button type silver oxide battery).
(1) Pull out and remove the battery lid © in the direction of the arrow.
(2) Exchange the battery. Be sure to set the battery with the plus side up.
(3) Insert and attach the battery lid © in the opposite direction of the arrow.
(4) Set ABS 0.0.
Error display and countermeasure

When an error is displayed on the LCD display, take the following action.
• ErrC and flickering of LCD display
1
The surface of the scale © is soiled. Wipe out soil with soft cloth with a small amount of oil
having low viscosity contained.
• Least significant E display
I The least significant E may be displayed when the head unit of the scale unit (D is fed at high
speed. However, the measurement is not affected by it. When the least significant digit is E even
in the state that the head unit is stopped, it has the same meaning as ErrC. Take the same action.
• B display
The voltage of the battery is low. Exchange the battery.
10-7-2 Handling of measure scope

s Attaching of measure scope
I When the measure scope © is not attached to the tool presetter, attach the measure scope © to the
if
tool presetter according to the following procedure.
(1) Insert the measure scope © into the mounting hole of the holder (D until the end face of
the measure scope © touches the holder (D.
II (2) Put a brass washer in the screw hole of the holder © and attach the knob screw © to it.
(3) Tighten the knob screw © to fix the measure scope ©.
i
il
i
I
I
i
i
;f
I
I
1 10-48
il
1 r
1 Position adjustment of measure scope
• Focusing
Turn the dial (D for adjustment.
• Adjustment of vertical position I
Turn the dial © for adjustment. V
• Adjustment of longitudinal position
(1) Loosen the knob screw (D to make the measure scope © movable in the longitudinal
direction.
(2) Move the measure scope © in the longitudinal direction by viewing the LCD display ©
to position it roughly.
(3) Tighten the knob screw (3).
(4) Adjust the position of the measure scope © finely by turning the dial (2).
1
10-7-3 Measurement of reference position of measure scope
To adjust a tool of the tool unit using the tool presetter, it is necessary to measure the reference
position of the measure scope © beforehand. Measure the reference position of the measure scope ©
according to the following procedure.
.
Measurement of reference position of measure scope
(1) Insert the master gauge CD (see the draw¬
ing on the right) into the reference hole A
I
<
of the main unit ©. i

(2) Loosen the knob screw (D to make the
measure scope © movable in the longitu¬
dinal direction.
(3) Move the measure scope © in the longi¬
tudinal direction by looking into the mea¬ f
sure scope © to catch an image of the
master gauge CD.
Cross hairs
(4) Tighten the knob screw (3).
(5) Adjust the dials (D, (D, and © by looking
i into the measure scope © and focus the
measure scope © on the tip (part of <j> 6)
of the master gauge (D.
(6) Adjust the dial @ by looking into the
measure scope © and set the tip of the
master gauge (D to the cross hairs of the Master gauge
eyepiece micrometer @.
10-49
'
I
:
'
:
i
!
[
i
(7) When the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer © are seen
! slantwise to the tip of the master gauge CD, loosen the screw ©
and correct the slope of the cross hairs by turning the eyepiece
micrometer @. After correction, tighten the screw © to fix the
eyepiece micrometer @.
(S) Adjust the dial (2) by looking into the measure scope © and set
the reference outer diameter part (part of <j> 6) of the master gauge
CD to the vertical lines of cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer
©
(9) Remove the master gauge (T).
(10) Insert the master gauge © (see the drawing on the right) into the reference hole 1 of the
11 main unit ®.
; (11) Adjust the dial (9) by looking into the measure scope © and focus the measure scope ©
on the tip (part of <j> 6) of the master gauge ©.
(12) Check that the tip and reference
outer diameter part (part of $ 6) of ®|® ©
the master gauge © are set to the
cross hairs of the eyepiece mi¬
crometer © in the same way as
(8).
o
Light
If they are seen shifted, the light ©~]<D projection line Reference iine
w
projection line of the measure
scope © and the reference line D
em
(line passing the centers of the ref¬
erence holes A and 1) of the main
unit © are shifted from each other
as shown in the drawing on the ©
right. Loosen the screws (J) (4
pcs.) and the screws (D (4 pcs.)
and adjust the angle between the ® D
measure scope © and the main
unit © to coincide the light pro¬
jection line of the measure scope
© with the reference line of the
main unit ©.
(13) Tighten the screws (D and (D.
; (14) Adjust the dials (D and © once again by looking into the measure scope © and check that
the tip and reference outer diameter part (part of <(> 6) of the master gauge © are set to the
cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer @ in the same way as (8).
(15) Assume this position as the reference position of the measure scope ©. Press the ORIGIN
button © for 1 second or more to set ABS to 0.0.
10-50
:
10-7-4 Setting of too? outside machine by tool presetter
V.
A WARNING
1
%
7 Adjustment of diameter direction and center height of tool

$
I O Applicable tool unit and attaching position
II Name Machine No.
Attaching
position
3-staion tooholder (DUmiXi) 421-02 A-4 ;
I
$
3-station toolhoider for inverse tool setting for backworking (Dl2mm) 421-03
3-station toolhoider (ÿ 1/2 inch) 421-92
B-5
A-4 \
1
II
3-station toolhoider for inverse tool setting for backworking (Dl/2 inch) 421-93 B-5
Standard wedge type (ÿ 16mm) 221-01
Standard wedge type (Digram)
if
1 IStntn-overhang wedge type (CD 16mm)
221-01A
221-02
I 15mm-overhang wedge type (Dl9mm) 221-02A
i
Standard wedge-free type (Pl6mm) 221-03
1
f'
Standard wedge-free type (Dl9mm)
15mm-overhang wedge-free type (Dl6mm)
221 -03A
221-04
i
i 15mm-overhang wedge-free type (Dl9mm) 221-04A

A-4 i
Wedge longitudinally adjustable type (ÿl6mrh) 221-05 :ÿ
Wedge longitudinally adjustable type (Gl9mm) 221-05A

j.
Wedge type for inverse tool setting (ÿ 16mm) 223-07
1 Wedge type for inverse tool setting (ED19mm) 221-07 A
& Wedge-free type for inverse tool setting (G3l6mm) 221-08
f Wedge-free type for inverse tool setting (Ol9mm) 221-08A
Wedge longitudinally adjustable type (CD16mm) 221-09 I
>ÿ Wedge longitudinally adjustable type (Dl9mm) 221-09A j
Wedge-free type for cut-off tool (Pi 6mm) 221-71 =•
j
Wedge-free type for cut-off tool (ED19mm) 221-73A
Wedge-free type for backworking (ÿ 16mm) 221-72
wm B-5
Wedge-free type for backworking (Dl9mm) 221-72A
%
El
II I.
I:
1
< i.
S;
%
;
;
:
8 : ;
Si
II 10-51
m
* :
!
1
|
;
!
;
3jp~
©fe; ®
© ''i
©Jo
i
A
*3? ] ©1©
f ® p ?
PH *® 9_
®
~
®f|| |L=j';-JH ® ® ®jH
•p I i jgi
I O Adjustment method
(1) Set the measure scope © to the reference position.
(2) Temporarily fix a tool to the tool holder and attach the tool holder to the tool presetter.
(3) Move the measure scope © to the position where the edge position of the tool is adjusted
in the longitudinal direction. When the single sleeve holder is used, adjust the edge posi¬
tion in the current position (reference position). When the triple sleeve holder is used,
move the measure scope © to the position shown in the next drawing.
The center position of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer @ at this time is the
center position of the guide bushing at YO.O and BO.O (absolute coordinates).
(4) Adjust the dial d) by looking into the measure scope © and focus the measure scope ©
on the edge of the tool.
(5) Adjust the tool in the direction of the diameter (vertical direction). Look into the measure
scope ®, set the tool edge to the center of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer ® as
shown in the drawing, and fix the tool to the tool holder.
(6) When the wedge-free type tool holder is used, adjust the center height of a tool (in the
longitudinal direction). Set the tool edge to the center of the cross hairs of the eyepiece
micrometer © as shown in the drawing by looking into the measure scope ©.
(7) When the wedge type tool holder is used, by measuring the shift amount of the tool edge
from the center of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer @ in the longitudinal direc¬
tion, the shift amount of the center height direction of the tool from the center of the guide
bushing can be confirmed. In the state of (5), press the ZERO/ABS button © short (for
less than 1 second), display INC on the LCD display ©, adjust the dial (2) by looking into
the measure scope ©, and set the tool edge to the center of the cross hairs of the eyepiece
micrometer @. The INC coordinate value at this time is the shift amount of the tool in the
center height direciton from the center of the guide bushing.
10-52
i 1
ABS-24 - 0
24 30
1
ABS3 . 0
ABS3Q 0
ABS-3. 0
ABS-30 . 0
30
a 24 a
ABS24 . 0 !
rq 4 ft tn T"
tn !
!
o
M
© © © g (9) ® :
CVI
M
o o o o o o
©J n © ©; ©
YO . 0 YO . 0
BO. 0 BO. 0
ABSO . 0
r
If:
f ro
ro
[T\ S
EiCO O 3.
YO. 0
||
I BO . 0
Adjustment and measurement of shift amount of toot edge in longitudinal direction

f
• Applicable tool unit:
.....
O Applicable tool unit and attaching position
Same as the previous section
• Tool unit attaching position: A-3
1
f.
©©ÿ ®
o.a OtD- a®
<§>
Col
$ iS la
I as ir
l° ;
« @ @ ® @
• • ri
?
I ife im JL ® ® ®
I
® 3 Et i
I
|
©
10-53
:Y
f. '
)
O Adjustment method
I
(2) When measuring the tool holder for main machining, move the measure scope © to the
position of ABS -25.0. The center position of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer
© at this time is the reference longitudinal position (position of 2mm from the end face of
the guide bushing in the +Z1 direction) of the tool edge at EO.O (machine coordinate).
l|
When measuring the back machining tool holder, move the measure scope © to the posi¬
tion of ABS 134.0. The center position of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer @ at
this time is the reference longitudinal position (position of 159mm from the end face of
i
the sub-spindle in the +Z2 direction at Z0.0) of the tool edge at EO.O (machine coordinate).
:
(3) Press the ZERO/ABS button © short (for less than 1 second) and display INC on the LCD
display ©.
; (4) Attach the tool holder to the tool presetter.
: (5) Adjust the dial (9) by looking into the measure scope © and focus the measure scope ©
! 27
.25. ABS- 25 . 0
/ INCO.O
-M
C
[ 42ji -02|
Y0 . 0
EO . O
320
161 159
Z, 159
1 34
I
s 1PT ABS 1 34 . 0
I NCO . 0 Ml
! 3 ZO . 0
[
421-Q3
YO . 0
I EO O•
10-54
(6) Measure the shift amount of the tool in the longitudinal direction. (Wedge longitudinally
adjustable type tool holder excluded)
Si
Adjust the dial (D by looking into the measure scope © and set the tool edge to the center
of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer @ as shown in the drawing. The INC coor¬
11
:> '
dinate value at this time is the shift amount of the tool edge from the reference longitudinal
£ position.
I (7) When the wedge longitudinally adjustable type tool holder is used, adjust the shift amount
of the tool edge in the longitudinal direction. :
• Move the measure scope © in the longitudinal direction until the necessary shift
amount is displayed on the LCD display © as an INC coordinate value.
•Set the tool edge to the center of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer @ as shown :
I in the drawing by looking into the measure scope ©. :
Edge position adjustment of front or back machining tooi in longitudinal direction
(When the edge of a back machining tool is at a distance of less than 197mm from the end face of
the guide bushing)
Name Machine No. Attaching position
Triple sleeve holder for main and back 421-11 :
Triple sleeve holder for main and back 421-12
Single sleeve holder 221-10
Single sleeve holder for deep drilling 221-11
Double sleeve holder 221-12 A-3
Center adjustable single sleeve holder 221-14
Single sleeve holder for backworking 221-16
Front drilling unit ER11 221-52
Front tapping unit ERi 1 221-53 :
Counterface drilling unit ERI 1 1 221-56
<0 Adjustment method

(2) When measuring the front machining tool unit, move the measure scope © to the position
of ABS -25.0. The center position of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer @ at this :
time is the reference longitudinal position (position of 2mm from the end face of the guide li
bushing in the +Z1 direction) of the tool edge at EO.O (machine coordinate).
When measuring the back machining tool unit, move the measure scope © to the position
of ABS 134.0. The center position of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer ® at this
time is the reference longitudinal position (position of 123mm from the end face of the
sub-spindle in the +Z2 direction at Z0.0) of the tool edge at EO.O (machine coordinate).
:
i
display ©.
(4) Attach the tool unit to the tool presetter.
10-55
.
J
ft
1
>
:
!
(5) Adjust the dial © by looking into
the measure scope © and catch an
image of the tool edge.
cj 00£>
-tei
«»[
(6) Adjust the dial (D by looking into
the measure scope © and focus the
I*
measure scope © on the edge of the
€?
(7)
tool.
Adjust the shift amount of the tool
—
©n®
cr1
rzuTf
]
¥ i°
edge in the longitudinal direction. @ ® @ @
* Move the measure scope © in 3 © © ® ©
the longitudinal direction until

the necessary shift amount is dis¬
j ®p a
i played on the LCD display © as
an INC coordinate value.
•Set the tool edge to the center of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer @ as shown
in the drawing by looking into the measure scope ©.
320
197 123
2 max. 1 95
25. 170
75 50 70
ABS-25. 0 ABS170. 0
e
INCQ . O INCO . 0
nt
-H
L4L
20.0
I 421-11 EO. 0
CTfo! *
z
1
z
2
: 1 x
I|f
10-56
I:-r
Edge position adjustment of front machining tool in longitudinal direction
0“ Applicable tool unit and attaching position
Triple sleeve holder for main and back 421-11 '
D-9
;
O Adjustment method
(2) Move the measure scope © to the position of ABS 145.0. The center position of the cross
hairs of the eyepiece micrometer © at this time is the reference longitudinal position
I
(position of 2mm from the end face of the guide bushing in the +Z1 direction) of the tool
edge at EO.O (machine coordinate). l
(3) Press the ZERO/ABS button @ short (for less than 1 second) and display INC on the LCD \
display ©. :
170
:
: zz
i
@1® & Y/.
® 3
zZz
© ®
: :c
®
SSa) ® p i
i
(5) Adjust the dial © by looking into the measure scope © and catch an image of the tool
edge.
(6) Adjust the dial (D by looking into the measure scope © and focus the measure scope ©
I
on the edge of the tool. :
1 (7) Adjust the shift amount of the tool edge in the longitudinal direction.
I • Move the measure scope © in the longitudinal direction until the necessary shift amount ;
is displayed on the LCD display © as an INC coordinate value. ;

• Set the tool edge to the center of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer ® as shown in
1 the drawing by looking into the measure scope ©.
1 10-57
: l
i
;
:
i
1:
170
1 45 .25.
ABS145 0
I NCO . O
ABSO 0
- 63 3ÿ
if, -€Egf-
11 C --
Cl
LM EO . 0
i Edge position adjustment of back machining tool in longitudinal direction

I Triple sleeve holder for main and back 421-12 D-S
Single sleeve holder for backworking 221-16
II
O Adjustment method
(2) Move the measure scope © to the position of ABS -10.0. The center position of the cross
hairs of the eyepiece micrometer © at this time is the reference longitudinal position
(position of 113mm from the end face of the sub-spindle in the +Z2 direction at Z0.0) of
the tool edge at EO.O (machine coordinate).
display©.
i
1 70
H® o
_c2i . £, © ®r
(33)©
i®
=Eiÿ zZ%
¥>
7
i9 D
1
zZz
0 sfis ©
9
©
©
©
©
I
© D
i ffl
10-58
(
I
i:
edge.
(6) Adjust the dial (D by looking into the measure scope © and focus the measure scope ©
(7) Adjust the shift amount of the tool edge in the longitudinal direction.
* Move the measure scope © in the longitudinal direction until the necessary shift
amount is displayed on the LCD display © as an INC coordinate value.
* Set the tool edge to the center of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer @ as shown
-
:
, _ 320 _ i
:
:
1 13 207 :
max.205 *2
10, 170
80 50 75 :
ABS- 10.0
INCO- 0 '
hs l
FT"©
"
-H—B ABSO . 0 = Q __ I
;
ZO . 0 L)d EO. 0 :
Center adjustment of front machining too! and cross machining tool
<C> Applicable tool unit and attaching position :

Center adjustable single sleeve holder 221-14
Off-center cross drilling unit ER11 221-57 A-4 i
Off-center cross tapping unit ER11 221-59
:
:
<0 Adjustment method
(2) Attach the tool unit to the tool presetter. :
edge.
(4) Adjust the dial (9) by looking into the measure scope © and focus the measure scope ©
(5) Adjust the center height of the tool unit.
Set the tool center to the center of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer © as shown
I
I 10-59 i
:
?!
I
:S!
i 1
:
i
i
i
•
i
fti| !
m
t
l
;
:
j
v. :
V
© ©
-
I
;
C© O.© 0
®
J?!
L
® M© ft
O Hr I
I
t : r>
1 © 0| © ©|
© 0
04**®#-r4j|-Vpÿ ©
0 @ l@j
XT . QT-*
I ! © •p tJ O
®
p 111
$ >W "o wT o
5E o i& o o~ @I
I © o I .&
0i 0
if s *
®
©[
*II o ©i
©i
0 0® o ©5
@ 0
ss
® D
1 I 8 ! J
p
I
I
V o I
m •:
:
:
/T
T
i ABSO.O ABSO.O
i / I
[ ES
i
®T®
i
SB
I .
I
ft
.! J
_z V
!
;
:
i
-
\
I I YO . 0 Y70 . 0
\ ! BO. 0 BO . 0
I .; ;
j
11 i
I 1i
1 i
I
i
1 !•:
A
i
1
i
< Vz
I! Z |li
ft
ft :
h !:
ft 1
I ft
IfN
ft
10-60
It I
I . I:s
Adjustment of ejection length of cross machining tool
2-spindle cross drilling unit ER16 421-51
High speed 2-spindle cross drilling unit ER11 421-52
Cross drilling unit ER16 221-50
C-6 or C-7
Cross tapping unit ERi 1 221-51
Off-center cross drilling unit ERI 1 221-57
Off-center cross tapping unit ERI 1 221-59
7
O Adjustment method
(1) Set the measure scope © to the refer¬
ence position. The center position of
the cross hairs of the eyepiece mi¬
crometer © at this time is the center
©I i©
©
position of the guide bushing at YO.O

(absolute coordinate).
(2) Attach the tool unit to the tool ~cr
presetter.
(3) Adjust the dial © by looking into the
measure scope © and catch an image
of the tool edge.
:a ®j
©
©
®
©
(4) Adjust the dial (D by looking into the Ht ® b i
measure scope © and focus the mea¬

sure scope © on the edge of the tool.
(5) Adjust the ejection length of the tool.
* Move the measure scope © in the longitudinal direction until the necessary ejection
length is displayed on the LCD display © as an ABS coordinate value.

•Set the tool edge to the center of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer © as shown
i _ max . 1 24_ I
80 44
ABSO-O max .25 ABS44-0
H
-Y 2
1
z
YO . 0
f 0-61 i
|8
i
Confirmation of tool position of slotting unit
if
Slotting unit 50B 421-53
C-7
Slotting unit 50A 421-54
O Confirmation method
ence position.
;
(2) Move the measure scope © to the po¬
I
sition of ABS 13.0. The center position
I®
of the cross hairs of the eyepiece mi¬
|
crometer © at this time is the center .©
position of the guide bushing at Y26.0
(absolute coordinate). ¥>
5
(3) Press the ZERO/ ABS button © short ® D
1
(4)
(for less than 1 second) and display
INC on the LCD display ©.
Attach the tool unit to the tool
presetter.
n OJ
® 5
®
®
& ®
®
i (5) Adjust the dial (D by looking into the

measure scope © and catch an image
of the tool edge.
I (6) Adjust the dial (D by looking into the measure scope © and focus the measure scope ©
on the edge of the tool. t
(7) Adjust the dial (2) by looking into the measure scope © and set the tool center to the center
of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer @ as shown in the drawing.
(8) The numerical value displayed on the LCD display © as an INC coordinate value is the
distance from the center position of the guide bushing to the tool center at Y26.0 (absolute
j
coordinate).
Y26 . 0
\ ill
'
I
.
I
4 <:
i ABS 13.0
INCO.O
13ÿ
2z
93
f
10-62
it
|;
a Adjustment and confirmation of tool position of side milling unit and slotting unit
:
Ji
Side milling unit for BC collet 221-62
Slotting unit SOB 221-63
Slotting unit 50A 221-63H
Adjustable side milling unit ER11 221-64 A-1
Adjustable slotting unit 50B 221-65
Adjustable slotting unit 50A 223-65H : |
Side milling unit ER11 221-66
O Adjustment method
ence position. The center position of
the cross hairs of the eyepiece mi¬ <» Q.ia
crometer © at this time is the center
® je>!
m
I®
1
position of the guide bushing at YO.O
i - -0-|-©C
(absolute coordinate) and BO.O (ma¬ :
chine coordinate).
(2) Attach the tool unit to the tool @ 3
presetter.
®
(3) • Adjust the dial (D by looking into the ® ®
I measure scope © and catch an image
[6]
8
© ® @
!
g§
(4)
of the tool edge.
Adjust the dial (D by looking into the
® 3
i ;
measure scope © and focus the mea¬

1 (5)
sure scope © on the edge of the tool.
Adjust the tool position. (Side milling unit, adjustable slotting unit)
v
i
• Move the measure scope © in the longitudinal direction until the necessary tool posi¬
tion is displayed on the LCD display © as an ABS coordinate value.
•Set the tool edge (tool center) to the center of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer
© as shown in the drawing by looking into the measure scope ©. ;
(6) Measure the tool position. (Slotting unit)
* Adjust the dial (D by looking into the measure scope © and set the tool center to the
center of the cross hairs of the eyepiece micrometer @ as shown in the drawing.
• The numerical value displayed on the LCD display © as an ABS coordinate value is the
distance from the center position of the guide bushing to the tool center at BO.O (abso¬
lute coordinate).
t
;
I
10-63
r
I
1
|
$
I
!/
; s
i
I ?
m- 't
s :
I
.1 I
if :!
X i!
'
: 1
i
.! ABSO . 0 ABSO . 0
i.
<ÿ
#151
i
$ 7*
'
\
if
M
1 3
0
I
i!
"X
l ::
YO - 0 YO . 0
I BO . 0 BO . 0
:!
1 '
1
/
:} A
7
V/ iii
//
A
m
v?-
ill
I 4‘ X$'
//
W y
sr;i /'
;
Is
t
; //
YV ,
t
:
:
!,l
I:s
no
i
n
,
; I:
amu
\ ! I:
i: I
1
in i
iI i i
R'v
.1
;
(
i
1S
3
i 1: S
If:
1 F :: I
Si .
; 10-64 I
3 I!!ÿ
l •
#
: i !
11. Troubleshooting
11-1 Procedure for locating trouble
(1) What are the machine type, machine serial number (plate No.), and CNC unit name?
(2) What is the mode?
(HEAD1 |J, SIMUL Q, HEAD2 g, EDIT g, MEMORY (5), MDI Q, ;
MACRO g, JOG Q STEP g, REFERENCE POINT RETURN cf '
(3) In which operation dose the trouble occur?

(4) Are the alarm number and message displayed?
(5) What are the absolute position of each axis and the machine position when the trouble
occurs?
(6) What is the position if there is a positioning error?
(7) How many times has the trouble occurred in the past? What is the frequency?
(8) In the case of automatic operation, what is the program in the area of stoppage?
(9) Are the main spindle and sub-spindle rotating?
(10) Is the automatic operation START fT| or FEED HOLD |foj| button on?
Check the above items and then contact your distributor.
11-1
!
I
;;
I
.
i;
;
-
11-2 DGN check method

Display the DGN check screen (PMC SIGNAL STATUS screen) according to the following proce¬
dure.
(1) Press the system key jfyjj.
(2) Press the soft key [PMC].
: (3) Press the soft key [PMCDGN].
:
(4) Press the soft key [STATUS].
; (5) Input the address number and press the soft key [SEARCH].
=MC SIGNAL STATUS MONIT RUN

ADDRESS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
30000 0 0 0 T 1 1 0
I 30001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
/
;
30002 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
9
30003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
30004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TFIN MFIN
30005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
: ovc
30006 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0
ST
30007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
:
! SEARCH
|
For further details, refer to Section 11.6, “Self diagnosis function table” and the operator's I:
manual issued by the CNC manufacturer (FANUC).
1
m
11-2
I
Y V
liv
I 11~3 Alarm check method

Display of alarm screen
For detailed alarms, refer to Section 11.7, “Alarm list” and the operator's manual issued by the CNC
manufacturer (FANUC).
Press the message key jfT||
to display the ALARM MESSAGE screen.
I! ACTUAL POSITION
[ABSOLUTE 3
OOOOO NOOOOO
TOOOO
,
X o . ooo TOOOO
j;
Y o . ooo
z ‘ o - ooo ALAR1/ MESSAGE
HEAD1
A o . ooo :
fi
B o . ooo
si E o . ooo HEAD2
i
Z2 o . ooo
[ACTUAL SPEED 3F1 0 MM/MIN
St 0 RPM ;
:
F2 0 MM/MIN S 0 TOOOC
S2 0 RPM MDI »***
*** »** 00:00:00 HEAD1
ABS REL ALL ALARM MSG HISTRY
Press the soft key [MSG] to display the OPERATOR MESSAGE screen.
ACTUAL POSITION
OOOOO NOOOOO
[ABSOLUTE 3
TOOOO
sill X O', ooo TOOOO
Y o . ooo ;
I
z 1 o . ooo OPERATOR MESSAGE
A o . ooo
I
B o . ooo
i
E o . ooo I
Z2 o . ooo
II [ACTUAL SPEED 3F1
S1
F2
0
0
0
MM/MIN
RPM
MM/MIN S 0 TOOOC
S2 0 RPM **** *** *** 00:00:00 HEAD1
ABS REL ALARM MSG HISTRY
1
ALL
:
i.
11-3
;
j
:
i
!
1;
;
!
I :
{ |
I
1t: : !
;
1 of alarm history screen
(1) Press the message key jfT)|.
I (2) Press the soft key [HISTORY] to display the ALARM HISTORY screen.
j j j
(3) Use the page key pg> or to display another screen of alarm history.
j ACTUAL POSITION
OOOOO NOOOOO
X
[ABSOLUTE 3
o . ooo TOOOO I
o . ooo TOOOO
Y
11
z, o . ooo ALARM HISTORY
PAGE :
i A o . ooo 96/05/21 11:16:28

100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE
B o . ooo
E o . ooo
: z2 o . ooo
[ACTUAL SPEED 3F1 0 fvM/MIN
St 0 RFM
F2 0 K/M/MIN S 0 T000C
S2 0 RPM MDI **** 00:00:00 HEAD1
ABS REL ALL ALARM MSG HISTRY (OPRT 3 +
j:
The alarm history records up to 25 alarms occurring in the CNC. When the occurrence number
exceeds 25, data is automatically erased in the occurrence order.
I
To erase all the alarm history: |
* Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
® Press the soft key [CLEAR]. The alarm history will be erased.
11-4
11-4 Parameter check method
(1) Press the system key j[~5~)j- !;ÿ
(2) Press the soft key [PARAM] to display the PARAMETER (SETTING) screen.
(3) Refer to the STAR’S “Parameter list” supplied with the machine.
To display the parameters on the HEAD 1 side, press the HEAD1 key or SIMUL key fgf,]|
of MODEL To display the parameters on the HEAD2 side, press the HEAD2 key For jjggj. j I
further details, refer to the operator's manual issued by the CNC manufacturer (FANUC).
ACTUAL POSITION
(ABSOLUTE 3
OOOOO NOOOOO ;
TOOOO
I
X o . ooo TOOOO
Y O . ooo
z, o . ooo PARAMETER (SETTING 3
A o . ooo 0000
00
SEQ
0,
INI ISO TVC
00000
B o . ooo 0001
0000000.0
FCV
E O - ooo 0002
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
z2 o . ooo
(ACTUAL SPEED 3F1 0 IvM/MIN
S1 0 RFM
F2 0 fvM/MIN >_ S 0 T000C
S2 0 RPM MO 3 00:00:00 HEAD1
ABS REL ALL PARAM DGNOS PMC SYSTEM (OPRT3 +
i* i
;
ill
! l:
1
11-5
:
i 1
'
:
I::
V
;[
II
:
i
!
I
Press the system key |{j>]j —

> [PMC] -» [PMC PRM] > [TIMER],
The PMC PRM [TIMER] screen will be displayed.
—
i;
j PMC PRM [TIMER } MON IT RUN

:
NO. ADDRESS DATA NO. ADDRESS DATA NO. ADDRESS DATA
-:
01
02
TOO
T02
OOOOOOO
OOOOOOO
16
17
T30
T32
0000000
0000000
31
32
T60
T62
0000000
0000000
03 T04 OOOOOOO 18 T34 0000000 33 T64 0000000
:
; 04 T06 OOOOOOO 19 T36 0000000 34 T66 0000000
05 T08 OOOOOOO 20 T38 0000000 35 T68 0000000
06 T10 OOOOOOO 21 T4Q 0000000 36 T70 0000000
07 T12 OOOOOOO 22 T42 0000000 37 T72 0000000
08 T14 OOOOOOO 23 T44 0000000 38 T74 0000000
09 T16 OOOOOOO 24 T46 0000000 39 T76 0000000
10 T18 OOOOOOO 25 T48 0000000 40 T78 OOOOOOO
; 11 T20 OOOOOOO 26 T50 QOOOOQO
•5 12 T22 OOOOOOO 27 T52 0000000
13 T24 OOOOOOO 28 T54 0000000
i
14 T26 OOOOOOO 29 T56 0000000
15 T28 OOOOOOO 30 T58 0000000
I-.
it.
OOUNTR KEEPRL DATA SETING !
TIMER
if
f.
v
Press the system key (3] -> [PMC] -» [PMC PRM] -> [KEEP RELAY].
The PMC PRM [KEEP RELAY] screen will be displayed.
For detailed keep relay contents, see Section 11.8, “Keep relay table”.
PRM [KEEP RELAY) M0N1T RUN
ADDRESS DATA ADDRESS DATA

KOO 00000000 K15 00000000
I K01
K02
K03
00000000
00000000
00000000
K16
K17
K18
00000000
00000000
00000000
K04 00000000 K19 00000000
K05 00000000
K06 00000000
<07 00000000 i
<08 00000000
<09 00000000
<10 00000000
<1 1 00000000 ij
<12 00000000
K13 00000000 |i
: gg
! K 14 00000000
•4
1
| T ] IvER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA SETING
:
:
I
I T.'
a;
;s
2
11-6 a
:1S
I f
I
The PMC DATA TBL CONTROL screen will be displayed.

—
Press the system key (j>) —» [PMC] —>[PMC PRM] »[DATA]. ;
=MC DATA TBL CONTROL

GROUP TABLE COUNT = 11
NO. ADDRESS PARAMETER TYPE NO. OF DATA NO. ADDRESS PARAMETER TYPE NO. OF DATA
001 DOOOO 00000000 0 000 016 1
002 D001Q 00000000 0 000 017
003 D0078 00000000 0 000 018
f!
004 D0110
005 DO122
006 D0400
00000000
00000000
00000000
0
0
0
000
000
000
019
020
021
I
;
«I
007 D0418 00000000 0 000 022 . II
008 D0420 00000000 0 000 023
009 D0422 00000000 0 000 024
010 D0622 00000000 0 000 025 : j
011 D1680 00000000 0 000 026
012 027
013 028
014 029
015 030
G. DATA G. COST NO-SRH INI!
11“5 Parameter change method

See Section 7.23 explaining the parameter change method in this manual.
im f
if
Im
s
£
1
r-'.; ;
l
m
Si
I '
!
:
i
i
i
I
.3
m
:
I.T:t: 1
(
f
!
m '
11-7
:
1
f
| :
:
:
,
i
i
!
I
I l
i
!
I: 5
f
I!
r i
I
.!
11-6 Seif diagnosis function (DGN) table

!
Power circuit sequence-*- Machine
:
(Diagnosis of division A is possible only with CNC power. Perform division B diagnosis after ma¬
{ i:
1 chine ready status.)
No. Name Signal name DGN No. Bit Check method Division \
; I
1 Main spindle clamp PINON Y1G00 0 1 with M06, 0 with M07 on HEAD1 in MDI B
mode
2 Separator advance SEP Y1Q00 1 1 with M17, 0 with M18 on HEAD2 in MDI B
mode
3 Sub-spindie clamp PINSON Y1000 2 1 with G00C0 or 0 with M07 on HEAD2 in

MDI .mode
B
t
4 Air blow AIRBLW YIOOO 3 ! with M14, 0 with M15 on HEAD2 in MDI B
mode
V'i'i' :
5 Broken cut-off tool detect CUTDET Y1000 4 One shot 1 with T100 and M27 on HEAD1 in B
MDI mode
6 Buzzer PATBUZ Y1000 5 1 with red or yellow iarnp lit on when rotating B
beacon with buzzer is installed
f
7 Turret clamp TCL Y1000 6 0—-1—0 when turret indexing is completed B 1
8 Turret unclamp TUCL Y1000 7 0— I—0 when turret indexing is started B

:
9 Lubrication oil motor LUBON YlOQi 0 1 during auto, operation B
10 Coolant unit 0.8MPa HPCOL Y10Q1 1 1 with M125, 0 with M126 on HEAD1 in MDI B :
coolant motor mode
11 Servo brake BRAKE Y1001 3 1 with machine ready state B

;
:
12 Coolant motor COL Y1001. 6 I with M25, 0 with M26 on HEAD1 in MDI B
mode
; :
i 13 Chip conveyor ON/OFF CHIP2 Y10Q1 7 1 with M64, 0 with M65 on HEAD1 in MDI B
mode (keep relay K06-bit0=0)
I 14 Main collet close cc Y1002 0 1—0 with M10 on HEAD1 in MDI mode B i,
;
15 Main collet open CUC Y1002 1 1 with Ml 1 on HEAD! in MDI mode B !
1
16 Sub collet close BCC Y1002 2 1-0 with M10 on HEAD2 in MDI mode B
i
17 Sub collet open BCUC Y1002 3 ! with Ml 1 on HEAD2 in MDI mode B ill
1
: 18 Gripping unit close GRIP Y3002 4 1 with Ml 2 on HEAD1 in MDI mode B
; sIS
19 DO spare 4 DOR4 Y1002 5 1 with Ml 56, 0 with Ml 57 on HEAD1 in MDI B
i mode
; 1
u
s
: 11-8
1
!
1.
I
No. Name Signal name DGN No. Bit Check method Division
j : 1
20 DO spare 5 DOR5 Y1002 6 1 with M158, 0 with M159 on HEAD1 in MDI B
i
mode i. I:
1
21 Air purge AIRVER Y1002 7 ! with hydraulic motor ON B
i !1
22 MOO signal MOO Y1003 0 1 with MOO on HEAD I in MDI mode B
About 1 sec. after turned to 0 If
II
23 Feed torque stop signal TORQUE Y1003 3 1 with M62, 0 with M63 in HEAD I in MDI B \\
mode
24 Main collet close/open signal CCSGN Y1003 4 0 with M10 on HEAD1 in MDI mode B ;
I
I :
I
I 11
i!
If
i
ff m>
i
I :I
;
I Y
f
1!
s
%
1
1
:
:
!
; 1I
I i I
l1
t1
11-9
1
,f
\
I
I
.
: aii
I
Ip I
}
V
I
f :
I !;•
I:
r;
v
;
:
;
&
No. Name Signa! name DGN No. Bit Check method Division
! ] 25 DO spare 1 DOR 5 Y3003 5 1 with MI 50, 0 with Mi 51 on HEAD! in MDI B

i
mode
26 DO spare 2 DOR 2 Y3003 6 1 with Ml 52, 0 with Ml 53 on HEAD] in MDI B

:
mode
I
: 27 DO spare 3 DOR 3 Y1003 7 1 with M 3 54, 0 with M 1 55 on HEAD! in MDI B
mode
i
i 28 DO spare 6 DOR 6 Y1O04 0 I with Ml 60, 0 with M16! on HEAD! in MDI B

mode
'if:
i
I: 29 Parts conveyor motor WCON Y1004 1 1 with M84, 0 with M85 on HEAD2 in MDI
mode
B
:
30 Main breaker trip AUTOFF Y1004 2 1 about 5 sec. after AUTO POWER OFF key is A
t; ONandPATRorPATYis 1
31 Work lamp ON WLON Y1004 3 1 with work lamp key ON A
32 Emergency stop *AEMG Y1004 4 0 with keep relay K00-bit3=l when all barstock B
is out in barfeeder
33 Rotating beacon (Red) PATR Y1Q04 5 1 with emergency stop state A
34 Rotating beacon (Yellow) PATY Y1004 6 1 with count up of counter B

I
35 Rotating beacon (Green) PATG YI004 7 1 for 10 sec. with G04UI0.0 on HEAD1 in MDI B
mode
t I
36 Y power-driven tool spindle RM03 Y3005 0 A 1 2-bit binary output with respect to the maxi¬ B
I s
speed signal mum speed with the M46 (M47) SDDDO
37 RM02 Y1005 1 command with power-driven tool effective key B
ON on HEAD! in MDI mode.
38 RM03 Y1005 2 All signal become 0 with M48. B
39 RM04 Y1005 3 B
i 40 RM05 Y1005 4 B
!
41 RM06 Y1005 5 B
: 42 RM07 Y10O5 6 B
:
43 RM08 Y1005 7 B
i
44 RM09 Y1006 0 B
| 45 RM10 Y1006 1 B
46 RM11 Y1006 2 B
:
:
47 RM12 Y1006 3 B
i
\
' 11-10
If i
I
ii
48 Power-driven tool 2 forward RMCW Y1006 4 1 with M46 S500 and power-driven tool effec¬ B
rotation tive key ON on HEAD1 in MDI mode
49 Power-driven tool 2 reverse RMCCW Y1006 5 1 with M47 S500 and power-driven tool effec¬ B |
;?
rotation tive key ON on HEAD! in MDI mode tl
50 Power-driven tool 2 reset RMRST Y1006 6 1 by pressing reset key on CNC panel when in¬ B
!
verter 2 is abnormal
: Si
:
11
I
:
I
:
'
I
1?
; !
I
I .
i
i
?;
| i
I
i
:
1
I .
;
|
ij
11-11
'
..I.. s
;
:-i i 'ÿ
1
mm It
1 15?
||
li:
I If
i5
51
a1
1
«
1 I
1i \
t
:•
|
;
1
J,:
I Power circuit sequenceÿ Operation panel

chine ready status.)
I:
:
5J HEAD I side auto, operation HEAD1L Y051 0 1 by selecting HEAD! B

selection
52 Simul. auto, operation selec- SIMULL Y051 I 1 by selecting SIMUL B

tion
53 HEAD2 side auto, operation HEAD2L Y051 2 1 by selecting HEAD2 B

1 selection
II
: 54 Reference point return mode ZRNL Y051 3 1 by selecting reference point return mode A
1 55 Single block key SBKL Y051 4 1 by selecting single block A

I
8 56 Z2-axis ref. point return
completion
Z2L Y051 5 1 at Z2-axis ref. point return completion B
if.
57 Main spindle OFF key SPOFL Y051 7 1 with main spindle OFF A
1
I :i
58 Work lamp key WLAMPL Y052 0 1 by selecting work lamp key A
*is
I I 59 Air cut key A1RCTL Y052 1 1 and 0 flashing alternately by selecting air cut A
key
:
||
6G EDIT mode EDITL Y052 2 1 by selecting EDIT mode A
i 1
it 61 MEMORY mode MEML Y052 3 1 by selecting MEMORY mode A
62 MDI mode MDIL Y052 4 1 by selecting MDI mode A
!j il r 63 MACRO mode MACROL Y052 5 1 by selecting MACRO mode A

I
64 JOG mode JOGL Y052 6 1 by selecting JOG mode A *
I
65 STEP mode STEPL Y052 7 1 by selecting STEP mode A
1
II
4 66 CUT-OFF mode ACOFL Y053 0 1 by selecting cut-off mode key A a
i 67 Initial position key 1NIPSL Y053 1 3 by selecting initial position key A
1i
68 Zl-axis stroke check key Z1STL Y053 2 3 by selecting Zl-axis stroke check key A
69 AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF APOFFL Y053 3 1 by selecting AUTO POWER SHUT OFF key A
key
if
f
70 TORQUE LIMIT key TRQLML Y053 4 ) by selecting torque limit key A
!
:
71 OPTIONAL STOP key OPSL Y053 5 1 by selecting optional stop A !
{
'
1I
11-12
if
1
tpj£\
!
72 BLOCK SKIP key (HEAD I) BDTL Y053 6 1 by selecting block skip (HEAD1) A
i
73 ONE CYCLE key OCYL Y053 7 1 by selecting one cycle stop A
74 Zl-axis reference point return Z1L Y054 0 1 at Zl-axis ref. point return completion B
completion
75 X-axis reference point return XL Y054 2 1 at X-axis ref. point return completion B
completion !ÿ;
76 A-axis reference point return ALAMP Y054 3 1 at A-axis ref. point return completion B
1
]
completion
i:
77 Y-axis reference point return YL Y054 4 1 at Y-axis ref. point return completion B
completion
78 B-axis reference point return BL Y054 5 l at B-axis ref. point return completion B
completion
i 79 E-axis reference point return EL Y054 6 1 at E-axis ref. point return completion B i
completion
I
1
80 Auto, operation start lamp CL Y055 0 1 during auto, operation B
81 Auto, operation stop lamp HL Y055 1 1 during auto, operation stop B
82 Barstock absence lamp WELMP Y055 2 1 by pressing barstock absence switch A
83 Operation ready completion MRDYON Y055 3 I with hydraulic motor ON B

S
84 Turret control key TCONL Y056 1 1 by selecting turret control key A I:

85 Block skip key (HEAD2) BDTSL Y056 2 1 by selecting block skip (HEAD2) A
86 Sub collet open key BCUCL Y056 3 1 with sub collet open B
87 Sub collet close key BCCL Y056 4 1 with sub collet close B
88 Sub spindle OFF key BSPOFL Y056 5 1 with sub-spindle OFF A

$
I I 89 Sub spindle ON key BSPONL Y056 6 1 during sub-spindle rotation B
IIII! 90 Main spindle ON key SPONL Y056 7 1 during main spindle rotation B
9! Power-driven tool stop key PTOFFL Y057 0 1 by selecting power-driven too! stop key A
!|
92 Power-driven tool effective PTAUTL Y057 1 1 by selecting power-driven tool effective key A
key
|
93 Turret retract key +YRL Y057 2 1 after retraction of turret by pressing turret re¬ B
| tract key
94 Turret advance key -YRL Y057 3 1 after advance of turret by pressing turret ad¬ B
$
vance key s
11-13
I m
11 |
Ili Is:
j-.;
If
t
i a
it
A
II 1
i?
«•i i
I
In -
1.1;s I
1
I
s ii
I
—
.
f i 'i
C
I
f No. Name Signal name DGN No. Bit Check method Division
i
v
I 95 Main collet open key CUCL Y057 6 i with main collet open B
I I
96 Main collet close key CCL Y057 7 i with main collet close I B ii
if
||
1
:
V : I'¬ l
l' 7
|
I' I |
is
:
! ?ÿlSi
;
7
li :
IiI
f
i
I;
1
1
j!
13
m
sj
;
7
7
} i;
»
i:i
1
1 i;
3 i
4;
V •
3
i
i.
III
I
3
PI
11-14
I
I I
Machine-** Power circuit sequence 1

| (Diagnosis of division A is possible only with CNC power. Perform division B diagnosis after ma¬
;
chine ready status.) 5
f.
No. Name Signal name DGN No. Bit Check method Division ?
i f
1 Frequency agreement signal IV2SAR XiOOO 0 1 when output frequency of Y power-driven B :
tool is near set frequency i

;
f 2 Inverter 2 alarm IV2ALM X1000 1 1 when inverter 2 is abnormal A
3 Inverter 2 operating signal IV2RUN X1000 2 0 during Y power-driven tool stop, 1 during ro¬ B I:
tation
.
4 Main collet dose CCF1N X1005 0 1 with main collet close A
5 Main spindle clamp PINFW X1005 1 1 with main spindle clamp B

1
6 Main spindle unclamp PINBW X1005 2 1 with main spindle unclamp A
? Broken cut-off tool detector CUTBWL X1005 3 1 when broken cut-off too! is at retract end B
1 retract end . !
8 Detection of broken cut-off CUTBRK X1005 4 1 when broken cut-off tool is at advanced end B f
tool
1
9 Turret clamp TCLAMP XI 005 6 1 with turret damp A §
f
10 Magnetic contactor function TACTCK X1005 7 0 with malfunction of magnetic contactor func¬ A
check tion (melting)
:
11 Sub collet dose BCCFIN X1006 0 1 with sub collet dose A
12 Sub-spindle damp P1NSFW X1006 1 1 with sub-spindle damp B

v
13 Sub-spindie unclamp PINSBW X1006 2 1 with sub-spindle unclamp A
;!
14 Detection of part ejection PEDET XI006 3 I with parts ejection state A
I
15 All barstock completion *BFNS XI 007 0 0 when all barstock in auto, barfeeder is com¬ A
1
pleted
16 Auto, barfeeder abnormal sig- *BFALM X1007 1 0 with abnormal signal of auto, barfeeder A
I
nal
37 Barstock feed out completion BFST X1G07 2 1 with barstock feed out completion of auto. A
barfeeder
18 Auto, barfeeder ready comple¬ *BFRDY X1Q07 3 0 when ready of auto, barfeeder is completed A
I1
m
tion signal
19 Barstock absence signal *WELS X1007 4 0 at no barstock A

I
t
I
11-15
11
s
? •(
;
!
i
:
jl
8
il
I!
1
'
ii
!
j
20 Fire extinguisher broken line *AFDIS XI 007 5 Normally 1 , 0 with broken line of sensor A
s '
: alarm signal
21 Separator advance SEPADV X!007 6 0 with separator advance, 1 with retract B
! 22 Separator retract SEPRET XI 007 7 0 with separator advance, 1 with retract A

1
23 Low coolant oil level detection *CFS XI 008 0 0 when coolant oil level is lowered A
24 Coolant ON FLOWON X1008 1 0-*l with coolant motor ON B
25 Low lubri. oil level detection 2 *LFS2 X1008 2 0 when lubricant (vactra) level is lowered A
m i 26 Spare input signal (M20 stop) M20DI XI 008 3 Normally 0, 1 with short circuit between "406" A
and "+24V” of line for terminal base XT782 f
if:
27 Emergency stop signal *ESP X1008 4 0 at emergency stop A
28 Door close confirmation DOORSW X10Q8 6 0 when anyone of doors for headstock, cutting A
room left or cutting room right is opened I
si
I
m
li
29 Operation ready completion MRDY X1008 7 1 with hydraulic motor ON B
30 Door interlock (headstock DORSW1 X1009 1 0 when door is closed, 1 when opened A
side)
31 Door interlock (cutting room DORSW2 XI 009 2 0 when door is closed, 1 when opened A
: : left) V
'
32 Door interlock (cutting room DORSW3 XI 009 3 0 when door is closed, 1 when opened A
right)
33 Chip conveyor motor abnor¬ CHPALM XI009 4 Normally 1, 0 at abnormal B

mal detection signal
:
!
I i
If .
i IMi
III
:
,!
1 }
I1
i 1 sW
i
f: L:
l:
Ii
!
I
i 11-16
i :i i
Operation panel-* Power circuit sequence
1
chine ready status.)
1
1 No.
34 Start button
Name Signai name DGN No. Bit
ST. M X047 0
Check method
1 with start button ON

Division
A
1
11 35 Feed hold button *SP. M X047 1 0 with feed hold button ON A

III
36 Coolant unit 0.8MPa ON/OFF HCLKEY X047 2 0 when ON/OFF switch of coolant unit O.SMPa A
switch is turned OFF
37 Coolant ON/OFF key switch COLKEY X047 3 1 when ON/OFF key switch of coolant is turned A
OFF
38 Machine ready button MRDY. M X047 4 1 by pressing machine ready button A

til
39 Door interlock key switch DORKEY XQ47 5 0 when door interlock key switch is set to (O) side A
40 Data input key KEY. M X047 6 1 when data input key is set to (I) side A
j
41 JOG feed/Feed rate override X048 0 Refer to 1). A t I

: 42 *JV2. M X048 1 m
43 *JV4. M X048 2
44 *JV8. M X048 3 i
;ÿ 1
45 Rapid feed override ROVI.M X048 4 Refer to 2). A 1
46 ROV2. M X048 5
!
47 HEAD1 auto, operation selec- HEAD1 X051 0 1 by pressing HEAD1 key A

tion i
48 Simul. auto, operation selec¬ SIMUL X051 1 1 by pressing SIMUL key A

tion
49 HEAD2 auto, operation selec¬ HEAD2 X051 2 1 by pressing HEAD2 key A

|1
tion •i:
50 Reference point return mode ZRN.M X051 3 1 by pressing ref. point return key A 1
il
51 Single block key SBK.M X051 4 1 by pressing single block key A :
52 -Z2 key -Z2.M X051 6 1 by pressing -Z2 key A r
53 Main spindle OFF key SPOFF X051 7 1 by pressing main spindle OFF key A I
54 Warning light key WL1GHT X052 0 1 by pressing warning light key A
55 Air cut key AIRCUT X052 1 1 by pressing air cut key A
11-17
:
I;
:
1
;
j;
IV §
'
;
j-
11
H 1
'
i
1I
r
.
IS
II!
II:
: No. Name Signal name DGN No. Bit Check method Division
56 EDIT mode EDIT X052 2 1 by pressing EDIT key A

i
:
57 MEMORY mode MEM. M X052 3 1 by pressing MEMORY key A
58 MDI mode MDI. M X052 4 1 by pressing MDI key

I A
59 MACRO mode MACRO X052 5 1 by pressing MACRO key A

6'
60 JOG mode JOG. M X052 6 1 by pressing JOG key A |
:I 61 STEP mode STEP X052 7 1 by pressing STEP key A 1.
62 CUT OFF key ACQFF X053 0 1 by pressing CUT OFF key A
1 63 Initial pos. key INIPQS X053 1 1 by pressing initial pos. key A

I
64 ZI -axis stroke check key Z1ST X053 2 1 by pressing Zl-axis stroke check key A
|
65 Auto, power supply shut off APQFF X053 3 1 by pressing auto, power supply shut off key A
§ key
i t
66 TORQUE limit key TRQLIM X053 4 1 by pressing torque limit key A
I 67 Optional stop key OPS X053 5 1 by pressing optional stop key A

jit
68 Block skip key (HEAD1) BDT. M XG53 6 1 by pressing block skip key (HEAD1) A
69 One cycle key OCY X053 7 1 by pressing one cycle key A
70 -Xkey -X. M X054 2 1 by pressing -X key A

i
71 +Akey +A.M X054 3 1 by pressing +A key A
72 +Ykey +Y. M X054 4 1 by pressing +Y key A

if I
73 +B key +B. M X054 5 1 by pressing +B key A i
if
74 +Ekey +E. M X054 6 I by pressing +E key A
75 -Ekey -E. M X054 7 1 by pressing -E key A
I I! 76 -Z1 key -Zl.M X055 0 1 by pressing -Z1 key A

III
j; 77 +Z1 key +Z1.M X055 1 1 by pressing +Z1 key A
|! 78 +X key +X. M X055 2 1 by pressing +X key A

i
79 -A key -A.M X055 3 1 by pressing -A key A
|
80 -Y key -Y.M X055 4 1 by pressing -Y key A
i
1 I 81 -B key -B.M X055 5 1 by pressing -B key A
82 +Z2 key +Z2.M X055

i 7 1 by pressing +Z2 key A
||
i 11-18
1
I
I
1
83 Turret control key TCON X056 1 1 by pressing turret control key A
84 Block skip key (HEAD2) BDTS. M X056 2 1 by pressing block skip key (HEAD2) A
|
K
85 Sub collet open key BCUC. M X056 3 1 by pressing sub collet open key A
1
86 Sub collet close key BCC.M X056 4 1 by pressing sub collet dose key A Is:
87 Sub-spindle OFF key BSPOFF X056 5 1 by pressing sub-spindle OFF key A

I
88 Sub-spindle ON key BSPON X056 6 1 by pressing sub-spindie ON key A
89 Main spindle ON key SPON X056 7 1 by pressing main spindle ON key A
90 Power tools OFF key PTOFF X057 0 1 by pressing power-driven tool OFF key A
S' f
91 Power tools AUTO key PTAUT X057 i 3 by pressing power-driven tool AUTO key A
n
92 Turret retract key +YR. M X057 2 1 by pressing turret retract key A
93 Turret advance key -YR.M X057 3 1 by pressing turret advance key A

I
94 Turret reverse rotation key YCCW X057 4 1 by pressing turret reverse rotation key A
J
m
95 Turret forward rotation key YCW X057 5 1 by pressing turret forward rotation key A :
'H
96 Main collet open key CUC. M X057 6 1 by pressing main collet open key A
97 Main collet close key CC.M X057 7 1 by pressing main collet close key A
!
%: ir
0,:
m
A
X:
H
1 11
11-19
i; ll
1 i
;!
i ii
:
'
?:
a
;
:
M :
M if $
1
11
.
if"' . s>.:o v.v
1
X'
:
!
I
i i
la
i
U
|
i ! wmi
i i)
Turning feed override (%) X048.3 X048.2 X048.1 X048.0

f 0 0 0 o o n
11 iS?r
10 0 0 0 1
11
1
s
20 0 0 1 1
il
30 0 0 1 0
40 0 1 1 0
i
t
50 o i i 1
I .
i 60 0 1 0 1
i
I 70 0 1 o 0
a
o o
I
i 80 1 l
90 i i o l 1
«
: 1.00 1 1 1 1
110 1 0
1
1 1
120 1 0 I 0
130 1 0 1 1 •
;
I
140 1 o o i
1
150 1 0 0 0
m 2)
i I Multiplier X048.5 X048.4
j
X 1 0 0
I ; .J I
l i'
X 5 0 i
J
*
X 25 1 1
xioo 1 0
il
i
i
ffl|
T
1
1 11-20
y
f!
11-7 Alarm table
No. Message Contents
1000 EMERGENCY STOP The emergency stop state was entered.
1001 MAIN SPINDLE SPEED DETECTION The main spindle speed exceeded the permissible fluctuation range
(rin G26 Pp Qq Rr Dd;). y
I
1002 BAR FEEDER ALARM There is an abnormality in the automatic barfeeder.
SI ;
i
:
i.-. 1003 MAIN SPINDLE ALARM There is an abnormality in the main spindle.
& 1004 POWER TOOLS INVERTER Y TRIP There is an abnormality in the Y power driven attachment Y motor
inverter.
1
I
y 1005 LACK OF COMMAND M05 The grip ON (Ml 2) command or damp ON (M06) was issued with¬
out issuing the main spindle stop command (M05).
; 1006 CUT-OFF TOOL BROKEN A broken cut-off tool was detected, or the broken cut-off tool detec¬ is
tor wire is disconnected.
1007 SQ252 SIC. IS SHORT-CIRCUITED •The broken cut-off too! detection signal is short circuited.
*
1010 SQ251 SIG. IS SHORT-CIRCUITED The broken cut-off tool detection retract end signal is,short circuited.; ;
*ÿ
SQ250 SIG. IS DISCONNECTED The main collet close confirmation signal wire is disconencted.
1011 When the main collet is closed, the proximity switch entered the
non-proximity state even though the open command was not issued. I:
iit f 1
1012 SQ250 SIG. IS SHORT-CIRCUITED The main collet close confirmation signal is short circuited.
1013 LACK OF COMMAND M13 ‘ The main spindle rotation was commanded while the grip was ON
and main collet was open.
m
V;
• When using the automatic barfeeder (keep relay K00-bit0=l), the I
START button was pressed without commanding M13 when
w?
alarm No. 1011 was displayed.
i!
1014 A AXIS JOG FEED
the START button was pressed.
—
After moving the A-axis by hand while T100 T800 was selected,
i
1015 B AXIS JOG FEED After moving the B-axis by hand while T11 AA-T18AA was se¬
lected, the START button was pressed.
$
gjj
l1 1016 MODE IS NOT MACRO Another mode was selected while executing a program in the macro I
mode.
y:;
1017 COOLANT FLOW ALARM The coolant flow has dropped below the specified value.
%
1020 PMC FUNCTION COMMAND ERROR A machine command error occurred in the sequence ladder. %
:
1022 MACHINE IS NOT READY The machine is not ready. Press the MACHINE READY button. f
:
i 1023 MAIN M-FIN SIGNAL ALARM The HEAD1 side M code command complete signal has not been
returned, or an invalid M code was commanded.
IF
1024 T100 IS NOT SELECTED Broken cut-off tool detection (M27) was issued when T100 was not
selected.
;
1025 CYCLE TIME OVER After M20 was commanded, one cycle was not completed even after
the time set in timers 1 to 3 passed.
i
11-21
X
t:
j|
I
! Ii.
i
1:
h
f ft
y
!
t :
II
I:
;f :
I
I i
§ :
:
1 ;]
V
II
s I
% l
I 4u,
? • •• H
:!:.
;
m
: No. Message Contents l.i
I 13
!
i The one cycle stop conditions were reached.

1026 M20 STOP i
1
1027 LACK OF COMMAND M09 The main spindle rotation command was issued while the Cs mode
was ON, or MS2 was commanded in the SIMUL mode. I1
1030 MAGNETIC CONTACTOR ERROR One of the magnetic contactors (KM001, KM202 to KM2Q5) cannot
: function due to a fusion, etc. i
1031 SYNCHRO MODE ALARM M142 was issued in the M140 mode, or M140 was issued in the
Ml 42 mode.
1
The HEAD1 and HEAD2 waiting M codes differ.
I1
1032 WAITING M-CODE MISMATCH
I
1033 CHIP CONVEYOR ALARM There is an abnormality in chip conveyor. I ;
1?
1034 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER Soft OT is cancelled. Turn OFF CNC power once.
1040 EXECUTE X-AXIS ZERO RETURN Manual zero point return of the A-axis was started before the X-axis
completed zero point return.
1041 EXECUTE Y-AXIS ZERO RETURN Manual zero point return of the B-axis was started before the Y-axis
1: completed zero point return.
•!«
#:
:ÿ I
4
41
I
M IS
I
1 I I
—
i ;
!
i
l
l
\ p
;;
11-22 I
i I
\
; No. Message Contents
/ 1101 LACK OF COMMAND M07 The main spin die rotation command was issued when the main .
spindle was damped, or M82 was commanded in the SIMUL mode.
1120 SUB SPINDLE ALARM There is an abnormality in the sub-spindle.

[
1123 SQ256 SIG. IS DISCONNECTED The sub-coliet dose confirmation signal wire is disconnected. When
the sub-collet is dosed, the proximity switch entered the non-prox¬
imity state even though the open command was not issued. !
I
1122 SQ256 SIG. IS SHORT-CIRCUITED The sub-collet dose confirmation signal is short circuited.
1123 LACK OF COMMAND M18 Moving of the Y or Z2-axis was attempted while the. separator was
advanced, or program operating of Y-axis at the position of Y
ABS<195.0 and Z2-axis at Z2-axi$ plus position was attempted. !
I
t
1124 E POSITION IS WRONG Turret advance, retract, right swing or left swing was attempted
while the E-axis was at the + side.
1125 X OR Z2 POSITION IS WRONG Turret advance was attempted while X-axis and Z2-axis were not at
V
reference point.
i 1126 PART PICK UP ERROR Pick up of the parts failed..

'*'* *•*f.
1127 Y OR Z2 POSITION IS WRONG M17 was commanded while Y ABS<195.0 or Z2-axis was not at
j
reference point.
1130 LACK OF COMMAND G28 WO When using separator A, Y-axis moving command was given while :
Z2-axis was not at reference point.
1131 BACK M-F1N SIGNAL ALARM The back side M code complete signal has not been returned, or an
invalid M code was commanded.
|
1132 LACK OF COMMAND M59 The sub-spindie rotation command was issued in the sub-spindle in¬
dexing state or M82 (sub-side) was commanded during the SIMUL
mode.
I
1133 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS ALARM The main spindle side command exceeded the sub-spindle side j; :
maximum speed during the spindle synchronous command (M82). :
1134 LACK OF COMMAND M83 The main or sub-spindle index command was issued during the 1
; spindle synchronous command. .
1135 EXECUTE Y-AXIS ZERO RETURN Manual zero point return of the E-axis was attempted before the Y-
i
axis completed reference point return.
1137 EXECUTION MODE IS NOT OFF Starting of the MDI or memory mode program was attempted or
changing to the reference point return mode was attempted while the :
J execution mode in the geometry offset screen or the cut-off process¬

ing screen was still ON.
!
1140 AUTO CUT OFF KEY IS NOT OFF Starting of the MDI or memory mode program was attempted or
changing to the reference point return mode was attempted while
cut-off mode key was still ON.
1141 INITIAL POSITION KEY IS NOT OFF Starting of the MDI or memory mode program was attempted or !|
changing to the reference point return mode was attempted while
initial position key was still ON.
i
11-23
i
i
:
l
i|s
! i
:!
: II
ij M
l
!ÿ
1 I
t)
i I
:ÿ
: 1142 REWIND TO TOP OF PROGRAM After changing the mode or pressing the reset button during auto¬
i matic operation (SIMUL mode), the START button was pressed
! without rewinding the program to the head. I
||
j 1143 TORQUE LIMIT ALARM The torque limit was applied on one of the servomotor axes.
1144 TORQUE LIMIT INTERLOCK The torque limit ON was commanded during Z-ZB-axis synchroni¬
I zation, or Z-ZB-axis synchronization was commanded while the
torque limit was ON.
1145 SUB SPINDLE INDEX ALARM The sub-spindle index command completion was not returned.
1146 SUB SPINDLE SPEED DETECTION The sub-spindle speed exceeded the permissible fluctuation range (r
in G26 Pp Qq Rr Dd;).
:
%
t
a
;
I
I
i
1
j
i
’!
I
I
I 11-24
1
R

:
2070 COUNT UP The standard counter has counted up. 1
i.
2071 LOW LEVEL OF COOLANT OIL The coolant oil level has dropped.
2073 LOW LEVEL OF LUBRI. OIL The automatic centralized lubrication oil level has dropped.
I
2074 NO STOCK ON SINGLE BARFEEDER The single barfeeder is out of stock.
\
2075 NO STOCK ON AUTOMATIC The automatic barfeeder is out of stock.
BARFEEDER
2076 AUTOMATIC BARFEEDER NOT The automatic barfeeder ready signal has not turned ON. :
I READY
:
2077 PART EJECT ERROR Parts ejection failed,
2080 POWER-DRIVEN TOOLS AUTO KEY IS The START button was pressed with the POWER TOOLS AUTO
OFF key turned OFF.
i
2081 CNC BATTERY ALARM The battery voltage for CNC back-up has dropped below the speci¬ };
fied value.
2082 REMOVE THE TOOL SETTER 1) The START button was pressed, 2) reference point return was
executed or 3) turret was advanced with the tool setter installed.
1 M25 or Ml 25 was commanded when the COOLANT AUTO key

2083 COOLANT AUTO KEY IS OFF
was OFF.
|
2084 MAINTENANCE TIME OVER One of the maintenance timers (1—5) has reached its time.
t
2085 COUNT UP (OPTION) The option counter has counted up.
2086 COUNT UP (NC-OPTION) The CNC option part quantity display function has counted up.
,
2087 SIGNAL FOR AUTOMATIC FIRE The automatic fire extinguisher’s activation sensor is disconnected.
m EXTIGUISHER IS DISCONNECTED
2090 SPEED DOWN POWER-DRIVEN TOOL The X power-driven tool has rotated for a long time while exceeding
X the permissible continuous speed (4501rpm). Lower the speed.
St
I
ft
2091 COOLANT UNIT 0.8MPA AUTO
SWITCH IS OFF
Ml 25 was commanded while coolant unit 0.8MPa ON/OFF switch
was OFF.
:
1
i
11 •-
I
a*s ;
m
1 I
f
,V:
/. :
| 11-25
It
'
t
i;
.
1 i
!
I
a:
M
f
I
I
I
1 !
ri
! i
K
I
3000 MACRO MODE IS NOT READY The macro mode has not been selected or the SIMUL mode has not
been selected.
3001 SENSOR IS DISCONNECTED The offset adjustment sensor has not been installed or is discon¬
nected.
3002 DATA A IS WRONG The data A value on the offset adjustment screen is incorrect.
3003 DATA B IS WRONG The data B value on the offset adjustment screen is incorrect.
3004 DATA C IS WRONG The data C value on the offset adjustment screen is inconect.
3005 DATA D IS WRONG The data D value on the offset adjustment screen is incorrect.
3006
3007 SENSOR ALARM

----
DATA E IS WRONG
POINT 1
The data E value on the offset adjustment screen is incorrect
The sensor did not react at the point 1 section when the offset adjust¬
ment program was started.
The sensor did not react at the point 2 section when the offset adjust¬
----
3008: SENSOR ALARM POINT 2
3009 SENSOR ALARM POINT 3 The sensor did not react at the point 3 section when the offset adjust¬
3010 SENSOR ALARM POINT 4 The sensor did not react at the point 4 section when the offset adjust¬
--
3011 Z2 POSITION IS WRONG When the geometry offset measurement program was executed, the
sensor position (Z2) exceeded 219.0mm (78.0mm in back mode).
3012 PROGRAM END RESET ON The geometry offset measurement program and cut-off processing
program have completed. Press the reset key.
A
3013 COOLANT AUTO KEY IS OFF The cut-off processing program was executed while the COOLANT
AUTO key was OFF.
i SEPARATOR KEEPRELAY NO SET Ml 17 was commanded while the keep relay (K05-bI) set when the
3015
separator A (38414) was used to 0.
3017 ID NO. IS NOTO, 1,2,3 ID No.4 and more cannot be measured.

II
3018 TOOL IS NOT SELECTED Tool on the cursor position is not selected.
3019 THIS ID NO. IS ALREADY USED ID No. key input is already used.
3020 G784/SETTING ERROR The V, S and F settings were not found for the G784 command, or
the values were inaccurate.
3021 G784/M-CODE ERROR The M setting was not found for the G784 command, or a value other
than 36 or 37 was commanded.
3022 Z1 STROKE DATA ERROR Z1 stroke data is 0 or negative value.
f!
)
1
:
1 11-26
ftMtliNWMta
1
I
P/S Alarm explanation

i
:
3800 A tool number or ID No. that cannot be commanded was commanded.
There is an error in the approach command.
!
3802 The G code group G code was other than GOO, G01 , G02 or G03 when changing pianes.
The plane was changed during the G96 mode.
There was a G70, G71 , G72 or G73 command at a plane other than the standard plane.
The A or B-axis was commanded during the circular arc command or tool nose R compensation at a plane other
than the standard plane.
3803 The next approach was commanded while approach was being executed.
\
Some command was given to the approach axis.
1 I'
3805 The turret type tool post was selected and commanded from the HEAD1 during the HEAD2 command mode or
from the HEAD2 during the HEAD1 command mode.
i 3806 A tap command was issued during the G98 mode.
3807 •An axis that cannot be commanded was found in the tap block. !
•A chamfer or comer R command was found in the tap block.

•The tap block was commanded during tool nose R compensation.
|
1 3808
•The command was not in a single block.
The rigid tap was commanded at a plane other than the standard plane.
.
i
I-
;
$
3810 There is an error in the G120 command format.
1
3811 Gl 31 or G141 was commanded during Zl-axis movement.
:
! 3812 The main spindle work length is not set. (G120 has not been commanded.)
:
3813 The sub-work length is not set for the G132 command.
;
; *
!
3815 A tool selection or approach was commanded while an alarm occurred in the PMC-axis control.
L;
3816 Gl 70 was commanded in approach command,
•i
: i
I1
1
:ÿ
I
i;
1 1
11-27
I
1
t!
: f
1:
,!
I
i
I
i
i
;
]
:
analysis
In this section, factor analysis of alarms of alarm Nos. of 1000s and 2000s will be explained. Firstly,
factors are classified into the following three types.
A: Factors which can be removed by an operator
B: Factors which can be removed by a person in charge of maintenance of the user
iII
fiI
§||
I
I
C: Factors which can be removed by a person in charge of maintenance of the manufacturer I
: (
: CAUTION
;
1
An operation should not perform the removal operation offactors ofB and C. 1 4$
II
• 1000 EMERGENCY STOP Ir
A: • The emergency stop button is pressed.
• The door is opened in the door interlock ON state.
B: • The breaker is tripped.
• The circuit protector is tripped.
! • The thermal relay is tripped.
For further details, see the electric circuit diagram.
C: • The emergency stop circuit is disconnected.
There are LEDs (HL701 to HL710) provided on the PCB (A701) in the CNC box and the
range of energized parts can be found to a certain extent depending on the lighting status
thereof. Refer to it.
• The fuse (0.5 A) in the safety relay module (A010) is burnt out.
• 24 VDC is not output from the CNC (+24N <-» ON).
S
• 1001 MAIN SPINDLE SPEED DETECTION
A: • The cutting load of the main spindle is too large.
• The “G26 Pp Qq Rr” command value of HEAD1 is incorrect.
C: • Check the parameters (on the HEAD1 side) relating to the main spindle.
• 1002 BAR FEEDER ALARM

B: • The automatic bar feeder is abnormal.
• When this alarm occurs unnecessarily, check the interface of an abnormal signal of the
automatic bar feeder.
C: * When this alarm occurs unnecessarily, check the continuity state of an abnormal signal on
IS
the CNC box side.
1I
\
11-28
S
t
t
• 1003 MAIN SPINDLE ALARM
A: • When the alarm cannot be canceled by pressing the reset key| # j, turn the power supply
of the machine body OFF once and then turn it ON again.
C: Check the parameters (on the HEAD1 side) related to the spindles.
• Check the main spindle motor (M501) and amplifier (A501).
I
• 1004 POWER TOOLS INVERTER Y TRIP
1 A: • Check whether the alarm can be canceled by turning the power supply OFF or ON.
C: • Check the setting and wiring of the inverter (A510).
,
• 1005 LACK OF COMMAND M05

A: • Issue the main spindle stop command (HEAD1 side: M05) before the program grip ON
command (HEAD1 side: Ml 2).
• 1006 CUT-OFF TOOL BROKEN

A: * It is detected that the cut-off tool is broken.
C: • The broken cut-off tool detection proximity switch (SQ251, SQ252) is damaged or the
mounting position is defective.
• 1007 SQ252 SIG SHORT-CIRCUITED

C: • The broken cut-off tool detection proximity switch (SQ252) is damaged or the mounting
position is defective.

C: • The broken cut-off tool detection return end proximity switch (SQ251) is damaged or the i
• 1011 SQ250 SIG IS DISCONNECTED

C: • The main collet chuck close check proximity switch (SQ250) is damaged or the mounting

C: * The main collet chuck close check proximity switch (SQ250) is damaged or the mounting

|# |and then command M13 by pressing the MDI mode key
A: • Press the reset key and
HEAD1 side key ||gj.
11-29
.
.
;;
i
:
9 1014 A AXIS JOG FEED

A: • After TOO to T800 selection, the Y axis is moved in the manual mode, so that the tool i
selection No. display is different from the actual position. For the program to be restarted, I
at
T100 to T800 should be commanded before starting machining.
When the reset key j'ÿ~jis pressed, the program can be started up. ,
j 9 1015 B AXIS JOG FEED
A: * After Til AA to T18 AAA. (A A indicates 00 or ID No.) selection, the X axis is moved i
in the manual mode, so that the tool selection No. display is different from the actual
position.
For the program to be restarted, Til AA to T18 AA should be commanded before I
1
starting machining.
When the reset key j # j is pressed, the program can be started up.
I||
* 1016 MODE IS NOT MACRO
I
J A: * When performing the cutting-off processing or tool setter automatic measurement, set the
p
mode to the Macro mode psTjl-
I
9 1017 COOLANT FLOW ALARM
A: 9 When the coolant flow sensor valve is closed, open it suitably.
• When the coolant amount in the coolant tank is insufficient, replenish it.
B: * When the connector (XS004) of the coolant pump motor is disconnected, connect it.
• When the setting of the coolant flow sensor (SF001) is defective, adjust it by the adjust¬ 1
5$
ment method described in Section 6 of the installation manual-
C: • The operation of the electromagnetic switch KM202 is defective.
t sfE
• The coolant flow sensor is damaged or the signal line is disconnected. 1
* The coolant pump motor is faulty. I
* The power line of coolant pump motor is disconnected.
<* When no flow sensor is used, do not remove the short-circuit bridge between +24N and
390 of the terminal block XT782 on the PCB (A701) in the CNC box. II
1
I
* 1020 PMC FUNCTION COMMAND ALARM ,
C: • The setting of the PMC data table is defective.
; 1
9 1022 MACHINE IS NOT READY
s
A: • Press the machine ready button JQJ. (Press the button continuously until the lamp lights.)
I
11-30
11
..
I1 • 1023 MAIN M-FIN SIGNAL ALARM
A: • An M code which cannot be used by the HEAD1 side is commanded.
5 C: • Check the factor for that the completion signal is not returned.
• 1024 T100 IS NOT SELECTED ft

II A: • Command T100 before the broken cut-off tool detection command (HEAD1 side: M27).
1 • 1025 CYCLE TIME OVER

A: • The feed rate is decreased due to feed override.
• The spindle is stopped regardless of the feed per revolution mode.
B: The setting of the one-cycle timer (PMC timers 1 to 3: Note) is defective.
'
j:'
Note: The total time of the PMC timers 1 to 3 is the check time of one-cycle time.
C: • Check the factor for taking a lot of time.
° 1026 M20 STOP

This is an alarm used under a specific specification. When this message is displayed, refer to the
i
corresponding specific specification for contents thereof.
f
A: • When the Cs control OFF command (HEAD1 side: M09) is issued, the main spindle can
be rotated.
• 1030 MAGNETIC CONTACTOR ERROR

|
C: • One of the electromagnetic switches KM001. KM002, KM202, KM203, KM205, and
I KM207 is in the state that the contact is always closed because the contact is welded.
Exchange the faulty electromagnetic switch.
• 1031 SYNCHRO MODE ALARM

A • The Ml 40 mode and Ml 42 mode cannot be controlled at the same time. Command one of
; i
It them.
1 8 1032 WAITING M-CODE MISMATCH

A: * Fit the M codes for waiting for the HEAD1 side and HEAD2 side to each other.
• 1033 CHIP CONyEYOR ALARM
I When this alarm occurs, the machine is stopped in the one-cycle (M20) mode and the motors for
the main spindle, sub-spindle, power-driven tool, and coolant are stopped.
B: • Check the status of the chip conveyor. ;
• Check the cable connection between the chip conveyor and the CNC. '
C: • When the chip conveyor is mounted, check the continuity status of an error signal.
• When this message is displayed though no chip conveyor is mounted, there is a possibility
that the short-circuit bridge between 72 and ON in the terminal block XT201 in the CNC
box is removed.
11-31
\
:
:
: *
U
i
I
1
:
\
: • 1034 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER

A: • The soft OT is canceled. If the program is started up in this state, it is dangerous. Turn the
power supply of the CNC OFF ( Q ) once. The soft OT will be returned to the valid state.
• 1040 EXECUTE X-AXIS ZERO RETURN I

A: • Before starting reference point return of the A axis manually, return the X axis to its
reference point beforehand.
I
• 1041 EXECUTE Y-AXIS ZERO RETURN
A: • Before starting reference point return of the B axis manually, return the Y axis to its
reference point beforehand.
1
A: • When the unclamp command (HEAD1 side: M07) is issued, the main spindle can be
I
rotated.
;
• 11.20 SUB SPINDLE ALARM
A: • When the alarm cannot be canceled by pressing the reset key jjTJ,
turn the power supply
of the machine body OFF once and then turn it ON again.
; C: e Check the parameters (on the HEAD2 side) related to the spindles.
• Check the sub-spindle motor (M502) and amplifier (A502).
. 1121 SQ256 SIG IS DISCONNECTED
C: * The sub-collet chuck close check proximity switch (SQ256) is damaged or the mounting
|
;
• 1122 SQ256 SIG SHORT-CIRCUITED I
f C: • The main collet chuck close check proximity switch (SQ256) is damaged or the mounting
f:
A: • By the return command (HEADI side: M18)ofthe parts separator B, the Y or Z2 axis can
be moved.
C: * The return check proximity switch (SQ255) of the parts separator B is damaged or the
|
• 1124 E POSITION IS WRONG i

A: * Forward movement , backward movement Jj|ÿ , and turning |ÿj Jÿj of the turret by
pressing the buttons of the operation panel are valid only when the machine coordinate of
the E axis is 0 or a negative value.
Move the E axis to the negative side in the jog mode
11-32
:
• 11 25 X OR Z2 POSITION IS WRONG !
A: • Forward movement , backward movement [(g)] , and turning |(Q)| |jQ|] of the turret by
pressing the buttons of the operation panel are valid when the X and Z2 axes are at their |
reference points. Return the X and Z2 axes to their reference points manually.
• 1 126 PART PICK UP ERROR

A: • There in no part in the back collet.
C: • The proximity switch (SQ259) is damaged or the mounting position is defective.
:
• The collet mechanism is damaged.
• 1 127 Y OR Z2 POSITION IS WRONG

A: • The parts separator JB forward movement command (HEAD2 side: Ml 7) is valid when the
Y is 195.0 (absolute) or more and the Z2 axis is at the reference point.
• 1 130 LACK OF COMMAND G28 WO

1.- A: • When the parts separator A is used, the Y axis can be moved only when the Z2 axis is at
i the reference point.
I& 1131 BACK M-FIN SIGNAL ALARM
I
i#ÿ
°
A: • An M code which cannot be used on the HEAD2 side is commanded.
i
I C: • Check the factor for that the completion signal is not returned.
Ii • 1 132 LACK OF COMMAND M59 :i

A: • The sub-spindle is being indexed at present. The sub- spindle can be rotated in the index¬
1 ing OFF (HEAD2 side: M59) state.
v .
C: • The sub-spindle indexing pin return end lead switch (SQ308) is damaged or the mounting
1 position is defective.
;
. 1133 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS ALARM
A: • Under the spindle synchronous rotation control (M82), the spindle speed of the main
I: spindle can be increased up to the maximum spindle speed of the sub-spindie.
*
C: • The setting of the parameters related to main spindle synchronous rotation control is de-
®
fective. :
The machine is overloaded.
I
,c
'
• 1134 LACK OF COMMAND M83 i
A: • The spindle indexing command (main side or back side) is issued during the spindle syn¬
chronous command. Before indexing the spindles, issue the spindle synchronization OFF :
:
command (M83) beforehand.
;;
11-33
:
.
'
|
4
• 1135 EXECUTE Y-AXIS ZERO RETURN

A: • Manual reference point return of the E axis is performed when the Y axis is not returned to
its reference point. Return the Y axis to its reference point first.
* 1137 EXECUTION MODE IS NOT OFF

A: • When the execution mode is ON on the geometry offset screen, the program cannot be
started up in the MDI or memory mode. Manual reference point return can be neither
performed. Turn the execution mode OFF.
* 1 1 40 AUTO CUT OFF KEY IS NOT OFF

A: • When the cutting-off processing function key jpgi] is ON, the program cannot be started
up in the MDI or memory mode. Manual reference point return can be neither performed.
• 1141 INITIAL POSITION KEY IS NOT OFF

A: * When the initial position key jfÿj is ON, the program cannot be started; up in the MDI or
memory mode. Manual reference point return can be neither performed.
* 1142 REWIND TO TOP OF PROGRAM

j
A: • When the program is started up, the mode is changed or the reset key # j is pressed.
Restart the program from the beginning thereof. (Press the reset key |"ÿ' j
in the edit mode
• 1 143 TORQUE LIMIT ALARM

A: • Cutting is being executed when the torque limiter is ON;
* Heavy cutting is being executed.
$ Note: To cancel this alarm, it is necessary to turn the power of the CNG off once.
C: * The setting of the data tables D622 to D636 is defective.
®
An excessive load is applied to one of the servo feed axes. Check it with a servo monitor.
* 1144 TORQUE LIMIT INTERLOCK I

A: • The torque limit ON command (M68) cannot be issued during synchronous control of the t
Z-ZB axes (while M40 is valid).
* The Z-ZB axes synchronous control (M40) cannot be issued while the torque limit is ON
(while M68 is valid).
* 1 145 SUB SPINDLE INDEX ALARM

i C: • The sub-spindle indexing pin forward end lead switch (SQ307) is damaged or the mount¬
1 ing position is defective.
I
* The setting of the parameters (HEAD2 side) related to orientation is defective.
• The sub-spindle amplifier (A502) is damaged. :
11-34
• 1146 SUB SPINDLE SPEED DETECTION
A: • The cutting load of the sub-spindle is too large.
• The “G26 Pp Qq Rr” command value of HEAD2 is incorrect.
C: • Check the parameters (on the HEAD2 side) relating to the sub-spindle.
* 2070 COUNT UP
A: • Cancel the count-up of the standard counter. To restart the program as it is, after the count-
up is canceled, press the start button jfglj. During this period of time, do not press the reset
key
\7\
/:[
NOTICE
•For the counter operation method, see Section 7.13. \
• 2071 LOW LEVEL OF COOLANT OIL
A: • Replenish coolant. The stop status of the program varies with selection of the keep relay.
In either case, the spindles, power-driven tool, and coolant motor are stopped. For further i
details, refer to the explanation of keep relay (KOO-bl, KQl-b4).
C: • The coolant float switch (SLQ01) is damaged or the mounting position is defective.
I
• 2073 LOW LEVEL OF LUBRI. OIL
i
When this alarm occurs, the machine is stopped in the one- cycle (M20) mode and the motors
for the main spindle, sub-spindle, power-driven tool, and coolant are stopped.
A: • Replenish automatic centralized lubricant. The program can be restarted as it is. After
I lubricant is replenished, press the start button |J|. During this period of time, do not press i ;
the reset key #[ j.
The message is erased at the same time with start.
C: • The automatic centralized lubricant float switch (SL004) is damaged or the mounting
• 2074 NO STOCK ON SINGLE BAR FEEDER

A: • Replenish bars to the bar feeder.
B: * When this alarm occurs unnecessarily, check the interface of barstock completion of the
bar feeder.
I
C: • When this alarm occurs unnecessarily, check the continuity state of a bar stock absence
signal on the CNC box side.
:
i
11-35
;
I
» 2075 NO STOCK ON AUTOMATIC BAR FEEDER

A: • Replenish bars to the bar feeder.
B: • When the bar feeder has no all-barstock completion signal, do not remove the short-circuit
bridge between +24N and 499 of the terminal block XT206 in the CNC box.
• When this alarm occurs unnecessarily, check the interface of all-barstock completion of
the bar feeder.
!i C: • When this alarm occurs unnecessarily, check the continuity state of an all-barstock
i
I completion signal on the CNC box side.
® 2076 AUTOMATIC BAR FEEDER NOT READY

A: • The bar feeder is not in the ready state.
B: • When the bar feeder has no ready signal, do not remove the short-circuit bridge between
+24N and 495 of the terminal block XT206 in the CNC box.
* When this alarm occurs unnecessarily, check the interface of a ready signal of the bar
feeder.
C: •. When this alarm occurs unnecessarily, check the continuity state of a ready signal of the
bar feeder on the CNC box side.
|
9 2077 PART EJECT ERROR
1 A: • A product remains in the sub-collet. Call the door manager, release ( Q ) the door inter¬
lock in the presence of the manager, and then open the door and take out the product. :
Close the door and turn the door interlock ON ( ] ). The program can be restarted as it is.
During this period of time, do not press the reset key j # j.
C: • The proximity switch (SQ259) is damaged or the mounting position is defective.
• The ejector pin is defective.
9 2080 POWER TOOLS AUTO KEY IS OFF

:
; A: • Turn the power-driven tool valid key pT| ON and then start up the program.
i • 2081 CNC BATTERY ALARM !
B: ° Even if this alarm occurs, the machine continues running. Stop the machine suitably and
exchange the battery for the memory. For the battery exchange method, refer to the instal¬
lation manual.
;ÿ * 2082 REMOVE THE TOOL SETTER

A: • Remove the tool setter and then start the program.
11-36
S:
HI
isii
• 2083 COOLANT IS OFF

A: • For cutting, turn the coolant ON/OFF key A ON (|) and then start the program.
jjr
When the air cut key ~j of the operation panel is ON (lighting), the program can be
started as it is.
j j.
In this case, do not press the reset key # The message is erased at the same time with
start.
SI
II » 2084 MAINTENANCE TIME OVER
B: • Even if this alarm occurs, the machine continues running. Stop the machine suitably and
check the parts to be maintained.
On the maintenance timer screen, clear the timer reaching its set time.
ii
I!
When this message is unnecessary, set the keep relay K02- bit2 to 1.
t • 2085 COUNT UP (OPTION)

for the main spindle, sub- spindle, power-driven tool, and coolant are stopped.
A: ° Cancel the count-up of the optional counter (Star simple tool life management).
To restart the program as it is, after the count-up is canceled, press the start button jflll.
i
j j.
During this period of time, do not press the reset key # The message is erased at the
same time with start.
NOTICE
•For the operation methodfor the optional counter (Star simple tool life management),
see Section 7.14.
* 2086 COUNT UP fNC-QPTIQN')

I
for the main spindle, sub-spindle, power-driven tool, and coolant are stopped.
I' A: • Cancel the count-up of the CNC optional counter.
I
[ j.
In this case, it is necessary to press the reset key
I r NOTICE
% ® For the operation methodfor the CNC optional counter, refer to the operator’s manual
of the CNC manufacturer. \:
'ÿV
I
I
11-37
!
i
:
:
j
l
.
'
• 2087 SIGNAL FOR AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER IS DISCONNECTED

j for the main spindle, sub-spindle, power-driven tool, and coolant are stopped.
C: • When an automatic fire extinguisher is mounted, check the continuity status of the sensor
and the continuity status of the input line of a disconnection signal of the sensor to the
«
CNC. s
• When this message is displayed though an automatic fire extinguisher is not mounted,
there is a possibility that the short-circuit bridge between +24N and 897 in the terminal
block XT782 in the CNC box is removed.
I • 2090 SPEED DOWN POWER-DRIVEN TOOL X

A: • Decrease the spindle speed of the X power-driven tool down to the permissible spindle
I
:
speed of continuous revolutions (4500 min1) or less. In this case, there is no need to press §1
the reset key. The message is erased at the same time with decrease of the spindle speed. I
:
Even if this alarm occurs, the machine continues running. When this status continues, IS
f there is a possibility that an overheat alarm of the X axis power-driven tool motor occurs.
1I If this occurs, the machine enters the feed hold state and the motors for the main spindle,
sub-spindle, power-driven tool, and coolant are stopped.
:
I
• 2091 COOLANT UNIT 0.8 MPA AUTO SWITCH IS OFF
I
!& A: • For cutting, turn the coolant unit O.SMPa ON/OFF switch jjf1 ON |
( ) and then start the
program.
When “DRY RUN” on the keep relay conversational setting screen is YES, the program
[
can be started as it is. In this case, do not press the reset key The message is erased at
the same time with start.
'
;
1
«
%
I
1
j
I
11-38
If i ft
»|:j
SI'j
mi
11-8 Keep relay table
When changing keep relay, turn OFF the memory protect key switch on the operation panel.
(bit)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
KOOO BZ.P M80.P JPN.P EMG.P MOO.P SBK.P BF.P :

iff
K001 SPHS.P OCY.P LEV.P

, ;
CC.P ALM.P TIME.P RWD.P
K002 I
K003 PAT.P GRIP.P M2G.P I I

#
If
D06.P D05.P D04.P D03.P D02.P D01.P
c- K004 V;
WKEJ.P SEP.P
I
K005
i 1
K006 PATB.P CHIP.P
K007 RGDM.P RGDS.P ':f
K008 I,
K009
f:
I
K010 :1
i
i*
Sf
KOI 1
KOI 2 SYOF.P SATM.P SBF.P WEL.P I 1

Ml1
it \ t?
KOI 3 if
K014
;.f
KOI 5
i
f
i; :
%
if!
i
B: •
I f
11-39
I:
;f
I
V
11
: l!
t\
:
n : j
IH8
:
relay applications
BF.P (KOO-bitO) ... : Set I when using the automatic barfeeder (option).
SBK.P (KOO-bitl) : Set 1 when single block stop is to be applied instead of feed hold when the
coolant level drops.
MOO.P (KOO-bitl) .. : Set 1 when the spindle is not to be stopped with the MOO command.
EMG.P (KOO-biO) : Set 1 if the emergency stop is to be applied at MOO stop after all material
has been fed.
JPNP (K00-bit4) : Set 1 when Japanese is to be used for the conversational setting screen
display.
M80.P (KOO-bitS) : Set 1 when the M80 command is to be waited for.
BZ.P (KO0-bit6) .. : Set 1 when the buzzer that sounds when the operation panel keys are
touched is to be turned OFF.
LEV.P (K01-bit2) : Set 1 when the coolant oil level alarm is to be invalidated.
Note that this will automatically be set to 0 when the CNC power is turned
ON.
OCY.P (K01-bit4) : Set 1 when one cycle stop is to be applied instead of feed hold stop when
li. the coolant level drops.
Set SBK.P (KOO-bitl) to 0 when using this function.
SPSH.P (K01-bit6) : Set 1 when synchronous phase control is to be executed.
RWD.P (K02-bitl) : Set 1 to invalidate the alarm (No. 1142) that occurs when reset is applied
during automatic operation (SIMUL) mode or when the START button
:1'
fT| is pressed after changing modes.
TIME.P (K02-bit2) .... : Set 1 to invalidate the time up display (No. 2084) of the maintenance
timer.
ALM.P (K02-bit4) : Set 1 to invalidate the alarms (No. 1014 and 1015).
I CC.P (K02-bit5) .... : Set 1 if the open/close state of the main collet when the power is turned
i ON is to be the same as when the power was turned OFF last.
M20.P (K03-bit0) : Set 1 to cause an alarm (alarm 1026) when the spare input signal (M20
stop) changes from a b contact (normally b contact) to an a contact.
GRJP.P (K03-bitl) : Set 1 when using gripping unit.
1 PAT.P (K03-bit4) .. : Set 1 when 2 colours of red and yellow rotating beacons (including signal
tower) are used.
D01.P (K04-bit0) : Set 1 when the spare M code output 1 is not to be cut off when an emer¬
gency stop occurs. li
D02.P (K04-bitl) : Set 1 when the spare M code output 2 is not to be cut off when an emer¬
at
i
gency stop occurs.
D03.P (K04-bit2) : Set 1 when the spare M code output 3 is not to be cut off when an emer¬ II
gency stop occurs.
D04JP (K04-bit3) : Set 1 when the spare M code output 4 is not to be cut off when an emer¬
gency stop occurs.
1
11-40
;
D05.P (K04-foit4) .. .. .. ..
: Set 1 when the spare M code output 5 is not to be cut off when an emer¬
gency stop occurs.
BG6.P (K04-bit5)
SEP.P (K05-bitl) ....

: Set 1 when the spare M code output 6 is not to be cut off when an emer¬
gency stop occurs.
: Set 1 when using parts separator B (option).
—
WKEJ.P (K05-bit3) ... : Set 1 when the program is to be skipped to the / code at M75 M76 when
f
i
$ÿ-
CHIP.P (K06-bit0) ...
using the parts ejection detector and there are no parts (non-proximity
state).
: Set 1 when the chip conveyor (user prepared) run signal is to be always
ON (OFF when emergency stop occurs).
PATB.P (K06-bst2) .... : Set 1 when using the rotating beacon.
1,1 KGPM.P (K07-bit6) .. : Set 0 when executing right-handed threading and set 1 when left-handed
threading for front rigid tapping (option).
I
1 WEL.P (K12-bit2)
SBF.P (K12-bit3)
.. .....
RGPS.P (K07-bit7) .... : Set 0 when executing right-handed threading and set 1 when left-handed
threading for back rigid tapping (option).
: Set 1 when the automatic barfeeder barstock absence signal is a b contact
type when there is no barstock.
: Set 1 when the single barfeeder is to be used.
i
I
In this case, set KOO-bitO to 0. i
s SATM.P (K12-bit6) ... : Set 1 when the same tool selection function is to be validated.
SYOF.P (K12-bit7) .... : Set 1 if the main spindle and sub-spindle rotation is to be stopped when :
the spindle synchronous rotation control is released.

8
sif I
!>
..
:
I.
:
{
11
1
1
I 11-41
if
t
i
it
How to change keep relay
(1) Press the MODE key or emergency stop.
(2) Press OFFSET key [jgg|.
(4) Display the SETTING (HANDY) screen with PAGE keys jjg jgj and input PARAM¬
ETER WRITE=1 to make parameter change possible.
At this time, alarm "100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE" is displayed.
(5) Press SYSTEM key g.
' (6) Press the soft key [PMC].
(7) Press soft key [PMC PRM].
:
: (8) Press soft key [KEEPRL].
(9) The DATA displayed with cursor can be changed.
: j
To display with cursor, move cursor to the DATA position to be set with cursor keys t j
j j
| j j or move cursor to each bit to be set with cursor keys «- j -* j. 11
(10) Key in 1 or 0 in the data key.
(11) Press input key Jgj.
i (12) Press OFFSET key [£>} §§
!
; (14) Display the SETTING (HANDY) screen with PAGE keys [%j [gj.
The input of PA¬
a
i;
RAMETER WRTFE=0 makes the change of parameter impossible.
|;'i;
(15) To release the alarm “100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE”, press reset key
\#\ I
NOTICE
® When setting the keep relay by keep relay conversational setting screen, refer to section
7-17.
11-42
it
12. Maintenance and Inspection
Always perform the following maintenance and inspection regardless of whether a fault has occurred
to ensure that this machine can be used in a favorable condition for a long time.
NOTICE j;
•Assign a supervisorfor the machine, and always obtain the approval of the supervisor
before starting inspection or adjustment of the machine.
Si ® Put up clear signs when inspecting or adjusting the machine to notify third parties of the 1
iI work.
* Do not leave the operation tools or tool units, etc., usedfor maintenance on the machine
as this will lead to a drop in work efficiency and unexpected accidents. Try to keep the
v
work area neat. §
if
!
12-1 Monthly inspection
In addition to daily inspections, the monthly inspection is done to predict and diagnose hard-to-find
faults. Always designate a periodic inspection date, and perform the following inspections.
:
12-1-1 Inspection of bearing heating
AWARNING
•Always perform this work in the emergency stop state or with the main power (main
.
1 breaker) OFF ((f)) exceptfor steps (1) (3).
—
•Be careful not to touch the tool nose during work.
i ii
* If malfunction isfound on bearing, temperature of bearing may be abnormally high. Be
careful when confirming the temperature of bearing.
(1) Set the machine in the MACHINE READY state.

(2) Zero point return the all axes (Z1, X, A, Y, B and Z2).
(3) Dry run the main/sub-spindle, revolving guide bushing and X/Y power-driven attachment ;
w for 15 minutes at 3000min v. :
.
(4) Open the headstock room door (D and cutting room door (D with the machine in the
emergency stop state or with the main power OFF ( Q )• i
(5) Confirm that the temperature of the sections (bearing housing sections) shown below with 1
arrows is "room temperature + 20° or less" (degree that can be touched by hand for several :
seconds). If the temperature of these sections is abnormally high, the bearings must be
replaced.
12-1
i
i
;
:
£)
:
if ;
.
]
I
j
i i.
1
a
a •;
j
> j;.
::
1
;
112 13
||
? I
[ |
r —
i j [ ]
1: o n
I
I
I {
i iSL flS& I
•<n :
I :
II »
i
I|||;
I;
§
f1 |: :!
l
I|
1 II
CFP XX _Q_
T£_
o
w. rJr
3a
7W
?
Igs o
o
© o«
r
o
-&ÿ o
o © o
Kg
©i i©°
1
I
sI :
1 ;
12-2
i ill
III
; I
it i
12-1-2 Cleaning of guide bushing I
AWARNING 'I
®Always perform this work in the emergency stop state or with the main power (main
breaker) OFF (Q).
:
•Be careful not to touch the tool nose during work. I
:
1j f\ NOTICE
.
®Zero point return the X, Y, ZI and 22-axis before starting this work.
•Refer to section 10-2for details on how to install the guide bushing.
!
Revolving guide bushing
i r—i f 1
I -
A * /
V
:
I
\
3
i; A
z
7ÿ77:
i;
U 2 I 3 I 4 T 5 T 6 Y 7 18 19 1 10
‘i
(1) Open the headstock room door and cutting room door with the machine in the emergency '
stop state or with the main power OFF ( Q ).

(2) Insert the jig @ in the sleeve (D, tighten the knob screw (D to the cover (7) and fix the
:
;
*i rotation of the sleeve ®.
(3) Loosen the two screws (2) and remove the clamp ring (D.
:
1 (4) Turn the adjusting nut © with the pipe ©, and pull it off from the guide bushing (D.
(5) Remove the knob screws (D, and remove the jig
(6) Remove the guide bushing (D. ;
(7) Remove the two fixing screws for block © and remove the block d).
i; (B) Remove the four fixing screws for cover © and remove the cover ©. ;
(9) Clean the block © , cover © and guide bushing ® and nut ©.
§ :
i (10) Clean the inner diameter of the sleeve ©, and the block ® and cover © installation
sections.
(11) Install block ® and cover © with nut.
12-3
l:
m
i
12-1-3 Cleaning of collet

!
| A WARNING
® Always perform this work in the emergency stop state or with the main power (main
breaker) OFF (Q).
NOTICE
® Zero point return the all axes (Zl, X, A, Y, B and Z2) before starting this work. I
® Open the main/sub-collet before starting this work.
®
Refer to section 10-1 and 10-3 for details on how to install the collet
collet
! 1 i2IAJ3J4l5I6T7T8
/
D
u
I ;
T7/
Q
O
3ÿ=2
SMI—s 3
o )
I
(1) Open the headstock room door with the machine in the emergency stop state or with the
main power OFF ( Q ).
(2) Loosen the two knob screws ©, and remove the cover (3).
(3) Remove the cap (D (right screw). To remove or install the cap (D, place a super pin span¬ I
ner at both ends of the cap, insert the handle (D in the toggle holder (D A hole, and remove.
3
! (4) Remove the spring (D, sleeve (D and collet © from the spindle.
(5) Clean the spring (D, sleeve (D, collet © and cap ®.
: i (6) Clean the inner diameter of the spindle and the installation surface of the cap ®.
!i
12-4
: f-
li
1 12 13 5 16 7 18 19 AYI o)
¥ cff
1; ! "T
T
: fl :
i
:
i :
J —
L .
i
(1) Open the cutting room door with the machine in the emergency stop state or with the main i
power OFF ( Q ). j
(2) Loosen the two knob screws ©, and remove the cover ©.
(3) Loosen the screw ©, and remove the cover ©.
(4) Remove the cap (T) (right screw). To remove or install the cap (©, place a super pin span¬
ner at both ends of the cap, insert the handle © in the toggle holder © A hole, and remove.
(5) Remove the collet (D, sleeve (D and spring © from the spindle.
(6) Clean the cap ®, collet ©, cover ©, sleeve © and spring ©.
(7) Clean the inner diameter of the spindle and the installation surface of the cap © and cover
©•
f
12-5
y
;
j:
j
;
; I;
12-1-4 Inspection of hydraulic unit

of pressure gauge operation
:
;
HACAOTION
® The hydraulic unit may be faulty or malfunctioning if the hydraulic pressure is incor¬
rect. Always set the hydraulic pressure to 4.9MPa (50kg!cm2)for pressure gauge (2)amd
l
3.4MPa (35kg/cm2)for pressure gauge (3}
11
.
Check the operation of the pressure gauge with the following steps. Refer to section 9-1-3 for the 1st
position of the hydraulic unit.
; (i) Set the machine in the MACHINE READY state.

(2) Remove four screws to remove the cover.
I .
(3) Loosen lock nut ®.
(4) Turn the pressure adjusting screw (D, and confirm that the pressure gauge (D and (3)
! indicator moves. When the pressure adjusting screw (D is turned to the right, the pressure
will increase, and when turned to the left, the pressure will decrease.
If the pressure gauge (2) and (3) indicator movement is abnormal, turn the power OFF and
*
replace the pressure gauge (D and (3).
(5) Adjust the pressure adjusting screw (D so that the pressure gauge (D indicates 4.9MPa
i l: (50kg/cm2) and the pressure gauge (3) indicates 3.4MPa (35kg/cm2).
|||
(6) Tighten the lock nut (4).
(7) Install the cover with four screws.
n I >ÿ»;ÿ
I4-
[ 4
5
a
:
c Be- 8
:
i
i
11213
12-6
I
i!
1
of hydraulic oil leaks
A WARNING
breaker) OFF ((f)).
Periodically inspect the hydraulic tank’s oil level (T), and check how much hydraulic oil has dropped.
If the hydraulic oil has dropped abnormally, there may be a hydraulic oil leak. Check the periphery
m of the hydraulic unit, the pipe couplings, the hydraulic hose and hydraulic cylinder, find the leak
position and take the following measures.
• Pipe couplings ... : Tighten the pipe couplings.
If the pipe coupling is damaged, replace the pipe coupling.
• Others : The broken device must be replaced.
i
!
t
l
I
i
:
:
12-7 :
I
if
:
:
:
:
:
:
;
; n
12-1-5 Inspection of air unit
of pressure gauge operation
j
:
CAUTION }
o The air unit may be faulty or malfunctioning if the pneumatic pressure is incorrect.
Always set the pneumatic pressure to 0.5MPa (5kg/cm2).
Check the operation of the filter regulator pressure gauge with the following steps. |
m
(1) Set the machine in the MACHINE READY state (state with MACHINE READY lamp III
|C]ut).
(2) Loosen two screws to remove the cover.
j (3) Pull up the pressure adjusting handle (D to release lock.
(4) Turn the pressure adjusting handle (D, and confirm that the pressure gauge (3) indicator
moves. When the pressure adjusting handle (D is turned to the right, the pressure will
1
i "
increase, and when turned to the left, the pressure will decrease.
If the pressure gauge (2) indicator movement is abnormal, separate the air source from the
;
(5)
machine and replace the pressure gauge (2).
Adjust the pressure adjusting handle (D so that the pressure gauge (2) indicates 0.5MPa
j
! (6)
(5kg/cm2).
Push in the pressure adjusting handle © to lock.
(7) Install the cover with two screws.
§
Unlock
;
©
i Lock
2 nn
tin !! nnj #
fell 1 1 1 1 nq
huuun) I
'V
i
©
0
I 12-8
I
inspection of air leaks
p AWARN1NG
•Turn the door interlock switch -£?- OFF ((f)) tmd leave the door open when checking
for air leaks. Always perform the work under the supervision of the supervisor. Take I
special care to the movable parts of the machine.
•Always separate the air unit from the compressed air supply source when performing
maintenance, and work in the emergency stop state or with the main power (main
breaker) OFF ((f)).
1 HI
Periodically inspect the air unit, and check for air leaks. If there are any air leaks, check the periph¬
ery of the filter regulator, the pipe couplings, pneumatic hose and pneumatic cylinder, find the leak
position and take the following measures.
i
!
•Pipe couplings Tighten the pipe couplings.
If the pipe coupling is damaged, replace the pipe coupling.
•Others The broken device must be replaced.
1
i
1
!
I
1 12-9
:
1
:
•JI
11
!
of filter element
A WARNING
•Always separate the compressed air supply sourcefrom the machine when performing
this work.
breaker) OFF ( Q ).
A WARNING
•Clogging of thefilter regulator’sfilter element (5) will lead to trouble and malfunction¬
ing of the air unit. Always clean the filter element Of)at least once a month.
* Use a neutral detergent when washing each part of the filter regulator. 1
—
•The tightening torque of the baffle (7)is 0.8 l.ONm. The baffle (7) may be damaged if
tightened with an excessive torque.
(1) While pressing the PUSH part of the lock button ©, turn
the bowl CD to the right (opposite direction of arrow on
main unit ©, and align the lock button © position to the
IN display on the main unit (D. The bowl (8) and O-ring
(D will come off the main unit ®. H
(2) Because the baffle © is screwed into the main unit CD,
1
1 IraT
remove the baffle (7) by turning to the left and, then re-
move the spring (2), deflector © and filter element ©. 3
(3) Clean the filter element © by blowing compressed air. If (4
the filter element © is heavily contaminated, wash it
with a neutral detergent.
6 )
(4) Wash the baffle ©, spring ©, deflector © and bowl ©
with a neutral detergent. 7
(5) Assemble the filter element ©, deflector © and spring
© into the baffle ©, and screw the baffle © into the
main unit ©.
8 1
DUD
(6) Set the O-ring © into the bowl ©.
(7) Align the bowl © lock button © position to the IN dis¬
play on the main unit ©, and insert bowl © into the main
unit ©.
(8) While pressing the bowl © upward, turn the bowl ® to the left (direction of arrow on
111
main unit ®), and align the lock button © position to the LOCK display on the main unit
©. The bowl © will be fixed to the main unit ®.
12-10
i
f
n 12-2 Six-month Inspection

The six-month inspection is done to predict and diagnose often overlooked faults, and to replace
Consumable parts. Always designate a periodic inspection date, and perform the following inspec¬
tions.
12-2-1 Inspection of main/sub-spindie shifter section wear
11 A WARNING
breaker) OFF ((f)). 1
1 •Excessive wear in the shifter section will cause the grip of the main/sub-collet to be
insufficient. The material may fly off the spindle and cause a very dangerous situation.
i I
> Refer to sections "10-1 Installation and adjustment of main collet" and "10-3 Installation and adjust¬
ment of sub-collet”, and inspect the shifter section of the main spindle (left diagram) and sub-spindle :
(right diagram). Always perform the work in the emergency stop state or with the main power (main
breaker) OFF ( O )•
• Toggle (T) (D Replace when the wear is greater than the slanted line in the diagram.
• Shifter (2) (3) Replace if the boundary of the arrow in the diagram cannot be visually
confirmed.
I
1 Y 2 3 14
'
!
t4‘-h ?
111 V J
1
1
f f
1
1 12-2-2 Inspection of belt
AWARNING
*
1
breaker) OFF ((f)) after all axes (Zl, X, A, Y, B and Z2) reference return except main
spindle encoder belt (1) .
t
\
:
12-11 :
f
:
:
i
;
rl A CAUTION
I ®Damage of the belt will lead to machine damage and machining defects, etc.
•Excessive belt tension will lead to belt damage, drop in belt or bearing life, and increase
in noise.
:
;
:
•Insufficient belt tension will lead to belt damage, belt slipping, and belt jumping.
i
II
Hinspect the belt with the following steps Ik
• Check the appearance of the belt in detail, and if there any abnormality such as cracking or
peeling is found, replace the belt.
Ij
® Check the belt tension. Press the back of the belt at the center of the span between the two
pulleys, and confirm the pressing load F when the belt is slackened to slack amount d. If the
: pressing load F is not within ±20% of the range shown below, the belt tension must be ad¬ if
justed.
1
Application Pressing load F Slack amount d
Main spindle motor belt 26.5N 3.3mm
Main spindle encoder belt 2.ON 3.3mm
gj5
Spindle counter shaft belt 6.9N 6.0mm
Revolving guide bushing counter shaft belt 6.9N 6.0mm
A-axis feed unit motor belt 12.7N 1.6mm
; X-axis feed unit motor belt 9.8N 1.9mm
B-axis feed unit motor belt 12.7N 2.7mm
Y-axis feed unit motor belt 12.7N 2.5mm
Sub-spindle motor belt 9.8N 2.7mm II
Sub-spindle encoder belt 2.ON 3.5mm
rt: ;l
If,
-
F
- ;v;
i
1>-k! I
12-12
!
I
O Main spindle encoder belt 1
(1) Position Zl-axis to the position of Z150.0 with the machine in the state of machine ready
(the state machine ready button |(_)j is lit).
main power OFF ( Q ). :
(3) Loosen the four screws (T), and remove the cover (2). .
(4) Remove the blind plate (5).

(5) Inspect the main spindle encoder belt (3).
(6) Install the cover (D with the four screws (D.
(7) Install the blind plate (D.
O Main spindle counter shaft belt j

(2) Remove three screws (9) to remove the cover ©. !
(3) Inspect the main spindle counter shaft belt ©.
O Main spindle motor belt

main power OFF ( Q ). I
(2) Remove four screws © to remove the cover (8).
(3) Inspect the main spindle motor belt (©.
(4) Install the cover (D with four screws (7).
(5) Install the cover © with three screws <©.
i
O Revolving guide bushing counter shaft belt

I
(2) Remove four screws © to remove the cover
(3) Remove four screws © to remove the cover ©.
(4) Inspect the revolving guide bushing counter shaft belt ©.
(5) Install the cover © with four screws ©.
(6) Install the cover @ with four screws @.
12-13
i
;
;
i
I!
[Main spindle side and revolving guide bushing side belts]
1 1 ID
—
2 r
'
3
f
4
5 v
V:
. y
6
o
FP :
o o HE 3
an w o o
i
c
a
0
©
fin& l
|
:
:
@
o 1
;
12
13
1
I
o o 14 gi
15
1
i
: 16
Em
\
m o
n
m
@
@
\ M- \
o
4
i T
7 Y 8 Y 9 Y10Y1 1
12-14
.
<0 Sub-spindle encoder belt and sub-spindle motor belts

(1) Open the cutting room door with the machine in the emergency stop state or with the main
power OFF ( O )-
:
(2) Remove the two screws © and remove the cover ©.
(3) Remove the four screws ® and remove the cover ©.
(4) Inspect the sub-spindie encoder belt (3).
(5) Remove the blind plate ®.
(6) Inspect the sub-spindle motor belt ©.
i
(7) Install the blind plate ©.
(8) Install the cover © with the four screws ©.
(9) Install the cover (D with the four screws ®.
[Sub-spindle side belts]
1
If
2
(
3 ©
4
5
ri Si
7 V-7
©
Ii
i 4
'
12-15
;
.
I
:
:
jHh
!
O A-axis feed unit motor belt and X-axis feed unit motor belt
(1) Open the cutting room door with the machine in the emergency stop state or with the main
power OFF ( O )• i
(2) Remove seven screws (2) to remove the cover ®.
.=
: (3) Remove four screws (D to remove the cover ©.
: (4) Remove the blind plate (D- Ii

: (5) Inspect A-axis feed unit motor belt (5).
i (6) Remove four screws (7) to remove the cover ®.
Remove the plug (D.
(7)
(8) Inspect X-axis feed unit motor belt ®.
s
(9) Install plug (8).
(10) Install the cover (9) with four screws (7).
(11) Install the blind plate ©.
(12) Install the cover ® with four screws (3).
(13) Install the cover (D with seven screws (2).
[A-axis / X-axis side belts] 11
nrr S3
i
3141516 §
K
ImJ
® e; I|
I
:
:
:
F 3.
© «...
4
©
i
m
i
!
11
@
I I
nfl i © o
©
I
J
I
li
2 7181911°
I
I
«
12-16
II
O B-axis feed unit motor belt and Y-axis feed unit motor belt 1
(1) Open the cutting room door with the machine in the emergency stop state or with the main l
power OFF ( O )•
(2) Remove nine screws CD to remove the cover (2).
(3) Remove four screws © to remove the cover (D.
(4) Remove seven screws © to remove the cover ©.
(5) Remove four screws (5) to remove the cover (D-
I (6)
(7)
Remove the plug ©.
Inspect Y-axis feed unit motor belt ®. !1
i
(8) Inspect B-axis feed unit motor belt (9).

(9) Install plug ©.
(10) Install the cover (D with four screws (D.
(11) Install the cover © with seven screws ®.
(12) Install the cover (3) with four screws ©. i
(13) Install the cover © with seven screws ®.
[B-axis / Y-axis side belts]
o o
1 ± i
I
I :
112 13 14
5a6a7X8a9 1o Y 1 1
t o ]>o
0 *° IS* J>
i
i:
T ;
:
.
C2D
:
12-17
<7
’5-f |L| Tnff D
:
t
I
:
,
12-2-3 Inspection of wiring and piping
; A WARNING
breaker) OFF (Q).
I ! Inspect the cables and hydraulic/air hoses in the periphery of the headstock, periphery of the tool
‘I
post, and periphery of the backworking attachment while focusing on the following items.
If wrapping of the cables or hoses are defective, replace them with new one.
• Are the movable cables or hoses rubbing against the machine structure, etc.? If they are,
correct the wiring and piping.
: i • Are the cable and hose terminals securely fixed? Securely fix when the bundling bands or
screws, etc., are loose.
• Are any cutting chips accumulated at the cable and hose sections? Remove if there is any
accumulated.
I
IB
i if
ii
I
«
i
12-18 -
'
i
12-2-4 inspection of safety device
i
NOTICE
•Contact STAR MICRONICS or your dealer if the safety device malfunctions arefound.
I
of door interlock unit operation i
CAUTION
® Turn the door interlock key switch ON (\) and leave the headstock room door (T)
and cutting room door (2) and (3) open. Always perform the work under the supervision
of the supervisor and take special care to the moving parts of the machine.
\
Door interlock unit detects the opening doors for headstock room © and cutting room © and ©.
Confirm the operation of switches with the following steps.
I
;
(1) Close the headstock room door © and the cutting room doors © and ©.
(2) Turn the door interlock key switch ON (|).
S;
(3) Set the machine in the ready state.
(4) Open the headstock door © to confirm that the machine comes into the emergency stop
state.
(5) Close the headstock room door ©.
- (6) After pressing the CNC power OFF ( Q ) button, press ON |( ) button to set the machine
!
l (7)
in the ready state.
For the cutting room doors © and ©, confirm with the steps (4) to (6).
j
§|! II 2 I 3
lit
7 T
:
[ :
HI
Si _
JQOrtt
:
12-19
:
:
:
:
i
:
::
of coolant oil level detector operation
A WARNING
® An insufficient coolant oil discharge rate may lead to fires.
NOTICE
; •Refer to the section 9-1-2for details on the coolant tank position.
The coolant oil level detector CD detects when the level of the coolant oil in the coolant tank is
insufficient. Check the operation of the detector with the following steps. #
(1) Confirm the required amount of cutting oil is in the coolant tank.
(2) Set the machine in the ready state.
: (3) By lowering the float (2) of level switch to the lower limit by hand, display the following
alarm on the screen.
I
:
| 2071 LOW LEVEL OF COOLANT OIL
1I
j
(4) Confirm the float (2) of level switch comes up to the coolant oil surface and press reset key *
i i |
|yfr to release the alarm.
I
: flj
1 o c
m
1
i
i 2
12-20
I
i
f of coolant oil flow sensor operation
A WARNING
•Turn the door interlock switch ~p- OFF ( Q ) and leave the door open during this
work. Always perform the work under the supervision of the supervisor. Take special
care to the movable parts of the machine.
® An insufficient coolant oil discharge rate may lead to fires.
NOTICE
•Refer to the section 9-1-2for details on the coolant tank position.
The coolant oil flow sensor (D detects when the discharge rate of the coolant oil is insufficient.
Check the operation of the device with the following steps.
(1) Place the required amount of coolant oil in the coolant tank.
1 (2)
(3)
Set the machine in the MACHINE READY state.
Under the supervision of the machine supervisor, turn the door interlock switch -5f- OFF
I (4)
( O )> and open the cutting room door.
Open the coolant oil cocks (D and (D (positions in the drawing) fully.
1 f
(5) Press MDI key and select the MDI mode.
I Issue the coolant ON command (HEAD! side M25), and confirm that the coolant oil is
I (6)
1
1
being discharged.
(7) Turn the coolant oil cock CD and (D clockwise, and confirm that the following alarm is
I displayed on the screen when the discharge rate of the coolant oil drops.
(S) Open the coolant oil cocks (D and (2) (positions in the drawing) fully.
I
Is (9) Press reset key [ |to release the alarm.
t
1
1 r :
1 Tap* “it ; i
; i n :
1.
---
- y
J i
MB I
I
$
1 Y 2
K n w~?
%
i
12-21
:ÿ
!
.
:
I
of lubrication oil level detector operation
i
ACAUTION
v P" An insufficient lubrication level may lead to machine faults and malfunctioning.
The lubrication oil level detector detects when the level of the lubrication oil in the lubrication tank
is insufficient. Check the operation of the switch with the following steps.
(1) Place the required amount of lubrication oil in the lubrication tank.
(2) Set the machine in the machine ready state (the state machine ready lamp [Q| is lit).
1I
(3) Prepare a receptacle. Pull out the drain plug (D and drain the lubrication oil from the tank.
i
(4) Confirm that float (D of level switch comes down to the lowest position and the foilwing
alarm is displayed on the screen.
I [ 2073 LOW LEVEL OF LUBRL OIL]
(5) Set the drain plug (D and place the required amount of lubrication oil in the tank.
I i
(6) Press reset key [ j
to release the alarm.
I
I
;
i
H
1
2
i
k
L
T€
;; of broken cut-off tool detector operation

Refer to section 13-4 and confirm the operation of the broken cut-off tool detector.
Confirmation of parts ejection detector operation

Refer to section 13-23 and confirm the operation of the parts ejection detector.
I I
12-22
i
.1
13= Speciflcatioiis and handling of optional accessories

This chapter describes the specifications and handling of optional accessories that can be installed on
C this machine. When installing one of the optional accessories, make sure the relevant items in this
chapter are well understood before operation.
This chapter has been prepared in a format to supplement the operation manual of main machine.
Thus, refer to the operation manual for items not mentioned in this chapter. If the details in this chapter
and the operation manual for the main machine are duplicated, the details of this chapter will take
priority.
13-1 Single bar feeder [323]

il Summary
----------
This is a single bar feeder with 3 types of tubes.
11Specification
• Tube: Inner diameter <j>6.5 mm
Inner diameter <j>l 1.7 mm
Inner diameter <j)25.0 mm
• Applicable bar length: - 3.67 m (12 feet)
H Handling
A WARNING
® Be sure to perform thefollowing 3 items of operations in the emergency stop state or the
main breaker OFF state (Q).
1
* When the push rod @ora bar ®is inserted in a bar tube tube, do not look into the bar
tube.
•When the rope @is stretched, be sure to tighten the knob screw @surely tofix the rope
@ before starting operation. :
:
1
0 How to stretch rope
||; (1) Tie and wind the rope © round the small pulley © and tie the end of the rope © to the tip
:
of the weight hook (4). !
II (2) Tie and wind the rope © round the large pulley © and tie the end of the rope © to the
joint ring @ via the intermediate pulleys © and ©.
f
(3) Attach the joint ring © to the vane © of the push rod ©.
(4) Tighten the knob screw © to fix the rope © and attach the weight © to the weight hook
© . Decide the number of weights suitably depending on the thickness and length of a bar.
13-1
1
1
:
:!
:
;
r|:
!
:S <C>AMgameiit of bar tube
(1) Loosen the screws (D, (Q), ©, and ©.
(2) Align the center of each bar tube vertically with the vertical adjustment screws © and ©.
(3) Tighten the screws (D, CD, ©, and ©.
(4) Move the bar stands © and @ back and forth to align the bar tube roughly with the center
of the main spindle.
(5) Loosen the screw © and align the center of the bar tube in the back and front direction
with the back and front adjustment screw ©.
(6) Tighten the screw ©.
<C> Selection of bar tube

I There are 3 bar tubes provided. Select a bar tube suitably according to the following procedure
depending on the thickness of a bar. ;
(1) Loosen the screw © and the knob screws (7) and ©.
(2) Move the stopper shaft © according to the bar tube to be selected and tighten the notch
aligning screw © of the stopper shaft @.
(3) Press in the tube holder © until it touches the screw © and tighten the knob screw @.
i (4) Move the tube holder © according to the bar tube to be selected and tighten the knob
(5)
screw (7).
Attach the joint ring @ to the vane © of the push rod © in the selected bar tube. :
s
I
AWARNING
® Be sure to stop the machine before starting inspection and adjustment of the machine.
® Turn the door interlock key switch -ff - OFF ((f)), open the door, and then start the
following 3 items of operations. Be sure to perform the operations under supervision of
the person in charge of management of the machine and pay attention to the movable
part of the machine.
11
<0 Supply of bar
(1) Lower the push rod © down to the back end of the bar tube and tighten the knob screw ©
to fix the rope ©.
(2) Loosen the knob screw © and pull out the tube holder © toward an operator.
(3) Draw in the push rod © with the rope ©, press the bar © whose end is chamfered to
about 60° to the center hole of the push rod ©, and insert the bar © into the bar tube.
(4) Press in the tube holder © until it touches the screw © and tighten the knob screw ©. V
(5) Attach a cut-off tool to T100 of the gang tool post.

»;<y
13-2
!
(8) Turn the door interlock key switch on the machine operation panel OFF ( Q ) under
the headstock room.
(9) Press the jog key to select the jog mode.
(10) Press the axis direction selection key p*]
to feed the X axis to the neighborhood of XO.O
(absolute coordinate).
(11) Draw in the rope @ so as to prevent the push rod © from separating from the bar ©,
insert the bar © into the main spindle, and press it slightly against the side of the cut-off
tool via the guide bushing.
(12) Tighten the knob screw © so as to prevent the force of the load (5) from applying to the
cut-off tool suddenly and stretch the rope little by little.
O Adjustment of barstock absenceswitch

(1) Set the Zl axis at the main collet close position (program reference point) on the program.
(2) Insert the push rod © into the main spindle until the tip of the push rod © reaches the
(3)
(4)
location at a distance of about 10 mm from the main collet.
Loosen the set screw © of the dog @.
Press the dog @ against the lever © so that the barstock absence switch operates at the
i
aforementioned location of the push rod and tighten the set screw ©. When the barstock
absence switch operates, the barstock absence indicator lamp •pii.f on the machine op¬ :
eration panel lights.
i
O Treatment for remnant barstock
AWARNING
•In the operation of (6), you may get hurt in hand at the end of the remnant barstock. i
Wear a protective means (gloves, etc.) before starting operation.
(1) Move the push rod © backward and tighten the knob screw © to fix the rope ©.
t (2) Press the jog key pvT| to select the jog mode.
(3) Press the axis direction selection key |ÿ*| to feed the Zl axis to the neighborhood of ZO.O
II (absolute coordinate).
(4) Press the main collet open key |ÿ|to open the collet.
(5) Let the remnant barstock protrude from the end face of the main spindle cap about 50 mm
and press the main collet close key to close the collet.
(6) By pressing the end of the remnant barstock strongly by one finger of your right hand,
press the main collet open key [|p| by your left hand to open the collet. In this case, the
remnant barstock is flicked backward (on the left) the main spindle.
i
13-3
as r
••••)
I
'
)b it 1
I I ;
;;
: l
11 \\
i ;
j
! S
Mi:! J
1
i
:
i;
i'i
m i oo Y io y <o Y N
it CM OJ A CM A c\j A eg
It
||
I I
CM
CM
• l d
!I-
1
CM
O
f
i
CM
>
i ' O
I 1
o
I
fry
=5 "3 BT
•ÿi,;
T1 co Y
°
<MA<MAOOAOOAOO
Y CM
: i
1 CO
$
I N
•f i!
ID g3
©
to
I
i
-NT
II
if
1 - 00 I V:
I
1 i
$
M
I
> I
\ 1,
0
! i'i
TO
&
' //
N *T J*
JL .
E3=l
«•:.
i
53 5 a
:l
' :}
: [
1 O
|i { CM I oo T I in I <D N Y CD Y O) Y ° CM
1 ili1;
I
! li
I 1
I: I Ilf.
H;
rv?,
:
t: 13-4
I I
l
13-2 Leakage breaker [40440]
The main power supply breaker is changed to a leakage breaker.
i;
t; * Rated sensitivity current: 30 mA
8
I 13-3 Chip conveyor j
:!
© This is a hinge steel belt type chip conveyor only for curled long chips (50 mm or more). The auto¬
S' matic interval operation and mutual operation are available. Please prepare a chip tank by the user.
i:
* The following 4 types of chip conveyors are available in the machine. Select one of them according
to the usage.
• Chip conveyor, hinge type [42401]: By Tsubakimoto Mayflan i
» Chip conveyor, hinge type [42431]: By Shiroyama Kiko
This conveyor cannot be used together with a long parts ejector with guide tube [42472, !
42472A].
9 Chip conveyor, hinge type, long version [42402]: ... By Tsubakimoto Mayflan
9 Chip conveyor, hinge type, long version [42432]: ... By Shiroyama Kiko
This conveyor is designed to eject long products outside the machine in combination with a
long parts ejector with guide tube [42472, 42472A],
I
>r 1
* Conveyable chip shape: Curled long chips of 50 mm or more (powdery chips and fine
I • Chip conveying rate:

chips impossible)
15 L/hour (cast converted value)
1
O Power lamp
1 If the machine enters the machine ready state when the connector © is connected, the chip
conveyor is energized and the power lamp © lights.
1 O Automatic interval operation
When the start (FORWARD) button (4) is pressed, the machine starts the automatic interval
operation. When the stop (STOP/RESET) button © is pressed, the machine stops the automatic
:
interval operation.
O Manual operation t
While the REVERSE button © is pressed, the machine performs the reverse operation. When
I the REVERSE button © is released, the machine stops the reverse operation. ;i
© Emergency stop [Only 42401 and 42402]
In any of the above cases, to stop the operation, press the emergency stop button ©. To release
the emergency stop, turn the emergency stop button © clockwise.
13-5
.
U?
i
:
i 1
I
f;
u
I
;
I
::
:
1 .
a
:
1
I
_
!
[ ©
r -
i j CUD1
D t eses
S/7
r- 1
I
:
I
: i ! [
l
I
: :: im
TP:
jast Li
l. •
I
1
.
.
: 253141516 4 I 3 I 2 Y 5
$ i
i !
CAUTION
i
I i
I.; - POWER
\1
I & i FORWARD REVERSE \STOP
§
n WE* PARSS
I f f§
II
I
'
I! i
II :
i 13-6
.
1 4
1
!1
1 !i,
AWARNING I
:
•To adjust the interval timer, open the door of the chip conveyor control panel.
Be sure to adjust the interval timer in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF f I
state (Qf !
1
AS
;
!;
i OSetting of operation time and stop time of interval operation
Use the interval timer (shown in the drawing on the right) in the control panel for setting.
• Operation time (orange indicator): 1.2 seconds to 300 hours (initialization: 2 minutes)
Use the ON setting dial for setting.
• Stop time (green indicator): 1.2 seconds to 300 hours (initialization: 5 minutes)
a Use the OFF setting dial for setting.

The time setting range of the timer can be switched by the graduation numeral change-over
switch, ON time unit change- over switch, and OFF time unit change-over switch.
jl{ Operation time = numeral indicated by orange indicator * display time in ON time unit dis¬
•:
play window
i
1 Stop time = numeral indicated by green indicator * display time in OFF time unit dis¬ f
play window
OFF display OFF time unit

i
(On when chip conveyor is OFF)''"-* f display window
ON display EH
(On when chip conveyor is ON)'"' 1
ON '
gk OFF time unit
o
0.6 v
1
0.4 0.8
1.0
change-over switch
Graduation numeral
:
1 ON setting dial display window !
1 (orange indicator)
OFF setting dial OCFF
l.l ON time unit
display window
OCN
(green indicator)
Graduation numeralÿ ®s ON time unit
change-over switch change-over switch
I
NOTICE
f * The chip conveyor cannot always eject all chips outside the machine. Be sure to clean
|
||l the bottom of the chip tank periodically.
kk •When the chip conveyor is usedfor the interval operation, fine chips passing the belt 1
surface are accumulated between the belts or on the conveyor bottom plate, produce a
;
great resistancefor start-up, and cause the conveyor to stop. When the interval opera¬
tion is to be performed, set the timer according to the operation status. l
•For others, refer to the operation manual of the chip conveyor manufacturer.
is
13-7
:
:
:
13-4 Broken cut-off tool damage detector [42404]

*Standard for export machine
ill
This unit detects damage of a cut-off tool by mechanically detecting the existence of products after
cutting off by T100.
1
AWARNING
•Damage of a cut-off tool causes damage to the machine or a fire. Be sure to operate this
unit after the cutting-off process is performed.
® When the cutting-off process is performed at a tool position other than T100, this unit
does not function.
® Air pressure: 0.5 MPa (5 kg/cm2)

* Minimum product detection length: 5 mm
• Minimum product detection diameter:
— 4>2 mm
i * Detection load: 5.2 N (0.53 kg)
• Broken cut-off tool detection ON: M27 (HEAD1 side)
©
o|Q=>
®r
(1) Before the cut-off tool returns after the
cutting-off process is completed, the
;<©
'
otffcv! i
-jQ@
SH unit instructs broken cut-off tool de- 111
! •gyp-*
tection ON (HEAD1 side, M27). ; TF a
(2) The detection probe (D swivels in the \\>
central direction of the guide bushing. ! Efn ss o@\-Ar/,
(3) When the cut-off tool is damaged, the ff » \
product is not cut off and remains in

the guide bushing. Therefore, the de-
1 !
tUa.™-! ©
© "S3
tection probe (D strikes the product / 2
and cannot move to the specified posi¬

© w 1
tion. If this occurs, put the machine
into the feed hold state. ©
(4) The broken cut-off tool detection
switch checks that the detection probe (D moves to the specified position and it is checked
that the cutting-off process is performed normally. If this occurs, the detection probe (T) is
returned to its original position and the machine goes to the next step.
13-8
1
I
check
NOTICE
•This unit may notfunction depending on the product shape. Before starting machining
of a product newly, be sure to check the operation of this unit.
•This unit is a safety device. Be sure to check the operation thereof once every 6 months.
(1) Remove the T100 tool in the main breaker OFF ( Q ) state.
(2) Set the coolant nozzle toward the guide bushing.
(5) Press the jog key pvT] to select the jog mode.
(6) Press the main collet open key psp| to open the collet and insert a bar into the guide
bushing until it protrudes about 20 mm from the end face thereof. i
(7) Press the main collet close key to close the collet.
(8) Press the MDI key|ÿ|to select the MDI mode and press the program key j(3)}| to display
the program (MDI) screen. !
(9) Press the HEAD1 key |ggj to select the HEAD1 mode. ?
(10) Key in and execute the following program.

T100 ;
GOO X-2.0 ;
M2 7 ;
(11) Detect an error in the cutting-off process and check that the machine is in the feed hold
1
state. If the machine does not enter the feed hold state, execute the following adjustment
of the detection probe (T). ,
of detection probe I
A WARNING
;•
s •Be sure to perform this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF state
(O)'
•While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of a tool
I
:'Y
’’i
-
F (1)
(2)
(3)
Press the emergency stop button
into the emergency stop state.
Open the door of the cutting room.
Loosen the screws (D (2 pcs.).
on the machine operation panel to put the machine ;
I
(4) Fit and adjust the length of the detection probe CD to the edge position of the T100 tool.
(5) Fit the position of the end of the detection probe CD in the direction of the Z1 axis to the
overall length of the product and turn and adjust the detection probe ®. i
V 13*9
'
!
;
I
:
(6) Tighten the screws © (2 pcs.).

(7) Execute the “Operation check” described in the previous section.
;
message
When damage of a cut-off tool is detected or an error is found in the broken cut-off tool detector,
i one of the following alarm messages will be displayed on the screen. If this occurs, the machine
enters the feed hold state and the main spindle motor, sub-spindle motor, power-driven tool motor,
and coolant motor are stopped.
:
1006 CUT-OFF TOOL BROKEN
V
Damage of a cut-off tool is detected, or the broken cut-off tool detection op¬
eration is not completed within the predetermined time, or the broken cut-off
tool detection switch (SQ252) is disconnected.
1007 SQ252 SIG IS SHORT-CIRCUITED

A signal of the broken cut-off tool detection switch (SQ252) is short-cir¬
cuited.
1»
1010 SQ2S1 SIG IS SHORT-CIRCUITED
11
; A signal of the broken cut-off tool detection return end switch (SQ251) is
1 short-circuited. i
1024 T100 IS NOT SELECTED

I
I
|| Broken cut-off tool detection ON (HEAD1 side, M27) is instructed when
i T100 is not selected.
I %
1
il Program example
[HEAD1 side]
01234 ; Program No.
M131 ;
;;v
G99 G40 G97 M0 9 ;
M03 S500 ?
Mil ;
GOO ZO TOO ; g
G28 VO ;
!
---
M2 00 ;
M20 ;
it M10 ?
T100 ; Selection of cut-off tool
M2 7 7 Broken cut-off tool detection ON
GOO Z-0.5 TOO M2 5 ;
G28 U0 7
13-10
1
;v
13-5 Parts conveyor [42412]
This is a conveyor for ejecting products picked up by the parts separator type B [42414] outside the
machine.
* Maximum conveying capacity: 4*20*150 mm

* Belt width: 90 mm (with frame)
• Belt speed: 5 m/min (50 Hz), 6 m/min (60 Hz)
• Drive motor: . 25 W
: :
When the parts separator type B is used, this unit operates for about 18 seconds and then automati¬
cally stops in link motion with the parts separator B retract command (HEAD2 side, Ml 8).
Issue the following commands to operate the unit independently.
• Parts conveyor ON: M84 (common to HEAD1 and HEAD2 sides)
The conveyor will stop about 18 seconds after the M84 command is
issued.
* Parts conveyor OFF: M85 (common to HEAD1 and HEAD2 sides)
belt exchange method

The conveyor belt is an expendable. Exchange the conveyor belt according to the following proce¬
dure.
i
AWARNING
® Be sure to perform this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF state
(O)-
:
1 :
1 NOTICE
:
ll
Open the door of the cutting room in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF
1 (1)
state ( O )ÿ
8 (2) Loosen the screws © (2 pcs.) and remove the cover
(3) Remove the connector © from the receptacle.
(4) Loosen the screws © (4 pcs.) and remove the screws © (4 pcs.). I
i (5)
(6)
Loosen the knob screws © (2 pcs.) and remove the cover ©.
Loosen the screws © (4 pcs.) and remove the receiver ©.
(7) Loosen the screws @ (4 pcs.) and remove the chute ©.
(8) Pull out the parts conveyor © outside the machine.
II (9) Loosen the screws © (4 pcs.) and remove the guide ©.
s 13-11
#P
I
I
;
'ÿ
i
7 :
y :
;
i
(10) Exchange the conveyor belt (3).
(11) Attach the guide (D with the screws (D (4 pcs.).
(12) Insert the parts conveyor ©> in the machine body.
(13) Attach the chute © with the screws @ (4 pcs.).
(14) Attach the receiver (2) with the screws (D (4 pcs.).
v
(15) Attach the cover (D with the knob screws (D (2 pcs.).
I (16) Attach the screws © (4 pcs.) and tighten the screws © (4 pcs.).
I (17) Attach the connector (7) to the receptacle.
(18) Attach the cover © with the screws (6) (2 pcs.).
H NOTICE
•Depending on the use condition, chips may be adhered onto the conveyor belt (3) or
chips are accumulated in the oil pan @ Be sure to clean the conveyor belt (3)and the oil
pan &every dav before starting operation.
112131415
n
6
ft
1
7
8
i
e J
®
7
r
!
:
* JR
T
h z;:z-;£75V; 5 II
1
8 19
L
1 10Y1 1 Y 12Y 13Y14Y15
i;
A
1
u n
I
:
/' \ !
IE o 7
I
13-12
y
13-6 Parts separator type B [42414]
This unit collects products picked up by the sub-collet or parts separator type A [42415] and ejects
__
them to the Stocker or parts conveyor [42412].
1? \
» Maximum applicable product outer diameter: .... <j>20 mm

• Maximum applicable product length: 150 mm
i
fj Command
* Parts separator B advance: M17 (HEAD2 side)
• Parts separator B retract: ... M18 (HEAD2 side)
|
V
&
(1)
(2)
When the back machining is completed, the back attachment returns to its reference point.
By the parts separator B advance command (HEAD2 side, Ml 7), the chute (D moves
forward up to the center portion of the sub-spindle.
sr
(3) By the sub-collet open command, a product is ejected onto the chute (D and rolls and
drops on the plate (2).
1,' (4) By the parts separator B retract command (HEAD2 side, Ml 8), the chute (D moves back¬
ward. In this case, a product is pressed on the plate (D by the scraper (D and collected in
V the stocker or the parts conveyor ®.
--S.
| rfe \
2 13 14 \\\\
XY ! \v,
N !
\v ;
ZX---
*»
1 'j-~ % J
I!
% I
; % % .
ft «
c i :
|
1 t!
!
I
I
[
s
J-=!
! ! s .
:
13-13 !
I
-
!
I
H
message
i When a machine error or a program error occurs in relation to this unit, one of the following alarm
1
messages will be displayed on the screen. If this occurs, the machine enters the feed hold state and
the main spindle motor, sub-spindle motor, power-driven tool motor, and coolant motor are
: stopped.
1123 LACK OF COMMAND M18

When the parts separator type B moves forward, an attempt is made to move
I
the Y axis or Z2 axis in the jog mode.
a
fS
1127 Y OR Z2 POSITION IS WRONG

a
An attempt is made to execute the parts separator B advance command
(HEAD2 side, M17) when the Y axis is set to Y<195.0 or the Z2 axis is not at
the reference point.
example I
[HEAD2 side] 1
;
MO 5 ; 1
-- -- --
1
TOO ;
G28 VO WO ;
ai
Ml 7 ; Parts separator type B advance
Mil ;
G04 U1.0 ;
if
Ml 8 ; Parts separator type B retract 1
I
M2 7 ; Parts ejection detection ON -
I
i 1
$;?a
i
! I
:
13-14
13-7 Parts separator type A [42415] 1
:
This unit collects products which are difficult to be picked up by the sub-collet. Products are picked I
up by this unit mounted to the back attachment and collected into the Stocker or parts conveyor
[42412] by the parts separator type B [42414],
I1
!
® This unit cannot be used with overhang tool adapter [311-01, 02, 331-01]for gang tool ||
post
• Maximum applicable product outer diameter: .... <j>20 mm

• Maximum applicable product length: 45 mm
Command :
I *
*
Parts separator A product pick up: .
Parts separator A product ejection:
Ml 17 (HEAD2 side)
Ml 18 (HEAD2 side)
:
415161718 J:
i \
!. 1 'A\\
5 2
J
I 3
!
© 1
iI;
;
I L._„ir J N% »* 1
i
%
i :
% l
; %
K
1 !
jirtL] «
1
8
1
I [
L
©
•> «
I
::
1 i
f
X
B:
C
: M
! s
n
I
!
:
I
r :
ffi
£5S 13-15
X1
;
,
11
1 ,
!
(1) The back attachment waits at the reference point.

(2) At the same time with start of the cutting-off process, the back attachment moves forward
up to the product picking- up position (Z 258.5) by the parts separator A forward com¬
mand (HEAD2 side, Ml 17).
'
(3) The cutting-off process is completed and the cut-off product is collected by the parts sepa¬
; rator type A (D.
(4) By the parts separator A product ejection command (HEAD2 side, Ml 18), the back at¬
tachment and the parts separator type B perform a series of operations of product collec¬
tion.
• The back attachment returns to its reference point.
• The chute (D of the parts separator type B moves forward up to the central portion of the
;
sub-spindle and presses and opens the bucket (D of the parts separator type B. i
• The product is ejected onto the chute (D and rolls and drops on the plate (6).
• The chute (D moves backward and the product is pressed by the scraper (D on the plate (D
and collected by the Stocker or the parts conveyor (9).
:
. _ 320 _ i
;|i"
260
1=1
: U —ri!il
:
nH
;/
!\ i
'LL
AWARNING
•Be sure toperform this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFFstate (Q>).
•While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of a tool.
rjifeOAiitlOW %
• When using the parts separator type A, be sure to remove the receiver (?) of the parts I
separator type B.
11
NOTICE
..Hi
state ( O )•
:
(2) Attach the parts separator type A (2) to the back attachment with the screws ® (4 pcs.).
(3) Loosen the screws (7) (2 pcs.) and remove the receiver (4) of the parts separator type B.
I
13-16
1!
• When attaching this unit, display the keep relay conversational setting screen (see Section 7- :
17) and change the the following keep relay. When removing this unit, return the following
keep relay to the standard specification.
Item Standard specification When 42415 attached
USE SEPARATOR A NO YES
• When attaching this unit, change the HEAD2 side parameter No. 1320 (Z) with reference to
Section 7-23. When removing this unit, return the aforementioned parameters to the standard
specification. Note that the standard specification parameters vary with the tool holder at¬
tached to the gang tool post.
O Parameter changes
Tool holder of gang tool post Standard specification When 42415 attached
5-station tooiholder [421 -01 , 421 -91] +304500
+259000
4-station tooiholder {421 -04] +300500
Alarm messages
When a machine error or a program error occurs in relation to this unit, one of the following alarm
\
messages will be displayed on the screen. If this occurs, the machine enters the feed hold state and the
main spindle motor, sub-spindle motor, power-driven tool motor, and coolant motor are stopped.
1130 LACK OF COMMAND G28 W0
. When the parts separator type A is used, an attempt is made to execute the Y axis
movement command in the state that the Z2 axis is not at the reference point. I:
3012 SEPARATOR KEEP RELAY NO SET :
:
: An attempt is made to execute the parts separator A product pick-up com¬
mand (HEAD2 side, Ml 17) when “USE SEPARATOR A” on the keep relay
'
:
:ÿ
conversational setting screen is NO.
Program example
gp
mm [HEAD1 side] [HEAD2 side]
:
G99 MO 3 S ;
T100 ;
_ _
;
M500 ; M500 ;
GOO X
M510 ;
Z Tl ; Ml17 ; — Parts separator A product pick-up
command
G01 X-2.0 F0.02 ; M510 ;
.:;j M520 ;
M80 ;
M520 ; — Waiting for HEADI side cutting-
off process
. • (Barstock absence detection process) Ml 17 ;
M81 ;
— Parts separator A product ejection
command
M99 ; M99 ;
13-17
|
II :
I
13-8 Barstock gripping unit [42418]

1f
This unit is mounted halfway between the guide bushing and the main spindle. This is a unit for
holding a bar so as to prevent it from moving in the axis direction (the direction of the Z1 axis)
when the main collet is opened and used for machining a long bar which is longer than the head-
stock stroke (205 mm).
I
The one-chucking stroke is 195 mm.
I
I
• Applicable bar outer diameter: 44 mm to 4>20 mm .
1I
• Grip ON:.. M12 (HEAD1 side)
* Grip OFF: Ml 3 (HEAD1 side) i
' :ÿ
I
When the unit is not used, move the main unit of the barstock gripping unit to the upper side of the
: machine according to the following procedure. 1

A WARNING
: fO> .
t§
NOTICE
®
Before starting this work, return the Z1 axis to its
T 1
1
I
:
reference point beforehand. \ 2
,
(1) Open the door of the cutting room in the emer¬ r~i n
I gency stop state or the main breaker OFF state
\
I
(2)
(3)
(Q).
Loosen the screws (D.
Move the gripping unit (D to the upper side of
\ r bW \
\ IV
1
11
the machine as far as it will go.

(4) Tighten the screws CD to fix the barstock grip¬ 'w \t 111
iUU i
(5)
ping unit (D,
When returning the gripping unit| ( ) to the use n J
n
position, move the gripping unit (2) to the lower -3?/,/ I
1| side of the machine as far as it will go according
to the same procedure and fix it.
1 n n
13-18
;
1
B
{
• When using this unit, change the HEAD1 side parameter No. 1320 (Z) with reference to |
Section 7.23. When this unit is not used, return the aforementioned parameter to the standard
specification.
O Parameter changes _
Parameter No. Standard specification When 42418 used i
HEAD1 side parameter No, 1320 (Z) +205500 +195500 :
|
messages
main spindle motor, sub-spindle motor, power-driven tool motor, and coolant motor are stopped.

When the main spindle is rotating, an attempt is made to execute the grip ON
command (HEAD1 side, Ml 2).
:
An attempt is made to execute the main spindle rotation command (HEAD!
side, M03, M04) in the grip ON state.
,
;
I example
f
| [HEAD1 side]
& GOO Z150.0 ; Collet open position ® when the grip is changed
1 MO 5
G04
;
U0.1 ;
Main spindle stop
Dwelling 0.1 s
Grip ON I
i Ml 2
Mil
;
; Collet open
U GOO ZO ; Collet close position when the grip is changed
9 G120 Z150.0 ;
_
Setting of Z1 axis coordinate system when the grip is changed
Z: the value of Z at CD
!
1 M10 ; Collet close
M13 Grip OFF
MO 3 ; Forward rotation of main spindle
s
I * To the top of the program, command Zl-axis coordinate setting (G120 Z0).
:
I
1
1 I
ti
:S
13-19
:ÿ
:
r
;
I i
n
13-9 Tool setter [42421]
This unit automatically measures and sets the geometry offset in the center height direction (A axis,
B axis) of a tool of the gang tool post or turret in the machine. When a tool is attached to the gang
tool post or turret, and the unit is attached to the back attachment, and the measurement program is
executed, the geometry offset can be set simply.
I ;
NOTICE}
•For handling of the unit, see Section 10-6.
13-10Tool presetter [42422]

I: When this unit is used, the adjustment of diameter direction and center height of a tool to be at¬
tached to the turret and the adjustment of the overhang amount of the sleeve holder and a power-
driven tool can be made outside the machine.
NOTICE
•For handling of the unit, see Section 10-7.
•The unit cannot be used to adjust the angle adjustable cross drilling unit ER11 (421-55).
;
i
13-20
H ,
fj
&
is? 13-11 Parts Stocker base [42424]
:
%
This unit is a container for stocking products ejected by the parts conveyor [42412] outside the
machine and a base for installing the container. It is designed to install a general-purpose container
available in the market.
• Maximum external container dimensions: 362 x 230 x 110 mm (W x D x H)

'ÿ
:
:
I The unit can be changed the height A of the stacker (4) in the three stages (697 mm, 757 mm, 817
mm). When the unit is used in the machine, set A to 697 mm. The height changing procedure is as
i
shown below. i
i.
(1) Loosen the screws (D (4 pcs.).
(2) Fit the base (3) to the screw holes of the holder (3) and decide the desired height of the
holder (D. :
I (3) Fix the base (T) and the holder (D with the screws (2) (4 pcs.). |
1 rr:=r ~T=, \
I ni !:
362 230
/
i! 1h |
J!h
::i O
@08®
T1 "S.™
+
k
:
! ih :
r— =-T- !
l
\===
r:3r KZT
//
//
7/ /
//
o
[N
co
i ! I t|5j
k
3
N !:
in
!u: s :
TV u (O
<
lit :Ui 1: ;
..J3R
112 1314 15
NOTICE
/
•The unit cannot be used together with the long parts ejector with guide tube [42472, 1
I 42472AJ.
•Be sure to put the drain hose (§) into the coolant tank.
13-21 ];
.
— -r?
!i
.
i
I
i
Ih I
r
1 f~f -
13-12 Rotating beacon [42427], signal tower [42428]

i
This unit is a warning light installed on the machine to inform the operator of the operational status
of the machine.
'li)
O Rotating beacon [42427] (Note 1) i
• Lighting type: . Incandescent lamp, rotary flash 1
• Color: Red, yellow, green (optional selection of 1 to 3 colors)
?f
• Warning buzzer: ....Selection of valid or invalid (Note 2)
I
O' Signal tower [42428]
* Lighting type: LED, ON or OFF (selection, Note 3)
• Color: Red, yellow, green
• Waming buzzer: .... Selection of valid or invalid (Note 4)
;
AWARN1NG IIll
•Be sure to perform the operations of the following Notes 1 to 3 in the emergency stop jij
!: f state or the main breaker OFF state ((f)). For further details, refer to the electric I*
circuit diagram.
I
Note 1: When the [42427] is used, remove the short-circuit bridge between 250 and 0A of the
terminal block XT205 in the CNC cabinet.
1
Note 2: To make the buzzer of each color invalid, remove the short-circuit bridge of the terminal
block XT205 in the CNC cabinet. The short-circuit bridge corresponding to each color is i
as shown below.
Red: Between 251 and 251A
Yellow: Between 252 and 252A
Green: Between 253 and 253A
Note 3: (D For blinking
|
• Remove the short-circuit bridge between 250 and 0A of the terminal block XT205
:
in the CNC cabinet.
I
.
• Connect the brown lead wire of the signal tower to the wire No. 250 of the terminal 1
block XT205.
(2) For not blinking
• Do not remove the short-circuit bridge between 250 and 0A of the terminal block
XT205 in the CNC cabinet.
• Insulate the end of the brown lead wire of the signal tower with tape without con¬
necting it.
Note 4: To make each buzzer valid, set the keep relay K06-b2 to 1.
If
! if:
:
&
Is
13-22
conditions
I) Red
When an alarm is displayed on the screen (The following conditions are excluded.)
• Under the lighting conditions in Item II
* When Alarm 208 1 (CNC battery alarm) is displayed
When an alarm message is erased, the lamp goes off. For detailed alarm messages, see Section 11-7.
II) Yellow
When one of the following alarm messages is displayed
:
Alarm 2070: When the part counter counts up
Alarm 2074: When MOO is stopped due to barstock absence of the single bar feeder
Alarm 2075: When MOO is stopped due to no shelf bar of the automatic bar feeder (op¬
tional)
I
1
Alarm 2085: When the tool life management counter (optional) counts up
Alarm 2086: When the part number counter (optional) of the CNC manufacturer counts up
When an alarm message is erased, the lamp goes off. For detailed alarm messages, see Section 11-7.
III) Green
During automatic operation (Bar exchange of the automatic bar feeder is included.)
If NOTICE
• Under the one-color specification of red or yellow, the lighting condition of “Red” +
“Yellow” is set.
i®
A (mm )
Type
No. 1 co I or 2 colors 3 colors :
42427 1769 18 7 9 196 2 :
42428 19 17 j
r.
-------
man i ss&s --
! ! !1 j
I r : rr ::
__J51 »-
5
ul
yE=3 1 :
_J=3y
8!
y
:
< tzzzz
I :
I !
rtii
! T. r;n
r'
:
f ! - 1 1 ;
i
M, 1
L-.=J_ S
3 i
13-23
y
!
/
i
I
'
:
!
i
-r
;
13-13 Main spindle inner tube 11.7 mm specification [42445]
This specification suppresses rotation runout of a bar with a small diameter by attaching a guide
tube in the main spindle.
II
:
: • Inside diameter of inner tube: .... (j>l 1.7 mm 1

• Applicable bar diameter: d>4 mm to <j>8 mm (outside diameter of finger chuck <|>10 mm)
s
:
!
:
A WARNING
® Be sure to perform this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF state ((f)).
1
a
:
NOTICE 1||;
;
•Before starting this work, return the Zl axis to its reference point beforehand.
!
(1) Insert the guide tube (D in the sleeve (2) so that the guide tube (3) is set to the tapered
(2)
portion of the mouth of the sleeve (2).
Insert the guide tube (D and the sleeve (2) into the holder © on the back of the headstock
1
and tighten the screws CD surely to prevent the guide tube (3) from moving.
In this case, let the indexing position of the sleeve (2) face downward. Position the sleeve
(2) so that the split position of the periphery of the sleeve (2) is held by the screws (D.
;
I
Tiph! i ;§|
:fr
(
\
)
T
Split
CZTZ
. 1I
I
1 I 2 I 314 :
i_.T_.lJ
13-24
13-14 Main spindle inner lobe 6.5 mm [42446]
Summary
This specification suppresses rotation runout of a bar with a small diameter by attaching a guide
tube in the main spindle.
i
leaf son
« Inside diameter of inner tube: (j)6.5 mm I
• Applicable bar diameter: Max. <j>4 mm (outside diameter of finger chuck <f>5 mm)
A WARNING
•Be sure to perform this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFFstate ((f)).
NOTICE
•Before starting this work, return the Z1 axis to its reference point beforehand. .
(1) Insert the guide tube (3) in the sleeve (D so that the guide tube (D is set to the tapered
portion of the mouth of the sleeve (2).
(2) Insert the guide tube (3) and the sleeve (D into the holder ® on the back of the headstock
and tighten the screws (D surely to prevent the guide tube (3) from moving.
i In this case, let the indexing position of the sleeve (D face downward. Position the sleeve
1 (D so that the split position of the periphery of the sleeve (D is held by the screws ®. T:
1I
71
/
r ri i
\ T
czvz ; k> !
Split
1 I2I3I 4
in
13-25
i
I
i
\
1
1
!
13-15 Coolant unit 0.8 MPa [42458]
Summary
:
This unit supplies coolant to a tool of the turret at high pressure. The unit can be used effectively to
remove chips from the cutting point during cutting when chips cling to the tool easily. An oil hole
tool can be used together with the oil hole drill unit [42461].
:
j • Maximum coolant pressure: 0.78 MPa (8 kg/cm2) 1

• Theoretical coolant discharge amount: ... 12.0 L/min (50 Hz) 14.4 L/min (60 Hz)
• Coolant supply tool No.: T1200, T140O, T1600, T1800
• Applicable tool unit: This unit can be applied to the tool units indicated below.
With respect to tool units to which a plurality of tools can
be attached, applicable ID Nos. are shown below. The
nozzle © to be used varies with each tool unit. Numbers
1-4 are marked on the nozzle ©. The numbers of
nozzles © to be used are shown below.
; Ii Name Machine No. ID No. Number of pipe (p
5-station tooihoider (ÿ 12 mm) 421-02
T**33, 36, 39 2
3-station tooihoider (ÿ 1/2 inch) 421-92
; Standard wedge type (ÿ 16 mm) 221-01
1
Standard wedge-free type (ÿ 16 mm) 221-03
Cross drill unit ER16 221-50
3
Cross tapping unit ER11 221-51
2-spindle cross drilling unit ER16 421-51
High-speed 2-spindle cross drilling unit ER18 421-52
T**42, 44, 46 4 1
• Coolant unit 0.8 MPa ON: . Ml 25 (common to HEAD1 and HEAD2 sides)
• Coolant unit 0.8 MPa OFF: Ml 26 (common to HEAD1 and HEAD2 sides)
of nozzle
11
A WARNING 11
(O)- II
® While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of a tool.
11
S!
NOTICE I!
•Before starting this work, move the turret to the exchange position of the tool unit (see
Section 10-5-2) beforehand.
i To the attaching hole of the ring (2) at the location where the nozzle (§)is not attached,
®
be sure to attach the plug ©

! :
I:ÿ!
13-26
@® 1
b 4
U©
y'Q°j "ST 5
7
3 ;
;
®©
© F
1
I
rr 2 18 13 16
;
(1) Remove the plug ® at the location where the nozzle (D is attached from the ring (2).
(2) Attach the nut (3) and the bushing (8) to the nozzle © and insert the nozzle into the ring (2).
(3) Tighten the nut (D slightly.
(4) Attach the holder (7) with the screw ©.
Ui (5) Tighten the nut (3).
I
I
:
i
:
r
:
j
lit
i
,
I
-
13-27
'ml:
III ;
* :
I
1
1 I
: {
1
I
of suction filter of coolant pump
A WARNING
"i ® Be sure to perform this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF state (Q)).
Ui
® Clean the filter when the indicator of the vacuum gauge d)points to the yellow or red II
portion shown in the drawing when the coolant pump (T) operates. The suction filter is
i clogged. Clogging of the suction filter may cause damage to the coolant pump. Be sure
to inspect the vacuum gauge (2) of the coolant pump (T) every day.
:
s (1) Loosen the plug (D and wait for about 10 seconds.
: (2) Loosen the plug (3).
(3) Turn and remove the cover (4). The suction filter can be seen inside. ||
(4) Clean the suction filter. |
1
(5) Attach the suction filter.
(6) Attach the cover (4).
112 13 14 ;
:
I
i 1 Yellow
A-
1
K
V Red
40
\ Blue
cm H8
[
: I
jpif
13-16 Coolant oil flow sensor [42459]
!ÿ
This unit is a safety device for monitoring the discharge amount of coolant and putting the machine
into the feed hold state when the discharge amount of coolant is not sufficient.
A WARNING
®
If coolant is not supplied sufficiently to the cutting point, there is a possibility of a fire.
Be sure to check the operation (see Section 12-2-4) of the coolantflow rate detector once
every 6 months.
H;
13-28
i
13-17011 hole drill unit [42401]
This unit is a sleeve and a piping device for front drilling using an oil hole tool together with the
coolant unit 0.8 MPa [42458],
I
.
I • Collet: ER20 (sealing disk DS/ER20 used together)
• Applicable tool type: Straight shank tool
• Coolant supply position: Shank, end face
$ * Maximum tool length: . 148 mm
I • Maximum tool groove length:
• Maximum drilling capacity: ...
60 mm
<j)13 mm in diameter
1 • Maximum drilling depth: 50 mm
1I *
8
Applicable sleeve holder:
Tool Nos. to be attached:
Single sleeve holder for deep drilling [221-11]
T1200, T1400, T160Q, T1800
a:t NOTICE
® Be sure to use the unit together with the coolant unit 0.8 MPa [42458].
® The unit cannot be used together with the parts separator type A [42415],
Select the sealing disk DS/ER20 (3) according to the shank diameter of a tool
_
®
f ;
&
I 1 2 A 3 I 4 15 X 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 A 10 11121 13)
1 I
$
-
1 ©\ \
!ÿ!
itSiSz:
li max .68. Si- -5
/
'W. V _z. l I
/
rz ==:s=ss=TIZJ |
!
v;K o rr n I
r-%' V \
In! o
/<,
A *?/
1
(jmLi
! V
A
LLÿ. i
1UZ5
13-29
V"
I
1
;
:
A WARNING 1
•Be sure to perform this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF state ((f)).
® While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge
of a tool
! r\ NOTICE
•Before starting this work, move the turret to the exchange position of the tool unit (see |||
Section 10-5-2) beforehand.
11 II
(1) Remove the nozzle or plug for the coolant unit 0.8 MPa [42458] at the location where the V
pipe CD is attached from the ring (see Section 13-16). I
(2) Attach the plate © to the sleeve holder (D with the screws (D (2 pcs.). In this case, coat a
liquid gasket on the contact surfaces of the sleeve holder (D and the plate ©.
!
(3) Attach the sleeve © to the sleeve holder © with the screws © (2 pcs.). 1
(4) Insert the collet © into the sleeve ©, attach the sealing disk ® to the oil hole tool ©, and I
attach the cap @ to the sleeve ©.
1
(5) Attach the sleeve holder ® to the turret. •S
(6) Attach the pipe © to the ring for the coolant unit 0.8 MPa [42458] (see Section 13-16).
(7) Attach the nut © and the bushing (Q) to the pipe ® and insert the pipe ® into the elbow
ft
u
(8) Tighten the nut ©.
i
I
If
: i
11
;
13-30
«
13-13 Long parts elector with guide tube [42472, 42472A],
Parts stopper [42479]
This unit has a guide tube installed in the sub-spindle and ejects products outside the machine after
:
back machining. The push-out method is used to eject products outside the machine, so that the unit is
suited to products in a simple shape for allowing products to pass through the guide bushing smoothly.
11
r
NOTICE
•The unit cannot he used together with the parts ejection detector [53409] and chip con¬
veyor hinge type [42401, 42431].
I
|
1
i -AeAtmow;
® Select the inside diameter of the tube so as to prevent products from overlaying each
other in the bushing and guide tube.
i'¬
• Applicable product outside diameter:
• Guide tube inside diameter D (mm):
* Applicable product length

....
<j>4 to <j>20 mm [42472]
4>4 to <p!6 mm [42472A]
5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 11.0, 12.0, 13.0, 14.0,
15.0, 16.0, 17.0, 19.0,21.0
[42472]: ....65 to 600 mm (5.0 D
125 to 600 mm (17.0 D £ 21.0)
36.0)
ll
II [42472A]: .60 to 600 mm (5.0 E> £ 11.0)
120 to 600 mm (12.0 D 17.0)
of Song parts ejector with guide tube
AWARNiNG 1
® Be sure to perform this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF state ((f)).
® While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of a tool
3 Y 4 Y 5 Ye
1
2
<r?
\ /
I
1
*
1||
+ f ;
* 13-31
I t'1 ;
'll
\
i
1
;!f
i
i
:
!
!
-
i 7 A 8 I 9 Y 101 1 1 Y 121 13 14 A 1 5X 1 6X 17I 1 8X 1 9
h
;
an
I
K7B 17
i
i
BS
-HHT'TT
=rr=UUy tfc 4- s-
i
frs£l£3ÿ----"3
hf
S77
20
1 h
J
21122
nd
!
=3= RR if
E£ zrrrd jfel 0ÿ
|
j =-EZE
7___Ll
,
M--I
state ( O )ÿ
(2) Loosen the screws (2) (4 pcs.) and remove the cover (X).
(3) Loosen the knob screws CD (2 pcs.) and remove the cover ®. I
(4) Loosen the screws (D (4 pcs.) and remove the cover (5).
(5) Loosen the screw © and remove the cover (D-
(6) Remove the cap (7) and the sleeve (Q). To attach or remove the cap (7), hook a hook span¬
ner wrench on the cap and insert the handle into the toggle holder.
(7) Loosen the screws @ (3 pcs.) and remove the holder ©.
(8) Remove the nut ©.To attach or remove the nut ©, hook a hook spanner wrench on the
cap and insert the handle into the toggle holder.
13-32
i
i-
(9) Remove the part push rod. (See Section 10-4- 1.)
(10) Attach the special bushing © or © for the long parts ejector to the sleeve @. The bush¬
ings © and © vary with the inside diameter thereof in the shape.
(11) Insert the sleeve ©, the spring ©, and the collet (D into the sub-spindle and tighten the
cap (7).
(12) Attach the holder © with the screws © (3 pcs.).
(13) Insert the sleeve © or © into the holder © with the split portion up. In this case, fit the
holder © to the end faces of the sleeves © and Use the sleeves © and © suited to the
tubes © and ©.
(14) Insert the tubes © or © into the sleeve ©or© with the notch up to the stop ring position. :
The tubes © and © vary with the inside diameter thereof in the shape.
(15) Tighten the screws © (2 pcs.) to fix the tube © or ©.
(16)
(17)
Attach the cover (D with the screws (D (4 pcs.).
Attach the cover © with the knob screws (D (2 pcs.).
I
NOTICE
I
® The tubes ©and © vary with the inside diameter thereof in the shape. Use the sleeves 1
©and @suited to the tubes ©and ©
® The bushings ©and © vary with the inside diameter thereof in the shape as shown in V
!
the drawing below.
® Long parts ejection may not be available depending on the product shape.
co"
a (
i in
a
•9- 1
r
tv ‘
a
CM
; •e I
i
<M
58 30 60 35
-9
42472 42472A
I
-
1
f I
i I
-ÿ!
1
13-33
g&;
!
i
*1
of parts stopper
..
\
A WARNING
®Be sure to perform this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF state ( (© )•
• When the long parts ejector with guide tube [42472, 42472A] and the sub-spindle air
blower [42475] are used together, there is a possibility that a product jumps outfrom the
m
machine by compressed air Mowing into the guide tube. Be sure to attach the parts
stopper [42479] to prevent a productfrom jumping outfrom the machine. If!
j
2a3a4I5I6I7X8X9 1 3jf 1 4
F
© I'i
I
: £ ©
''/
°—¥ÿ
§5)©
n
I!
|
13119
(Q
(1) Attach the plate (2) and the lid 0 to the cover 0 with the screws 0 (4 pcs.) and attach the
cover 0 to the pipe © or ®. Use the plate 0 suited to the tube 0 or ®.
- mai
(2) Tighten the screws © to fix the parts stopper © and the collar © or © to the end of the
ii
tube 0 or ©. Use the collars © and © suited to the tubes 0 and ©.
(3) Loosen the screws © (2 pcs.) and adjust the position of the guide © according to the
outside diameter of a product.
(4) Tighten the screws © (2 pcs.) to fix the guide @.
(5) Loosen the nut 0 and adjust the position of the roller 0 with the screw 0. Adjust the 1
position of the roller 0 according to the outside diameter of a product so that the product
can pass through the guide © smoothly and the roller 0 can have product holding force j
sufficient for compressed air. :
(6) Tighten the nut 0 to fix the screw ©.
;>
(7) Attach the cover 0 to the cover 0 with the screws @ (4 pcs.).
(8) Attach the cover © to the machine body with the screws © (4 pcs.).
4
13-34
I
1
1
fSj!*
13-19Sub-spindSe air blow unit [42475]
i:
i |
This unit supplies compressed air into the sub-spindle and blows it from the sub-collet to prevent
chips from entering inside the sub-spindle.
The unit includes two types of compressed air supply nozzles such as one when the unit is used
!ÿ
together with the parts separator B [42414] and the other when the unit is used together with the long
:
parts ejector with guide tube [42472, 42472A]. Use one of them according to the type to be used.
:
i
£
1
31
AWARNING
® When the unit is used together with the long parts ejector with guide tube [42472,
42472A] and the gap with the inside diameter of the guide tube is extremely narrow,
there is a possibility that a product jumps out infront or behind by compressed air blown
into the guide tube. Be sure to use the parts stopper [42479] together and adjust the air
pressure up to 0.5 MPa according to the use condition for safety operation.
0
Air pressure: 0.5 MPa (5 kg/cm2)
!
j * Air blow ON: .. M14 (HEAD2 side) £
• Air blow OFF: M15 (HEAD2 side)
[Attaching
f
AWARNING i
& ®Be sure to perform this work in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF state (0).
•While at work, take great care not to get hurt due to touching the edge of a tool. V
O When the parts separator B [42414] is used together
state ( O )-
(2)
(3)
Loosen the knob screws CD (2 pcs.) and remove the cover CD-
Loosen the screws © (4 pcs.) and remove the cover (D.
1
(4) Insert the tube © into the holder (5)
up to the stop ring position of the
2 Y 3 Y 4
1
)ÿ
tube (7).
(5) Tighten the screw © to fix the tube !
<D. <T=P
I
Connect the nylon tube (D to the el¬
(6)
bow®. HO 1
(7) Attach the cover ® with the screws :
© (4 pcs.).
(8) Attach the cover © with the knob i
screws © (2 pcs.). i
13-35
:
:
I
;
:
I
;*
I ! 516171819
:
i
— 1 LJ )r±
i
:
V
:
: y if
— I
'
aÿnBT-n
3 I*
m
i
!
: . Tl _J
5 Y 10Y 1 1 Yl2Yl3Y 14 Q-ÿ>
1
;s|,
i
rr ! L.J 1
;,.v
n v;
l
asffiZ
I
i
O When the long parts ejector with guide tube [42472, 42472A] is used together
I
state (Q).
(2) Loosen the knob screws 0 (2 pcs.) and remove the cover 0.
(3) Loosen the screws 0 (4 pcs.) and remove the cover 0.
(4) Insert the nozzle © into the plate © and tighten the screw © to fix it.
(5) Tighten the screws © (2 pcs.) to fix the plate ® to the holder 0.
(6) Connect the nylon tube ® to the elbow @.
S t (7) Attach the cover ® with the screws (4) (4 pcs.).
(8) Attach the cover 0 with the knob screws ® (2 pcs.).
I
I
13-36
I
13-20 Sub-spindle 1° indexing unit [42484]
This specification changes the indexing capacity of the sub-spindle from the standard indexing of :
15° (divided by 24) to indexing of 1° (divided by 360). When the specification is selected, an
indexing angle in units of 1° can be obtained.
• Sub-spindle minimum indexing angle: ... 1° (divided by 360)

i
• Sub-spindle indexing accuracy: ±1° t
Following the addresses C (absolute) and H (incremental), enter a value (decimal point) for the
........
indexing angle (HEAD2 side). The direction of forward rotation of the sub-spindle is the direction
of positive indexing angle.
......
\
....
• Sub-spindle indexing (absolute): G200 or G201 CDGD.O
(Example: Cl 24.0: Sub-spindle indexing 124° ) 1
• Sub-spindle indexing (incremental): ... G2G0 or G201 HUOD.O
(Example: H41.0: Sub-spindle indexing 41° )
* Sub-spindle unclamp: M59
NOTICE
•Use C (absolute)for thefirst main spindle indexing command. i
•The other instruction methods are the same as those under the standard specification.
! (See Section 8-15.)
I
message
main spindle motor, sub-spindle motor, power-driven tool motor, and coolant motor are stopped. fi
I 1132 LACK OF COMMAND M59

An attempt was made to execute the sub-spindle rotation command (HEAD2
I side, Mo3, M04) in the sub-spindle indexing state.

:
1 1134 LACK OF COMMAND M83

The sub-spindle indexing command is executed in the main / sub-spindle synchro¬
ill nous rotation control ON command (HEAD! (HEAD2) side, M82) valid state.
1
Its1
1145 SUB SPINDLE INDEX ALARM
The completion signal of the sub-spindle indexing command is not returned.
I
13-37
j
i
!
:
:
Program example
[HEAD2 side]
MO 3 S 2000 ;
Sub-spindle stop
.....
MO 5 ;
G 200 C 0 ; Sub-spindie indexing 0°
:
: G 200 C 18.0;
:
Sub-spindle indexing 18°
G 200 H 42.0 ; Sub-spindle indexing 60° (18+42=60)

:
M59 ; Sub-spindle indexing pin OFF
M03 S 2000 ;
K
I
i 4;
1
pi
II
I
II
13-38 II
I
13-21 CE conformed transformer version [42491]
_
This specification converts the commercial supply voltage (380, 400, 415 VAC) in Europe to the
input voltage (200 VAC) of this machine. Two systems of terminals for supply voltage (230 VAC)
for the peripheral equipment such as a bar feeder are provided.
• Input voltage: 3-phase 380 VAC

3-phase 400 VAC
—, Selection
« Output voltage:
3-phase 415 VAC — j
3-phase 200 VAC (for machine body: 1 system)

'ÿ
3-phase 230 VAC (for peripheral equipment: 2 systems)
JGL
: § r
in
sr 13
rh ;
—
i
XT IT ! S
AI
600 200
— 1
i
ojoo !
s f-
i
= ----- -
I
L §1'JE ::T31 jj==J :
iI
I ---—|; 1
! 1
*
n .. i ij
g
<o r m
=st-s~s=—=~==d= =
ri j.
j
|
13-39
•
I
;
II
I i
I
:
:
!
13-22 Parts ejection detector [53409]
A failure in picking up or ejection of products by the back attachment may cause a trouble such as
interference of the machine. This unit is a safety device for detecting a failure in picking up of
products or a failure in ejection of products by the back attachment and putting the machine into the
3
i feed hold state.
..jyCAunow aii
® The unit cannot be used together with the long parts ejector with guide tube [42472,
42472A].
;
• Maximum available product outside diameter: <j>20 mm

* Maximum available product length: 150 mm
I Command
• Parts ejection detection command : M27 (HEAD2 side) : .. Valid when the sub-collet is open
* Parts pick-up detection command : . M27 (HEAD2 side) : ... Valid when the sub-collet is closed
of switch position
n AWARNING
•Be sure to stop the machine
I
before starting inspection and adjustment of the machine.
•Turn the door interlock key switch -ÿ&- OFF ( Q ), open the door, and then start the
work. Be sure to perform the work under supervision of the person in charge of man¬
I agement of the machine and pay attention to the movable part of the machine.
i (1) Put the machine into the machine

ready state. Y Y
(2) Return the all axes to their refer¬
ence points.
2 3 4
1
(3) Turn the door interlock key switch
\
on the machine operation
Si
panel OFF ( Q ) under supervision
of the person in charge of manage¬
/
ment of the machine and open the
door of the cutting room.
(4) Loosen the knob screws (D (2 pcs.)
, and remove the cover (2).
: (5) Loosen the screws © (4 pcs.) and remove the cover (3).
;
13-40
(6) Loosen the screws © (2 pcs.).
(7) Press in the ejector pin © with your finger and fit the ejector pin © to the end face of the
cap ©.
(8) Adjust the proximity switch © in the longitudinal direction so that the warning lamp of
the proximity switch © goes off in this position.
(9) After adjustment, tighten the screws ©' (2 pcs.).
(10) Make the ejector pin © free and check that the warning lamp of the proximity switch ©
lights.
;
(11) Attach the cover © with the screws @ (4 pcs.). i
(12) Attach the cover © with the knob screws © (2 pcs.).
5 16 7 18
-CHi
r
S3 mi,
j-i PI fa u
1 I
1
nag !j
l 1
P-J
L
j
A NOTICE
Li
§ i
I •If this unit is not used when the long parts ejector with guide tube [42472, 42472A] is : I
used, fix the unit (9) in the position shown in the drawing below with the screws (§)(2
----
pcs.).
1|
@3
®
9
8
l
I
!
is— -L-L— ii— ii i
I nllP-Tl
FL
'
jW 1
i
To
!
13-41
P
:
;
l|
1
;
.
:
i
:
:
check
AGAUTION
•Before starting machining of a product newly, be sure to check the operation of this
unit.
® This unit is a safety device. Be sure to check the operation thereof once every 6 months.
• When a defective operation is found in the unit, contact your distributor.
O Parts pick-up detection

(1) Remove the bar from the sub-spindle in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF
(0>state-
(4) Press the jog key pvTjj to select the jog mode.
(5) Press the sub-collet close key to close the sub- collet.
(6) : : Press the MDI key jÿ| to select the MDI mode and press the program key |(g)]j to display
: the program (MDI) screen.
: (7) Press the HEAD2 key jjgjrj] to select the HEAD2 mode.
(8) Execute the product pick-up detection command (HEAD2 side, M27). In this case, check pi
i that the machine enters the feed hold state and the following alarm message is displayed
.
.
on the screen.
1126 PART PICK UP ERROR
3 ! O’ Parts ejection detection

(1) Insert a bar smaller than the inside diameter of the sub-collet and a main collet suited to
the bar diameter into the main spindle in the emergency stop state or the main breaker OFF
(O) state.
(2) Protrude the bar from the end face of the guide bushing by 30 to 40 mm.
f '
; (5) Press the jog key pvT] to select the jog mode.
(6) Press the main collet close key to close the main collet.
;
(7) Press the sub-collet open key to open the sub-collet.
(8) Press the axis direction selection key jfÿ| to position the Z2 axis at Z 290.0±1.0
(11.4173+0.04 inch).
.
(9) Press the MDI key to select the MDI mode and press the program key jd))| to display
(10) Press the HEAD2 key Hg]
13-42
i (11) Execute the parts ejection detection command (HEAD2 side, M27). In this case, check
that the machine enters the single block stop state and the following alarm message is j
-
displayed on the screen.
;
2077 PART EJECT ERROR
;
40—50
-O
( j f[
ZO. 0
\ 290
csm
320
message
When a parts ejection failure or product pick-up failure is detected by the M27 command, one of the
following alarm messages will be displayed on the screen. When a parts ejection failure is detected,
the machine enters the single block stop state. When a product pick-up failure is detected, the
machine enters the feed hold state and the main spindle motor, sub-spindle motor, power-driven
tool motor, and coolant motor are stopped.
2077 PART EJECT ERROR Part ejection failure
.....
I
II
« 1126 PART PICK UP ERROR Part pick-up failure
example
1 • Product ejection detection • Product pick-up detection
[HEAD2 side] [HEAD2 side]
i MO 5 ; M2 7 ; Part pick-up
TOO ; detection ON
G28 VO WO ; TOO ;
Ml 7 ; Parts separator B advance G28 WO
Mil ; G130 ;
1I M84 ; Parts conveyor ON MO 5 ;
M99 ;
1 G04 U1.0 ;
Ml 8 ; Parts separator B advance
s
: 13-43
i
1a
II
i||
1
I
I :
. :
14
13-23 Profile barstock specification

H Position adjustment of collet for profile barstock and bushing for profile barstock
When machining a profile barstock, it is necessary that the collet and bushing of the main spindle
are the same in the rotational direction position. Fit the rotational direction position of the collet to
that of the bushing according to the following procedure.
A WARNING 1
®Be sure to stop the machine before starting inspection and adjustment of the machine. I
•Open the door of the headstock room and then start the work. Pay attention to the mov¬ v '
able part of the machine.

i
A 21314 15
;
3 II
l
IM-
:
1;
m
-4U
o
..........
jhÿT+rrl —
3 CtZiS
©
i
! a
©3 §.
t
it 6 1 7
D
r~i n
o M, IMJ I
D
o i
o
D
MI
;
13-44
(1) Attach the collet and bushing for profile barstock to the machine. (See Sections 10-1 and
10-2.)
C (2) Put the machine into the machine ready state. :
(4) Press the jog key to select the jog mode.
(5) Press the axis direction selection key j to position the Z1 axis at Z 190.0±1.Q
(7.4803±0.04 inch).
(6) Press the MDI key to select the MDI mode and press the program key j(T)}|
to display
!
(7) Press the HEAD1 key fjggj to select the HEAD1 mode.
(8) Execute the main spindle clamp ON command (HEAD1 side, M06).
(9) Open the door of the headstock room.
(10) Loosen the knob screws © (2 pcs.) and remove the cover (7).
(11) Loosen the screws (3) (2 pcs.) and the bearing nut © so as to allow the pulley © to move ;
freely in the rotational direction. In this case, insert the handle © into the hole ® of the i
toggle holder (D.

(12) Take out the bar (profile barstock) from the main spindle side and insert it into the guide !
bushing.
(13) Execute the main collet close command (HEAD1 side, M10).
i
(14) Tighten the bearing nut ©. The clamping torque is 100 N-m as a guideline. Insufficient
tightening of the bearing nut may cause heat generation and damage to the bearing. Be
sure to tighten the bearing nut © carefully with the specified torque.
I
(15) Tighten the screws © (2 pcs.).
(16) Attach the cover © and fix it with the knob screws ®.
(17) Close the door of the headstock room.
S'
'
!
1
:ÿ
:
13-45
:
i
I
lipsHill
# )
V 1

CNC Operation Manual SV20 Swiss Type Automatic Lathe

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CNC Operation Manual SV20 Swiss Type Automatic Lathe

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

7_-

7' Store this Operation Manual in a Safe place /©rfutuie refer-,

3. Res.ponsibilityof prdduuts which fail during..the guarantee

I of warning signal words

1 ACAUTIQN 1 : Danger that may lead to physical accidents

NOTICE : Items of notice

door or remove the machine operation panel cover.

WARNING-7 C V: i;: >

3. Operation principle of the machine 3-1

4. Machine and specifications 4-1 I

5. Safety devices 5-1 I

6-5-1 Precautions for gang too! post/turret simultaneous machining 6-19

7-10 Position display screen . 7-34 |

Macro data setting ........

Parameter display and change method *

8-7 Spindle function (S function) 8-9

0 Preparatory function {G function) 8-20

Programmable data input (G10)

(G1 20, G1 21 , G1 30, G131, G132Kk, G1 40, G141) 8-57

9-1-3 Inspection of hydraulic oil - -•""9-5 ;

9-3 Handling of automatic bar feeder 9-10

10-2 Attaching and adjusting of guide bushing 10-4

Attaching and adjusting of tool to gang tool post

Automatic compensation of tool by tool setter

Measurement of reference position of measure scope

I 11. Troubleshooting 11-1

1 2. Maintenance and Inspection . 12-1

1 2-2-4 Inspection of safety device •12-19

13. Specifications and handling of optional accessories 13-1 '

13-1 Single bar feeder [323] 13-1

(4) Functions and specifications

1. ' ''*1 V,' * I'; J*

the cutting chips.

and notices during operation

after completing operation

regarding the control unit

§1Caution for fire prevention

(1) Conditions under which cutting oil can easily ignite

i cooling effect of the coolant oil

3. Operation principle of the machine

Guide bushing Sub-spindle

The turret has 8 tool unit mounting

rection of the diameter and the vertical

4-2 Control axis configuration diagram

Illy mm. iswsESSS?

4-4 Standard machine specifications

Control axis specifications

Main spindle specifications V

Item Specifications Remarks .

Type Gang tool post + 8 station turret Horizontal sturucture

Gang tool post

Power-driven Gang too! post 3 tools

I Sub-spindle machining capacity

. Maximum tapping capacity Stationary tool M8 X P1.25

1 I. Pressure O.SMPa (5kg/cm2) Air source should be supplied by user.

• Electric circuit diagram

; 42421 Too! setter Tooi setting inside the machine

42427C Rotating beacon •2 colors Yellow, green

I 42428 Signal tower Red, yeliow, green

42458 Coolant unit 0.8MPa

Is 42475 >8 Sub-spindie air blow unit

4-7 Standard CMC specifications

Control unit FANUC 16-TC

1 Rapid traverse override 1, 5, 25, 100% (4-step selectable)

1. ' ''1 V,' I'; J*